Preview only show first 10 pages with watermark. For full document please download

Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building

   EMBED

Share

Transcript

Project Manual for: OCEAN COUNTY COLLEGE NEW HEALTH SCIENCES BUILDING Bid Issue Specifications February 16, 2016 Artist’s rendering only. See Construction Documents for exact design. Owner Ocean County College 1 College Drive Toms River, NJ 08754 Architect Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 151 East 10th Avenue Suite 300 Conshohocken, PA 19428 Volume 2 of 2 Divisions 22 to 28 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Center CONTENTS DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SECTION TITLE 21 05 00 STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 13 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 22 05 00 STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR PLUMBING 22 07 00 PLUMBING INSULATION AND COVERING 22 11 12 PIPING SYSTEMS 22 11 16 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 13 00 DRAINAGE SYSTEMS 22 15 00 COMPRESSED AIR PIPING SYSTEMS 22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 00 STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR HVAC WORK 23 05 48 VIBRATION ISOLATION 23 05 93 TESTING, BALANCING, AND ADJUSTING 23 07 00 INSULATION AND COVERING 23 09 03 BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 23 09 93 VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS 23 21 11 PIPING SYSTEMS 23 21 12 DIRECT BURY PIPING SYSTEM 23 21 13 PUMPS 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEM 23 31 13 DUCTWORK 23 34 00 FANS AND ROOF VENTS 23 36 18 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME TERMINALS 23 37 00 AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - 1 McHugh Engineering Associates 23 74 14 CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS 23 81 27 DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEM 23 83 33 ELECTRIC HEATERS AND HEAT TRACING 26 00 00 STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK 26 05 13 CABLES - HIGH VOLTAGE 26 05 26 GROUNDING SYSTEMS: GENERAL 26 05 73 POWER SYSTEM STUDY 26 09 00 LIGHTING CONTROLS 26 10 00 MEDIUM VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 26 13 16 15 KV LOAD INTERRUPTER SWITCH 26 22 00 TRANSFORMERS - DRY TYPE (NEMA TP-1) 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS 26 27 00 BASIC MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 26 28 16 SAFETY SWITCHES - HEAVY DUTY 26 41 13 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM 26 43 13 SURGE SUPPRESSION 26 50 00 LIGHTING 27 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS 27 05 28 INTERIOR COMMUNICATION PATHWAYS 27 05 29 TELEPHONE/DATA CONDUIT SYSTEM 27 11 00 COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS 27 13 00 COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 27 13 14 COMMUNICATIONS OUTSIDE PLANT CABLING 27 15 00 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 17 00 CABLE TESTING, IDENTIFICATION, AND ADMINISTRATION 27 32 26 EMERGENCY TELEPHONES 27 32 26.01 EMERGENCY BLUE LIGHT TELEPHONES TABLE OF CONTENTS Ocean County College New Health Sciences Center PAGE - 2 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Center 27 53 00 AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 28 05 13 CONDUCTORS & CABLES ELECTRONIC SAFETY & SECURITY 28 13 00 ACCESS CONTROL 28 16 00 INTRUSION DETECTION 28 23 100 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 30 00 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS - ADDRESS. HORN TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - 3 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION SECTION 21 05 00 - STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCE A. Requirements established within the portions of this project manual titled Division 1, General Requirements are collectively applicable to the work of this section. Instructions to Bidders, Special Conditions and addenda as issued are part of this specification. Plumbing/Fire Suppression drawings along with all other project drawings and specifications represent the work of this section. Drawings, Contract, General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions form a part of this section, by reference thereto and shall have the same force and effect as if printed herewith in full. Failure to review these sections shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to fully comply with the terms therein. B. C. D. 1.02 SCOPE A. Provide labor, material, equipment and supervision necessary to install complete operating fire suppression systems as indicated on the drawings and specified herein, including all work at the site and within the proposed construction areas to accomplish the required work. It shall be the contractor’s responsibility to coordinate his work and the work of his subcontractors to insure that all the work is covered. He shall designate who is responsible for various portions of work which may overlap so that there is complete coverage of all required work. It is the position of the owner and the A/E that all work is the responsibility of the mechanical contractor within this Division of the work. All work shown on the drawings and not expressly mentioned in the specifications and all work specified but not shown on the drawings, but necessary for the proper execution of same shall be performed by the contractor. It is not the intent of the drawings and specifications to describe every feature and detail of the work. No additions to the contract amount will be approved for any materials, equipment, or labor to perform additional work unless it can be clearly shown to be beyond the scope and intent of the drawings and specifications. It shall be the fire suppression contractor’s responsibility to develop the design of the system based on current flow test results and to provide all the documentation necessary for final approval. Fire suppression contractor’s scope of work shall include but no be limited to the following: 1. Wet and Dry Sprinkler System, Siamese connection. 2. Refer to Commissioning of Systems Specification for additional work. B. C. D. E. F. 1.03 REGULATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Work shall be performed in accordance with the latest adopted codes, amendments, regulations and ordinances of the authorities having jurisdiction. Observe all safety regulations including the requirements of OSHA. Obtain and pay for all permits, connection charges, inspections, and certificates required to complete the work. B. STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 00 - 1 McHugh Engineering Associates C. D. E. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Latest editions of any referenced standards shall govern. Contractor shall arrange and pay for all tests and inspections specified herein or required by above agencies and furnish required certificate of inspection to owner. Where the contract documents are more stringent but not in conflict with the applicable codes, the more stringent requirements shall be followed. 1.04 SUBMISSIONS A. The procedure for submissions of shop drawings shall be as specified in Division 1, or as a minimum, as indicated below. Furnish submissions of shop drawings and samples of materials and equipment as indicated in these sections, on the drawings, or as directed by the A\E. Submissions will be made in a timely fashion such that adequate time exists to review the drawings, or material, and arrive at the site in accordance with the project schedule. Submissions will not be accepted with work defined as "By Others". Identify contractor by name and with his approval so indicated. Submissions are required prior to purchasing, fabrication, or installation of any material or equipment. Submissions shall be reviewed and certified by the submitting contractor that they are in accordance with the project documents. When requested by the engineer, shop drawings shall be required to be submitted to designated agencies for review and approval prior to submission to the engineer. Contractor shall arrange and pay for all tests and inspections specified herein or required by above agencies and furnish required certificate of inspection to owner. Contractor to forward a copy of submittals which have electrical requirements to the Electrical Contractor (EC) for coordination of voltage, amperage, and phase. Response to be received from EC prior to ordering of equipment by mechanical contractor. Submissions shall include warrantees by the manufacturer for equipment being provided. Submissions for commonly related items and equipment shall be combined in a single brochure with all items being furnished clearly identified. Shop drawings and submittals shall be checked and stamped by the contractor before submitting. They shall conform to measurements made at the site, the contract requirements, and coordinated with all other trades. Specific models in catalog sheets must be identified as well as all options, voltages, phases, etc. identified so as to be clear on what is being provided. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. 1.05 SITE INSPECTION A. Visit site, inspect and become aware of all conditions which may affect the work. Investigate utilities, protection requirements for adjacent facilities, storage locations, and access to the construction area. Submission of bid will be deemed evidence of having complied with this request. Contractor may not request additional costs for existing conditions which were evident from inspection of the site. B. 1.06 SUBSTITUTIONS A. B. Material and equipment specified shall be deemed as that which the bidder’s quotation represents. Once bids are accepted only that material and equipment listed in the specifications or added by addenda shall be acceptable. Substitution information for inclusion in an addenda must be received by the A\E at least 10 days prior to bid opening. If acceptable, an addenda will be issued which will add the additional acceptable manufacturers or materials and be available for all contractors to consider. A contractor cannot be the lowest bidder because he utilized substituted materials or equipment as opposed to specified materials or equipment. STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 00 - 2 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building C. If the contractor submits alternate equipment, manufacturers, systems, methods, or materials, not specifically identified in the specifications, additional review and investigation time may be required by the engineer. If the engineer determines additional review time is required because of the substitution then this will be a billable service by the engineer at the rate of $150.00/hr. for such services. Also billable will be any redesign time and revisions to drawings should they be necessary for incorporation into the work. Services will be billable to the contractor making such substitutions and will be payable prior to approval or rejection. 1.07 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. G. The drawings are generally diagrammatic and necessary field coordination and adjustment must be provided by the contractor prior to installation. Such deviations to the work to allow for coordination shall be kept to a minimum and any such deviations shall be at no extra cost. When a conflict or contradiction exists either between drawings and specs or between specs or between different drawings or details, the more stringent shall apply. Drawings and specifications are intended to be taken as a whole and each is to supplement the other. It is not intended that all work must be both shown on drawings and specified in the specifications. An item shown on the drawings and not indicated in the specifications is to be understood to be required for the project. An item specified and not shown on the drawings is to be understood to be required for the project. The contractor shall refer to the drawings for details which may influence the design of the fire suppression systems. The architects or engineers interpretation of the documents shall be binding upon the contractor. If a question arises, the contractor shall ask for an interpretation prior to bidding and an answer shall be issued as an addendum to all bidders. If a question arises after bidding the A/E interpretation shall govern. 1.08 MEASUREMENTS A. Before ordering materials or commencing with any work, the contractor shall verify all measurements at the building. Coordination of equipment, materials, spaces, and dimensions are the responsibility of the contractor. 1.09 PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. Provide a project schedule which shall show start, sequence of each type of work, milestone schedule, and completion of each type of work, with overall completion date. Work involving interruption of services shall be clearly designated and approved. 1.10 COST SCHEDULE A. B. Provide a detailed cost breakdown indicating labor and material amounts for various types of work. AIA forms are required for this submission. 1.11 COMPLETION A. The contractor shall deliver to the owner, with his request for final payment, copies of all manufacturer's guarantees, equipment instructional manuals, a complete set of all final shop drawings, catalog cuts, service contracts, and other items as may be required elsewhere in the documents. B. C. D. E. F. STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 00 - 3 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building 1.12 OFFICE A. The contractor shall set up his job office (desk) where directed by the owner. 1.13 STORAGE A. Material shall be stored only where directed by the owner. 1.14 SANITARY A. The contractor will at his own expense, provide and maintain in a sanitary condition, a portable chemical toilet. Toilet will be located where directed by the owner. B. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. B. C. All material shall be new and of present day manufacture. All material and equipment shall be in conformance with accepted trade standards. Whenever equipment or material is referred to in the singular, such as "the fan", it shall be deemed to apply to as many such items as may be necessary to complete the installation. The word “provide” means “furnish and install complete, tested, and adjusted as necessary with all accessories, covers, escutcheons”. The word “piping” means pipe, fitting, controls, valves and hangers as required for a complete system. D. 2.02 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MANUALS A. Properly and fully instruct owner’s personnel in the operation and maintenance of all systems and equipment. Insure that the owner's personnel are familiar with all operations to carry on required activities. Such instruction shall be for each item of equipment and each system as a whole. Manual shall include all instructions on operation, maintenance, repair parts list, lubrication requirements, brochures, catalogue cuts, wiring diagrams, control sequences, service requirements, piping diagrams, names and addresses of vendors, suppliers and emergency contacts. Three manuals shall be provided. Provide to the owner any special tools necessary to operate any of the equipment. B. C. D. E. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION A. B. C. Plug or cap open ends of piping systems. Stored materials shall be covered to prevent damage by inclement weather, sun, dust, or moisture. Protect all installed work until accepted in place by the owner. STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 00 - 4 McHugh Engineering Associates D. E. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Center Do not install sprinklers, polished metal escutcheons, and other finished devices until masonry, tile, and painting operations are complete or protect otherwise. Protect all existing or new work from operations which may cause damage such as hauling, welding, and painting. 3.02 WORKMANSHIP A. B. C. Install all work neat, trim, and plumb with building lines. Install work in spaces allocated. Cutting and patching shall be performed by skilled tradesmen normally employed for the work involved. 3.03 EXCAVATION, SHORING, PUMPING, BACKFILLING A. I. J. Perform all excavation required to install the work. Deposit excavated material so as not to create a slide hazard. No work shall be placed on rock. Cushion with 6 " layer of crushed stone. Protect tree roots with burlap covering and maintain moist until backfilled. Base estimates on excavation which will include earth, sand, clay, rubbish, debris, and all other materials up to one cubic yard in size. Boulders or rock larger than one cubic yard which need to be broken up with pneumatic equipment or explosives will be separately negotiated at the time of discovery with the owner and A/E. Do not proceed with rock excavation until an agreement is reached. Maintain excavations free of water. Shore excavations to prevent cave-in in accordance with OSHA regulations and to prevent strains on work put in place until ready to receive backfill. Backfill with clean material and pneumatically tamp in 8" layers. Remove excess material, including rock, from site or as directed by the A/E. Backfill piping trenches within 18" of footings, columns, piers, or grade beams, with concrete. Protect piping from direct contact and adherence to concrete. Return to original condition any areas disturbed for excavation. Provide pipe restraints as specified. 3.04 FASTENERS, HANGERS, AND SUPPORTS A. F. Furnish and install all hangers and supports required to suspend, mount, or hang the work per NFPA requirements. Furnish and install all miscellaneous steel angles, channels, beams, clips, brackets, and anchors to hang or support the work. Provide submissions for review. Install concrete inserts before concrete is poured. Drilled inserts shall not be loaded to more than 1/4 rated capacity with a minimum of 200 lbs. Power driven fasteners shall not be allowed for piping larger than 2", or for equipment. When used they shall not be loaded more than 1/8 rated capacity with a minimum of 200 lbs. Provide seismic restraint for piping as required by NFPA. 3.05 SLEEVES A. All piping passing through floors or walls shall have sleeves unless holes are cored. Sleeves shall be 16 gage galvanized steel in non-bearing walls, 10 gage galvanized steel for bearing walls, and B. C. D. E. F. G. H. B. C. D. E. MCHUGH ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC. 21 05 00 - 5 McHugh Engineering Associates B. C. D. E. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Center schedule 40 galvanized pipe in floors. Sleeves passing through foundation walls not exposed to interior spaces or sleeves passing through slab on grade may be schedule 40 PVC. Wall sleeves shall finish flush with wall. Floor sleeves shall extend 1 inch above floor. Sleeves in walls between interior spaces and unexcavated, exterior, crawl, or backfilled spaces shall be made watertight with "Link-Seal" modular wall and casing seal. Casing shall be schedule 40 galvanized pipe with anchor flange. 3.06 PLATES A. B. C. Furnish and install chrome plated plates wherever piping passes into finished areas. Plates shall be securely fastened to piping or building construction. Floor plates shall cover one inch floor extension. 3.07 OFFSETS, TRANSITIONS, MODIFICATIONS A. Furnish and install all offsets necessary to install the work and to provide clearance for the other trades. Maintain adequate headroom and clearance as directed by the A/E. Incidental modifications necessary to the installation of the systems shall be made as necessary and at the direction of the A/E. Rises and drops of piping systems shall be provided as required and where directed to allow for clearances to other construction. Drains shall be installed at no additional cost to the owner. The contractor shall allow for such occurrences in his bid. Piping, and equipment shall be so arranged as to not pass in front of windows, doors, access panels, access doors, and service clearance areas. Do not install within 3'-0" clearance of electrical or panel fronts. B. C. D. E. 3.08 ACCESS A. Locate all equipment, valves, devices and controllers which may need service in accessible places. 3.09 WIRING A. B. C. D. E. F. Power wiring shall be provided by the Division 26 Electrical Contractor. This contractor shall furnish all controllers necessary to operate the equipment. The Electrical Contractor shall store and install the electrical devices and furnish and install the power wiring. Supervisory and alarm wiring shall be furnished and installed under Division 28 portion of the work. All wiring shall be in accordance with the NEC. Pushbuttons shall be maintain-contact type. Refer to the electrical specifications for wiring methods. Plenum rated cable is required for control wiring. 3.10 UTILITIES A. B. Do not interrupt any utility or service without adequate previous notice and scheduling with the owner. Refer to Division 1 for requirements for providing temporary utilities. 3.11 CUTTING AND PATCHING EXTERIOR SERVICES STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 00 - 6 McHugh Engineering Associates A. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Center B. C. D. E. This contractor shall be responsible for returning disturbed areas to original condition where excavation for utilities has been required. Cut and patch paved areas to match original surfaces. Properly tamp backfill before finishing surfaces. Concrete pavements and curbs shall be formed and poured to match adjacent areas. Grass areas shall be sodded and maintained until established growth is achieved. 3.12 GUARANTEE A. All work shall be guaranteed to be free from defects for a period of one year of operation from date of acceptance by the owner unless otherwise specified. Material and labor for first year warranty is to be provided. Guarantee shall be extended for all non-operational periods due to failure within the guarantee period. Compressors and refrigeration system components shall be provided with a 5 year factory warranty. Material only for years 2 through 5 is required. B. C. 3.13 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. B. C. Deliver material and equipment in manufacturer’s original cartons or on skids. Store material in dry enclosures or under protective coverings out of way of work progress. Handle so as to prevent damage to product or any surrounding material. 3.14 MANUFACTURER’S NAMES A. Manufacturers names are included herein to establish those suppliers who may provide products for this project subject to the requirements of the specifications. All material and equipment must be U.L. and FM approved. Any deviations from this must be acknowledged at bid time by the supplier and he shall be solely responsible for any and all costs associated with the application of his product in the project. 3.15 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS Specifier: Verify if As-Builts need to be on CAD in addition to drawings. A. B. At the completion of the work the contractor shall furnish a reproducible as-built drawings to the A/E for approval. The drawings shall indicate all work installed and its actual size and location. If acceptable, the A/E will submit the as-built drawings to the owner as record drawings. If not acceptable, the A/E will return the drawing to the contractor to make corrections as required. The contractor will resubmit for approval. The as-built drawings shall indicate measured dimensions of underground lines and other concealed work. 3.16 PENETRATION SEALING A. All penetrations of Natatorium walls, fire walls, smoke walls, and floors by ducts, pipes, conduit, or wiring shall be sealed to prevent the flow of gasses or smoke. The sealant shall be foamed in place between the penetrant and the adjacent floor or wall with DOW Corning RTV foam or equivalent by 3M, Hilti, or Chase foam. The installation shall meet the approval of the authority having jurisdiction. Penetrations through rated surfaces shall have a UL rating equivalent to the adjacent surfaces. B. C. D. STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 00 - 7 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Center 3.17 CUTTING AND PATCHING INTERIOR SURFACES A. Respective contractor shall install all hangers, supports, pipe sleeves in floors, walls, partitions, ceilings and roof slabs as construction progresses to permit their work to be built into place and to eliminate unnecessary cutting of construction work. All cutting of concrete, or other material for the passage of piping through floors, walls, partitions and ceiling shall be done by the contractor where necessary to install his work. Contractor will close all such openings around piping, and conduit with materials equivalent to that removed. All exposed surfaces shall be left in suitable condition for refinishing without further work. Contractor shall patch and repair any existing openings created by the demolition work in floors, walls, partitions, and ceilings not being reused for the new construction. B. C. 3.18 COORDINATION A. The sprinkler shop drawings shall show all ductwork, diffusers, grilles, piping, conduit lighting fixtures coordinated with the sprinkler piping and sprinkler beads. All architectural features, structural conditions which may impact on the sprinkler layout shall be shown. The location of equipment compression and valve shall be coordinated with the other trades showing all necessary clearances. B. C. 3.19 WELDING A. All electric power for arc welding shall be supplied by the contractor performing the work. 3.20 VEHICLES A. Vehicle access to the site will be as directed by the owner. 3.21 RUBBISH DISPOSAL A. Burning of debris on the site shall not be permitted. All debris, refuse, and waste shall be removed from the premises at regular intervals. No accumulation shall be permitted. 3.22 PROTECTION A. B. Maintain all public walks and access ways. Erect and maintain barricades, warning signs, and other protective means as may be directed by the owner for protection of all persons and property from injury or damage. 3.23 SCAFFOLDING A. The contractor shall at his own expense, install, operate, protect, and maintain temporary services such as scaffolding, material hoists, access walks, etc., as may be required. 3.24 CLEANUP A. Remove all visible temporary tags or labels as well as any protective coverings and wrappings from equipment. Remove all spots, stains, soil, paint, spackle, and other foreign matter from all finished work. Remove all trash and debris from the premises. B. C. STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 00 - 8 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Center 3.25 WORK COMPLETION A. The contractor shall promptly correct work rejected by the engineer failing to conform to the requirements of the contract documents, whether discovered before or after substantial completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected work, including additional testing and inspections and compensation for the engineer’s services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at the contractor’s expense. 3.26 SHOP DRAWING REQUIREMENTS A. The following is a list of required shop drawings for the project. Not all items may be identified and it is the responsibility of the contractor to submit additional shop drawings where indicated in the specifications. FIRE PROTECTION DATE REC’D ACTION DATE REC’D ACTION COORDINATION DRAWINGS SPRINKLER SYSTEM HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS AND DESIGN DRAWINGS AND DETAILS FIRE MARSHAL APPROVAL INSURANCE COMPANY APPROVAL SPRINKLER HEADS PIPING/VALVES/HANGERS BACKFLOW PREVENTERS SPARE SPRINKLER CAP & SIGNS SIAMESE CONNECTION WATER MOTOR GONG FLOW & TAMPER SWITCHES AS-BUILTS WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES AIR COMPRESSOR & RECEIVER OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS TESTS/CERTIFICATIONS EMERGENCY AND MANUFACTURER CONTACTS STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 00 - 9 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Center FIRE PROTECTION DATE REC’D ACTION DATE REC’D ACTION CONTRACTOR’S LETTER OF COMPLETION END OF SECTION STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 00 - 10 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 21 13 00 - FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS NOTE: UNDERGROUND SERVICE SHALL NOT BE INSTALLED UNTIL ALL HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS FOR SPRINKLER/STANDPIPE SYSTEM ARE COMPLETED AND APPROVED BY CITY AND INSURANCE COMPANY OF OWNER. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCE A. B. Refer to Section 21 05 00 for requirements which are applicable to this section. Refer to applicable codes including latest adopted editions of the NFPA Codes particularly pamphlets 13 and 14. Refer to Codes published by the International Code Council for additional requirements. Refer to the International Fire Code. Where the contract documents are more stringent but not in conflict with the applicable codes, the more stringent requirements shall be followed. C. D. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor, material, equipment and supervision necessary to install a complete, approved, and functioning fire protection system as described herein. All work necessary for an installation which will be accepted by the local authority having jurisdiction is included in the scope of work of this section. Not all work is identified on the drawings and it is the contractor’s responsibility to provide all sprinkler system requirements necessary to obtain such approval. Systems shall include a wet sprinkler system throughout the building and dry pipe system in areas subject to freezing. Concealed spaces in buildings having combustible construction shall be protected with sprinklers. Provide a wet pipe system throughout the entire facility. The sprinkler system design shall be based on light hazard occupancy, except where ordinary hazard classification is dictated by the occupancy or the insurance underwriter. Provide interconnected wet standpipe system in all stairways for fire department use. See separate Section 21 12 00 for requirements of the Standpipe System. In multi-story buildings the sprinkler system for each floor shall be provided with sectionalizing valves, flow switches, and combination drain and inspectors test connections. Identification of all valves, drains, control valves, and test connections to be in accordance with NFPA 13 requirements. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Provide detailed shop drawings of the entire sprinkler system and standpipe system showing all components, dimensions, clearances and coverage’s. The submission shall bear the review approval signature of the authority having jurisdiction, and the owner's insurance company (And the Life Safety Division of Pennsylvania Department of Health) This applies to Nursing/Skilled Care facilities. Shop drawings will not be reviewed without these approvals. Provide an allowance for an additional 12 heads and piping to cover architectural review and adjustment at shop drawing review. Design shall follow building lines, centers, and architectural features for a uniform, coordinated appearance. B FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 00 - 1 McHugh Engineering Associates C. D. E. F. G. 1.04 A. B. C. D. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Center Provide manufacturers catalog data and performance data of all equipment and devices utilized on the project. Incorporate in a single bound submittal. Grooved joint couplings and fittings shall be shown on drawings and product submittals and shall be specifically identified with the applicable style or series number. Sprinklers shall be referred to on drawings, submittals and other documentation, by the sprinkler identification or model number as specifically published in the appropriate agency listing or approval. Trade names or other abbreviated designations shall not be allowed. Submit hydraulic design data if utilized for sizing of piping. Sprinkler drawings shall include: 1. Valving 2. Main riser details 3. Siamese connections 4. Water motor gong 5. Ball drip 6. Sprinkler locations and types 7. Fire hose locations 8. Hydraulic reference points 9. Hanger locations 10. Pipe sizes 11. Drain valves and inspector's test connections 12. Most remote hydraulic area 13. Flow switches 14. Tamper switches 15. Pressure switches Coordination with other trades must be identified with ceiling heights noted, sheet metal ductwork, piping systems, and lighting identified at clearance points shown. Conflicts created by this contractor’s failure to coordinate his work shall be corrected by him at no cost to the owner. QUALITY ASSURANCE Verify that all equipment is installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Contractor shall be fully licensed and accredited in the installation of automatic sprinkler and related fire protection equipment for a minimum of 5 years and shall be regularly engaged in this trade. Install all systems in accordance with the requirements of the applicable codes. To assure uniformity and compatibility of piping components in grooved piping systems, all grooved products utilized shall be the products of a single manufacturer throughout the system. Grooving tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the grooved components. 1.05 SPECIFIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM CERTIFICATIONS A. The contractor shall provide the owner through the architect with the following certifications before any work is performed. 1. Set of shop drawings bearing the review and approval signature of the local authority having jurisdiction (usually the fire marshal.) 2. Set of shop drawings bearing the review and approval stamp of the owner’s insurance company reviewing agency indicating compliance with insurance company and NFPA requirements. 3. Letter from sprinkler contractor that the submission meets all NFPA-13 requirements. At completion of the sprinkler installation, the contractor shall submit a letter from the sprinkler sub-contractor certifying that the sprinkler system as installed meets NFPA-13 requirements. Said letter shall include a guarantee to revise, add to or modify the system to meet NFPA requirements if B. FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 00 - 2 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Center any certified inspection agency or authority having jurisdiction indicates that the installation does not do so. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING - METALLIC A. B. C. F. G. H. Black steel Schedule 40 ASTM A-53, or A135 up to 2", Schedule 10 for 2 ½" and larger. Piping and fittings for dry pipe systems shall be galvanized. Joints: 2" and smaller: screwed 2 ½" and larger: grooved mechanical joint Mechanical Grooved End Fittings: ASTM A536 ductile iron, ASTM A234 forged steel, or ASTM A53 fabricated steel with grooved ends designed to accept Victaulic couplings. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Two ductile iron housings, “C” shaped, FlushSeal or installation ready composition sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers. a. Rigid Type: Housings shall be cast with offsetting, angle pattern bolt pads to provide system rigidity and support and hanging in accordance with NFPA 13. Tongue and recess rigid type couplings shall only be used if the contractor uses a torque wrench for installation. Required torque shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s latest recommendations. 1) 1 1/4" through 8" sizes: “Installation Ready” stab-on design, for direct ‘stab’ installation onto grooved end pipe without prior field disassembly and no loose parts. 2) 2" and Larger: Standard rigid coupling design. b. Flexible type: Use in seismic areas and where required by NFPA 13 1) 2" through 8" sizes: “Installation Ready” stab-on design, for direct ‘stab’ installation onto grooved end pipe without prior field disassembly and no loose parts. 2) 2" and Larger: Standard rigid coupling design. Coupling gaskets shall be listed for UL fire protection duty. All piping shall be protected against microbiological induced corrosion (MIC). Supports and hangers shall be UL listed for fire protection service. 2.02 PIPING - CPVC (USE ONLY ON LIGHT HAZARD OR 13R APPLICATIONS) A. D. E. Pipe and fittings shall be chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) and UL listed for fire protection service. Material listed and conforming to ASTM F442 shall be acceptable when every piece is identified with the logo of the listing agency. Installations must be in accordance with the listing provisions. Some may require enclosure and protection. Submittal listing requirements for review. Identify listing requirements on shop drawing submittals. 2.03 SPRINKLER HEADS A. Manufacturers: 1. Tyco Fire Products. 2. Victaulic Company 3. Viking Corporation. D. E. B. C. FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 00 - 3 McHugh Engineering Associates B. C. D. E. F. G Ocean County College New Health Sciences Center 4. Reliable Auto Sprinkler Corp. 5. Or approved equal. Type: listed types are Viking Corporation, other above manufacturers equivalents are acceptable. Pendant, upright Viking model M Micromatic Recessed Viking Model E-1 Escutcheon Flush Viking Model H-1 Horizon Concealed Viking Model H Mirage Sidewall Viking Model M Fast Response Viking Model M Microfast Finish: Finished Areas: Chrome Plated Unfinished Areas: Natural Brass Concealed Type: Painted White Cover Plate Application: Unfinished areas Pendant, upright Finished areas Recessed adjustable Concealed Sprinkler heads in gymnasiums and other places where heads are subject to damage, shops, storage, low headroom, etc., shall be protected from accidental discharge with wire cages. Sprinkler heads in refrigerated boxes with temperatures below 40 degrees F. shall be of the dry pendent type. Sprinkler heads at the top of elevator shafts to be 200 degree F rated. Sprinkler heads in swimming pool areas and pool filter rooms shall be wax coated. Concealed sprinkler should be used where requested by Architect and cost is not a consideration. 2.04 FLEXIBLE HOSE ASSEMBLY A. Manufacturer 1. Victaulic AquaFlex® or approved equal. Stainless steel sprinkler fitting system shall be used to locate sprinklers as required by final finished ceiling tiles and walls. The drop system shall consist of a braided or unbraided Type 304 stainless steel flexible tube, a zinc plated steel 1" NPT male threaded nipple for connection to branch line piping and a zinc plated steel reducer with ½" or 3/4" NPT female thread for connection to the sprinkler head. Union joints shall be provided for ease of installation. The flexible drop shall attach to the ceiling grid using a one piece open gate bracket (The bracket shall allow for sprinkler installation before or after the bracket is secured to the sprinkler grid). Products shall be UL listed for duty. B. 2.05 ALARM CHECK VALVES A. Valve shall be ductile iron and equipped with removable cover/rubber faced clapper assembly and will initiate an alarm hydraulically or electrically through a pressure switch for actuating a water motor gong or bell and signal to the fire alarm system during sustained water flow. Valve shall be trimmed with necessary gauges, external bypass, system drain, and pressure retard chamber. Valve internal components shall be replaceable without removing the valve from the installed position. Provide a hydraulically operated water motor gong or a waterproof electrically operated bell on the building exterior. B. 2.06 DRY PIPE VALVE A. Valve shall be a differential latch type and shall control the water flow of the dry pipe system. Valve FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 00 - 4 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Center B. shall be flanged pattern and shall be fully fitted with all the necessary trim. Provide an accelerator when the system size and NFPA criteria require the use of the unit. Accelerator shall be a quick opening device with integral anti-flood assembly. Unit shall be installed as part of the trim for the dry pipe valve. Grooved end dry pipe valve shall be a low differential latched clapper design and shall control the water flow of the dry pipe system. Valve internal components shall be replaceable without removing the valve form the installed position and shall be externally resettable. Minimum required air pressure is 13 psi with low pressure actuator with pneumatic activation. Maximum water working pressure is 300 psi in all sizes. 2.07 DRY PIPE SYSTEM AIR COMPRESSOR A. C. D. Provide a riser mounted oil-less air compressor complete with pressure switch for automatic operation, safety valve, check valve and riser mounting kit. Compressor shall be capable of charging the system to 40 psig in 30 minutes. Air compressor for dry pipe systems with accelerator in excess of 400 gallons shall consist of a receiver mounted unit. Compressor shall be reciprocating belt driven unit complete with enclosed belt guard, motor and controls for automatic operation. Receiver shall be ASME rated with tank drain, relief valve, regulator and pressure gauge and shall be sized per manufacturer recommendations based on system size. The unit shall be General Air Products Model AMP-1 or approved equal. Provide compressor with air maintenance device having low pressure alarm. Provide a manually regenerated desiccant air dryer with shut-off valves. 2.08 DRY PIPE SYSTEM- RECEIVER MOUNTED AIR COMPRESSOR AND DRY AIR PAC A. Provide a General Air Products or approved equal complete FM approved package consisting of a single stage reciprocating air compressor mounted on an ASME receiver with air cooled after cooler, pre-filter, twin tower desiccant air dryers, purge air mufflers, air maintenance device and outlet particulate filter and regulator. Unit shall have mounted integrated control panel with pressure gauges, interval controls and be a complete pre-wired and pre-piped package, charged and tested prior to shipment. Package shall be capable of charging the system within 30 minutes at 40 psi. 2.09 SPRINKLER HEAD CABINET A. B. C. Cold rolled steel, red enamel box, labeled "SPRINKLER HEADS", storage for 12 sprinkler heads, hinged cover. Complete with 12 sprinklers of the type used on the project. Located at the fire service entrance, wall mounted. 2.10 POST INDICATOR VALVE A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Kennedy Henry Pratt Co. NIBCO Waterous Company/Mueller Company Victaulic Or approved equal. Iron body bronze mounted solid wedge gate valve, UL and FM listed, non-rising stem. Post indicator cast iron, OPEN/SHUT indicator through window, wrench with locking top, red enamel paint. Provide flanged base type when installed on a paved surface. B. B. C. FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 00 - 5 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Center D. Ductile iron grooved end valve, bronze mounted, resilient wedge, brass non-rising stem, UL and FM listed. 2.11 SWITCHES A. B. Furnish and install flow switches, pressure switches and tamper switches on all valves for interconnection by the fire alarm system contractor. Device shall be UL listed. 2.12 SIAMESE A. Automatic sprinkler fire department connection to be flush face, angle body, UL listed 4" x 2 1/2" x 2 1/2" and polished brass finish with internal clappers and chains and caps. Connections to conform to the local fire department standards. Potter Roemer or approved equal. Where Storz Auxiliary Connection is the fire department standard, they shall consist of hard coated aluminum body with chain and cap. Provide round polished brass escutcheon plate to suit. B. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SPRINKLER SYSTEM A. All components shall be UL listed for the intended service. Sprinkler system shall be wet and hydraulically calculated. Sprinkler heads shall be arranged for coverage as indicated on the drawings or required by the occupancy. Provide protection above suspended ceilings where required. Furnish and install a detector check, monitored control valves, alarm check valve, dry pipe valve, air compressor, flow alarm switches, water motor gong and required accessories to complete the installation. Furnish and install a valve signaling unit for each connection to the fire alarm system provided under Division 26. Dry pipe system shall include automatic air maintenance pressure switch for automatic compressor operation and low system air pressure alarm. Devices shall be as manufactured by SECO, Potter Roemer, Grinnell, Crocker or approved equal. Where free standing fire department connection is shown it shall be a Potter Roemer Fig. 5761 with polished brass sleeve and escutcheon or approved equal. Grooved joint piping systems shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s guidelines and recommendations. All grooved couplings, fittings, valves, and specialties shall be the products of a single manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the grooved components. The gasket style and elastomeric material (grade) shall be verified as suitable for the intended service as specified. Gaskets shall be molded and produced by system manufacturer. Grooved end shall be clean and free from indentations, projections, and roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove for proper gasket sealing. A factory trained field representative shall provide on-site training for contractor’s field personnel in the proper use of grooving tools and installation of grooved piping products. Factory trained representative shall periodically review the product installation. Contractor shall remove and replace any improperly installed products. B. C. D. E. F. G. 3.02 UNDERGROUND SERVICE A. B. Underground service shall terminate as shown and connect to the supply main. Piping shall be pressure Class 350 ductile iron pipe with 350 Class ductile iron fittings. Joints shall be push-on type with restraining gaskets or retainer glands similar to Griffin pipe “SnapLoc” “Bolt FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 00 - 6 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Center C. Loc” or EBAA”Megalug” or approved equal. Pipe and fittings shall be cement lined. Terminate service 6" above floor with flanged fitting. 3.03 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION A. Install heads after coordination with other trades paying particular attention to lighting fixtures, piping, and ductwork. Install pipe sleeves where piping passes through walls and floors. Furnish and install cast escutcheon plates at penetrations. All piping in finished spaces is to be concealed, unless otherwise noted. Concealment is to be coordinated with the Architect. In unfinished tenant spaces sprinkler heads shall be arranged in relation to the structural members with heads located at underside of structure. Branch piping to be located to permit installation of return bends and heads located in the center of the ceiling tiles when the space is fitted out. All piping to be graded to drainage points in accordance with Underwriters requirements. Provide drip piping from water motor gong to suitable discharge point on grade. Provide and install a circuit closer on each fire alarm system. Sprinkler heads shall be installed with return bends and swing ells so that heads are positioned in the center of ceiling tiles. The sprinkler bulb protector must remain in place until the sprinkler is completely installed and before the system is placed in service. Remove bulb protectors carefully by hand after installation. Do not use any tools to remove bulb protectors. All underground pipe fittings involving changes in direction, capped connections and the joints two pipe lengths on either side of fittings shall b restrained. Restraints shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Conflicts caused by failure to coordinate sprinkler work with other trades shall be corrected by this contractor. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. 3.04 TESTING A. The completed system shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of NFPA Pamphlet 13. Provide completed Contractor’s Material and Test Certificate for both above ground and underground piping. 3.05 SIAMESE A. Install Siamese connection with UL approved check valve and ball drip piped in accordance with requirements. . END OF SECTION FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 00 - 7 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 22 05 00 - STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR PLUMBING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCE A. Requirements established within the portions of this project manual titled Division 1, General Requirements are collectively applicable to the work of this section. Instructions to Bidders, Special Conditions and addenda as issued are part of this specification. Plumbing drawings along with all other project drawings and specifications represent the work of this section. Drawings, Contract, General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions form a part of this section, by reference thereto and shall have the same force and effect as if printed herewith in full. Failure to review these sections shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to fully comply with the terms therein. B. C. D. 1.02 SCOPE A. Provide labor, material, equipment and supervision necessary to install complete operating plumbing systems as indicated on the drawings and specified herein, including all work at the site and within the proposed construction areas to accomplish the required work. It shall be the contractor’s responsibility to coordinate his work and the work of his subcontractors to insure that all the work is covered. He shall designate who is responsible for various portions of work which may overlap so that there is complete coverage of all required work. It is the position of the owner and the A/E that all work is the responsibility of the mechanical contractor within this division of the work. All work shown on the drawings and not expressly mentioned in the specifications and all work specified but not shown on the drawings, but necessary for the proper execution of same shall be performed by the contractor. It is not the intent of the drawings and specifications to describe every feature and detail of the work. No additions to the contract amount will be approved for any materials, equipment, or labor to perform additional work unless it can be clearly shown to be beyond the scope and intent of the drawings and specifications. Plumbing contractor's scope of work shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Domestic water system and insulation (See Section 22 11 16, 22 07 00 and 22 40 00). 2. Sanitary and vent system. (See Section 22 13 00) 3. Storm and overflow systems and any insulation (See Section 22 07 00 and 22 13 00). 4. Domestic water piping serving humidifiers. 5. All other work in Division 22. 6. Roof penetrations for plumbing work. 7. Compressed Air Systems. 8. Provide third party certification of all packaged systems by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) in accordance with OSHA Federal Regulations 29CFR1910.303 and .399 as well as Pamphlet #70 and National Electrical Code Article 90-7. 9. Refer to Commissioning of Systems Specification for additional work. 10. Participation in commissioning of systems and equipment. B. C. D. E. STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 - 1 McHugh Engineering Associates 11. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Fire stopping of penetrations. (See Section 22 05 50) 1.03 REGULATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Work shall be performed in accordance with the latest adopted codes, amendments, regulations and ordinances of the authorities having jurisdiction. Observe all safety regulations including the requirements of OSHA. Obtain and pay for all permits, connection charges, inspections, and certificates required to complete the work. Latest editions of any referenced standards shall govern. Contractor shall arrange and pay for all tests and inspections specified herein or required by above agencies and furnish required certificate of inspection to owner. Where the contract documents are more stringent but not in conflict with the applicable codes, the more stringent requirements shall be followed. B. C. D. E. 1.04 SUBMISSIONS A. The procedure for submissions of shop drawings shall be as specified in Division 1, or as a minimum, as indicated below. Furnish submissions of shop drawings and samples of materials and equipment as indicated in these sections, on the drawings, or as directed by the A\E. Submissions will be made in a timely fashion such that adequate time exists to review the drawings, or material, and arrive at the site in accordance with the project schedule. Submissions will not be accepted with work defined as "By Others". Identify contractor by name and with his approval so indicated. Submissions are required prior to purchasing, fabrication, or installation of any material or equipment. Submissions shall be reviewed and certified by the submitting contractor that they are in accordance with the project documents. When requested by the engineer, shop drawings shall be required to be submitted to designated agencies for review and approval prior to submission to the engineer. Contractor shall arrange and pay for all tests and inspections specified herein or required by above agencies and furnish required certificate of inspection to owner. Contractor to forward a copy of submittals which have electrical requirements to the Electrical Contractor (EC) for coordination of voltage, amperage, and phase. Response to be received from EC prior to ordering of equipment by mechanical contractor. Submissions shall include warrantees by the manufacturer for equipment being provided. Submissions for commonly related items such as fixtures, trim, carriers, drains shall be combined in a single brochure with all items being furnished clearly identified. Shop drawings and submittals shall be checked and stamped by the contractor before submitting. They shall conform to measurements made at the site, the contract requirements, and coordinated with all other trades. Specific models in catalog sheets must be identified as well as all options, voltages, phases, etc. identified so as to be clear on what is being provided. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. 1.05 SITE INSPECTION A. Visit site, inspect and become aware of all conditions which may affect the work. Investigate utilities, protection requirements for adjacent facilities, storage locations, and access to the construction area. Submission of bid will be deemed evidence of having complied with this request. Contractor may not request additional costs for existing conditions which were evident from inspection of the site. B. 1.06 SUBSTITUTIONS STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 - 2 McHugh Engineering Associates A. B. C. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Material and equipment specified shall be deemed as that which the bidder’s quotation represents the contractor. Once bids are accepted only that material and equipment listed in the specifications or added by addenda shall be acceptable. Substitution information for inclusion in an addenda must be received by the A\E at least 10 days prior to bid opening. If acceptable, an addenda will be issued which will add the additional acceptable manufacturers or materials and be available for all contractors to consider. It shall be a basic premise that a contractor is a lowest bidder because he utilized substituted materials or equipment as opposed to specified materials or equipment. If the contractor submits alternate equipment, manufacturers, systems, methods, or materials, not specifically identified in the specifications, additional review and investigation time may be required by the engineer. If the engineer determines additional review time is required because of the substitution, then this will be a billable service by the engineer at the rate of $150.00/hr. for such services. Also billable will be any redesign time and revisions to drawings should they be necessary for incorporation into the work. Services will be billable to the contractor making such substitutions and will be payable prior to approval or rejection. 1.07 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. F. The drawings are generally diagrammatic and necessary field coordination and adjustment must be provided by the contractor prior to installation. Such deviations to the work to allow for coordination shall be kept to a minimum and any such deviations shall be at no extra cost. When a conflict or contradiction exists either between drawings and specs or between specs or between different drawings or details, the more stringent shall apply. Drawings and specifications are intended to be taken as a whole and each is to supplement the other. It is not intended that all work must be both shown on drawings and specified in the specifications. An item shown on the drawings and not indicated in the specifications is to be understood to be required for the project. An item specified and not shown on the drawings is to be understood to be required for the project. The architects or engineer’s interpretation of the documents shall be binding upon the contractor. If a question arises, the contractor shall ask for an interpretation prior to bidding and an answer shall be issued as an addendum to all bidders. If a question arises after bidding the A/E interpretation shall govern. 1.08 MEASUREMENTS A. Before ordering materials or commencing with any work, the contractor shall verify all measurements at the building. Coordination of equipment, materials, spaces, and dimensions are the responsibility of the contractor. 1.09 PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. Provide a project schedule which shall show start, sequence of each type of work, milestone schedule, and completion of each type of work, with overall completion date. 1.10 COST SCHEDULE A. B. Provide a detailed cost breakdown indicating labor and material amounts for various types of work. AIA forms are required for this submission. 1.11 COMPLETION B. C. D. E. STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 - 3 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building A. The contractor shall deliver to the owner, with his request for final payment, copies of all manufacturer's guarantees, equipment instructional manuals, a complete set of all final shop drawings, catalog cuts, service contracts, and other items as may be required elsewhere in the documents. 1.12 OFFICE A. The contractor shall set up his job office (desk) where directed by the owner. 1.13 STORAGE A. Material shall be stored only where directed by the owner. 1.14 SANITARY A. The contractor will at his own expense, provide and maintain in a sanitary condition, a portable chemical toilet. Toilet will be located where directed by the owner. B. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. B. C. All material shall be new and of present day manufacture. All material and equipment shall be in conformance with accepted trade standards. Whenever equipment or material is referred to in the singular, such as "the fan", it shall be deemed to apply to as many such items as may be necessary to complete the installation. The word “provide” means “furnish and install complete, tested, and adjusted as necessary with all accessories, covers, escutcheons”. The word “piping” means pipe, fitting, controls, valves and hangers as required for a complete system. D. 2.02 MOTORS A. B. C. D. E. Incorporate latest IEEE and NEMA standards. All copper windings with ball bearings. Indoors; drip proof, 40 degree C rise. Outdoors; totally enclosed 55 degree C rise. Motors over 10 HP to be high efficiency with PF in excess of 0.9. 2.03 MOTOR STARTERS AND CONTACTORS A. B. C. Fractional with horsepower up to ½ HP; electrical contract. Polyphase and single phase above ½ HP: this contract. Electrical contractor shall install all starters except for those provided as an integral part of equipment. Polyphase starters shall be magnetic combination type, across-the-line electrically operated, electrically held, three pole assemblies, with arc extinguishing characteristics, silver to silver renewable contacts, 3 pole thermal bi-metallic, red run pilot light, individual phase protection, with D. STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 - 4 McHugh Engineering Associates E. F. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building overload heaters matched to motors installed and with 4 auxiliary contact, Hand-off-Auto switch, and control transformer. For single phase motors above ½ HP provide magnetic combination single phase motor starters with overloads, non-fusible disconnect switch, red run pilot light, integral 120 volt control transformer with dual primary fusing auxiliary contacts. Starters shall be as manufactured by G. E., Siemens, Square "D", Cutler-Hammer or approved equal. 2.04 EQUIPMENT START UP A. B. C. Verify that equipment is operating within warranty requirements. Advise owner and A/E at least two days prior. Verify proper operation. Obtain signed statement by manufacturer or his representative that equipment is operating within warranty requirements. Submit statement to A/E. 2.05 LUBRICATION A. B. C. Lubricate all equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Lubricate prior to start up. Provide one years’ supply of lubricants to the owner. 2.06 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MANUALS A. E. Properly and fully instruct owner’s personnel in the operation and maintenance of all systems and equipment. Insure that the owner's personnel are familiar with all operations to carry on required activities. Such instruction shall be for each item of equipment and each system as a whole. Manual shall include all instructions on operation, maintenance, repair parts list, lubrication requirements, brochures, catalogue cuts, wiring diagrams, control sequences, service requirements, piping diagrams, names and addresses of vendors, suppliers and emergency contacts. Three manuals shall be provided. Provide to the owner any special tools necessary to operate any of the equipment. 2.07 DRAIN PANS A. All water heaters mounted above the floor shall be provided with drain pans. Drain to suitable discharge point acceptable to owner and A/E. To be visible outfall. Drains shall slope down in direction of flow at 1" per 10 feet. B. C. D. B. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION A. B. C. D. Plug or cap open ends of piping systems and conduit. Stored materials shall be covered to prevent damage by inclement weather, sun, dust, or moisture. Protect all installed work until accepted in place by the owner. Cover plumbing fixtures. Do not install plates, polished metal escutcheons, and other finished devices until masonry, tile, and painting operations are complete or protect otherwise. Protect all existing or new work from operations which may cause damage such as hauling, welding, E. STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 - 5 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building soldering, painting, insulating, and covering. 3.02 WORKMANSHIP A. B. C. Install all work neat, trim, and plumb with building lines. Install work in spaces allocated. Cutting and patching shall be performed by skilled tradesmen normally employed for the work involved. 3.03 EXCAVATION, SHORING, PUMPING, BACKFILLING A. I. Perform all excavation required to install the work. Deposit excavated material so as not to create a slide hazard. No work shall be placed on rock. Cushion with 6 " layer of crushed stone. Protect tree roots with burlap covering and maintain moist until backfilled. Base estimates on excavation which will include earth, sand, clay, rubbish, debris, and all other materials up to one cubic yard in size. Boulders or rock larger than one cubic yard which need to be broken up with pneumatic equipment or explosives will be separately negotiated at the time of discovery with the owner and A/E. Do not proceed with rock excavation until an agreement is reached. Maintain excavations free of water. Shore excavations to prevent cave-in in accordance with OSHA regulations and to prevent strains on work put in place until ready to receive backfill. Backfill with clean material and pneumatically tamp in 8" layers. Remove excess material, including rock, from site or as directed by the A/E. Backfill piping trenches within 18" of footings, columns, piers, or grade beams, with concrete. Protect piping from direct contact and adherence to concrete. Return to original condition any areas disturbed for excavation. 3.04 FASTENERS, HANGERS, AND SUPPORTS A. B. J. Furnish and install all hangers and supports required to suspend, mount, or hang the work. Furnish and install all miscellaneous steel angles, channels, beams, clips, brackets, and anchors to hang or support the work. Provide submissions for review. Install concrete inserts before concrete is poured. Drilled inserts shall not be loaded to more than 1/4 rated capacity with a minimum of 200 lbs. Powder driven fasteners shall not be allowed for piping larger than 2", or for equipment. When used they shall not be loaded more than 1/8 rated capacity with a minimum of 200 lbs. All hangers, miscellaneous steel, braces, and supports shall be galvanized, cadmium plated, or painted with corrosion resistant primer and finish coat of epoxy enamel. Piping shall be supported from adjustable clevis type hangers with insulation pipe saddles at not more than 8 foot centers up to 1 1/4" dia. and 10 foot centers above 1 1/4" dia. Piping shall not support other piping. Support vertical piping at floor levels. Piping shall have split rings. Provide and install lintels where required for mechanical work and not indicated on architectural or structural drawings. Furnish steel framing for roof openings and floor openings. Submit details for review. 3.05 SLEEVES A. All piping passing through floors or walls shall have sleeves unless holes are cored. Sleeves shall be 16 gage galvanized steel in non-bearing walls, 10 gage galvanized steel for bearing walls, and B. C. D. E. F. G. H. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 - 6 McHugh Engineering Associates B. C. D. E. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building schedule 40 galvanized pipe in floors. Sleeves shall accommodate insulation. This shall not apply to sprinkler piping. Sleeves passing through foundation walls not exposed to interior spaces or sleeves passing through slab on grade may be schedule 40 PVC. Wall sleeves shall finish flush with wall. Floor sleeves shall extend 1 inch above floor. Sleeves in walls between interior spaces and unexcavated, exterior, crawl, or backfilled spaces shall be made watertight with "Link-Seal" modular wall and casing seal. Casing shall be schedule 40 galvanized pipe with anchor flange. 3.06 PLATES A. B. C. Furnish and install chrome plated plates wherever piping passes into finished areas. Plates shall be securely fastened to piping or building construction. Floor plates shall cover one inch floor extension. 3.07 OFFSETS, TRANSITIONS, MODIFICATIONS A. Furnish and install all offsets necessary to install the work and to provide clearance for the other trades. Maintain adequate headroom and clearance as directed by the A/E. Ductwork transitions necessary to accommodate available space or clearance requirements shall be contract requirements. Incidental modifications necessary to the installation of the systems shall be made as necessary and at the direction of the A/E. Rises and drops of piping systems shall be provided as required and where directed to allow for clearances to other construction. Drains shall be installed at no additional cost to the owner. The contractor shall allow for such occurrences in his bid. Piping and equipment shall be so arranged as to not pass in front of windows, doors, access panels, access doors, coil removal or filter removal space or service clearance areas. Do not install within 3'-0" clearance of electrical panel fronts. B. C. D. E. F. 3.08 RECESSES A. B. Furnish information to the general contractor as to sizes and locations of recesses required to install panels, boxes, grilles, and other equipment or devices which are to be recessed into walls. Make offsets or modifications as required to suit final locations. 3.09 EQUIPMENT SETTING A. C. D. Furnish and install as a minimum, a 4" thick concrete pad beneath all floor mounted equipment in mechanical rooms, boiler rooms, or equipment rooms, or outside on grade. This shall not apply to residential installations of water heaters and air handling units or furnaces unless detailed on drawings or specified elsewhere. Furnish and install as a minimum, spring vibration isolators under any equipment 5 HP and over and rubber-in-shear vibration isolation under all equipment less than 5 HP. This shall apply to residential installations. Reinforce concrete with No. 4 rods 12" on centers both ways. Pad to have 3/4" dowels into concrete at 1 per 4 square feet. 3.10 LABELING B. STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 - 7 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building A. All equipment shall be provided with permanent black laminated white core labels with 3/8" letters. 3.11 FLASHING AND COUNTER-FLASHING A. Roof drains and overflow drains shall have counter-flashing fittings. General contractor shall provide flashing. Piping and conduit through the roof shall be flashed by the General Contractor. This contractor shall furnish counter-flashing. B. 3.12 ACCESS A. B. D. Locate all equipment, valves, devices and controllers which may need service in accessible places. Where access is not available; access panels shall be provided. Furnish prime painted steel access doors to the General Contractor for installation. Access doors shall be 16 gauge frames and 22 gauge steel door. Access doors in fire rated walls shall have a "B" label for 1 ½ hours. Maintain clearances for tube removal, coil pulls, and filter removal. 3.13 WIRING A. C. D. E. F. Power wiring shall be provided by the Division 16 Electrical Contractor. This contractor shall furnish all 3 phase starters, pushbuttons, and controllers necessary to operate the equipment. The Electrical Contractor shall store and install the electrical devices and furnish and install the power wiring. Control wiring shall be furnished and installed under Division 15 portion of the work. Wiring for controls is control wiring whether it is line voltage or low voltage. All wiring shall be in accordance with the NEC. Pushbuttons shall be maintain-contact type. Refer to the electrical specifications for wiring methods. Plenum rated cable is required for control wiring. 3.14 UTILITIES A. B. Do not interrupt any utility or service without adequate previous notice and scheduling with the owner. Refer to Division 1 for requirements for providing temporary utilities. 3.15 CUTTING AND PATCHING EXTERIOR SERVICES A. B. C. D. E. This contractor shall be responsible for returning disturbed areas to original condition where excavation for utilities has been required. Cut and patch paved areas to match original surfaces. Properly tamp backfill before finishing surfaces. Concrete pavements and curbs shall be formed and poured to match adjacent areas. Grass areas shall be sodded and maintained until established growth is achieved. 3.16 GUARANTEE A. All work shall be guaranteed to be free from defects for a period of one year of operation from date of acceptance by the owner unless otherwise specified. Material and labor for first year warranty is to be provided. Guarantee shall be extended for all non-operational periods due to failure within the guarantee period. C. B. B. STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 - 8 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building C. Compressor system components shall be provided with a 5 year factory warranty. Material only for years 2 through 5 is required. 3.17 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. B. C. Deliver material and equipment in manufacturer’s original cartons or on skids. Store material in dry enclosures or under protective coverings out of way of work progress. Handle so as to prevent damage to product or any surrounding material. 3.18 MANUFACTURERS’ NAMES A. Manufacturers’ names are included herein to establish those suppliers who may provide products for this project subject to the requirements of the specifications. Although a manufacturer’s name may appear as an acceptable supplier it is not understood that a standard product is acceptable. Products must also meet the technical, performance, and physical requirements of the project as well as being named in the specification. Any deviations from this must be acknowledged at bid time by the supplier and he shall be solely responsible for any and all costs associated with the application of his product in the project. A design cannot be prepared which accommodates the installation of all suppliers and is not intended to do so. If certain modifications must be made to accommodate one particular supplier’s equipment it shall be considered the contractor’s responsibility to arrange for such accommodations and be financially responsible for same. B. 3.19 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS A. At the completion of the work the contractor shall furnish a reproducible as-built drawings to the A/E for approval. The drawings shall indicate all work installed and its actual size and location. If acceptable, the A/E will submit the as-built drawings to the owner as record drawings. If not acceptable, the A/E will return the drawing to the contractor to make corrections as required. The contractor will resubmit for approval. The as-built drawings shall indicate measured dimensions of underground lines and other concealed work. B. 3.20 PENETRATION SEALING A. C. D. All penetrations of Natatorium walls, fire walls, smoke walls, and floors by pipes or wiring shall be sealed to prevent the flow of gasses or smoke. The sealant shall be foamed in place between the penetrant and the adjacent floor or wall with DOW Corning RTV foam or equivalent by 3M, Hilti, or Chase foam. The installation shall meet the approval of the authority having jurisdiction. Penetrations through rated surfaces shall have a UL rating equivalent to the adjacent surfaces. 3.21 CUTTING AND PATCHING INTERIOR SURFACES A. Respective contractor shall install all hangers, supports, pipe sleeves in floors, walls, partitions, ceilings and roof slabs as construction progresses to permit their work to be built into place and to eliminate unnecessary cutting of construction work. All cutting of concrete, or other material for the passage of piping through floors, walls, partitions and ceiling shall be done by the respective contractor where necessary to install his work. Respective contractor will close all such openings around piping with materials equivalent to that removed. All exposed surfaces shall be left in suitable condition for refinishing without further work. Contractor shall patch and repair any existing openings created by the demolition work in floors, B. B. C. STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 - 9 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building walls, partitions, and ceilings not being reused for the new construction. 3.22 INVERTS AND ELEVATIONS A. B. Indicated inverts and elevations of existing utilities are approximate and based on the best information available. Upon of award of contract, contractor shall verify in the field all such information and report any discrepancies before proceeding with work. Contractor shall be responsible for extra work caused by his failure to verify inverts and elevations. 3.23 CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHERS A. Furnish and install final connections to equipment furnished in other parts of the specification or furnished by the owner. Provide drainage connections, vent connections, water connections, fuel gas connections, gas connections to the fixtures or equipment. Plumbing connections shall include valved supplies and trapped waste connections. 3.24 BOILER ROOM DRAWING A. B. C. D. Mechanical contractor shall provide a 3/8" = 1'0" scale drawing of the Mechanical Room showing all mechanical, ductwork, floor drains, plumbing, fire protection equipment and electrical equipment to exact scale with dimensions on pads, equipment, etc. Show two cross sections at important points. Obtain information from other subs. Submit for review and approval. Submit to Harrisburg Department of L& I for boiler installation approval. 3.25 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Provide 3/8" = 1'-0" scale drawings showing all coordinated ductwork, piping, conduit, and equipment of all trades. The sheet metal shop drawings may be used as the basis of these drawings. Show ductwork, walls, beams, steel, drainage piping, domestic water piping, HVAC piping, sprinkler piping, light fixtures, electrical conduit and equipment. Contact other disciplines and obtain information to identify fully coordinated systems. Submit for review and approval to the A/E. Provide all dimensional data and necessary clearances to other trades for installation of fixtures and equipment within casework and counter tops. Work shall not proceed until coordination is completed and all conflicts, issues, sequences etc., are resolved. B. C. D. E. F. G. 3.26 VEHICLES A. Vehicle access to the site will be as directed by the owner. 3.27 RUBBISH DISPOSAL A. Burning of debris on the site shall not be permitted. All debris, refuse, and waste shall be removed from the premises at regular intervals. No accumulation shall be permitted. 3.28 PROTECTION A. Maintain all public walks and access ways. STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 - 10 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building B. Erect and maintain barricades, warning signs, and other protective means as may be directed by the owner for protection of all persons and property from injury or damage. 3.29 SCAFFOLDING A. The contractor shall at his own expense, install, operate, protect, and maintain temporary services such as scaffolding, material hoists, access walks, etc., as may be required. 3.30 CLEANUP A. B. C. D. Remove all visible temporary tags or labels as well as any protective coverings and wrappings from fixtures and equipment. Remove all spots, stains, soil, paint, spackle, and other foreign matter from all finished work. Clean and polish all plumbing fixtures. Remove all trash and debris from the premises. 3.31 MOUNTING HEIGHTS A. Contractor to coordinate all mounting heights with all trades and architect prior to rough-in. 3.32 WORK COMPLETION A. The contractor shall promptly correct work rejected by the engineer failing to conform to the requirements of the contract documents, whether discovered before or after substantial completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected work, including additional testing and inspections and compensation for the engineer’s services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at the contractor’s expense. 3.33 SHOP DRAWING REQUIREMENTS A. The following is a list of required shop drawings for the project. Not all items may be identified and it is the responsibility of the contractor to submit additional shop drawings where indicated in the specifications. PLUMBING DATE REC’D ACTION DATE REC’D ACTION COORDINATION DRAWINGS VALVES, STRAINERS BACKFLOW PREVENTORS MIXING VALVES PIPING/FITTINGS/LABELING DRAINS FIXTURES/TRIM/CARRIERS ELEVATOR PIT SUMP PUMPS STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 - 11 McHugh Engineering Associates PLUMBING Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building DATE REC’D ACTION DATE REC’D ACTION INSULATION A. HANDICAP COVERS B. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING C. TANKS D. EQUIPMENT WATER HEATERS (ELECTRIC, GAS, STEAM) HOT WATER RETURN PUMPS AS-BUILT DRAWINGS/CAD DISK WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS INSTRUCTIONS TESTS/CERTIFICATIONS EMERGENCY AND MANUFACTURER CONTACTS END OF SECTION STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 - 12 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 22 07 00 - PLUMBING INSULATION AND COVERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCE A. B. Refer to Section 22 05 00 for requirements which are applicable to this section. Refer to IBC 2006 Building Codes, Plumbing Code, and ASHRAE 90.1-2004. 1.02 SCOPE A. B. The work included in this specification consists of furnishing all labor, materials, accessories, and equipment necessary for the insulation of all plumbing; piping and plumbing equipment. Said work shall be completed in strict accordance with the insulation section of the specifications and applicable drawings. All work is subject to the terms and conditions of the contract. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. B. C. Submit shop drawings which indicate complete material data, a list of materials proposed, and indicate thickness and density of material for individual services. Submit fabrication instructions for pipe fitting and valve insulation. Submit manufacturers joining recommendations for butt joints and longitudinal seams. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. C. Install insulation in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Insulation shall be installed by skilled workmen regularly engaged in insulation work. Protect insulation and covering until accepted in place by the owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 HOT WATER PIPING A. Includes; 1. Domestic Hot Water Supply 2. Domestic Hot Water Return Material; Fiberglass bonded with resins to form circular pipe sleeves and pipe covering segments with factory applied all service jacket. Fire Safety; U.L. listing flame spread rating of 25 and smoke developed rating of 50. Thermal conductivity of 0.276 at 90 degrees F. Thickness per ASHRAE STD. 90.1-2010: Piping System Types: PIPE SIZES / INSULATION THICKNESS B. C. D. E. PLUMBING INSULATION AND COVERING 22 07 00 - 1 McHugh Engineering Associates Temp Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Up to 1" Up to 1.5" Up to 4" Up to 8" 8" & Up 1. Hot Water a) Domestic HW/HWR F. 100-130 1" 1" 1.5" 1.5" 1.5" I. Joints; Pressure sealing lap strips for longitudinal joints and minimum 3" pressure sealing butt strips for circumferential joints. Valves and Fittings; Fiberglass insulation of same thickness as pipe with pre-molded fitting covers. Contractor shall insulate all exposed domestic water and drainage piping under all handicapped lavatories and sinks with pre-formed insulation kit with PVC jacket. There shall be no sharp or abrasive surfaces under the handicapped lavatories. Manufacturer: Johns-Manville Micro-Lok, Knauf Lo Smoke PVC or approved equal. 2.02 COLD WATER PIPING A. G. Includes; 1. Domestic Cold Water: 1/2" insulation 2. Horizontal Storm Water, both normal and overflow, and underside of Roof Drains: 1" insulation 3. PVC vent piping in plenum ceilings: 1" insulation 4 PVC drainage piping in plenum ceilings: 1" insulation 5 All PVC storm water, both normal and overflow, and underside of roof drains in plenum ceilings: 1" insulation Material; Fiberglass bonded with resins to form circular pipe sleeves with factory applied jacket of Kraft paper bonded to aluminum foil, reinforced with fiberglass yarn. Vapor barrier. Fire safety; Flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke density rating of 50 or less and a fuel contributed rating of 50 as tested by ASTM E 84-75. Thermal Conductivity; 0.25 at 100 degrees. Joints; Pressure sealing lap strips for longitudinal joints and 3 inch wide wrapping strips for butt joints. Strips shall be sealed with an adhesive meeting NFPA 90 25-50 code such as: 1. CMC17-465 2. H. B. Fuller Co., Foster Products Division 85-20 As an option the contractor may utilize pressure sensitive butt strips. Valves and Fittings; Fiberglass insulation of same thickness as pipe with pre-molded fitting covers. Seal edges of fitting cover with vapor barrier mastic adhesive or vapor barrier strip tape which shall overlap the insulation and fitting cover by 2 inches. Manufacturer: Johns-Manville Micro-Lok, Knauf Proto Lo Smoke PVC. 2.03 PIPE INSULATION - EXTERIOR A. All piping exposed to the elements shall be insulated in accordance with sections 2.01 and 2.02 of this specification and shall be protected with a weatherproof finish. Minimum Insulation Thickness shall be increased by 1/2". Jacketing shall be 0.016" aluminum or stainless steel with moisture retarder. The insulation and jacketing shall be held securely in place with a friction type, Z lock, or minimum 2" overlap joint. Joints shall be sealed completely along the longitudinal seam and shall be applied so as to shed water. All circumferential joints shall be sealed by use of preformed butt strips, minimum 2" wide. Butt strips shall overlap adjacent jacketing a minimum of 1/2". Jacketing and butt strips shall be G. H. B. C. D. E. F. B. PLUMBING INSULATION AND COVERING 22 07 00 - 2 McHugh Engineering Associates C. D. E. F. G. H. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building additionally secured using 1/2" bands and seals. Spacing of bands shall be recommended by manufacturer. On all outdoor chilled water and refrigerant systems, insulation and fitting insulation should be completely vapor sealed. Fittings shall be insulated using preformed fiber glass fittings or mitered sections of pipe insulation. Fittings shall be covered using preformed aluminum or stainless steel jacketing identical in composition to the jacketing on the straight pipe. All joints shall overlap a minimum of 1" and be completely weather sealed. PVC fittings of outdoor grade may be applied over preformed fiber glass fittings or mitered sections of pipe insulation. All joints shall overlap adjacent jacketing a minimum of 2" and be completely weather sealed using a solvent type PVC weld adhesive. In lieu of preformed molded fiber glass fittings, U.V. Resistant PVC Fittings with contoured fiber glass inserts may be used. Adequate fiber glass insert material must be applied over the iron pipe fitting, and insert must be tucked to give full insulation coverage at fitting location. Hot: When insulating hot pipe fittings, a layer of kitchen-type aluminum foil shall be applied over the first fiber glass insert applied, making sure the aluminum foil is extended over the adjacent pipe insulation. A second fiber glass insert shall then be applied over the foil, with a vapor seal at all the aluminum foil edges. Insulation thickness shall be such that the surface temperature of the PVC shall not exceed 125 deg. F. The PVC Fitting Cover should then be applied over the fiber glass inserts, and sealed with Solvent Adhesive along all edges of PVC Fitting. Alternate - Pipe insulation and fitting may be covered with FRP (Fiber Glass Reinforced Plastic) jacketing and fittings and installed according to manufacturer's recommendations. 2.04 ROOF DRAIN INSULATION A. B. C. D. E. Roof drain sump cover to be LoSmoke 25/50 rated PVC. One piece and two piece pre-molded high impact fitted covers with fiberglass inserts and accessories which includes elbows, tee/valves, and caps, etc. 25/50 flame spread and smoke density (ASTM-E-84) ratings to conform with federal, state, and local codes. UV resistant. Temperature Range: -20°F to 140°F surface temperatures. K valve of .26 at 75°F. Surface preparation and installation to be in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements. Manufacturer: Proto PVC Corp. “RDS” Series 1-800-875-7768 or approved equal. 2.05 MANUFACTURERS A. Johns-Manville, Certain Teed, Owens/Corning, Knauf, Armstrong or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. B. C. Do not install until all piping systems are tested. Do not install until the building is closed in. Perform work at ambient and equipment temperatures as recommended by the adhesive manufacturer. Work in the area which may damage the insulation shall have been completed prior to the start of insulating. The owner shall not be responsible for subsequent charges arising out of damage to insulation caused by work progressing in the area after insulation has been installed. D. PLUMBING INSULATION AND COVERING 22 07 00 - 3 McHugh Engineering Associates E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building All insulation shall be continuous through wall, ceilings and floor openings except where fire safe materials are required. Insulation on all cold surfaces must be applied with a continuous unbroken vapor seal. Hangers, supports, anchors, etc. that are secured directly to cold surfaces shall be adequately insulated and vapor sealed to prevent condensation. Finish insulation neatly at hangers, supports, and other protrusions. Secure with tacks or tape as required. Install inserts on all hangers. Inserts between the pipe and pipe hanger shall consist of rigid pipe insulation of thickness equal to the adjoining insulation and shall be provided with vapor barrier where required. Insert length shall be 10" long for pipes up to and including 2-1/2" and 12" for pipes over 2-1/2". Pipe insulation shall have metal shields. The shields shall be installed between hanger support and the pipe insulation. Shield shall be formed to fit the insulation and shall extend up to the center line of the pipe. Shield shall be 10" long for pipes up to and including 2-1/2" and 12" for pipes over 2-1/2" Repair separation of joints or cracking of insulation due to thermal movement or poor workmanship. All insulation shall be secured at sufficient intervals to prevent sagging, gaps, or spaces from occurring. Any repairs necessary for 1 year due to improper installation shall be provided by Contractor at no cost to Owner. Contractor shall insulate all exposed domestic water and drainage piping under all handicapped sinks with pre-formed insulation kit with PVC jacket similar to, Lav-Guard as manufactured by Truebro. There shall be no sharp or abrasive surfaces under the handicapped lavatories. 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Pipe and equipment shall be clean, oil free, and dry prior to the application of insulation. END OF SECTION PLUMBING INSULATION AND COVERING 22 07 00 - 4 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 22 11 12 - PIPING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCE A. B. C. D. Refer to section 15000 for requirements which are applicable to this section. Refer to National Plumbing Code. Refer to ASHRAE handbooks. Where the contract documents are more stringent but not in conflict with the applicable codes, the more stringent requirement shall be followed. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor, material, equipment, and supervision necessary to install a complete operating domestic water system with all devices, appurtenances and accessories to complete the work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings of all items specified in this section. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. C. Verify that all equipment is installed in accordance with the manufacturer's warranty requirements. Install systems and equipment in accordance with the National Plumbing Code. NSF Compliance: NSF/ANSI 61-G and/or NSF/ANSI 372 for valve materials for potable water service. Valves for domestic water must be third party certified. 1.05 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Type K copper tubing; Underground domestic CW Type L Copper tubing; Interior above ground domestic CW, HW, HWR, and Compressed Air. B. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PVC PIPING AND FITTINGS A. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Schedule 40 ASTMD 2665 2.02. A. B. COPPER TUBING Above ground hard drawn seamless type "L" ASTM B-88. Below ground hard drawn seamless type "K" ASTM B-88. PIPING SYSTEMS 22 11 12 - 1 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building C. Fittings; solder joint, wrought copper, ANSI B-16.22 2.03 VALVES - GENERAL A. B. Gate and globe valves shall be repackable under pressure, with gland follower. The temperature/pressure rating shall not be less than the design criteria applicable to the system. Manufacturer; Crane, Nibco, Jamesbury, Apollo, Milwaukee, Grinnell, Hammond, or approved equal. 2.04 GATE VALVES UP TO 2 1/2 INCH - SOLDER END A. B. C. D. E. Solid wedge, inside screw, traveling stem, screw-in bonnet. Lead free valves shall be manufactured in accordance with MSS SP-110 and constructed of de-zincification-resistant (DZR) bronze bodies and end pieces and shall be made from a high quality lead free performance bronze alloy per ASTM B584 Alloy C87850. No brass containing more than 15% zinc shall be approved. 200 lb. non-shock WOG. All bronze ASTM B62. Application; copper piping systems. 2.05 GATE VALVES OVER 2 1/2 INCH - BRONZE A. C. D. E. Solid wedge, renewable bronze seat rings, outside screw and yoke, rising stem, bolted bone, flanged. Lead free valves shall be manufactured in accordance with MSS SP-110 and constructed of de-zincification-resistant (DZR) bronze bodies and end pieces and shall be made from a high quality lead free performance bronze alloy per ASTM B584 Alloy C87850. No brass containing more than 15% zinc shall be approved. 125 lb. saturated steam, 200 lb. non-shock WOG. All bronze ASTM B62. Application; copper piping systems. 2.06 GLOBE VALVES UP TO 2 1/2 INCH - SOLDER END A. B. C. D. Renewable composition disc, screw-in bonnet, rising stem. 300 lb. non-shock cold water. All bronze ASTM B62. Application; copper piping systems. 2.07 BALL VALVES UP TO 2 1/2 INCH A. B. C. D. E. All bronze, threaded. Lead free valves shall be manufactured in accordance with MSS SP-110 and constructed of de-zincification-resistant (DZR) bronze bodies and end pieces and shall be made from a high quality lead free performance bronze alloy per ASTM B584 Alloy C87850. No brass containing more than 15% zinc shall be approved. 150 lb. saturated steam, 600 lb. non-shock WOG. Teflon seats, packing and gasket, stainless steel ball. Application; Copper piping systems. 2.08 SWING CHECK VALVES UP TO 3 INCH - SOLDER END B. PIPING SYSTEMS 22 11 12 - 2 McHugh Engineering Associates A. B. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building C. D. E. Regrinding bronze disc. Lead free valves shall be manufactured in accordance with MSS SP-110 and constructed of de-zincification-resistant (DZR) bronze bodies and end pieces and shall be made from a high quality lead free performance bronze alloy per ASTM B584 Alloy C87850. No brass containing more than 15% zinc shall be approved. 300 lb. non-shock WOG. All bronze, ASTM B62. Application; copper piping systems. 2.09 SWING CHECK VALVES OVER 3 INCH - ALL BRONZE A. B. C. D. E. Renewable bronze seat ring and composition disc, bolted cover, flanged. Lead free valves shall be manufactured in accordance with MSS SP-110 and constructed of de-zincification-resistant (DZR) bronze bodies and end pieces and shall be made from a high quality lead free performance bronze alloy per ASTM B584 Alloy C87850. No brass containing more than 15% zinc shall be approved. All bronze, ASTM B62. 175 lb. non-shock cold water. Application; copper piping systems. 2.10 STRAINERS A. D. E. Self-cleaning "Y" type screwed end up to 2 inch with machined seats and blow-off outlet, stainless steel screen. All bronze, 150 lb. steam 300 lb. non-shock WOG, for copper piping systems. Lead free valves shall be manufactured in accordance with MSS SP-110 and constructed of de-zincification-resistant (DZR) bronze bodies and end pieces and shall be made from a high quality lead free performance bronze alloy per ASTM B584 Alloy C87850. No brass containing more than 15% zinc shall be approved. Self-cleaning "Y" type flanged 2 1/2 inch and up with bolted cover flange, blow-off outlet, brass screen. All bronze construction ASTM B-62 150 lb. steam 225 lb. non-shock WOG, for copper piping systems. Perforations; .033" pipe size to 2 inch, .057" pipe size 2 1/2 to 4 inch, 1/8 " pipe size 6 inch and up. Manufacturers; Muesco, Sarco, Hoffman, Metraflex, Mueller, or approved equal. 2.11 THERMOMETERS A. B. Separable socket, inserted into fluid flow, adjustable, hermetically sealed, red mercury, die cast case, baked enamel finish, double strength glass lens, white scale and black graduations. Manufacturer; U.S.Gauge, H.O. Trerice, Moeller, Duro, Ernst, or approved equal. 2.12 GAUGES A. B. C. Phosphor bronze bourdon tube, polypropylene case, gasketed glass crystal, aluminum dial, black graduations, 4 1/2 inch diameter. Installed with bronze gauge cock. Manufacturer; Danton, U.S. Gauge, H.O. Trerice, Moeller, or approved equal. 2.13 TEMPERATURE/PRESSURE PLUGS A. Furnish and install on the inlet and outlet of all heat exchange devices and terminal equipment, a temperature and pressure insertion device fitting. B. C. PIPING SYSTEMS 22 11 12 - 3 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building B. Provide temperature and pressure reading instrument to owner at completion of the work. 2.14 ISOLATION FITTINGS A. C. Insulated dielectric unions to prevent the flow of electric between adjacent sections of piping. Unions shall have the same pressure and temperature ratings of the installed systems. Fittings shall be screwed union type up to 2 inch and flanged type above 2 inch. Flanged type shall have isolating gaskets and isolated bolt holes. Manufacturer; Epco Sales Inc., Central Plastics, or approved equal. 2.15 UNIONS A. All equipment, control valves, and coils shall be provided with union connections up to 2 1/2 inch and flanged connections above 2 1/2 inch. Unions and flanges shall have pressure and temperature ratings equivalent to the fittings in the adjacent piping system. Screwed unions shall be bronze to bronze seat. B. B. 2.16 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Flexible connectors shall be provided on the suction and discharge of all base mounted pumps and wherever else indicated on the drawings. Connectors shall be braided hose or reinforced rubber as manufactured by R.K.L. Control Inc., Anaconda, Flexonics, Mason Industries, or approved equal. B. 2.17 PIPE SADDLES A. B. Pipe saddles shall be welded to all steel pipe 2 1/2 inches or larger for support of the pipe at hanger locations where the piping conveys hot fluids or steam. The saddles shall be packed with insulation of the same material used for adjacent pipe insulation. 2.18 PIPE ANCHORS AND GUIDES A. C. Anchors for retarding and constraining pipe movement shall be installed to maintain the piping in the proper position. Pipe anchors shall be a rigid constraint between the pipe and the building structural system. Where the piping is constrained to move in a designated direction furnish and install pipe alignment guides to control the movement of the pipe. The guides shall be fastened to the building structural system. Guides shall be commercially manufactured by J.J. McNally, Flexonics, Tube Turns, or approved equal. Two sets of guides shall be installed on each side of an expansion joint. 2.19 SUPPORTS A. Piping shall be supported from structure at intervals not exceeding: B. PIPE SIZE PIPING SYSTEMS INTERVAL COPPER PVC 22 11 12 - 4 McHugh Engineering Associates Up to 1" 1 ½" 2" 2 ½" 3" 4" 6" 8" Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building 6' 6' 10' 10' 10' 10' 3' 3 ½' 3 ½' 4' 4' 4 ½' 5' 5' C. D. E. Other piping to be supported per manufacturer. Hangers shall be copper or copper plated for copper piping, galvanized or corrosion resistant for steel and PVC piping. Provide insulation saddles for insulated piping. Piping supports shall be clevis type hangers. Piping which is 2 1/2" in diameter or larger and has hangers longer than 12" in length shall be seismic braced. Bracing shall be with angle iron stiffeners at 45° angles attached to the structural support and the clevis hanger. See detail on drawings. Bracing shall be at spacing dimensions given above. 2.20 SCREWED PIPE FITTINGS A. Pipe joints made on screwed pipe shall be sealed with Teflon ribbon wrapped on the threads before assembly. Usage shall be in conformance with the manufacturer’s instructions. B. B. 2.21 RELIEF VALVES A. Furnish and install an ASME pressure relief valve on each closed circuit water circulating system capable of relieving the full heat generating capacity of the system. 2.22 BALANCING VALVES - ORIGINAL A. Furnish and install flow control valves at each heat pump, fan coil, unit heater, radiator, HVAC unit, coil or any other terminal device and at floor return riser connections, and at hot water to boilers. Each balancing valve on terminal equipment shall be factory set. Other balancing valves shall be field setable with orifice taps and calibration setting to adjust the system to the indicated flow. Balancing valves shall be complete with ball valve shut off, (2) P/T ports, air vent and union. Manufacturers: Autoflow or B&G Circuit Sentry for terminal equipment. Autoflow, B&G Circuit Sentry, or B&G Circuit Setter for other locations. Approved equal by Tour and Anderson, Wheatly, Armstrong. Each flow control valve shall be preceded by a 20 mesh stainless steel strainer. Strainer shall be line size with combination ball valve shut off, PT port, drain valve and union end. B. C. D. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PIPING SYSTEMS A. All piping shall be arranged to drain to a drainable low point. The low point shall be provided with a drain valve at least 1/2 inch and a hose end thread as a minimum. Extensions to floor drains may be PIPING SYSTEMS 22 11 12 - 5 McHugh Engineering Associates B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building required elsewhere in which case the drain line shall gradually slope to the drain and terminate at the drain with a 90 degree elbow. Air vents shall be placed at the high points of all portions of systems which may trap air. This shall apply to piping, equipment, coils, exchangers or any other place that air may collect. At these points install automatic air vents which shall automatically vent the air from the system. Piping shall run square with building lines. Piping shall not be insulated until it is pressure and leak tested and until the building is closed in. Necessary drains, offsets, rises, vents, and drips shall be provided for as part of the contracted work. Where any such rise or drip is necessary the contractor shall install same as part of the work and as directed by the engineer. The drawings are diagrammatic in nature and due to the small scale it is not possible to show all necessary drains, vents, offsets and rises which may be required to properly execute the work and such items shall be provided as needed. Running or close nipples are not allowed. Piping shall not be installed over electrical panels, equipment, transformers, motor control centers, switch, gear, or substations. If absolutely necessary piping may be sleeved to prevent water from falling on electrical gear provided the installation is acceptable to the electrical inspectors. Allow clearances for expansion and contraction. Provide swing ells at connection points so as not to strain piping systems. Exposed insulated risers shall be covered with 22 gauge galvanized steel sleeves from floor to ceiling. All piping shall be installed on the interior conditioned side of the building insulation. Utilize eccentric reducers on steam and water piping systems with tops level for water systems and bottoms level for steam systems. Furnish and install dielectric pipe couplings between sections of ferrous and nonferrous piping systems and between copper or brass equipment and ferrous piping systems. Piping shall be supported from adjustable clevis type hangers at distances specified in Section 15000. Provide sway bracing to prevent horizontal movement of pipe. 3.02 PIPING IDENTIFICATION A. B. C. Provide stencils or snap-on labels to identify all piping systems. Labels shall indicate the service of the pipe and the direction of flow. Labels shall be required where piping enters and leaves mechanical rooms, at inlets and outlets of equipment, at 25 foot intervals where exposed. 3.03 VALVE IDENTIFICATION A. B. C. All valves shall be identified. Identification shall consist of a metallic tag chained to the valve with tag number pressed into the metal. Tag number shall include the equipment served by the valve. Provide a piping system diagram with valve tag numbers identified. The diagram shall be 1/8”=1’ scale, easily legible, framed in glass, and mounted in the mechanical room or where directed by the owner. Multiple charts may be necessary and required where various piping systems or portions of systems need be identified for simplicity. 3.04 SOLDERING AND BRAZING A. B. C. D. Ream or file pipe or tube to remove burrs. Clean and polish contact surfaces. Apply flux to both male and female surfaces. Insert tube full depth into socket. PIPING SYSTEMS 22 11 12 - 6 McHugh Engineering Associates E. F. G. H. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building I. Bring joint to soldering or brazing temperature in as short a time as possible. Form a continuous solder bead or brazing filler bead around entire circumference of the joint. Tin-lead 50-50 shall not be allowed on the site. Brazed joints of 95-5 tin antimony AWS 5.8 shall be used for refrigerant piping, hot water heating piping, drainage piping, domestic hot, cold, and recirculated water piping. Flux shall be non-toxic. 3.05 VALVES A. B. Valves shall be installed with their stems above the horizontal. Valves shall be installed on the connections to all equipment and control valves to allow for isolation for repair. Valves installed above 7 feet in mechanical rooms shall have chain operators. Check valves shall be installed on the discharge side of pumps and wherever else indicated on the drawings. C. D. 3.06 STRAINERS A. B. Strainers shall be installed on the suction side of all pumps and at the inlets to all control valves. Provide a blow down valve of at least 1/2 inch size connected to each strainer blow off port. 3.07 GAUGES A. Pressure gauges shall be installed on the suction and discharge side of all pumps inlet and outlet of backflow preventors, and wherever else indicated on the drawings or specified. 3.08 SYSTEM START-UP A. Fill system and thoroughly flush all sediment, dirt, particles and any other material from the system. Furnish and install necessary hose connections as may be necessary to accomplish. Remove all air from the system. This will require several bleeding sequences to remove all air from the system. Provide all necessary air vents to accomplish. Where existing systems are connected, remove air from the existing system also. Clean all strainers after thorough flushing. Provide chemical treatment for first year of operation including all necessary tests, chemicals, additives and service visits. B. C. D. END OF SECTION PIPING SYSTEMS 22 11 12 - 7 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 22 11 16 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCE A. B. C. Refer to Section 22 05 00 for requirements which are applicable to this section. Requirements of the National Plumbing Code. Requirements of the International Code, local plumbing code and the authorities having jurisdiction shall be made a part of these specifications. Where the contract documents are more stringent but not in conflict with the applicable codes, the more stringent requirements shall be followed. D. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. B. Submit shop drawings and manufacturers data for all materials specified herein. Submit manufacturer’s certificates of conformance with referenced codes. 1.03 WORK INCLUDED A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. Revisions to existing water piping to accommodate renovations with new fixtures. Testing of new piping. Disinfection of new piping. All domestic water piping including underground to 5'-0" from building exterior wall. Hot water heaters, piping, circulators, and controls. Testing of all piping systems. Miscellaneous piping and plumbing accessories specified herein or necessary to complete the work. Include all labor, material and provide for the inspection and supervision of the work to insure that installations are correct and complete and that equipment installed is within manufacturer’s warranty requirements. Connections to all fixtures and equipment including those furnished by others. Water meter, backflow preventer, and any and all charges associated with the water meter installation. Water service including meter pit and service connection to street main, street opening plus re-paving with all required permits, inspections and payment of all related costs. I. J. K. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING A. B. Above ground: Hard drawn ASTM B-88 specification for seamless copper water tube, Type "L". Below ground: Annealed soft temper ASTM B-88 specification for seamless copper water tube, Type "K". Fittings wrought copper solder joint ANSI B16.22. Fittings for underground to be bronze heavy flared type. C. D. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16 - 1 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building 2.02 SHOCK ABSORBERS A. B. Standard: P.D.I. WH-201. Manufacturer: Josam, Zurn, Wade, J. R. Smith, or approved equal. 2.03 WALL HYDRANTS A. Non-freeze type, 3/4 inch with exposed hose connection, polished chrome face, loose key, vacuum breaker. Manufacturer; Josam, Zurn, Wade, Smith, or approved equal. Verify wall construction with hydrant locations to assure anti-freeze arrangement and concealed connection. B. C. 2.04 BACKFLOW PREVENTORS A. Backflow preventor shall be of the reduced pressure type complete with service valves and strainer similar to Watts Regulator No. 909 SQT or approved equal. 2.05 DOMESTIC WATER SERVICE A. B. C. Type "K" copper tube, annealed soft temper ASTM B-88 in 100 foot lengths. Cast bronze flared fittings. Ductile iron pipe, cement mortar lined/seal coat, pressure Class 350 with push-on type joints, Class 350 mechanical joint fittings. Pipe shall be restrained with Griffin Pipe snap-loc joints and mega-lug type retainer gland for fittings, or approved equal. 2.06 RECESSED BOX TYPE NON-FREEZE WALL HYDRANT A. Smith No. 5509 QT cast bronze box with bronze nickel plated face with "T" handle key and bronze casing with concealed vacuum breaker 3/4" universal inlet connection, or approved equal. 2.07 PROJECTING NON-FREEZE WALL HYDRANT A. Smith No. 5609 QT cast bronze hydrant with bronze nickel plated face with "T" handle key and bronze casing with exposed 3/4" universal inlet connection and vacuum breaker or approved equal. 2.08 THERMAL EXPANSION ABSORBER A. Expansion absorber shall be installed in connection with each domestic water heating device consisting of a pre-charged vertical steel tank with polypropylene liner as manufactured by Amtrol, Model AST Extrol or approved equal. Selection shall be in accordance with the manufacturer recommendation. Where necessary, multiple tanks shall be utilized with common header. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 WATER SERVICE DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16 - 2 McHugh Engineering Associates A. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building G. H. I. Connect to water service where indicated on the drawings and extend new water service into building. Install water line at least 4'-0" below finished grade level. Arrange and pay for all fees, testing, and inspections, etc. in connection with the new water service. Materials and installation shall conform to the latest issue of requirements of the local water company. Furnish and install all water piping, valves, fittings, supports, etc. as required for the water meter. The entire installation shall be in conformance with the requirements of the local water company. All changes in direction in ductile iron piping shall be restrained with approved restrainer gland gaskets. Use retainer glands or restraining gaskets on ductile iron fittings where changes in direction occur. Service backflow preventor shall be installed in accordance with code and utility requirements. Provide floor drain adjacent to backflow preventor. 3.02 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING A. B. C. D. Extend and connect to all fixtures and outlets requiring water service. Hangers and supports for copper tubing or pipe shall be copper or copper plated steel. After testing, all domestic water piping shall be disinfected as herein specified. Furnish and install shock absorbers on all branches to fixture groups or toilet rooms with flush valves or solenoid valves including equipment which functions with solenoid valves. Install so as to be accessible for maintenance. Furnish and install isolation ball valves at main connections on all branches to groups of fixtures located by separate rooms except in back-to-back arrangements. Furnish and install vacuum breakers on all outlets in the domestic water system which may have a hose attachment including wall hydrants, hose bibbs, and washer connections. All piping shall be installed on the interior conditioned side of the building insulation. Test piping at 150 psi for not less than 4 hours. Drop in pressure shall not be more than 1 psi. Utilize gage graduated in 1 psi increments. If the test is under the jurisdiction of a local inspector his requirements may be used provided they are not less than above. Furnish signed report of test and witness. B. C. D. E. F. E. F. G. H. 3.03 SOLDER JOINTS A. B. Utilize 95/5 tin antimony solder ONLY. JOINTS MADE WITH 50/50 SOLDER WILL BE REQUIRED TO BE REPLACED. See Specification Section 15050 for other details on soldering. 3.04 COPPER TUBING ALLOWABLE ALTERNATE CONNECTIONS METHOD A. Press connections: Copper press fittings shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions. The tubing shall be fully inserted into the fitting and the tubing marked at the shoulder of the fitting. The fitting alignment shall be checked against the mark on the tubing to assure the tubing is fully engaged (inserted) in the fitting. The joints shall be pressed using the tool approved by the manufacturer. Material - Press Fittings: Copper press fittings shall conform to the material and sizing requirements of ASME B16.18 or ASME B16.22. O-rings for copper press fittings shall be EPDM. Manufacturers - Copper Press Fittings: 1. Viega, 17545 Daleview Dr., Lakewood, OH 44107, 877-620-0016 2. Ridge Tool Co., 400 Clark Street, Elyria, OH 44035, 800-519-3456. B. C. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16 - 3 McHugh Engineering Associates 3. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Or approved equal. 3.05 BACKFLOW PREVENTORS A. C. Furnish and install reduced pressure backflow preventors on any domestic water connection to another piping system. Backflow preventers shall be approved by the water company. Systems shall include but not be limited to: 1. Boiler water systems, heating systems. 2. Chilled water systems. 3. Condenser water systems. 4. Sprinkler systems. 5. Boiler steam systems for makeup. 6. Any system containing chemical water treatment, additives or anti-freeze. 7. Irrigation system. Provide means for proper disposal of any relief discharge from the backflow preventor. 3.06 CROSS CONNECTION (HOT AND COLD WATER) A. Equipment or fixtures having single nozzle or valved discharge controls in addition to the normal hot and cold water valved controls shall be provided with individual check valves in the supplies to prevent cross feeding through the fixture connection. 3.07 DISINFECTION A. After final testing for leaks, all domestic cold, hot and hot recirculation water systems shall be thoroughly flushed to remove all foreign material. Before placing the system into service, engage a qualified service organization, United Water Treatment Company or approved equal, to disinfect the systems as follows: 1. Isolate existing piping systems, which need to be disinfected. 2. At a point not more than 10 feet downstream from the beginning of the new main, water entering the new main shall receive a dose of chlorine fed at a constant rate such that the water will have not less than 200 mg/L free chlorine or through a 3/4" hose connection, sufficient sodium hypochlorite will be meter pumped into system to produce a free available chlorine residual of not less than 200 mg/L. 3. Proceed upstream from the point of chlorine application opening all faucets and taps until chlorine is detected. Close faucets and connections when chlorine is evident. Tag all faucets and taps with proper labeling to ensure water is not used during sterilization procedure. The chlorine shall be applied continuously for a sufficient period to develop a solid column, or “slug,” of chlorinated water that will, as it moves through the main, expose all interior surfaces to a concentration of approximately 200 mg/L for three hours. 4. When chlorinated water has been brought to every faucet and connections with a minimum of 200 mg/L chlorine, retain this water in system for three hours. 5. Concentrated chlorine shall not be allowed to remain in the system for more than six hours. Also, special procedures shall be used to dispose of heavily concentrated chlorine in an environmentally acceptable and approved manner. 6. As the chlorinated water flows past fittings and valves, related valves, connections and/or hydrants shall be operated so as to disinfect appurtenances and pipe branches. 7. At the end of the retention period, no less than 100 ppm of chlorine shall be present at the extreme end of the system. 8. Proceed to open up all faucets and connections and thoroughly flush all new lines until the chlorine residual in the system is less than 1.0 ppm. B. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16 - 4 McHugh Engineering Associates 9. 10. 11. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Obtain representative water samples from the system for analysis by an approved licensed independent testing laboratory. Water samples for bacteriological analysis shall be collected in sterile bottles treated with sodium thiosulphate as required by Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater. If all samples tested for coliform organisms are negative, a letter and laboratory report shall be submitted by the contractor to the engineer, certifying successful completion of the disinfection and testing. If any samples tested indicate the presence of coliform organisms, the entire disinfection process shall be repeated. END OF SECTION DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16 - 5 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 22 13 00 - DRAINAGE SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCE A. B. Refer to Section 22 05 00 for requirements which are applicable to this section. Requirements of the International codes and authorities having jurisdiction shall be made a part of these specifications. Where the contract documents are more stringent but not in conflict with the applicable codes, the more stringent requirement shall be followed. C. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. B. C. Install piping to meet requirements of National Plumbing Code. Provide manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. All Piping and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. B. C. Certificates: Submit manufacturer's certificates of conformance to applicable codes. Test Reports: Submit copies of test reports. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Submit "PVC" manufacturer's materials, installation support and expansion joint recommendations for review by Architect/Engineer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Cast Iron no-hub ASTM-A88 and CISPI-301 with heavy duty banded stainless steel sleeves and rubber sleeve joints for all above ground sanitary drainage and storm drainage piping 2" and larger. Cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall bear the markings of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute and conform to CISPI Standard 301. Copper type DWV for up to 1 1/2". Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings: Schedule 40 Solid Wall Pipe DWV drain, waste and vent to be used for all underground storm, sanitary and condensate drainage systems and all vent piping above grade for sanitary systems. All PVC piping in plenum ceilings shall be insulated in accordance with Specification Section 22 07 00. 1. Pipe and fittings shall be manufactured from virgin rigid PVC (Polyvinyl chloride) vinyl compounds with a Cell Class of 12454 as identified in ASTM D 1784. 2. PVC Schedule 40 pipe shall be Iron Pipe Size (IPS) conforming to ASTM D 1785 and ASTM D 2665. Injection molded PVC DWV fittings shall conform to ASTM D 2665. Fabricated PVC DWV fittings shall conform to ASTM F 1866. Pipe and fittings shall be manufactured as a system and be the product of one manufacturer. All pipe and fittings shall be manufactured in the United States. All systems shall utilize a separate waste and vent B. DRAINAGE SYSTEMS 22 13 00 - 1 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building C. system. Pipe and fittings shall conform to NSF International Standard 14. Exposed drainage systems shall be schedule 40 galvanized steel, copper tube type "L", or standard weight cast iron. 2.02 CLEANOUTS: A. B. C. D. E. F. Slab on grade; J. R. Smith 433OV with nickel bronze cover and rim. Concrete Floors; J. R. Smith 4020 with nickel bronze cover. Provide flashing flange where floor is waterproofed. Tile Floors; J. R. Smith 4140 with 1/8" recess. Provide flashing flange where floor is waterproofed. Carpet Floors; J. R. Smith 4020 with carpet marker. Walls; J. R. Smith 4510-4725 cover plate chrome finish. Approved equivalents by Josam, Zurn, Watts and Wade are acceptable. 2.03 FLOOR DRAINS A. B. Finished spaces unless otherwise noted on plans; J. R. Smith 2010-A with nickel bronze strainer or approved equal. Provide trap primer connection and heel proof grate. Flashing collar. In traffic areas provide heel proof strainer. Unfinished spaces; J. R. Smith 2110 with cast iron grate and flashing flange or approved equal. 2.04 TRAP PRIMERS A. Smith No. 2699 cast bronze trap primer or approved equal with 1/2" connections. Provide primered drains with Smith No. 2695 or 2696 cast iron trap primer adaptors or approved equal. Trap primers for multiple floor drains shall consist of the appropriate model with distribution unit as manufactured by Precision Plumbing Products or approved equal. All trap primers shall be accessibly located and installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. B. C. 2.04 ROOF DRAINS A. Combination roof drain/overflow drain, deck clamp, overflow strainer, drain pan, deck extension, and cast iron. Froet Industries “100C” Series or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. B. Examine areas to receive piping for: 1. Defects that adversely affect execution and quality of work. 2. Deviations beyond allowable tolerance for piping clearances. Start work only when conditions are satisfactory. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Piping Layout: 1. Complete installation to present a neat, orderly appearance. DRAINAGE SYSTEMS 22 13 00 - 2 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. B. C. Do not block openings or passageways with piping. Run piping parallel to walls of building, unless otherwise indicated. Keep piping free from contact with structure or installed items. All changes in direction to be made with "Y" branches or 1/8 bends. Provide cleanouts at base of all stacks, at changes in direction of piping and at 50 foot intervals. Cleanouts shall be line size up to 4 inch and 4 inch for piping over 4 inch. Workmanship: 1. Examine pipe and fittings before installation and assure no defective materials are incorporated. 2. Keep inside of pipes and fittings free of dirt and debris. 3. Installation of cast iron soil pipe to conform to Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Standards Handbook. Placement: 1. Vertical Piping: a. Secure at sufficiently close intervals to keep pipe in alignment, and to support weight of pipe and contents. b. Install risers, stacks, etc. as directly as possible to roof. c. Install supports at each floor. 2. Horizontal Piping, Suspended; a. Support at sufficiently close intervals to prevent sagging and to maintain alignment. Not to exceed: cast iron piping to be supported at pipe joints not to exceed 10'-0" spacing. Copper and steel piping to be supported on 12' spacing. PVC piping to be supported on 4'-0" spacing. Copper tubing up to 1 1/4" to be supported on 6' spacing, over 1 1/4" to be supported on 10'-0" spacing. Other piping to be supported per manufacturer. b. Install hangers and supports at least 18 inches from each joint regardless of pipe length. c. Install hangers at the ends of all runs or branches and at each change of direction or alignment. d. Gasketed or mechanical joints piping shall be securely braced or clamp and rod restrained to prevent horizontal movement where the transition from the vertical of the horizontal occurs. Branches must be secured to prevent movement in any direction by use of sway bracing. 3. Horizontal Piping, Underground; a. Lay piping on firm bed for entire length of trench except where supports are provided. b. Employ partial backfilling and cradling to hold pipe in secure position during backfilling operations. c. Firmly brace piping laid on grade prior to embedment in concrete. 4. PVC and DWV Schedule 40; a. PVC pipe installation practices including support bracing and solvent welding shall be in strict conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations. b. Expansion joints shall be installed at every floor for waste and soil system stack, alternate floors for vent stacks rain water conductors and condensate stacks. 3.03 TESTING A. B. C. D. Disconnect all equipment and devices which may be damaged by test pressures. Plug or cap lines. Test each piping system for leaks in accordance with the local inspectors test code. Repair all leaks noted. DRAINAGE SYSTEMS 22 13 00 - 3 McHugh Engineering Associates E. F. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Minimum test shall be to fill system to top vent stack and not show a drop of more than 3 inches for 1 hour. Test shall be performed before piping is concealed. Secure certificate from municipal inspector of an acceptable test. END OF SECTION DRAINAGE SYSTEMS 22 13 00 - 4 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 22 15 00 - COMPRESSED AIR PIPING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCE A. B. Refer to section 22 05 00 for requirements which are applicable to this section. Refer to International Mechanical Code. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. D. Provide all labor, material, equipment, and supervision necessary to install a complete compressed air piping system with all devices, appurtenances and accessories to complete the work. Provide air compressor, receiver, filters, and air dryer complete with accessories and controls. Provide final connection to air compressors with flexible connector, air check valve, and shut-off valve. Provide valves in mains and on all branch lines to equipment to allow for servicing. 1.03 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Type "L" copper with wrought copper solder end fittings. Solder to be 95.5 B. C. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 VALVES A. C. Valves 2 inch and smaller shall be globe pattern, screwed ends all bronze, renewable disc seat rated at 150 lb. saturated steam. Valves over 2 inch shall be globe pattern, flanged ends, IBBM 125 lb. saturated steam, OS&Y, renewable bronze disc and seat ring. Ball valves shall be all bronze, threaded, 150 lb. saturated steam, Teflon seat and S. S. ball. 2.02 ISOLATION FITTINGS A. C. Insulated dielectric unions to prevent the flow of electricity between adjacent sections of piping. Unions shall have the same pressure and temperature ratings of the installed systems. Fittings shall be screwed union type up to 2 inch and flanged type above 2 inch. Flanged type shall have isolating gaskets and isolated bolt holes. Manufacturer; Epco Sales Inc., Central Plastics or approved equal. UL listed for gas piping service. 2.03 UNIONS A. All equipment, control valves, and regulators shall be provided with union connections up to 2 inch and flanged connections above 2 inch. B. B. COMPRESSED AIR PIPING SYSTEMS 22 15 00 - 1 McHugh Engineering Associates B. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building C. Unions and flanges shall have pressure and temperature ratings equivalent to the fittings in the adjacent piping system. Screwed unions shall be bronze to bronze seat. Unions shall be placed between the appliance and its shutoff valve. 2.04 SCREWED PIPE FITTINGS A. Pipe joints made on screwed pipe shall be sealed with Teflon ribbon wrapped on the threads before assembly. Usage shall be in conformance with the manufacturer’s instructions. B. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PIPING SYSTEMS A. G. H. I. Branch connections shall be made to the top of horizontal lines. All piping shall be arranged to drain to a drainable low point. The low point shall be provided with a valve, nipple and cap for the removal of moisture. Piping shall run square with building lines. Necessary drains, offsets, rises, vents, and drips shall be provided for as part of the contracted work. Where any such rise or drip is necessary the contractor shall install same as part of the work and as directed by the engineer. The drawings are diagrammatic in nature and due to the small scale it is not possible to show all necessary drains, vents, offsets and rises which may be required to properly execute the work and such items shall be provided as needed. Drips shall be accessible. Running or close nipples are not allowed. Furnish and install dielectric pipe couplings between sections of ferrous and nonferrous piping systems and between copper or brass equipment and ferrous piping systems. Piping shall be supported from adjustable clevis type hangers. 10' centers for piping 3/4" and less and 12' centers for 1" and larger. Drops to outlets shall be secured with split ring hangers on 12'-0" centers. Piping shall be clean, free of metal chips and cutting oil and other foreign materials. Piping shall be capped immediately after installation. 3.02 PIPING IDENTIFICATION A. B. C. Provide stencils or snap-on labels to identify gas piping systems. Labels shall indicate "AIR" and the direction of flow. Labels shall be required where piping enters and leaves mechanical rooms, at inlets and outlets of equipment, at 50 foot intervals where exposed. 3.03 VALVES A. B. Valves shall be installed with their stems above the horizontal. Valves shall be installed on the connections to all equipment and control valves to allow for isolation for repair. 3.04 TESTING A. The air system shall be at a pressure not less than 1.5 times the normal system working pressure for B. C. D. E. F. COMPRESSED AIR PIPING SYSTEMS 22 15 00 - 2 McHugh Engineering Associates B. C. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building an 8 hour period. Dry, clean air or nitrogen shall be used for testing. Provide a report of the test procedure utilized indicating test pressure and duration, date, and signatures of witnesses which shall include the owner, and representative of the A/E. END OF SECTION COMPRESSED AIR PIPING SYSTEMS 22 15 00 - 3 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 22 40 00 - PLUMBING FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT * Code reference - Applies only to projects in Philadelphia PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCE A. B. C. Refer to Section 22 05 00 for requirements which are applicable to this section. Reference the requirements of the National Plumbing Code. Where the contract documents are more stringent but not in conflict with the applicable codes, the more stringent requirements shall be followed. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. B. Furnish and install plumbing fixtures, drains, trim, supplies, fastening devices, carriers, valves, and traps for a complete installation. Provide connection of all services for soil, waste, vent, cold and hot water. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings of all materials and products described in this section and indicated on the drawings including that listed in the schedule on the drawings. Fixture submittals shall include all trim associated with the china. They shall be incorporated in a single brochure with the items being furnished clearly identified. B. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All fixtures shall be unmarked, uncracked, true, and level. All shall be warranted to not craze, color, or scale. Installations shall conform to the National Plumbing Code. Install all materials and equipment in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and within the warranty requirements. All handicapped fixtures and their installation shall conform to the American's with Disabilities Act and Fair Housing Amendments Act (Public Law 101-336). B. C. D. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 TRAPS A. B. C. Fixture traps shall be approved self-cleaning type with clean-outs. Traps shall be chrome plated cast brass. Traps for lavatories shall be 1 1/4" x 1 1/2" size. 2.02 TRIM A. All trim including faucets, waste fittings, strainers, valves, supplies, nipples, and escutcheons shall PLUMBING FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT 22 40 00 - 1 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building H. be chrome plated cast brass. Exposed water supply pipes shall be chrome plated brass with loose key angle stops. Fixtures shall be selected for low water consumption and limited to 1.6 gallons per flush on toilets, 2.2 gpm for faucets, and 2.5 gpm for showers. Public toilet room faucets shall be self-closing metering type when not indicated for the handicapped. Handicapped faucets shall conform to ADA requirements. Provide an approved temperature limiting device that conforms to ASSE 1070. All lavatories in public toilet rooms shall have grid type strainers. Waste connections for handicapped lavatories shall be offset. Contractor is to insulate all exposed domestic water and waste piping with pre-fab PVC jacketed assemblies. For fixtures requiring flush valves, they shall be of the low consumption type. Selection shall be for use with the specified fixture. ‘Eco-drive’ sensor operated flush valves and faucets shall include regenerating battery system. 2.03 CARRIERS A. B. C. All wall hung fixtures shall be provided with floor mounted carriers. Floor mounted carriers shall have short pattern foot supports. Carriers for lavatories shall be concealed arm type. 2.04 MANUFACTURERS A. B. C. D. E. Fixtures; Kohler, American-Standard, Crane, or approved equal. Seats; Church, Olsonite, Sperzel, Benke, Bemis, or approved equal. Carriers; Josam, Zurn, Wade, J.R. Smith, Watts, or approved equal. Faucets; American-Standard, Speakman, Chicago, Kohler, Delta, Moen, or approved equal. Supplies and Traps; McGuire, Brass Craft, Central Brass, Kohler, American-Standard, or approved equal. Shower, Mop Receptors and Laundry Trays; Crane/Fiat, Stern/Williams, or approved equal. Domestic Water Heaters-Gas; Rheem/Rudd, A.O. Smith, Lochinvar, Jackson, State, or approved equal. Shower Enclosures - Kohler, American Standard, Crane/Fiat, or approved equal. Flush Valves - Sloan Royal or approved equal. Flush Valves - Sloan Regal, Coyne and Delaney, Zurn, or approved equal. Insulation for handicapped lavatory and sink connections insulations - Truebro McGuire “pro-wrap” or approved equal. Alternate flush valve selection where budget consideration requires a lower cost valve and competitive pricing. B. C. D. E. F. G. F. G. H. I. J. K. ∙ 2.05 VACUUM BREAKERS A. Furnish and install vacuum breakers on all fixtures, trim, or faucets arranged for the connection of hoses. Vacuum breaker shall be located on the discharge side of the valve. Vacuum breakers shall be chrome plated brass where exposed and rough brass where concealed. Install vacuum breakers on wall hydrants, hose bibbs, janitor sinks and wherever else required by code. B. C. 2.06 DOMESTIC WATER HEATER - ELECTRIC A. B. C. D. Size and capacity as indicated on drawing. 2 1/2 inch thick polyurethane insulation R 20. To exceed ASHRAE 90.1B and HUD requirements. Adjustable controls conforming to U.L., and NEMA. PLUMBING FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT 22 40 00 - 2 McHugh Engineering Associates E. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Center F. G. H. Glass lined tank. Anode rods, ASME pressure and temperature relief valve, baked enamel finish, high temperature cutout. 10 year warranty. Plastic lined nipples, drain valve, individually factory tested. Non-simultaneous operation of dual heating elements. 2.07 WATER HEATER DRAIN PAN A. B. Pan shall be galvanized steel - 24 gauge with a minimum height of 1 ½”. Each pan shall have a 3/4" drain to an acceptable point. 2.08 HEATER WARRANTIES A. Provide extended warranties of 5 years for commercial and 10 years for residential heaters. 2.09 CIRCULATORS A. Circulating pumps shall be in-line, centrifugal, close coupled with mechanical seals, all bronze construction similar to TACO or Bell and Gossett, or approved equal. Pump shall be controlled by adjustable, immersion type Aquastat, Honeywell, or approved equal. B. 2.10 WATER CLOSET CARRIER SELECTION. A. Carrier fitting configuration shall be suitable for the stack location shown on the drawings. Carriers to permit handicapped mounting of fixtures shall be utilized where required. 2.11 WALL HUNG WATER CLOSET SUPPORTS/FITTINGS A. Smith No. 0100 series "adjustable" deep rough-in support. Where floor construction is not suitable for deep rough-in, Smith No. 0200 series shallow rough-in type may be used. Where furred wall space is not sufficient for the adjustable series, Smith "compact" No. 0400 series may be used. 2.12 WALL HUNG BLOWOUT AND WASH-OUT URINALS ON FLOOR MOUNTED SUPPORT A. Smith No. 0600 series urinal support. Uprights shall be high-strength steel with block bases securely bolted to floor construction. 2.13 ELECTRIC WATER COOLER WALL SUPPORT A. Smith No. 0830 floor mounted support electric water cooler support. Uprights shall be high strength steel with block bases securely bolted to floor construction. 2.14 STEEL BACKING PLATE FOR PLUMBING FIXTURES A. Where plumbing fixtures of the arms which support them are specified to be attached to a steel plate in the wall, furnish and install a 1/4" thick by 6" wide steel plate which shall extend at least one stud beyond the first and last fixture mounting points. Fixture or supporting arms shall be securely and firmly attached to the steel plate in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions 2.15 FLAT-SLAB LAVATORIES-CONCEALED ARMS ON BACKING PLATE A. Lavatories shall be punched for Smith No. 0728 or approved equal concealed arm fixture support PLUMBING FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT 22 40 00 - 3 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Center with chromium plated threaded escutcheons. The arms shall be securely bolted to steel backing plate in the wall as herein before specified. They shall have positive mechanical locking device and shall be fully adjustable after installation of the finished wall. 2.16 FLAT-SLAB LAVATORIES-CONCEALED ARMS ON FLOOR SUPPORT A. Lavatories shall be punched for Smith No. 0700-E fixture support. Fixture support shall have chromium plated threaded escutcheons and concealed arms with positive mechanical locking device. Arms shall be fully adjustable after installation of finished wall. Uprights shall be high-strength steel with block bases securely bolted to floor construction. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATIONS A. Plumbing fixtures shall be installed in a manner to afford easy access for cleaning. Where practical, all piping from fixtures shall run in the most direct route to the wall. Furnish and install all waste connections, traps, water supplies, final connections, etc., to equipment furnished under other portions of the specifications. Make final connections to all soil, waste, vent, and water piping to the fixtures. Fixtures shall be set level and in proper alignment with adjacent walls and fixtures. All wall hung fixture carriers to be securely anchored to the slab. Attach floor mounted water closets to floor with wax seal and lag screws. Do not use lead flashing to hold closet in place. Securely bolt all fixtures to the building construction and unless special hangers are indicated, provide hangers and/or carriers designed specifically for the fixtures by the fixture manufacture. Caulk all wall hung fixtures between fixture and wall with sealant specified in Section 07900. Provide sealant at all points where mop receptor meets walls and floor. Install electric water coolers with "P" trap and water shutoff valve within cabinet. Contractor shall insulate all exposed domestic water and drainage piping under all handicapped lavatories and sinks with pre-formed insulation kit with PVC jacket. There shall be no sharp or abrasive surfaces under the handicapped lavatories. Contractor shall provide an offset tailpiece for the handicapped lavatory's drain piping to create space for wheelchair access. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. 3.02 MOUNTING HEIGHTS A. Mount fixtures with the following heights above finished floor, except where noted otherwise. Water Closet: Standard Handicapped 15 inches to top of bowl rim 17 - 19 inches to top of seat Urinal: Standard Handicapped 22 inches to top of bowl rim 17 inches to top of bowl rim Lavatory: Standard 31 inches to top of basin rim PLUMBING FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT 22 40 00 - 4 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Center Handicapped 34 inches to top of basin rim or 29 inches to underside of basin apron Drinking Fountain: Standard Handicapped 40 inches to top of basin rim 36 inches to bubbler outlet Water Closet Flush Valves: Standard 11 inches minimum above bowl rim Handicapped Center line of flush valve shall not exceed 44" above fin. fl. Flush valve handle shall extend toward the wide side of stall. END OF SECTION PLUMBING FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT 22 40 00 - 5 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building DIVISION 23 - HVAC SECTION 23 05 00 - STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCE A. Requirements established within the portions of this project manual titled Division 1, General Requirements are collectively applicable to the work of this section. Instructions to Bidders, Special Conditions and addenda as issued are part of this specification. Mechanical, Plumbing, and HVAC drawings along with all other project drawings and specifications represent the work of this section. Drawings, Contract, General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions form a part of this section, by reference thereto and shall have the same force and effect as if printed herewith in full. Failure to review these sections shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to fully comply with the terms therein. B. C. D. 1.02 SCOPE A. Provide labor, material, equipment and supervision necessary to install complete operating mechanical systems as indicated on the drawings and specified herein, including all work at the site and within the proposed construction areas to accomplish the required work. It shall be the contractor’s responsibility to coordinate his work and the work of his subcontractors to insure that all the work is covered. He shall designate who is responsible for various portions of work which may overlap so that there is complete coverage of all required work. It is the position of the owner and the A/E that all work is the responsibility of the mechanical contractor within this Division of the work. All work shown on the drawings and not expressly mentioned in the specifications and all work specified but not shown on the drawings, but necessary for the proper execution of same shall be performed by the contractor. It is not the intent of the drawings and specifications to describe every feature and detail of the work. No additions to the contract amount will be approved for any materials, equipment, or labor to perform additional work unless it can be clearly shown to be beyond the scope and intent of the drawings and specifications. HVAC contractor's scope of work shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Air distribution system, associated ductwork, devices, equipment and insulation. 2. Heating hot water system and insulation. 3. Chilled water system, equipment and insulation. 4. Condensate drainage system (air conditioner units). Condensate pumps. 5. Roof penetrations for mechanical work and all associated roof work. 6. Exhaust systems. 7. Test Balance & Adjust. 8. Building automation system and automatic temperature controls. 9. All other work identified in Division 23 and/or on the mechanical drawings except that identified as plumbing or fire protection work. 10. Contractor shall not utilize new HVAC equipment for temporary heating purposes. Temporary heating is to be provided as described under the architect’s general conditions. Contractor is to protect all HVAC equipment during construction and cover all ductwork B. C. D. E. STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 1 McHugh Engineering Associates 11. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building openings. Participation in commissioning of systems and equipment. 1.03 REGULATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Work shall be performed in accordance with the latest adopted codes, amendments, regulations and ordinances of the authorities having jurisdiction. Observe all safety regulations including the requirements of OSHA. Obtain and pay for all permits, connection charges, inspections, and certificates required to complete the work. Latest editions of any referenced standards shall govern. Contractor shall arrange and pay for all tests and inspections specified herein or required by above agencies and furnish required certificate of inspection to owner. Where the contract documents are more stringent but not in conflict with the applicable codes, the more stringent requirements shall be followed. B. C. D. E. 1.04 SUBMISSIONS A. The procedure for submissions of shop drawings shall be as specified in Division 1, or as a minimum, as indicated below. Furnish submissions of shop drawings and samples of materials and equipment as indicated in these sections, on the drawings, or as directed by the A\E. Submissions will be made in a timely fashion such that adequate time exists to review the drawings, or material, and arrive at the site in accordance with the project schedule. Submissions will not be accepted with work defined as "By Others". Identify contractor by name and with his approval so indicated. Submissions are required prior to purchasing, fabrication, or installation of any material or equipment. Submissions shall be reviewed and certified by the submitting contractor that they are in accordance with the project documents. When requested by the engineer, shop drawings shall be required to be submitted to designated agencies for review and approval prior to submission to the engineer. Contractor shall arrange and pay for all tests and inspections specified herein or required by above agencies and furnish required certificate of inspection to owner. Contractor to forward a copy of submittals which have electrical requirements to the Electrical Contractor (EC) for coordination of voltage, amperage, and phase. Response to be received from EC prior to ordering of equipment by mechanical contractor. Submissions shall include warrantees by the manufacturer for equipment being provided. Submissions for commonly related items such as fixtures, trim, carriers, drains shall be combined in a single brochure with all items being furnished clearly identified. Shop drawings and submittals shall be checked and stamped by the contractor before submitting. They shall conform to measurements made at the site, the contract requirements, and coordinated with all other trades. Specific models in catalog sheets must be identified as well as all options, voltages, phases, etc. identified so as to be clear on what is being provided. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. 1.05 SITE INSPECTION A. Visit site, inspect and become aware of all conditions which may affect the work. Investigate utilities, protection requirements for adjacent facilities, storage locations, and access to the construction area. Submission of bid will be deemed evidence of having complied with this request. Contractor may not request additional costs for existing conditions which were evident from inspection of the site. B. STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 2 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building 1.06 SUBSTITUTIONS A. B. Material and equipment specified shall be deemed as that which the bidder’s quotation represents. Once bids are accepted only that material and equipment listed in the specifications or added by addenda shall be acceptable. Substitution information for inclusion in an addenda must be received by the A\E at least 10 days prior to bid opening. If acceptable, an addenda will be issued which will add the additional acceptable manufacturers or materials and be available for all contractors to consider. It shall be a basic premise that a contractor is a lowest bidder because he utilized substituted materials or equipment as opposed to specified materials or equipment. If the contractor submits alternate equipment, manufacturers, systems, methods, or materials, not specifically identified in the specifications, additional review and investigation time may be required by the engineer. If the engineer determines additional review time is required because of the substitution then this will be a billable service by the engineer at the rate of $150.00/hr. for such services. Also billable will be any redesign time and revisions to drawings should they be necessary for incorporation into the work. Services will be billable to the contractor making such substitutions and will be payable prior to approval or rejection. If the contractor elects to submit alternate equipment, manufacturers, systems, methods, or materials, not specifically identified in the drawings and specifications, it is the contractor’s responsibility to coordinate the work with other trades and pay for any associated costs with the substitution or change. C. D. 1.07 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. F. The drawings are generally diagrammatic and necessary field coordination and adjustment must be provided by the contractor prior to installation. Such deviations to the work to allow for coordination shall be kept to a minimum and any such deviations shall be at no extra cost. When a conflict or contradiction exists either between drawings and specs or between specs or between different drawings or details, the more stringent shall apply. Drawings and specifications are intended to be taken as a whole and each is to supplement the other. It is not intended that all work must be both shown on drawings and specified in the specifications. An item shown on the drawings and not indicated in the specifications is to be understood to be required for the project. An item specified and not shown on the drawings is to be understood to be required for the project. The architects or engineers interpretation of the documents shall be binding upon the contractor. If a question arises, the contractor shall ask for an interpretation prior to bidding and an answer shall be issued as an addendum to all bidders. If a question arises after bidding the A/E interpretation shall govern. 1.08 MEASUREMENTS A. Before ordering materials or commencing with any work, the contractor shall verify all measurements at the building. Coordination of equipment, materials, spaces, and dimensions are the responsibility of the contractor. 1.09 PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. Provide a project schedule which shall show start, sequence of each type of work, milestone schedule, and completion of each type of work, with overall completion date. 1.10 COST SCHEDULE B. C. D. E. STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 3 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building A. B. Provide a detailed cost breakdown indicating labor and material amounts for various types of work. AIA forms are required for this submission. 1.11 COMPLETION A. The contractor shall deliver to the owner, with his request for final payment, copies of all manufacturer's guarantees, equipment instructional manuals, a complete set of all final shop drawings, catalog cuts, service contracts, and other items as may be required elsewhere in the documents. 1.12 OFFICE A. The contractor shall set up his job office (desk) where directed by the owner. 1.13 STORAGE A. Material shall be stored only where directed by the owner. 1.14 SANITARY A. The contractor will at his own expense, provide and maintain in a sanitary condition, a portable chemical toilet. Toilet will be located where directed by the owner. B. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. B. C. All material shall be new and of present day manufacture. All material and equipment shall be in conformance with accepted trade standards. Whenever equipment or material is referred to in the singular, such as "the fan", it shall be deemed to apply to as many such items as may be necessary to complete the installation. The word “provide” means “furnish and install complete, tested, and adjusted as necessary with all accessories, covers, escutcheons”. The word “piping” means pipe, fitting, controls, valves and hangers as required for a complete system. D. 2.02 MOTORS A. B. C. D. E. Incorporate latest IEEE and NEMA standards. All copper windings with ball bearings. Indoors; drip proof, 40 degree C rise. Outdoors; totally enclosed 55 degree C rise. Motors over 10 HP to be high efficiency with PF in excess of 0.9. 2.03 MOTOR STARTERS AND CONTACTORS A. B. C. Fractional with horsepower up to ½ HP; electrical contract. Polyphase and single phase above ½ HP: this contract. Electrical contractor shall install all starters except for those provided as an integral part of STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 4 McHugh Engineering Associates D. E. F. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building equipment. Polyphase starters shall be magnetic combination type, across-the-line electrically operated, electrically held, three pole assemblies, with arc extinguishing characteristics, silver to silver renewable contacts, 3 pole thermal bi-metallic, red run pilot light, individual phase protection, with overload heaters matched to motors installed and with 4 auxiliary contact, Hand-off-Auto switch, and control transformer. For single phase motors above ½ HP provide magnetic combination single phase motor starters with overloads, non-fusible disconnect switch, red run pilot light, integral 120 volt control transformer with dual primary fusing auxiliary contacts. Starters shall be as manufactured by G. E., Siemens, Square "D", Cerus or Cutler-Hammer, or approved equal. 2.04 EQUIPMENT START UP A. B. C. Verify that equipment is operating within warranty requirements. Advise owner and A/E at least two days prior. Verify proper operation. Obtain signed statement by manufacturer or his representative that equipment is operating within warranty requirements. Submit statement to A/E. 2.05 LUBRICATION A. B. C. Lubricate all equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Lubricate prior to start up. Provide one year’s supply of lubricants to the owner. 2.06 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MANUALS A. E. Properly and fully instruct owner’s personnel in the operation and maintenance of all systems and equipment. Insure that the owner's personnel are familiar with all operations to carry on required activities. Such instruction shall be for each item of equipment and each System as a whole. Manual shall include all instructions on operation, maintenance, repair parts list, lubrication requirements, brochures, catalogue cuts, wiring diagrams, control sequences, service requirements, piping diagrams, names and addresses of vendors, suppliers and emergency contacts. Three manuals shall be provided. Provide to the owner any special tools necessary to operate any of the equipment. 2.07 DRAIN PANS A. Provide auxiliary galvanized steel condensate drain pan with 1" MPT drain connection ductwork and/or piping routed above electrical and/or it equipment. Drain to suitable discharge point acceptable to owner and A/E. Drain lines shall be separate and independent of A/C unit drain system unless provided with interlocked water sensing switch. Drains shall slope down in direction of flow at 1" per 10 feet. B. C. D. B. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 5 McHugh Engineering Associates A. B. C. D. E. F. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Cover duct openings during construction. Plug or cap open ends of piping systems and conduit. Stored materials shall be covered to prevent damage by inclement weather, sun, dust, or moisture. Protect all installed work until accepted in place by the owner. Cover plumbing fixtures and lighting fixtures. Do not install plates, polished metal escutcheons, thermostats, and other finished devices until masonry, tile, and painting operations are complete or protect otherwise. Protect all existing or new work from operations which may cause damage such as hauling, welding, soldering, painting, insulating, and covering. 3.02 WORKMANSHIP A. B. C. Install all work neat, trim, and plumb with building lines. Install work in spaces allocated. Cutting and patching shall be performed by skilled tradesmen normally employed for the work involved. 3.03 EXCAVATION, SHORING, PUMPING, BACKFILLING A. I. Perform all excavation required to install the work. Deposit excavated material so as not to create a slide hazard. No work shall be placed on rock. Cushion with 6 " layer of crushed stone. Protect tree roots with burlap covering and maintain moist until backfilled. Base estimates on excavation which will include earth, sand, clay, rubbish, debris, and all other materials up to one cubic yard in size. Boulders or rock larger than one cubic yard which need to be broken up with pneumatic equipment or explosives will be separately negotiated at the time of discovery with the owner and A/E. Do not proceed with rock excavation until an agreement is reached. Maintain excavations free of water. Shore excavations to prevent cave-in in accordance with OSHA regulations and to prevent strains on work put in place until ready to receive backfill. Backfill with clean material and pneumatically tamp in 8" layers. Remove excess material, including rock, from site or as directed by the A/E. Backfill piping trenches within 18" of footings, columns, piers, or grade beams, with concrete. Protect piping from direct contact and adherence to concrete. Return to original condition any areas disturbed for excavation. 3.04 FASTENERS, HANGERS, AND SUPPORTS A. B. Furnish and install all hangers and supports required to suspend, mount, or hang the work. Furnish and install all miscellaneous steel angles, channels, beams, clips, brackets, and anchors to hang or support the work. Provide submissions for review. Install concrete inserts before concrete is poured. Drilled inserts shall not be loaded to more than 1/4 rated capacity with a minimum of 200 lbs. Powder driven fasteners shall not be allowed for piping larger than 2", or for equipment. When used they shall not be loaded more than 1/8 rated capacity with a minimum of 200 lbs. All hangers, miscellaneous steel, braces, and supports shall be galvanized, cadmium plated, or painted with corrosion resistant primer and finish coat of epoxy enamel. Piping shall be supported from adjustable clevis type hangers with insulation pipe saddles as indicated in the piping system specification sections. Piping shall not support other piping. Support vertical piping and ductwork at floor levels. Piping shall have split rings. Ductwork shall have 1 1/2" angle iron frames. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. C. D. E. F. G. H. STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 6 McHugh Engineering Associates I. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building J. Provide and install lintels where required for mechanical work and not indicated on architectural or structural drawings. Furnish steel framing for roof openings and floor openings. Submit details for review. 3.05 SLEEVES A. All piping passing through floors or walls shall have sleeves unless holes are cored. Sleeves shall be 16 gage galvanized steel in non-bearing walls, 10 gage galvanized steel for bearing walls, and schedule 40 galvanized pipe in floors. Sleeves shall accommodate insulation. This shall not apply to sprinkler piping. Sleeves passing through foundation walls not exposed to interior spaces or sleeves passing through slab on grade may be schedule 40 PVC. Wall sleeves shall finish flush with wall. Floor sleeves shall extend 1 inch above floor. Sleeves in walls between interior spaces and unexcavated, exterior, crawl, or backfilled spaces shall be made watertight with "Link-Seal" modular wall and casing seal. Casing shall be schedule 40 galvanized pipe with anchor flange. B. C. D. E. 3.06 PLATES A. B. C. Furnish and install chrome plated plates wherever piping passes into finished areas. Plates shall be securely fastened to piping or building construction. Floor plates shall cover one inch floor extension. 3.07 OFFSETS, TRANSITIONS, MODIFICATIONS A. Furnish and install all offsets necessary to install the work and to provide clearance for the other trades. Maintain adequate headroom and clearance as directed by the A/E. Ductwork transitions necessary to accommodate available space or clearance requirements shall be contract requirements. Incidental modifications necessary to the installation of the systems shall be made as necessary and at the direction of the A/E. Rises and drops of piping systems shall be provided as required and where directed to allow for clearances to other construction. Drains shall be installed at no additional cost to the owner. The contractor shall allow for such occurrences in his bid. Ductwork, piping, conduit, and equipment shall be so arranged as to not pass in front of windows, doors, access panels, access doors, coil removal or filter removal space or service clearance areas. Do not install within 3'-0" clearance of electrical panel fronts. B. C. D. E. F. 3.08 RECESSES A. B. Furnish information to the general contractor as to sizes and locations of recesses required to install panels, boxes, grilles, and other equipment or devices which are to be recessed into walls. Make offsets or modifications as required to suit final locations. 3.09 EQUIPMENT SETTING A. Furnish and install as a minimum, a 4" thick concrete pad beneath all floor mounted equipment in mechanical rooms, boiler rooms, or equipment rooms, or outside on grade. Furnish and install as a minimum, spring vibration isolators under any equipment 5 HP and over and rubber-in-shear vibration isolation under all equipment less than 5 HP. B. STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 7 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building C. D. Reinforce concrete with No. 4 rods 12" on centers both ways. Pad to have 3/4" dowels into concrete at 1 per 4 square feet. 3.10 LABELING A. C. All equipment, panels, controls, safety switches, and devices shall be provided with permanent black laminated white core labels with 3/8" letters. This shall also apply to all controllers, remote start/stop push buttons, equipment cabinets, and where directed by the A/E. This shall not apply to local room thermostats and light switches. 3.11 FLASHING AND COUNTERFLASHING A. Piping and conduit through the roof shall be flashed by the General Contractor. This contractor shall furnish counterflashing. Ductwork through the roof and roof mounted duct connected equipment shall be provided with prefabricated roof curbs. General contractor shall flash. This contractor shall counterflash. Structural dunnage for roof mounted equipment shall be flashed and counterflashed. Prefabricated roof curbs may be utilized. B. B. C. 3.12 ACCESS A. B. D. Locate all equipment, valves, devices and controllers which may need service in accessible places. Where access is not available, access panels shall be provided. Furnish prime painted steel access doors to the General Contractor for installation. Access doors shall be 16 gauge frames and 22 gauge steel door. Access doors in fire rated walls shall have a "B" label for 1 ½ hours. Maintain clearances for tube removal, coil pulls, and filter removal. 3.13 WIRING A. C. D. E. F. Power wiring shall be provided by the Division 26 Electrical Contractor. This contractor shall furnish all 3 phase starters, pushbuttons, and controllers necessary to operate the equipment. The Electrical Contractor shall store and install the electrical devices and furnish and install the power wiring. Control wiring shall be furnished and installed under Division 23 portion of the work. Wiring for controls is control wiring whether it is line voltage or low voltage. All wiring shall be in accordance with the NEC. Pushbuttons shall be maintain-contact type. Refer to the electrical specifications for wiring methods. Plenum rated cable is required for control wiring. 3.14 UTILITIES A. B. Do not interrupt any utility or service without adequate previous notice and scheduling with the owner. Refer to Division 1 for requirements for providing temporary utilities. 3.15 CUTTING AND PATCHING EXTERIOR SERVICES A. This contractor shall be responsible for returning disturbed areas to original condition where excavation for utilities has been required. Cut and patch paved areas to match original surfaces. C. B. B. STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 8 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building C. D. E. Properly tamp backfill before finishing surfaces. Concrete pavements and curbs shall be formed and poured to match adjacent areas. Grass areas shall be sodded and maintained until established growth is achieved. 3.16 GUARANTEE A. All work shall be guaranteed to be free from defects for a period of one year of operation from date of acceptance by the owner unless otherwise specified. Material and labor for first year warranty is to be provided. Guarantee shall be extended for all non-operational periods due to failure within the guarantee period. Compressors and refrigeration system components shall be provided with a 5 year factory warranty. Material only for years 2 through 5 is required. B. C. 3.17 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. B. C. Deliver material and equipment in manufacturer’s original cartons or on skids. Store material in dry enclosures or under protective coverings out of way of work progress. Handle so as to prevent damage to product or any surrounding material. 3.18 MANUFACTURERS’ NAMES A. Manufacturers’ names are included herein to establish those suppliers who may provide products for this project subject to the requirements of the specifications. Although a manufacturer’s name may appear as an acceptable supplier it is not understood that a standard product is acceptable. Products must also meet the technical, performance, and physical requirements of the project as well as being named in the specification. Any deviations from this must be acknowledged at bid time by the supplier and he shall be solely responsible for any and all costs associated with the application of his product in the project. A design cannot be prepared which accommodates the installation of all suppliers and is not intended to do so. If certain modifications must be made to accommodate one particular suppliers equipment it shall be considered the contractors responsibility to arrange for such accommodations and be financially responsible for same. B. 3.19 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS A. At the completion of the work the contractor shall furnish reproducible as-built drawings to the A/E for approval. The drawings shall indicate all work installed and its actual size and location. If acceptable, the A/E will submit the as-built drawings to the owner as record drawings. If not acceptable, the A/E will return the drawing to the contractor to make corrections as required. The contractor will resubmit for approval. The as-built drawings shall indicate measured dimensions of underground lines and other concealed work. B. 3.20 PENETRATION SEALING A. All penetrations of fire walls, smoke walls, and floors by ducts, pipes, conduit, or wiring shall be sealed to prevent the flow of gasses or smoke. The sealant shall be foamed in place between the penetrant and the adjacent floor or wall with DOW Corning RTV foam or equivalent by 3M, Hilti, or Chase foam. The installation shall meet the approval of the authority having jurisdiction. Penetrations through rated surfaces shall have a UL rating equivalent to the adjacent surfaces. B. C. D. STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 9 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building E. All other penetrations of walls either above ceilings or exposed shall be closely sealed around the penetration with caulking or packing to prevent flow of air or sound through the wall. 3.21 CUTTING AND PATCHING INTERIOR SURFACES A. Respective contractor shall install all hangers, supports, pipe sleeves in floors, walls, partitions, ceilings and roof slabs as construction progresses to permit their work to be built into place and to eliminate unnecessary cutting of construction work. All cutting of concrete, or other material for the passage of piping and ductwork through floors, walls, partitions and ceiling shall be done by the respective contractor where necessary to install his work. Respective contractor will close all such openings around piping, ductwork, and conduit with materials equivalent to that removed. All exposed surfaces shall be left in suitable condition for refinishing without further work. Contractor shall patch and repair any existing openings created by the demolition work in floors, walls, partitions, and ceilings not being reused for the new construction. B. C. 3.22 INVERTS AND ELEVATIONS A. B. Indicated inverts and elevations of existing utilities are approximate and based on the best information available. Upon of award of contract, contractor shall verify in the field all such information and report any discrepancies before proceeding with work. Contractor shall be responsible for extra work caused by his failure to verify inverts and elevations. 3.23 CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHERS A. Furnish and install final connections to equipment furnished in other parts of the specification or furnished by the owner. Provide drainage connections, vent connections, water connections, fuel gas connections, duct connections, gas connections to the fixtures or equipment. Plumbing connections shall include valved supplies and trapped waste connections. 3.24 MECHANICAL ROOM DRAWING A. B. C. Mechanical contractor shall provide a 3/8" = 1'0" scale drawing of the Mechanical Room showing all mechanical, ductwork, floor drains, plumbing, fire protection equipment and electrical equipment to exact scale with dimensions on pads, equipment, etc. Show two cross sections at important points. Obtain information from other subs. Submit for review and approval. 3.25 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Provide 3/8" = 1'-0" scale drawings showing all coordinated ductwork, piping, conduit, and equipment of all trades. The sheet metal shop drawings may be used as the basis of these drawings. Show ductwork, walls, beams, steel, drainage piping, domestic water piping, HVAC piping, sprinkler piping, light fixtures, electrical conduit and equipment. Contact other disciplines and obtain information to identify fully coordinated systems. Submit for review and approval to the A/E. Provide all dimensional data and necessary clearances to other trades for installation of fixtures and equipment within casework and counter tops. Work shall not proceed until coordination is completed and all conflicts, issues, sequences etc., are resolved. B. C. D. E. F. G. STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 10 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building 3.26 WELDING A. All electric power for arc welding shall be supplied by the contractor performing the work. 3.27 VEHICLES A. Vehicle access to the site will be as directed by the owner. 3.28 RUBBISH DISPOSAL A. Burning of debris on the site shall not be permitted. All debris, refuse, and waste shall be removed from the premises at regular intervals. No accumulation shall be permitted. 3.29 PROTECTION A. B. Maintain all public walks and access ways. Erect and maintain barricades, warning signs, and other protective means as may be directed by the owner for protection of all persons and property from injury or damage. 3.30 SCAFFOLDING A. The contractor shall at his own expense, install, operate, protect, and maintain temporary services such as scaffolding, material hoists, access walks, etc., as may be required. 3.31 CLEANUP A. B. C. D. Remove all visible temporary tags or labels as well as any protective coverings and wrappings from fixtures and equipment. Remove all spots, stains, soil, paint, spackle, and other foreign matter from all finished work. Clean and polish all plumbing fixtures. Remove all trash and debris from the premises. 3.32 MOUNTING HEIGHTS A. B. Contractor to coordinate all mounting heights with all trades and architect prior to rough-in. Maximum thermostat mounting height (top of thermostat) in accordance with ADA 1. Side reach: 48" A.F.F. 2. Forward reach: 48" A.F.F. 3.33 WORK COMPLETION A. The contractor shall promptly correct work rejected by the engineer failing to conform to the requirements of the contract documents, whether discovered before or after substantial completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected work, including additional testing and inspections and compensation for the engineer’s services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at the contractor’s expense. 3.34 SHOP DRAWING REQUIREMENTS A. The following is a list of required shop drawings for the project. Not all items may be identified and STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 11 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building it is the responsibility of the contractor to submit additional shop drawings where indicated in the specifications. HVAC DATE REC’D ACTION DATE REC’D ACTION COORDINATION DRAWINGS PUMPS PUMP BASES PIPING FLEX CONNECTION SUCTION DIFFUSER TRIPLE DUTY VALVE AIR SEPARATOR EXPANSION TANK GAUGES THERMOMETERS AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES VALVES - ALL TYPES STRAINERS CHECK VALVES PIPING VIBRATION ISOLATION INSULATION A. Piping B. Ductwork C. Equipment SHEET METAL DRAWINGS BOILER ROOM DRAWINGS UNIT HEATERS (ELECTRIC) EXHAUST FANS DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEMS AIR HANDLING UNITS VAV TERMINALS FIRE DAMPERS STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 12 McHugh Engineering Associates HVAC Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building DATE REC’D ACTION DATE REC’D ACTION VOLUME DAMPERS SMOKE DAMPERS GRILLES, REGISTERS, DIFFUSERS LOUVERS/ROOF CAPS EQUIPMENT CURBS AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL A. DEVICES B. WIRING DIAGRAMS C. SEQUENCES TEST, BALANCE AND ADJUST REPORT AS-BUILT DRAWINGS WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS INSTRUCTIONS EMERGENCY AND MANUFACTURER CONTACTS CONDENSATE PUMPS END OF SECTION STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 13 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 23 05 48 - VIBRATION ISOLATION PART 1 - GENERAL NOTE: CONTRACTOR IS TO FURNISH AND INSTALL A VIBRATION ISOLATING DEVICE ON ALL MACHINE, MOTOR, AND CIRCULATING PIECES OF EQUIPMENT. IF A VIBRATION ISOLATING DEVICE IS OMITTED FROM THE DRAWINGS, THE CONTRACTOR IS TO MAKE AN ALLOWANCE TO INSTALL ONE. 1.01 REFERENCE A. Refer to section 23 05 00 for requirements which are applicable to this section. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor, material, equipment, and supervision necessary to select, provide, and install vibration isolation devices as described herein and required for equipment on the project. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings of all isolators, rails, hangers, mountings, connectors, hoses, and anchors specified herein. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. Verify that all equipment is installed in accordance with the manufacturer's warranty requirements. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 NEOPRENE PADS A. B. Roof mounted condensing units and floor mounted air handling units or furnaces shall be mounted on neoprene waffle pads. Pads shall be 5/16" thick type "W" as manufactured by Mason Industries Vibration Eliminator Company, Amber Booth, or approved equal. Application: Roof mounted condensing units. 2.02 PRE-COMPRESSED SPRING AND NEOPRENE HANGERS A. Vibration hangers shall be spring and neoprene as described above, but they shall be pre-compressed to the rated deflection so as to keep the piping or equipment at a fixed elevation during installation. The hangers shall be designed with a release mechanism to free the spring after the installation is complete and the hanger is subjected to its full load. Deflection shall be clearly indicated by means of a scale. VIBRATION ISOLATION 23 05 48 - 1 McHugh Engineering Associates B. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building C. Hangers shall be type PC3ON as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. or equivalent by Vibration Eliminator Company, Amber Booth, or approved equal. Application: Fitness room air handling unit (AHU-3). 2.03 DUCT HANGERS A. C. Vibration hangers shall contain a steel spring located in a neoprene bup manufactured with a grommet to prevent a short circuiting of the hanger rod. The cup shall contain a steel washer designed to properly distribute the load on the neoprene and prevent its extrusion. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30 degree arc before contacting the hole and short circuiting the spring. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Hangers shall be provided with an eye bolt on the spring end and provision to attach the housing to the flat iron duct straps. Submittals shall include a scale drawing of the hanger showing the 30 degree capability. Hangers shall be type W30 as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. or equivalent by Vibration Eliminator Company, Amber Booth, or approved equal. Application: Ductwork in mechanical rooms below occupied spaces. 2.04 ROOF CURB BASES A. C. Curb mounted rooftop equipment shall be mounted on vibration isolation bases that fit over the roof curb and under the isolated equipment. The extruded aluminum top members shall overlap the bottom member to provide water runoff independent of the seal. The aluminum member shall house cadmium plated springs having a 1 inch minimum deflection with 50% addition travel to solid. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 of the spring height at rated load. Wind resistance shall be provided by means of resilient snubbers in the corners with a minimum clearance of 1/4" so as not to interfere with the spring action except in high winds. The weather seal shall consist of continuous closed cell sponge materials both above and below the base and a waterproof flexible duct like connection joining the outside perimeter of the aluminum members. Foam or other contact like seals are unacceptable at the spring cavity closure. Caulking shall be kept to a minimum. Curb mounted bases shall be type CMAB as manufactured by Mason Industries or equivalent by Vibration Eliminator Company, Amber Booth, Thi-Curb, Custom Curb, R.P.S, or approved equal. Application: Roof mounted air handling units. 2.05 PIPE HANGERS A. B. Combination neoprene and spring with 1" static deflection. Application: Pipe hangers in boiler or mechanical room under occupied space. B. B. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 NEOPRENE PADS A. Cut pads of size to fit base area of equipment. Install between roof curb or floor and equipment base. 3.02 PRECOMPRESSED SPRING AND NEOPRENE HANGERS A. Hangers shall have a maximum rated deflection of 1.18" for equipment 20 lbs. and under and 1.75" VIBRATION ISOLATION 23 05 48 - 2 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building B. for equipment over 20 lbs. Average neoprene deflection shall be between 0.35" and 0.4". 3.03 DUCT HANGERS A. Hangers shall have a maximum rated deflection of 1.18" for equipment 95 lbs. and under and 1.35" for equipment over 95 lbs. 3.04 ROOF CURB BASES A. Select the appropriate base to match the equipment being provided. Base shall meet the exact dimensional and weight requirements at all points of the curb. Install as recommended by the vibration isolator manufacturer. Adjust, place in service, and provide instructions. B. END OF SECTION VIBRATION ISOLATION 23 05 48 - 3 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 23 05 93 - TESTING, BALANCING AND ADJUSTING FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 CONDITIONS A. HVAC equipment shall be completely installed and in continuous operation prior to testing, balancing, and adjustment. Test, balance, and adjust shall be performed when outside conditions approximate design conditions. Make at least two inspections of the mechanical systems during construction to verify that balancing procedures may be accomplished. Refer to Section 23 05 00 for additional requirements of this section. Should corrective measures caused by faulty installation require retesting, adjusting, and balancing, such work shall be at no additional expense to the Owner. A complete set of approved mechanical-equipment shop drawings shall be obtained from the Mechanical Contractor. A complete set of as-built mechanical drawings shall be provided by the Mechanical Contractor. All TBA work, is to be performed in compliance with the Standard Procedure Manual published by the TBA organization affiliated with the Contractor. Contractor to identify TB&A subcontractor within 30 days after award of Contractor. Testing, Balancing and Adjusting contractor to coordinate and perform balancing of the HVAC systems with the mechanical contractor prior to ceilings being closed up and scaffolding being removed. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. 1.02 ENGINEER QUALIFICATIONS A. Include proof of registration in the state of building location and record of at least five years of experience in the mechanical contracting industry engaged in HVAC testing, balancing, and adjusting. The testing, balancing, and adjustment organization shall be a certified member of NEBB or AABC and all testing, balancing, and adjusting shall be in accordance with the associated standards. Such firm shall have at least one certified TB&A supervisor. B. 1.03 INSTRUMENTATION A. B. Contractor shall provide all necessary instrumentation, tools, ladders, etc. to complete his work. Instrumentation shall be in accordance with AABC, NEBB, or SMACNA requirements and shall be calibrated to the accuracy standards demanded by these organizations. Copies of current calibration certificates shall be available to the Engineer on request. Flow-measuring hoods (manufactured, not fabricated) will be acceptable for measurement of ceiling diffuser performance only. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for safekeeping of all instrumentation during the course of work. C. D. 1.04 ADJUSTMENT TOLERANCE A. Contractor shall adjust all equipment in accordance with the capacities shown on the drawings, with permissible tolerances as follows: TESTING, BALANCING AND ADJUSTING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 1 McHugh Engineering Associates Supply fans Return exhaust fans Diffusers/supply grilles Return grilles Exhaust grilles Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building +5% to 10% +5% to 10% 0% to +10% 0% to -10% 0% to -10% 1.05 SHEAVE CHANGE A. Allow for one sheave change for 50% of the HVAC systems to be tested and adjusted. Replacement sheave shall be furnished and installed by the mechanical contractor. Sheave shall be adjusted by the TBA contractor. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 AIR SYSTEMS A. M. Furnish all labor, materials, instruments, and equipment to test, adjust, and balance systems in accord with the values shown on the drawings. Provide total and static pressure readings, traverse at fan inlets and outlets. Provide temperature measurements of inlets and outlets of HVAC units, DB and WB both heating and cooling. Measure and record amps, rpm, at fans and HVAC units. Provide two sets of data, one during design heating temperatures, and one during design cooling temperatures. Provide heating and air conditioning unit performance measurements determining total BTU's available during heating and cooling. Measure quantity of outside air in CFM at minimum damper position. Any holes or openings which were made for test readings are to be sealed. Repair any insulation disturbed by TB&A procedures. Identify Total CFM as sum of diffusers, registers, and grilles for each supply, return, and exhaust system. In all cases, air volumes shall be adjusted by means of manual dampers in the ductwork, not by integral dampers in the terminal outlets or inlets. Duct damper positions shall be marked with permanent ink markers or black spray paint after the final setting has been made. If the unit cannot reach design with furnished sheave, notify mechanical contractor to furnish and install a suitable sheave such that design can be reached. Allow for 2 passes for each heating and cooling season 3.02 WATER SYSTEMS A. Furnish all material, labor, instruments, and equipment to test, adjust, and balance the systems in accordance with the values shown on the drawings. Set and adjust GPM’s of terminal units to the values indicated. Read pump pressures, GPM’s, amps, volts, and identify operating point on the impeller curve. Contractor shall obtain the specified gpm requirement through all circulating pumps, primary and secondary coils, unit heaters, heat exchangers and radiation by adjustment to the specified pressure drop shown on the equipment schedules. Measurement of inlet and outlet pressures shall be made with needle-stem pressure gauge inserted B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. B. C. D. E. TESTING, BALANCING AND ADJUSTING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 2 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building F. G. in the test plugs on each piece of the equipment. Contractor shall adjust all gpm through flow-meter readings in his final report. Allow for 2 passes for each system and each terminal unit. 3.03 CEILING ACCESS A. As pertains purely to T&A work, Contractor shall be fully responsible for removal and reinstallation of ceiling tile and replacement of any tile damaged by T&A technicians. 3.04 SUBMISSION OF REPORTS A. B. C. Submit reports on approved forms. Submit three reports to A/E for review and acceptance. Report shall be certified by an AABC or NEBB member and bear the seal of the organization. 3.05 DUCTWORK LEAKAGE TESTING A. B. Installed ductwork shall be tested prior to installation of access doors, take-offs, etc. All leak testing shall be witnessed by the engineer or representative of the engineer. The contractor shall give the engineer 72 hours’ notice prior to testing. Any testing not witnessed by the engineer or his/her representative shall be considered invalid and will be redone. The testing shall be performed as follows: 1. Perform testing in accordance with HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. 2. Use a certified orifice tube for measuring the leakage. 3. Determine section of system to be tested and blank off. 4. Determine the percentage of the system being tested. 5. Using that percentage, determine the allowable leakage (cfm) for that section being tested. 6. Pressurize to operating pressure and repair any significant or audible leaks. 7. Repressurize the measure leakage. 8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the leakage measured is less than the allowable defined in step 5. C. NOTE: It is recommended that the first 100'-300' of ductwork installed be tested to insure the quality of the workmanship at an early stage. END OF SECTION TESTING, BALANCING AND ADJUSTING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 3 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 23 07 00 - HVAC INSULATION AND COVERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCE A. B. Refer to Section 23 05 00 for requirements which are applicable to this section. Insulation to be in accordance with ASHRAE 90.1-2004. 1.02 SCOPE A. B. The work included in this specification consists of furnishing all labor, materials, accessories, and equipment necessary for the insulation of all heating and air conditioning systems. Said work shall be completed in strict accordance with the insulation section of the specifications and applicable drawings. All work is subject to the terms and conditions of the contract. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. B. C. Submit shop drawings which indicate complete material data, a list of materials proposed, and indicate thickness and density of material for individual services. Submit fabrication instructions for pipe fitting and valve insulation. Submit manufacturers joining recommendations for butt joints and longitudinal seams. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. C. Install insulation in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Insulation shall be installed by skilled workmen regularly engaged in insulation work. Protect insulation and covering until accepted in place by the owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 HOT WATER PIPING A. Includes; 1. Heating Hot Water Supply 2. Heating Hot Water Return Material; Fiberglass bonded with resins to form circular pipe sleeves and pipe covering segments with factory applied all service jacket. Fire Safety; U.L. listing flame spread rating of 25 and smoke developed rating of 50. Thermal conductivity of 0.276 at 90 degrees F. Thickness per ASHRAE STD. 90.1-2010: Piping System Types: PIPE SIZES / INSULATION THICKNESS B. C. D. E. Temp HVAC INSULATION AND COVERING Up to 1" Up to 1.5" Up to 4" Up to 8" 8" & Up 23 07 00 - 1 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building 1. Hot Water a) Heating HW 140-200 1.5" 1.5" 2" 2" 2" b) Domestic HW/HWR 100-130 1" 1" 1.5" 1.5" 1.5" F. I. Joints; Pressure sealing lap strips for longitudinal joints and minimum 3" pressure sealing butt strips for circumferential joints. Valves and Fittings; Fiberglass insulation of same thickness as pipe with pre-molded fitting covers. Contractor shall insulate all exposed domestic water and drainage piping under all handicapped lavatories and sinks with pre-formed insulation kit with PVC jacket similar to Lav,Guard as manufactured by Truebro. There shall be no sharp or abrasive surfaces under the handicapped lavatories. Manufacturer: Johns-Manville Micro-Lok, Knauf Lo Smoke PVC, or approved equal. 2.02 COLD WATER PIPING A. G. Includes; 1. Air condition unit condensate drains: 1/2" insulation 2 Chilled water supply and return: 1½" insulation Material; Fiberglass bonded with resins to form circular pipe sleeves with factory applied jacket of Kraft paper bonded to aluminum foil, reinforced with fiberglass yarn. Vapor barrier. Fire safety; Flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke density rating of 50 or less and a fuel contributed rating of 50 as tested by ASTM E 84-75. Thermal Conductivity; 0.25 at 100 degrees. Joints; Pressure sealing lap strips for longitudinal joints and 3 inch wide wrapping strips for butt joints. Strips shall be sealed with an adhesive meeting NFPA 90 25-50 code such as: 1. CMC17-465 2. H. B. Fuller Co., Foster Products Division 85-20 As an option the contractor may utilize pressure sensitive butt strips. Valves and Fittings; Fiberglass insulation of same thickness as pipe with pre-molded fitting covers. Seal edges of fitting cover with vapor barrier mastic adhesive or vapor barrier strip tape which shall overlap the insulation and fitting cover by 2 inches. Manufacturer: Johns-Manville Micro-Lok HP, Knauf Proto Lo Smoke PVC, or approved equal. 2.03 DUCT INSULATION - INTERIOR - CONCEALED A. Includes: All supply, return, and outside air ductwork. 1. Supply ductwork in unconditioned spaces. 2. Return ductwork in unconditioned spaces. Material; Flexible vapor seal duct insulation with foil scrim kraft facing consisting of aluminum foil reinforced with fiberglass scrim to a U.L. rated kraft, 0.75 lb. density, .02 perms. Fire safety; Flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke density rating of 50 or less as tested by ASTM E 84-75. In conditioned space thickness is 2" inches, equaling an installed “R” value of 4.2. In unconditioned space/outdoors, thickness is 3", equaling an installed “R” value of 8.3. Application; All joints shall be sealed with a 3 inch wide strip of same material applied with H. B. Fuller Co., Foster Products Division 85-75. For ducts over 18" wide insulation shall be secured on bottom at 18" centers to reduce sagging. G. H. B. C. D. E. F. B. C. D. E. HVAC INSULATION AND COVERING 23 07 00 - 2 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building F. Manufacturer: Johns-Manville 800 Series Flexible Spin-Glass or approved equal. 2.04 DUCT INSULATION - INTERIOR - EXPOSED A. B. Same as above accept 6 PCF density with FSK facing, 0.02 perms. Secured with fasteners, 2 rows per side at 12" centers. 2.05 EQUIPMENT INSULATION A. Includes; 1. Water expansion tanks 2. Air Separators 3. Pumps Material; Spun glass inorganic glass fiber insulation bonded by a thermosetting resin with aluminum foil reinforced with fiber glass yarn and laminated to a fire-resistant kraft. 6 lb. density. Provide vapor barrier on all equipment that will have cold surfaces. Fire safety; Flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke density rating of 50 or less as tested by ASTM E 84-75. Thermal conductivity; 0.24 at 100 degrees F. Application; All joints shall be sealed with a 3 inch wide strip of same material applied with H. B. Fuller Co., Foster Products Division 85-75. Manufacturer: Johns-Manville 800 Series Non-Flexible Spin-Glass or approved equal. Thickness: 1 1/2" on equipment in mechanical rooms and in ceiling spaces, 3" on equipment in unconditioned attic spaces. B. C. D. E. F. G. 2.06 REFRIGERANT PIPING A. Includes; 1. Refrigerant lines - interior 2. Refrigerant lines - exterior Material; Elastomeric thermal insulation with exposed closed cell structure, pipe size 1 ½" or less = 1", pipe size larger than 1 ½" = 1 ½" (interior and exterior). Fire safety; Flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke density rating of 50 or less as tested by ASTM E 84-75. Thermal conductivity not to exceed .25 BTU per inch/h-Ft2 -°F. Joints; Butt joints and seams are to be sealed with contact adhesive as per manufacturer’s specifications. Seams are to be sealed with an adhesive meeting NFPA 90 25-50 such as CMC 17-465, H. B. Fuller Co., Foster Products Division 85-20 or approved equal. As an option the contractor may utilize pressure sensitive butt strips. Seal all edges. Manufacturer: Armacell AP Armaflex or approved equal. B. C. D. E. F. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. B. C. Do not install until all piping systems and ductwork are tested. Do not install until the building is closed in. Perform work at ambient and equipment temperatures as recommended by the adhesive manufacturer. HVAC INSULATION AND COVERING 23 07 00 - 3 McHugh Engineering Associates D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Work in the area which may damage the insulation shall have been completed prior to the start of insulating. The owner shall not be responsible for subsequent charges arising out of damage to insulation caused by work progressing in the area after insulation has been installed. All insulation shall be continuous through wall, ceilings and floor openings except where fire safe materials are required. Insulation on all cold surfaces must be applied with a continuous unbroken vapor seal. Hangers, supports, anchors, etc., that are secured directly to cold surfaces shall be adequately insulated and vapor sealed to prevent condensation. Finish insulation neatly at hangers, supports, and other protrusions. Secure with tacks or tape as required. Install inserts on all hangers. Inserts between the pipe and pipe hanger shall consist of rigid pipe insulation of thickness equal to the adjoining insulation and shall be provided with vapor barrier where required. Insert length shall be 10" long for pipes up to and including 2-1/2" and 12" for pipes over 2-1/2". Pipe insulation shall have metal shields. The shields shall be installed between hanger support and the pipe insulation. Shield shall be formed to fit the insulation and shall extend up to the center line of the pipe. Shield shall be 10" long for pipes up to and including 2-1/2" and 12" for pipes over 2-1/2" Repair separation of joints or cracking of insulation due to thermal movement or poor workmanship. All insulation shall be secured at sufficient intervals to prevent sagging, gaps, or spaces from occurring. Any repairs necessary for 1 year due to improper installation shall be provided by Contractor at no cost to Owner. 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Pipe, duct, and equipment shall be clean, oil free, and dry prior to the application of insulation. END OF SECTION HVAC INSULATION AND COVERING 23 07 00 - 4 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 23 09 03 - BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Scope: Furnish all labor, materials, and equipment for a complete and operating Building Management System (BMS) and integration with existing campus control system utilizing Direct Digital Controls as shown as drawings and as described herein. Drawings are diagrammatic only. All controllers furnished in this section shall communicate on a peer-to-peer open protocol bus (s) either LonTalk or BacNet. 1. The intent of the specification is to provide to the owner a BMS system(s) running the Niagara AX ™ open NICS framework and be truly “open” at all levels. “Open” by definition includes “Sourcing” and “Product,” and “Service” and “Expansion.” Any contractor or integrator “certified” on Niagara AX platform must be able to work on any device or network controller or supervisor without having to use other vendors to access parts of the network. This can best be described as an “open source,” “open protocol,” “open controller,” “open supervisor” system with “open maintenance” and “system expansion.” 2. BMS Systems that meet “Open definition”: a. Manufacturers: Honeywell Inc., Trane, Johnson Controls, and Siemens. b. Control Contractor Requirement: 1) Honeywell ACI or ACS – Certified Contractor. 2) Minimum of (2) certified WEBS AX employees. 3) Minimum of (5) WEBS ax installations with system supervisor interface. 4) Located within 100 miles of project site. c. Preapproved Honeywell ACI and ACS contractors for WEBs-AX™ “installation.” 3. Open NIC Statement NiagaraAX includes a licensing model that provides OEMs with the ability to define the various levels and types of Niagara interoperability their product will support. There are two primary interactions the NICs address – the sharing of data between stations (JACEs – WEBs-AX™ and Supervisors) and the ability for a tool (i.e., Work Place AX) to engineer a station. The NICS provides a structure (or schema) that OEMs can use to define the various levels and types of Niagara interdependability their products will support. The NICs definitions are contained in the license file which is checked by a station or tool when it starts up. Every licensed station and tool has a (BrandID). This field holds a text descriptor that the OEM chooses as the identifier its product line and each station can have only one BrandID entry. Station Compatibility “In” The field is a list of brands that this local station will allow Niagara AX™ data to come in from – “this is the list of brands that can accept data from.” Station Compatibility “Out” This Field is a list of brands that this local station will allow Niagara AX™ data to be shared with. Total Compatibility “In” BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 23 09 03 - 1 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building This field is a list of brands that this station will allow to be connected to it for engineering of its applications. Total Compatibility “Out” This field is a list of brands that this tool is allowed to connect to and engineer. For a BMS System(s) running Niagara AX™ from NICs framework and be truly “Open” at all levels … Example: No connectivity restrictions: The station and tool “NICs” would be as follows: Property Station Compatibility In Station Compatibility Out Total Compatibility In Total Compatibility Out 4. Value All All All All System architecture shall fully support a multi-vendor environment and be able to integrate third party systems via existing vendor protocols including as a minimum Lon, BACnet and Modbus 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS A. The BMS shall consist of controllers, sensors, thermostats, control valves, dampers and operators, indicating devices, interface equipment and other apparatus and accessories required to operate mechanical systems, and perform functions specified. The BMS shall be comprised of Network Area Controller(s) (NAC) within the facility. The NAC shall connect to the owner’s local or wide area network, depending on configuration. Access to the systems, either locally in this building or remotely from a control site or sites, shall be accomplished through standard WEB browsers, supported MS Internet Explorer via Internet and/or local area network. Each NAC shall communicate to LonMark™/LonTalk™ (ILC) and/or BACnet™ (IBC) controllers and other open protocol system/devices provided under Division 23, Division 26, etc. The BMS as provided in this Division shall be based on a hierarchical architecture incorporating the Niagara AX Frameware™. All control devices furnished shall be programmable directly from Tridium AX™ Workbench, WEBs Station AX™ or WEB Pro AX™ upon completion of this project. WEBsAX™ “open” license embedded user interface “UI.” B. C. 1.03 SPECIFICATION NOMENCLATURE - Acronyms used in this specification are as follows: Actuator AI AO Analog BMS DDC Discrete DI DO FC Control device that opens or closes valve or damper in response to control signal. Analog Input Analog Output Continuously variable state over stated range of values Building Management System Direct Digital Control Binary or digital state Discrete Input Discrete Output Failed Closed position of control device or actuator. Devices move to closed position on loss of control signal or energy source. BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 23 09 03 - 2 McHugh Engineering Associates FO GUI HVAC IDC ILC LAN Modulating Motorized NAC NC NO OSS Operator PC Peer-to-Peer P PI PICS PID Point WAN TCS FMCS CD NICS IBC I/O Points ACI ACS BCS WBI POT PMI OOT ASD Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Fail open (position of control device or actuator). Device moves to open position on loss of control signal or energy source. Graphical User Interface Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Interoperable Digital Controller Interoperable Lon Controller Local Area Network Movement of a control device through an entire range of values, proportional to an infinitively variable input value. Control device with actuator Network Area Controller Normally closed position of switch after control signal is removed or normally closed position of manually operated valves or dampers. Normally open position of switch after control signal is removed; or the open position of a controlled valve or damper after the control signal is removed; or the usual position of a manually operated valve. Operating System Server, host for system graphics, alarms, trends, etc. Same as actuator Personal Computer Mode of communication between controllers in which each device connected to network has equal status and each shares its database values with all other devices connected to network. Proportional control; control mode with continuous linear relationship between observed input signal and final controlled output element. Proportional-Integral control, control mode with continuous proportional output plus additional change in output based on both amount and duration of change in controller variable (reset control). BACnet Product Inter-operability Compliance Statement. Proportional-Integral-Derivative control, control mode with continuous correction of final controller output element versus input signal based on proportional error, its time history (reset) and rate at which it’s changing (derivative). Analog or discrete instrument with addressable database value. Wide Area Network Temperature Control Systems Facility Management Control System Compact Disc NIAGARA AX™ Compatibility Statement – see Part 1.1.3 Interoperable BACnet Controller AI, AO, DI, DO Honeywell designation acronym: Authorized Control Integrator. Honeywell designation acronym: Automation Control Specialist Honeywell designation acronym: (See ACS) WEB Browser Interface Portable Operator’s Terminal Power Measurement Interface Object Oriented Technology Honeywell Designation: Authorized System Distributor BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 23 09 03 - 3 McHugh Engineering Associates ISO-9001 PEC ASC AUC SNC SNMP OEM OBDB SQL Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Model for Quality Assurance in Design/Development, Production, Installation and Servicing. Programmable Equipment Controllers Application Specific Controllers Advance Unitary Controllers System Network Controller Simple Network Management Protocol Original Equipment Manufacturer Open Database Connectivity Structured Query Language 1.04 DIVISION OF WORK A. B. The BMS contractor shall be responsible for all controllers (IDC and IBC), control devices, control panels, controller programming, controller programming software, controller input/output and power wiring and controller network wiring. The BMS contractor shall be responsible for the Network Area Controller(s) (NAC), software and programming of the NAC, graphical user interface software (GUI), development of all graphical screens, Web Browser pages, setup of schedules, logs and alarms, LonWorks network management and connection of the NAC to the local or Wide Area Network. 1.05 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Reference General Conditions Section 230500 for all portions of work that applies to BMS or BMS contractor. Division 26, Electrical: B. 1. 2. 3. 4. Providing starters and disconnect switches (unless otherwise noted). Power wiring and conduit (unless otherwise noted). Provision, installation and wiring of smoke detectors (unless otherwise noted). Other equipment and wiring as specified in Divisions 14 and 16. C. Division 23, Equipment Interface: In the event the Division 23 equipment supplier has interface responsibility specified with the BMS, thru communications with Lon™, BACnet™ or ModBus, the BMS contractor shall be responsible for the up-loading of I/O points and operational written perimeters, as detailed in Division 23; HVAC equipment and the here after sequence-of-operations to the NAC. It will be the responsibility of the Division 23 manufacturers/equipment supplier to coordinate the time and date with their factory trained control technician to facilitate/accomplish 100%, the I/O points and control perimeters with the BMS contractor to fully meet the specification requirements. Upon completion and testing by both the BMS and the factory technician, all programming software will be given to the BMS for demonstration to the owner and will become property of the owner for use in the future. 1.06 AGENCY AND CODE APPROVALS A. All products of the BMS shall be provided with the following agency approvals. Verification that the approvals exist for all submitted products shall be provided on request, with the submittal package. Systems or products not currently offering the following approvals are not acceptable. 1. Federal Communications Commission (FCC), Rules and Regulations, Volume II – July 1986 Part 15 Class A Radio Frequency Devices BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 23 09 03 - 4 McHugh Engineering Associates 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building FCC, Part 15, Subpart J, Class A Computing Devices. UL 504 – Industrial Control Equipment UL 506 – Specialty Transformers UL 910 – Test Method for Fire and Smoke Characteristics of Electrical and OpticalFiber Cables Used in Air-Handling Spaces UL 916 – Energy Management Systems All UL 1449 – Transient Voltage Suppression Standard Test for Flame Propagation Height of Electrical and Optical – Fiber Cables Installed Vertically in Shafts. EIA/ANSI 232-E – Interface Between Data Technical Equipment and Data Circuit Terminal Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data Interchange. EIA 455 – Standard Test Procedures for Fiber Optic Fibers, Cables, Transducers, Connecting and Terminating Devices. IEEE C62.41 – Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits. IEEE 142- Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems NEMA 250 – Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (SIC) NEMA ICS 1 – Industrial Control Systems NEMA ST 1 – Specialty Transformers NCSBC Compliance, Energy Performance of Control System shall meet or surpass the requirements of ASHRAE/IESNA 90l.1 – 1999 1.07 SOFTWARE OWNERSHIP A. The owner shall have full ownership and full access rights for all network management, operating system server, engineering and programming software required for the ongoing maintenance and operation of the BMS. 1.08 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS A. BMS Contractor shall conform to the general and supplemental condition provisions under Division 230000 and this specification. 1.09 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING AND SHIPPING TO OEM FACTORY. A. Provide factory shipping cartons for each piece of equipment and control device. Maintain cartons through shipping, storage, and handling as required to prevent equipment damage. Store equipment and materials inside and protected from the weather. Factory mounted Components: Where control devices are specified in this section or other specifications such as (equipment) to be factory mounted, the BMS shall arrange for shipping of control devices to equipment manufacturer. He will have responsibility of “tagging” control hardware prior to shipping if requested by equipment supplier. The BMS contractor will have the option of either down-loading program(s) prior to shipping or installing programs after mechanical equipment has been installed at site, unless specific instructions are specified under 1.5C Equipment Interface. B. 1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single source Responsibility of BMS and/or FMCS. 1. The BMS Contractor shall be responsible for the complete installation and proper operations of the control system specified. The control system contractor shall exclusively be in regular and customary business of design, installation and service of computerized building management systems similar in size and complexity to the system specified. Subcontracting BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 23 09 03 - 5 McHugh Engineering Associates 2. 3. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building the “Single Service Responsibility” tasks to others covering any of the following: design and submission, graphics, software programming, field check, demonstrating operating compliance and warranty including using Automation System Distributor is not accepted. The Control System Contractor shall have a full service DDC office within 100 miles of the project site. This office shall be staffed with applications engineers, software engineers, and field technicians. This office shall maintain parts inventory and shall have all testing and diagnostic equipment to support their work, as well as staff trained in the use of this equipment. The manufacturers of the BMS digital controllers shall, if necessary, provide documentation supporting compliance with ISO-9001. PART 2 – PRODUCTS BAS SERVER & WEB BROWSER GUI 2.01 SYSTEM OVERVIEW A. The BMS Contractor shall provide system software based on server/thin-client architecture, designed around the open standards of web technology. The BMS server shall communicate using Ethernet and TCP/IP. Server shall be accessed using a web browser over Owner intranet and remotely over the Internet. The intent of the thin-client architecture is to provide the operator(s) complete access to the BMS system via a web browser. The thin-client web browser Graphical User Interface (GUI) shall be browser and operating system agnostic, meaning it will support Microsoft and Firefox browsers, and Windows as well as non-Window operating systems. No special software shall be required to be installed on PC’s used to access the BMS via a web browser. The BMS server software must support at least the following server platforms (Windows, and/or Linux). The BMS server software shall be developed and tested by the manufacturer of the system stand-alone controllers and network controllers/routers. The web browser GUI shall provide a completely interactive user interface and must offer and be configured with the following features as a minimum: 1. Trending. 2. Scheduling. 3. Electrical demand limiting. 4. Duty Cycling. 5. Download Memory to field devices. 6. Real time ‘live’ Graphic Programs. 7. Tree Navigation. 8. Parameter change of properties. 9. Setpoint Adjustments. 10. Alarm/Event Information. 11. Configuration of operators. 12. Execution of global commands. Software Components: All software shall be the most current version. All software components of the BMS system software shall be provided and installed as part of this project .BMS software components shall include: BMS Server Database: The BMS server software shall utilize a JAVA Database Connectivity (JDBC) compatible database such as: MS SQL 8.0, Oracle 8i or IBM DB2, BMS systems written to Non-Standard and/or Proprietary databases are NOT acceptable. B. C. D. E. F. BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 23 09 03 - 6 McHugh Engineering Associates G. H. I. J. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Database Open Connectivity: The BMS server database shall allow real time access of data via the following standard mechanisms: 1. Open protocol standard like SOAP 2. OLE/OPC (for Microsoft Client’s/Server platform only) 3. Import/Export of the database from or to XML (Extensible Mark-up Language) The installed system shall provide secure password access to all features, functions and data contained in the overall BMS. Communication Protocol(s): The native protocol of the BAS server software shall be TCP/IP over Ethernet. Proprietary protocols over TCP/IP are NOT acceptable. Thin Client – Web Browser Based : The GUI shall be thin client or browser based and shall meet the following criteria: 1. Web Browser’s for PC’s: Only the latest version of Microsoft/Firefox will be required as the GUI, and a valid connection to the server network. No installation of any custom software shall be required on the operator’s GUI workstation/client. Connection shall be over an intranet or the Internet. 2. Secure Socket Layers: Communication between the Web Browser GUI and BAS server shall offer encryption using 128-bit-encryption technology within Secure Socket Layers (SSL). Communication Protocol shall be Hyper-Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP) 2.02 WEB BROWSER GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE A. Web Browser Navigation: The Thin Client web browser GUI shall provide a comprehensive user interface. Using a collection of web pages, it shall be constructed to “feel” like a single application, and provide a complete and intuitive mouse/menu driven operator interface. It shall be possible to navigate through the system using a web browser to accomplish requirements of this specification. The Web Browser GUI shall (as a minimum) provide for navigation, and for display of animated graphics, schedules, alarms/events, live graphic programs, active graphic setpoint controls, configuration menus for operator access, reports, and reporting actions for events. Login: On launching the web browser and selecting the appropriate domain name or IP address, the operator shall be presented with a login page that will require a login name and password. Navigation in the system shall be dependent on the operator’s role privileges, and geographic area of responsibility. Navigation: Navigation through the GUI shall be accomplished by clicking on appropriate level of a navigation tree (consisting of expandable and collapsible tree control like Microsoft’s Explorer program), and/or by selecting dynamic links to other system graphics. Both the navigation tree and action pane shall be displayed simultaneously, enabling the operator to select a specific system or equipment, and view the corresponding graphic. The navigation tree shall as a minimum provide the following views: Geographic, Network, Groups and Configuration. 1. Geographic View shall display a logical geographic hierarchy of the system including: cities, sites, buildings, building systems, floors, equipment and objects. 2. Groups View shall display Scheduled Groups and custom reports. 3. Configuration View shall display all the configuration categories (Operators, Schedule, Event, Reporting and Roles). Action Pane: The Action Pane shall provide several functional views for each HVAC or mechanical/electrical subsystem specified. A functional view shall be accessed by clicking on the corresponding button. 1. Graphics: Using graphical format suitable for display in a web browser, graphics shall include aerial building/campus views, color building floor-plans, equipment drawings, active graphic setpoint controls, web content, and other valid HTML elements. The data on each graphic page shall automatically refresh. B. C. D. BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 23 09 03 - 7 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building 2. E. F. Properties: Shall include graphic controls and text for the following: Locking or overriding objects, demand strategies, and any other valid data required for setup. Changes made to the properties pages shall require the operator to depress an ‘accept/cancel’ button. 3. Schedules: Shall be used to create, modify/edit and view schedules based on the systems geographical hierarchy (using the navigation tree). 4. Alarms: Shall be used to view alarm information geographically (using the navigation tree), acknowledge alarms, sort alarms by category, actions and verify reporting actions. 5. Trends: Shall be used to display associated trend and historical data, modify colors, date range, axis and scaling. 6. Logic – Live Graphic Programs: Shall be used to display ‘live’ graphic programs of the control algorithm, (micro block programming) for the mechanical/electrical system selected in the navigation tree. 7. Other actions such as Print, Help, Command, and Logout shall be available via a dropdown window. Color Graphics: The Web Browser GUI shall make extensive use of color in the graphic pane to communicate information related to setpoints and comfort. Animated .gifs or jpgs, vector scalable, active setpoint graphic controls shall be used to enhance usability. Graphic tools used to create Web Browser graphics shall be non-proprietary and conform to the following basic criteria: 1. Display Size: The GUI workstation software shall graphically display in 1024 by 768 pixels 24 bit True Color. 2. General Graphic: General area maps shall show locations of controlled buildings in relation to local landmarks 3. Color Floor Plans: Floor plan graphics shall show heating and cooling zones throughout the buildings in a range of colors, as selected by Owner. Provide a visual display of temperature relative to their respective setpoints. The colors shall be updated dynamically as a zone’s actual comfort condition changes. 4. Mechanical Components: Mechanical system graphics shall show the type of mechanical system components serving any zone through the use of a pictorial representation of components. Selected I/O points being controlled or monitored for each piece of equipment shall be displayed with the appropriate engineering units. Animation shall be used for rotation or moving mechanical components to enhance usability. 5. Minimum System Color Graphics: Color graphics shall be selected and displayed via a web browser for the following: a. Each piece of equipment monitored or controlled including each terminal unit. b. Each building c. Each floor and zone controlled Hierarchical Schedules: Utilizing the Navigation Tree displayed in the web browser GUI, an operator (with password access) shall be able to define a Normal, Holiday or override schedule for an individual piece of equipment or room, or choose to apply a hierarchical schedule to the entire system, site or floor area. For example, Independence Day ‘Holiday’ for every level in the system would be created by clicking at the top of the geographic hierarchy defined in the Navigation Tree. No further operator intervention would be required and every control module in the system would be automatically downloaded with the ‘Independence Day’ Holiday. All schedules that affect the system/area/equipment highlighted in the Navigation Tree shall be shown in a summary schedule table and graph. 1. Schedules: Schedules shall comply with the LonWorks / BACnet Standards, (Schedule Object, Calendar Object, Weekly Schedule property and Exception Schedule property) and shall allow events to be scheduled based on: a. Types of schedule shall be Normal, Holiday or override b. A specific date. c. A range of dates. BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 23 09 03 - 8 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building d. G. Any combination of Month of Year (1-12, any), Week of Month (1-5, last, any), Day of Week (M-Sun, Any). e. Wildcard (example, allow combinations like second Tuesday of every month). 2. Schedule categories: The system shall allow operators to define and edit scheduling categories (different types of “things” to be scheduled; for example, lighting, HVAC occupancy, etc.). The categories shall include: name, description, icon (to display in the hierarchy tree when icon option is selected) and type of value to be scheduled. 3. Schedule Groups: In addition to hierarchical scheduling, operators shall be able to define functional groups, comprised of an arbitrary group of areas/rooms/equipment scattered throughout the facility and site. For example, the operator shall be able to define an ‘individual tenant’ group – who may occupy different areas within a building or buildings. Schedules applied to the ‘tenant group’ shall automatically be downloaded to control modules affecting spaces occupied by the ‘tenant group.” 4. Intelligent Scheduling: The control system shall be intelligent enough to automatically turn on any supporting equipment needed to control the environment in an occupied space. If the operator schedules an individual room in a VAV system for occupancy, for example, the control logic shall automatically turn on the VAV air handling unit, chiller, boiler, and/or any other equipment required to maintain the specified comfort and environmental conditions within the room. 5. Partial Day Exceptions: Schedule events shall be able to accommodate a time range specified by the operator (ex: board meeting from 6 pm to 9 pm overrides Normal schedule for conference room). 6. Schedule Summary Graph: The schedule summary graph shall clearly show Normal versus Holiday versus Override Schedules, and the net operating schedule that results from all contributing schedules. Note: In case of priority conflict between schedules at the different geographic hierarchy, the schedule for the more detailed geographic level shall apply. Alarms: Alarms associated with a specific system, area, or equipment selected in the Navigation Tree, shall be displayed in the Action Pane by selecting an ‘Alarms’ view. Alarms, and reporting actions shall have the following capabilities: 1. Alarms View: Each Alarm shall display an Alarms Category (using a different icon for each alarm category), date/time of occurrence, current status, alarm report, and a bold URL link to the associated graphic for the selected system, area or equipment. The URL link shall indicate the system location, address and other pertinent information. An operator shall easily be able to sort events, edit event templates and categories, acknowledge or force a return to normal in the Events View as specified in this section. 2. Alarm Categories: The operator shall be able to create, edit or delete alarm categories such as HVAC, Maintenance, Fire, or Generator. An icon shall be associated with each alarm category, enabling the operator to easily sort through multiple events displayed. 3. Alarm Templates: Alarm template shall define different types of alarms and their associated properties. As a minimum, properties shall include a reference name, verbose description, severity of alarm, acknowledgement requirements, and high/low limit and out of range information. 4. Alarm Areas: Alarm Areas enable an operator to assign specific Alarm Categories to specific Alarm Reporting Actions. For example, it shall be possible for an operator to assign all HVAC Maintenance Alarm on the 1st floor of a building to email the technician responsible for maintenance. The Navigation Tree shall be used to setup Alarm Areas in the Graphic Pane. 5. Alarm Time/Date Stamp: All events shall be generated at the DDC control module level and comprise the Time/Date Stamp using the standalone control module time and date. 6. Alarm Configuration: Operators shall be able to define the type of Alarm generated per object. A ‘network’ view of the Navigation Tree shall expose all objects and their respective Alarm Configuration. Configuration shall include assignment of Alarm, type of Acknowledgement and notification for return to normal or fault status. BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 23 09 03 - 9 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building 7. H. Alarm Summary Counter: The view of Alarm in Graphic Pane shall provide a numeric counter, indicating how many Alarms are active (in alarm); require acknowledgement, and total number of Alarms in the BAS Server database. 8. Alarm Auto-Deletion: Alarms that are acknowledged and closed shall be auto-deleted from the database and archived to a text file after an operator defined period. 9. Alarm Reporting Actions: Alarm Reporting Actions specified shall be automatically launched (under certain conditions) after an Alarm is received by the BAS server software. Operators shall be able to easily define these Reporting Actions using the Navigation Tree and Graphic Pane through the web browser GUI. Reporting Actions shall be as follows: a. Print: Alarm information shall be printed to the BAS server’s PC or a networked printer. b. Email: Email shall be sent via any POP3-compatible e-mail server (most Internet Service Providers use POP3). Email messages may be copied to several email accounts. Note: Email reporting action shall also be used to support alphanumeric paging services, where email services support pagers. c. File Write: The ASCII File write reporting action shall enable the operator to append operator defined alarm information to any alarm through a text file. The alarm information that is written to the file shall be completely definable by the operator. The operator may enter text or attach other data point information (such as AHU discharge temperature and fan condition upon a high room temperature alarm). d. Write Property: The write property reporting action updates a property value in a hardware module. e. SNMP: The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) reporting action sends an SNMP trap to a network in response to receiving an alarm. f. Run External Program: The Run External Program reporting action launches specified program in response to an event. Trends: Trends shall both be displayed and user configurable through the Web Browser GUI. Trends shall comprise analog, digital or calculated points simultaneously. A trend log’s properties shall be editable using the Navigation Tree and Graphic Pane. 1. Viewing Trends: The operator shall have the ability to view trends by using the Navigation Tree and selecting a Trends button in the Graphic Pane. The system shall allow y- and xaxis maximum ranges to be specified and shall be able to simultaneously graphically display multiple trends per graph. 2. Local Trends: Trend data shall be collected locally by Multi-Equipment/Single Equipment general-purpose controllers, and periodically u0loaded to the BAS server if historical trending is enabled for the object. Trend data, including run time hours and start time date and start time date shall be retained in non-volatile module memory. Systems that rely on a gateway/router to run trends are NOT acceptable. 3. Resolution: Sample intervals shall be as small as one second. Each trended point will have the ability to be trended at a different trend interval. When multiple points are selected for displays that have different trend intervals, the system will automatically scale the axis. 4. Dynamic Update: Trends shall be able to dynamically update at operator-defined intervals. Zoom/Pan: It shall be possible to zoom-in on a particular section of a trend for more detailed examination and ‘pan through’ historical data by simply scrolling the mouse. 5. Numeric Value Display: It shall be possible to pick any sample on a trend and have the numerical value displayed. 6. Copy/Paste: The operator must have the ability to pan through a historical trend and copy the data viewed to the clipboard using standard keystrokes (i.e., CTRL+C, CTRL+V). I. Security Access: Systems that Security access from the web browser GUI to BAS server shall require a Login Name and Password. Access to different areas of the BAS system shall be defined in terms of Roles, Privileges and geographic area of responsibility as specified: BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 23 09 03 - 10 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building 1. Roles: Roles shall reflect the actual roles of different types of operators. Each role shall comprise a set of ‘easily understood English language’ privileges. Roles shall be defined in terms of View, Edit and Function Privileges. a. View Privileges shall comprise: Navigation, Network, and Configuration Trees, Operators, Roles and Privileges, Alarm/Event Template and Reporting Action. b. Edit Privileges shall comprise: Setpoint, Tuning and Logic, Manual Override, and Point Assignment Parameters. c. Function Privileges shall comprise: Alarm/Event Acknowledgment Control Module Memory Download, Upload, Schedules, Schedule Groups, Manual Commands, Print, and Alarm/Event Maintenance. 2. Geographic Assignment of Roles: Roles shall be geographically assigned using a similar expandable/collapsible Navigation Tree. For example, it shall be possible to assign two HVAC Technicians with similar competencies (and the same operator defined HVAC Role) to different areas of the system. I. Sequences: Sequences shall be accessible through the Web Browser GUI in pdf format and shall be maintained for use as As-Builts. The intent of this is to provide the owner with easy access to the actual (As-Built) programmed sequences in a digital format that is accessible through the GUI. J. Control Drawings: Control drawings shall be accessible through the Web Browser GUI in pdf format and shall be maintained for use as As-Builts. The intent of this is to provide the owner with easy access to the actual (As-Built) control drawings in a digital format that is accessible through the GUI. 2.03 GRAPHICAL PROGRAMMING A. The system software shall include a Graphic Programming Language (GPL) for all DDC control algorithms resident in all control modules. Any system that does not use a drag and drop method of graphical icon programming shall not be accepted. All systems shall a GPL is a method used to create a sequence of operations by assembling graphic microblocks that represent each of the commands or functions necessary to complete a control sequence. Microblocks represent common logical control devices in conventional control systems, such as relays, switches, high signal selectors, etc., in addition to the more complex DDC and energy management strategies such as PID loops and optimum start. Each microblock shall be interactive and contain the programming necessary to execute the function of the device it represents. Graphic programming shall be performed while on screen and using a mouse; each microblock shall be selected from a microblock library and assembled with other microblocks necessary to complete the specified sequence. Microblocks are then interconnected on screen using graphic “wires,” each forming a logical connection. Once assembled, each logical grouping of microblocks and their interconnecting wires then form a graphic function block which may be used to control any piece of equipment with a similar point configuration and sequence of operation. GPL Capabilities: The following is a minimum definition of the capabilities of the Graphic Programming software: 1. Function Block (FB): Shall be a collection of points, microblocks and wires which have been connected together for the specific purpose of controlling a piece of HVAC equipment or a single mechanical system. 2. Logical I/O: Input/Output points shall interface with the control modules in order to read various signals and/or values or to transmit signal or values to controlled devices. 3. Microblocks: Shall be software devices that are represented graphically and maybe connected together to perform a specified sequence. A library of microblocks shall be submitted with the control contractors bid. 4. Wires: Shall be Graphical elements used to form logical connections between microblocks and between logical I/O. B. C. BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 23 09 03 - 11 McHugh Engineering Associates 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Reference Labels: Labels shall be similar to wires I that they are used to form logical connections between two points. Labels shall form a connection by reference instead of a visual connection, i.e., two points labeled ‘A’ on a drawing are logically connected even though there is no wire between them. Parameter: A parameter shall be a value that may be tied to the input of a microblock. Properties: Dialog boxes shall appear after a microblock has been inserted which has editable parameters associated with it. Default parameter dialog boxes shall contain various editable and non-editable fields, and shall contain ‘push buttons for the purpose of selecting default parameter settings. Icon: An icon shall be graphic representation of a software program. Each graphic microblock has an icon associated with it that graphically describes its function. Menu-bar Icon: Shall be an icon that is displayed on the menu bar on the GPL screen, which represents its associated graphic microblock. Live Graphical Programs: The Graphic Programming software must support a ‘live’ mode, where all input/output data, calculated data, and setpoints shall be displayed in a ‘live realtime mode. 2.04 LONWORKS NETWORK MANAGEMENT A. B. Systems requiring the use of third party LonWorks network management tools shall not be accepted. Network management shall include the following services: device identification, device installation, device configuration, device diagnostics, device maintenance and network variable binding. The network configuration tool shall also provide diagnostics to identify devices on the network, to reset devices, and to view health and status counters within devices. These tools shall provide the ability to “learn” an existing LonWorks network, regardless of what network management tool(s) were used to install the existing network, so that existing LonWorks devices and newly added devices are part of a single network management database. The network management database shall be resident in the Network Area Controller (NAC), ensuring that anyone with proper authorization has access to the network management databases at all times. Systems employing network management databases that are not resident, at all times, within the control system, shall not be accepted. C. D. E. 2.05 PORTABLE OPERATOR’S TOOL (LAPTOP COMPUTER) A. The laptop computer shall consist of an Intel Premium based laptop computer (minimum processing speed of 2.0 GHz with 2GB RAM and a 60-gigabyte minimum hard drive). It shall include a CDROM drive, and appropriate connectors and cables for communication with the Ethernet network. Operating system shall be Microsoft Windows XP Professional or 7. 2.06 OPEN, INTEROPERABLE, INTEGRATED ARCHITECTURE A. The intent of this specification is to provide a peer-to-peer networked, stand-alone, distributed control system utilizing the LonWorks technology communication protocol and/or BACnet in one open, interoperable system. The supplied computer software shall employ object-oriented technology (OOT) for representation of all data and control devices within the system All components and controllers supplied under this contract shall be true “peer-to-peer” communicating devices. Components or controllers requiring “polling” by a host to pass data shall not be acceptable. The supplied system must incorporate the ability to access all data using Java enabled browsers without requiring proprietary operator interface and configuration programs. An Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) or Structured Query Language (SQL) compliant server database is required for B. C. D. BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 23 09 03 - 12 McHugh Engineering Associates E. 2.07 A. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building all system database parameter storage. This data shall reside on the existing Operating System Server currently located in the Facilities Office on the LAN. Systems requiring proprietary database and user interface programs shall not be acceptable. A hierarchical topology is required to assure reasonable system response times and to manage the flow and sharing of data without unduly burdening the customer’s internal intranet network. Systems employing a “flat” single tiered architecture shall not be acceptable. 1. Maximum acceptable response time from any alarm occurrence (at the point of origin) to the point of annunciation shall not exceed 5 seconds for network connected user interfaces. 2. Maximum acceptable response time from any alarm occurrence (at the point of origin) to the point of annunciation shall not exceed 60 seconds for remote or dial-up connected user interfaces. BMS SERVER HARDWARE Computer Configuration (Hardware Independent) 1. Central Server. Owner shall provide a dedicated BAS server with configuration that includes the following components as a minimum: 2. 2 GHz, Intel Pentium IV or higher, Core 2 Dual also acceptable P4 or higher CPU – Dual Processor. 3. 8 GB of RAM Minimum 4. 40 gigabyte hard disk, 1.44M 3 ½” floppy drive, SVGA Card with 1024 x 768, 24-bit True Color, Back-up system 24X CD Rom R/W Drive minimum, 19” Flat Screen Color Monitor, Keyboard and mouse. 5. Operating System for the server shall be Microsoft Windows 7 Professional, Windows Server 2012 or 2012 R2. 6. Internet Explorer 6.0 or later 7. 10Base-T Ethernet Port 8. Standard Client: The thin-client Web Browser, BAS GUI shall be Microsoft Internet Explorer (6.0 or later) running on Windows XP or 7 (with LX Compatibility Mode. No special software shall be required to be installed on the PCs used to access the BAS via a web browser. 2.08 BMS SERVER FUNCTIONS A. A central server shall be provided. The server shall support all Network Area Controllers (NAC) connected to the customer’s network whether local or remote. Local connections shall be via an Ethernet LAN. Remote connections can be via ISDN, ADSL, T1 or dial-up connection. It shall be possible to provide access to all Network Area Controllers via single connection to the server. In this configuration, each Network Area Controller can be accessed from a remote Graphical User Interface (GUI) or from a standard Web browser (WBI) by connecting to the server. The server shall provide the following functions, at a minimum: 1. Global Data Access: The server shall provide complete access to distributed data defined anywhere in the system. 2. Distributed Control: The server shall provide the ability to execute global control strategies based on control and data objects in any NAC in the network, local or remote. 3. The server shall include a master clock service for its subsystems and provide time synchronization for all Network Area Controllers (NAC). 4. The server shall accept time synchronization messages from trusted precision Atomic Clock Internet sites and update its master clock based on this data. 5. The server shall provide scheduling for all Network Area Controllers and their underlying filed control devices. B. C. D. BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 23 09 03 - 13 McHugh Engineering Associates 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building The server shall be capable of providing demand limiting that operates across all Network Area Controllers. The server must be capable of multiple demand programs for sites with multiple meters and or multiple sources of energy. Each demand program shall be capable of supporting separate demand shed lists for effective demand control. The server shall implement the BACnet Command Prioritization scheme (16 levels) for safe and effective contention resolution of all commands issued to Network Area Controllers. Systems not employing this prioritization shall not be accepted. Each Network Area Controller supported by the server shall have the ability to archive its log data, alarm data and database to the server, automatically. Archiving options shall be userdefined including archive time and archive frequency. The server shall provide central alarm management for all Network Area Controllers supported by the server. Alarm management shall include: 1. Routing of alarms to display, printer, email and pagers. 2. View and acknowledge alarms. 3. Query alarm logs based on user-defined parameters. The server shall provide central management of log data for all Network Area Controllers supported by the server. Log data shall include process logs, runtime and event counter logs, audit logs and error logs. Log data management shall include: 1. Viewing and printing log data 2. Exporting log data to other software applications 3. Query log data based on user-defined parameters. 2.09 LIBRARY A. A Standard library of objects shall be included for development and setup of application logic, user interface displays, system services, and communication networks. The objects in this library shall be capable of being copied and pasted into the user’s data base and shall be organized according to their function. In addition, the user shall have the capability to group objects created in their application and store the new instances of these objects in a user-defined library. In addition to the standard libraries specified here, the supplier of the system shall maintain an online accessible (over the Internet) Library, available to all registered users to provide new or updated objects and applications as they are developed. All control objects shall conform to the control objects specified in the BACnet specification. The library shall include applications or objects for the following functions, at a minimum: 1. Scheduling Object. The schedule must conform to the schedule object as defined in the BACnet specification, providing 7 day plus holiday and temporary scheduling features and a minimum of 10 on/off events per day. Data entry tobe by graphical sliders to speed creation and selection of on-off events. 2. Calendar Object. The calendar must conform to the calendar object as defined in the BACnet specification, providing 12 month calendar features to allow for holiday or special event data entry. Data entry to be by graphical “point and click” selection. This object must be linkable” to any or all scheduling objects for effective event control. 3. Duty Cycling Object. Provide a universal duty cycle object to allow repetitive on/off time control of equipment as an energy conserving measure. Any number of these objects may be created to control equipment at varying intervals. 4. Temperature Override Object. Provide a temperature override object that is capable of overriding equipment turned off by other energy saving programs (scheduling, duty cycling, etc.) to maintain occupant comfort or for equipment freeze protection. 5. Start-Stop Time Optimization Object. Provide a start-stop time optimization object to provide the capability of starting equipment just early enough to bring space conditions to desired conditions by the scheduled occupancy time. Also, allow equipment to be stopped B. C. D. E. BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 23 09 03 - 14 McHugh Engineering Associates F. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building before the scheduled unoccupancy time just far enough ahead to take advantage of the building’s “flywheel” effect for energy saving. Provide automatic tuning of all start/stop time object properties based on the previous day’s performance. 6. Demand Limiting Object. Provide a comprehensive demand-limiting object that is capable of controlling demand for any selected energy utility (electric, oil, and gas). The object shall provide the capability of monitoring a demand value and predicting (by use of a sliding window prediction algorithm) the demand at the end of the user defined interval period (1-60 minutes). This object shall also accommodate a utility meter time sync pulse for fixed interval demand control. Upon a prediction that will exceed the user defined demand limit (supply a minimum of 6 per day), the demand limiting object shall issue shed commands to either turn off user specified loads or modify equipment set points to effect the desired energy reduction. If the list of sheddable equipment is not enough to reduce the demand to below the set point, a message shall be displayed on the users screen (as an alarm) instructing the user to take manual actions to maintain the desired demand. The shed lists are specified by the user and shall be selectable to be shed in either a fixed or rotating order to control which equipment is shed the most often. Upon suitable reductions in demand, the demand-limiting object shall restore the equipment that was shed in the reverse order in which it was shed. Each sheddable object shall have a minimum and maximum shed time property to effect both equipment protection and occupant comfort. The library shall include control objects for the following functions. All control objects shall conform to the objects as specified in the BACnet specification. 1. Analog Object – Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet standard for data sharing. Allow high, low and failure limits to be assigned for alarming. Also, provide a time delay filter property to prevent nuisance alarms caused by temporary excursions above or below the user defined alarm limits. 2. Analog Output Object – Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet standard for data sharing. 3. Binary Input Object – Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet standard for data sharing. The user must be able to specify either input condition for alarming. This object must also include the capability to record equipment run-time by counting the amount of time the hardware input is in an “on” condition. The user must be able to specify either input condition as the “on” condition. 4. Binary Output Object – Minimum requirement is to comply with the BAC net standard for data sharing. Properties to enable minimum on and off time for equipment protection as well as interstart delay must be provided. The BACnet Command Prioritization priority scheme shall be incorporated to allow multiple control applications to execute commands on this object with the highest priority command being invoked. Provide sixteen levels of priority as a minimum. Systems not employing the BACnet method of contention resolution shall not be acceptable. 5. PID Control Loop Object – Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet standard for data sharing. Each individual property must be adjustable as well as to be disabled to allow proportional control only, or proportional with integral control, as well as proportional, integral and derivative control. 6. Comparison Object – Allow a minimum of two analog objects to be compared to select either the highest, lowest, or equality between the two linked outputs. Also, allow limits to be applied to the output value for alarm generation. 7. Math Object – Allow a minimum of four analog objects to be tested for the minimum or maximum, or the sum, difference, or average of linked objects. Also, allow limits to be applied to the output value for alarm generation. 8. Custom Programming Objects – Provide a blank object template for the creation of new custom objects to meet specific user application requirements. This object must provide a simple BASIC-like programming language that is used to define object behavior. Provide BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 23 09 03 - 15 McHugh Engineering Associates G. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building library of functions including math and logic functions, string manipulation, and e-mail as a minimum. Also, provide a comprehensive on-line debug tool to allow complete testing of the new object. Allow new objects to be stored in the library for re-use. 9. Interlock Object – Provide an interlock object that provides a means of coordination of objects within a piece of equipment such as an Air Handler or other similar types of equipment. An example is to link the return fan to the supply fan such that when the supply fan is started, the return fan object is also started automatically without the user having to issue separate commands or to link each object to a schedule object. In addition, the control loops, damper objects, and alarm monitoring (such as return air, supply air, and mixed air temperature objects) will be inhibited from alarming during a user-defined period after startup to allow for stabilization. When the air handler is stopped, the interlocked return fan is also stopped, the outside air damper is closed, and other related objects within the air handler unit are inhibited from alarming thereby eliminating nuisance alarms during the off period. 10. Temperature Override Object – Provide an object whose purpose is to provide the capability of overriding a binary output to an “On” state in the event a user specified high or low limit value is exceeded. This object is to be linked to the desired binary output object as well as to an analog object for temperature monitoring, to cause the override to be enabled. This object will execute a Start command at the Temperature Override level of start/stop command priority unless changed by the user. 11. Composite Object – Provide a container object that allows a collection of objects representing an application to be encapsulated to protect the application from tampering, or to more easily represent large applications. This object must have the ability to allow the user to select the appropriate parameters of the “contained” application that are represented on the graphical shell of this container. The object library shall include objects to support the integration of devices connected to the Network Area Controller (NAC). At a minimum, provide the following as part of the standard library included with the programming software: 1. LonMark/LonWorks devices. These devices shall include, but not be limited to, devices for control of HVAC, lighting, access, and metering. Provide Lon Mark manufacturer-specific objects to facilitate simple integration of these devices. All network variables defined in the LonMark profile shall be supported. Information (type and function) regarding network variables not defined in the LonMark profile shall be provided by the device manufacturer. 2. For devices not confirming to the LonMark standard, provide a dynamic object that can be assigned to the device based on network variable information provided by the device manufacturer. Device manufacturer shall provide an XIF file, resource file and documentation for the device to facilitate device integration. 3. For BACnet devices, provide the following objects at a minimum: a. Analog In b. Analog Out c. Analog Value d. Binary e. Binary In f. Binary Out g. Binary Value h. Multi9-State In i. Multi-State Out j. Multi-State Value k. Schedule Export l. Calendar Export m. Trend Export n. Device BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 23 09 03 - 16 McHugh Engineering Associates 4. 5. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building For each BACnet object, provide the ability to assign the object a BACnet device and object instance number. For BACnet devices, provide the following support at a minimum. a. Segmentation b. Segmented Request c. Segmented Response d. Application Services e. Read Property f. Read Property Multiple g. Write Property h. Who-has i. I-have j. Who-is k. I-am l. Media Types m. Ethernet n. BACnet IP Annex J o. MSTP p. BACnet Broadcast Management Device (BBMD) function q. Routing Note: Depending on the project configuration and requirements, it may be desired to integrate data from devices that are not LonMark or BACnet. These could include industrial or plant floor devices such as PLC’s. Because of the many drivers available, a common method of providing this integration is: Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE), MODBUS (DDEE), and Ole for Process Control (OPC). 2.10 NETWORK AREA CONTROLLER (NAC) / SYSTEM NETWORK CONTROLLER (SNC) A. These controllers are designed to manage communications between the programmable equipment controllers (PEC), application specific controllers (ASC), and advanced unitary controllers (AUC) which are connected to its communications trunks, manage communications between itself and other system network controllers (SNC) and with any operator workstations (OWS) that are part of the BAS, and perform control and operating strategies for the system based on information from any controller connected to the BAS. The controllers must be fully programmable to meet the unique requirements of the facility it must control. The controllers must be capable of peer-to-peer communications with other SNC’s and with any OWS connected to the BAS, whether the OWS is directly connected, connected via modem or connected via the Internet. The communication protocols utilized for peer-to-peer communications between SNC’s will be Niagara AX, BACnet TCP/IP and SNMP. Use of proprietary communication protocol for peer-topeer communications between SNC’s is not allowed. The SNC shall be capable of executing application control programs to provide: 1. Calendar functions 2. Scheduling 3. Trending 4. Alarm monitoring and routing 5. Time synchronization. 6. Integration of LonWorks, BACnet, and ModBus controller data. 7. Network management functions for all SNC, PEC and ASC based devices. The SNC must provide the following hardware features as a minimum: 1. One Ethernet Port-10/100 Mdps B. C. D. E. F. BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 23 09 03 - 17 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building 2. 3. 4. 5. G. H. I. J. K. One RS-232/485 port One LonWorks Interface Port – 78KB FTT-10A Battery Backup Flash memory for long term data backup (if battery backup or flash memory is not supplied, the controller must contain a hard disk with at least 1 gigabyte storage capacity) The SNC shall support standard Web browser access via the Intranet/Internet. It shall support a minimum of 16 simultaneous users. The SNC shall provide alarm recognition, storage, routing, management and analysis to supplement distributed capabilities of equipment or application specific controllers. The SNC shall be able to route any alarm condition to any defined user location whether connected to a local network or remote via dial-up, telephone connection, or wide-area network. 1. Alarm generation shall be selectable for annunciation type and acknowledgement requirements including but not limited to: a. Alarm b. Return to normal c. To default 2. Alarms shall be annunciated in any of the following manners as defined by the user: a. Screen message text b. Email of complete alarm message to multiple recipients. c. Pagers via paging services that initiate a page on receipt of email message. d. Graphics with flashing alarm object(s). 3. The following shall be recorded by the SNC for each alarm (at a minimum): a. Time and date. b. Equipment (air handler #, accessway, etc.) c. Acknowledge time, date, and user who issued acknowledgement. Programming software and all controller “Setup Wizards” shall be embedded into the SNC. Operator Touch Screen Interface Provide a color graphic display touch screen operator interface mounted on panel face as indicated on drawings. The Operator Touch Screen Interface shall serve as the user interface to the entire TCS and shall allow the monitoring and the control of all systems points without the use of a mouse or keyboard. Access to the system shall be permission-based, configurable permission access levels based on operator’s role. Information on the color graphic display shall be dynamic and automatically updated. 2.11 PROGRAMMABLE EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER (PEC) A. HVAC control shall be accomplished using LonMark™ based devices where the application has a LonMark™ profile defined. Where LonMark™ devices are not available for a particular application; devices based on LonMark™ shall be acceptable. For each LonWorks™ device that does not have LonMark™ certification, the device supplier must provide an XIF file for the device. The controller platform shall provide options and advanced system functions, programmable and configurable using Niagara AX Framework™, that allow standard and customizable control solutions required in executing the “Sequence of Operation.” All PECs shall be application programmable and shall at all times maintain their LonMark™ certification. All control sequences within or programmed into the ILC shall be stored in non-volatile memory, which is not dependent upon the presence of a battery to be retained. The PECs shall communicate with the SNC at a baud rate of not less than 78.8K baud. The PEC shall provide LED indication of communication and controller performance to the technician, without cover removal. The following integral and remote Inputs/Outputs shall be supported per each PEC: 1. Four integral dry contact digital inputs. B. C. D. BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 23 09 03 - 18 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building 2. 3. 4. E. Six integral analog inputs (configurable as 0-10V, 0-10,000 ohm or, 20K NTC). Three integral 4-20 ma analog outputs. Eight integral 24 Vac Triac digital outputs, configurable maintained or floating motor control outputs. 5. One integral 20 Vdc, 65-mA power supply for auxiliary devices. Each PEC shall have expansion ability to support additional I/O requirements through the use of remote Input/Output modules. 2.12 APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS (ASC’S) A. Application Specific Controllers (ASC’s) shall be standalone EEPROM based configured to perform the sequences specified, and with I/O selected for the application. All unitary DDC controllers shall support the LonMark™ Functional Profile for the given application. ASC’s shall be tested and listed under UL916 for computing devices. ASC enclosures shall be flame retardant compact plastic conforming to UL94-V5 for plenum mounting or plated steel. Each ASC shall be provided with face mounted LED type annunciation to continually display its operational mode: power, normal, or in an alarm state. As an alternative to the face mounted integral LED, the control contractor shall provide relay driven pilot lights mounted at the AC location, which shall provide the specified annunciation. ASC’s shall be configured for DIN rail mounting using industry standard clip on adapters or direct panel mounted. The controller shall be programmable and configurable using Niagara AX Framework™ and provide control solutions as required to executing the “Sequence of Operation.” 1. Single Zone Constant Volume Air Handling Unit Controller a. Provide a stand-alone Single Zone DDC Controller featuring preprogrammed heating and cooling and economizer control algorithms configurable for either standard single zone rooftop unit applications or heat pumps. Controller shall be LonMark™ certified for the rooftop Unit Controller Application for interpretability with similar protocol third party devices in network applications. For rooftop applications, the controller shall have extended operating temperature rating from – 40F to + 150F so controller can be mounted directly in wiring cabinet of AHU. If controller provided does not have 40F to 150F temperature ranges, then the device shall be mounted in a separate enclosure with suitable heating and cooling to meet the controller operating temperature range. Controller application software shall include setpoint resets for energy demand limit control and economizer minimum position for IAQ control. Separate unoccupied heating and cooling setpoints shall be provided. A standby feature shall be provided to reset the occupied temperature set point back to a user definable limit based on status from an auxiliary device, such as an occupancy sensor or window contact. Controller shall include temperature wall module connection that may be used in applications where the wall module must: sense temperature, control set point temperature and control Occ/Unocc condition. In addition to internal I/O selected for the application, controller shall also support distributed I/O from the network. 2. Input/Output Module a. Provide a remote Input/Output module that connects sensors and actuators onto the field bus network for use by the NAC, ILC and ASC DDC Controllers. I/O Device shall support LonMark standard network communication technology for controller-tocontroller communications. I/O Device shall have extended operating temperature rating from -40F to +150F so Device can be mounted directly in wiring cabinet of monitored appliances. 3. Unit Ventilator Controller a. Provide a standalone DDC Unit Ventilator Controller featuring preprogrammed heating and economizer and ASHRAE Cycles I, II, III control algorithms. Controller shall be configurable for unit ventilator 2 pipe or 4 pipe applications with staged, BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 23 09 03 - 19 McHugh Engineering Associates 4. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building floating, or pulse width modulation (PWM) heating, cooling and economizer. Controller shall use Echelon LonWorks communication technology for field bus and shall utilize the LonMark Unit Ventilator (UV) communication profile for interoperability with similar protocol third party devices in network applications. Controller shall have extended operating temperature rating from -40F to +150F so controller can be mounted directly in wiring cabinet of unit ventilator package. Controller application software shall include setpoint resets for energy demand limit control and economizer minimum position for IAQ control. Separate unoccupied heating and cooling setpoints shall be provided. A standby feature shall be provided to reset the occupied auxiliary device, such as an occupancy sensor or window contact. Controller shall have spare outputs for interlocking exhaust fans or room lighting. Controller shall include a temperature wall module connection that may be used in any application where the wall module must: sense temperature, control set point temperature, control Occ/Unocc or control fan speed. In addition to internal I/O selected for the application, controller shall also support distributed I/O from the network. Fan Coil Controller a. Provide a standalone DDC Fan Coil Controller for common two pipe or four pipe fan coil units featuring preprogrammed heating and cooling control algorithms for single or up to three fan speed applications. Controller shall use Echelon LonWorks communication technology for field bus and shall utilize the LonMark Fan Coil Unit (FCU) communication profile for Interoperability with similar protocol third party devices in network applications. Controllers shall have integral transformers and fan speed relays directly wired to line voltage power 115Vac and 230 Vac. Controller application software shall include a setpoint reset for energy demand limit control. Separate unoccupied heating and cooling setpoints shall be provided. A standby feature shall be provided to reset the occupied temperature set point back to a user definable limit based on status from an auxiliary device, such as an occupancy sensor or window contact. Controller shall include a temperature wall module connection that may be used in any applications where the wall module must: sense temperature, control set point temperature, control Occ/Unocc or control fan speed. In addition to internal I/O selected for the application, controller shall also support distributed I/O from the network. b. The Control contractor shall furnish and ship damper actuators and Application installation. (Note: Terminal equipment manufacturer furnishes transformers, relays, airflow rings, and enclosures.) The control contractor shall provide the terminal equipment manufacturer with necessary wiring and mounting instructions. Any mounting charges shall be the responsibility of the equipment manufacturer. c. VAV ASC’s shall have configured airflow calibration software for VAV applications to assist the test and balance (T&B) contractor in final calibrations. Using the ASC contractor’s calibration tool, the T&B contractor shall be provided with a display allowing a simple command entry to place the UC in zero, minimum, and maximum CFM control modes. At each mode, a display field shall be provided for the T&B contractor to enter the actual measured value in CFM. Upon completion of entering the three values, the ASC shall automatically recalibrate based upon the actual values. 2.13 ADVANCED UNITARY CONTROLLER A. The advanced unitary controller (AUC) platform shall be designed specifically to control HVAC – ventilation, filtration, heating, cooling, humidification, and distribution. Equipment includes: constant volume air handlers, VAV air handlers, packaged RTU, heat pumps, unit vents, fan coils, natural BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 23 09 03 - 20 McHugh Engineering Associates B. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building convection units, and radiant panels. The controller platform shall provide options and advanced system functions, programmable and configurable using Niagara AX Framework™, that allows standard and customizable control solutions required in executing the “Sequence of Operation.” Minimum Requirements: 1. The Controller shall be fully programmable with full functionality on any Niagara AX brand platform. a. Support downloads to the controller from any brand of Niagara AX platform. b. Support uploads from the controller to any brand of Niagara AX platform. c. Support simulation/debug mode of the controller. d. Maintain native GUI. e. Native function-block programming within the Niagara AX environment. 2. The controller shall be capable of either integrating with other devices or stand alone operation. 3. The controller shall have two microprocessors. The Host processor contains on-chip FLASH program memory, FLASH information memory, and RAM to run the main HVAC application. The second processor for network communications. Controller memory minimum requirements include: a. FLASH Memory Capacity: 60 Kilobytes with 8 Kilobytes for application program. b. FLASH Memory settings retained for ten years. c. RAM: 2 Kilobytes. 4. The controller shall have an FTT transformer-coupled communications port interface for common mode-noise rejection and DC isolation. 5. The controller shall have an internal time with the ability to automatically revert from a master time clock on failure. a. Operating Range: 24 hour, 365 day, multi-year-calendar including day of week and configuration for automatic day-light savings time adjustment to occur on configured start and stop dates. b. Accuracy: +/- minute per month at 77° F (25° C). c. Power Failure Backup: 24 hours at 32° to 122° F (0° to 50° C). 6. The controller shall have Significant Event Notification, Periodic Update capability, and Failure Detect when network inputs fail to be detected within their configurable time frame. 7. The controller shall have an internal DC power supply to power external sensors. a. Power Output: 20 VDC +/- 10% at 75 Ma 8. The controller shall have visual indication (LED) of the status of the devise: a. Controller operating normally. b. Controller in process of download. c. Controller in manual mode under control of software tool. d. Controller lost it configuration. e. Now power to controller, low voltage, or controller damage. f. Processor and/or controller are not operating. 9. The minimum controller Environmental ratings: a. Operating Temperature Ambient Rating: -40° to 150° F (-40 to 65.5° C). b. Storage Temperature Ambient Rating: -40° to 150° F (-40 to 65.5° C). c. Relative Humidity: 5% to 95% non-condensing. 10. The controller shall have the additional approval requirements, listings, and approvals: a. UL/cUL (E87741) listed under UL916 (Standard for Open Energy Management Equipment) with plenum rating. b. CSA (LR95329-3) Listed c. Meets FCC Part 15, Subpart B, Class B (radiated emissions) requirements. d. Meets Canadian standard C108.8 (radiated emissions). e. Conforms requirements European Consortium standard EN 61000-6-1; 2001 (EU Immunity) BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 23 09 03 - 21 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building f. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. Conforms requirements European Consortium standard EN 61000-6-3; 2001 (EU Emission) The controller housing shall be UL plenum rated mounting to either a panel or DIN rail (standard EN50022; 7.5mm x 35 mm). The controller housing shall have a mix of digital inputs (DI), digital Triac Outputs (DO), analog outputs and universal inputs (UI). a. Analog outputs (AO) shall be capable of being configured as digital outputs (DO). b. Input and Output wiring terminals shall be removable from the controller without disconnecting the wiring. c. Input and Output wiring terminals shall be designated with color coded labels. d. Universal inputs shall be capable of being configured as binary inputs, resistive inputs, voltage inputs (o-10 VDC), or current inputs (4-20mA). The controller shall provide for “user defined’ Network Variables (NV) for customized configurations and naming using Niagara AX Framework™. The controller shall provide “continuous” automated loop tuning with Adaptive Integral Algorithm Control Loop. The controller platform shall have standard HVAC application programs that are modifiable to support both the traditional and specialized “sequence of operations” as outline in Section 4. a. Discharge air control and low limit. b. Pressure-dependent dual duct without flow mixing. c. Variable air volume with return flow tracking. d. Economizer with differential enthalpy. e. Minimum airflow coordinated with CO2. f. Unit ventilator cycle (1, 2, 3) 2-pipe. g. Unit ventilator cycle (1, 2, 3) 2-pipe with face/bypass h. Unit ventilator cycle (1, 2, 3) 4-pipe. i. Unit ventilator cycle (1, 2, 3) 4-pipe with EOC valve. 2.14 ADVANCED VARIABLE AIR VOLUME CONTROLLER A. The advanced VAV controller platform shall be designed specifically for room-level VAV control – pressure-independent air flow control, pressure dependent damper control, supply and exhaust pressurization/de-pressurization control; temperature, humidity, complex CO2, occupancy, and emergency control. Equipment includes: VAV terminal unit, VAV terminal unit with reheat, Series fan powered terminal unit, Parallel fan powered terminal unit, Supply and Exhaust air volume terminals, and Constant volume dual-duct terminal unit. The controller platform shall provide options and advanced system functions, programmable and configurable using Niagara AX Framework™, that allow standard and customizable control solutions required in executing the “Sequence of Operation.” The controller shall be fully programmable with full functionality on any Niagara AX platform. a. Support downloads to the controller from any brand of Niagara AX platform. b. Support uploads from the controller to any brand of Niagara AX platform. c. Support simulation/debug mode of the controller. d. Maintain native GUI. e. Native function-block programming within the Niagara AX environment. 2. The controller shall be capable of either integrating with other devices or stand-alone roomlevel control operation. 3. The controller shall have an internal velocity pressure sensor. a. Sensor Type: Microbridge air flow sensor with dual integral restrictors. b. Operating Range: 0 to 0.1.5 in. H2O (0 to 374 Pa). B. BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 23 09 03 - 22 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building c. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. Accuracy ±-2% of full scale at 32° to 122° F (0° to 50°C); ±1% of full scale at null pressure. The controller shall have two microprocessors. The Host processor contains on-chip FLASH program memory, FLASH information memory, and RAM to run the main HVAC application. The second processor for network communications. a. FLASH Memory Capacity: 60 Kilobytes with 8 Kilobytes for application program. b. FLASH Memory setting retained for ten years. c. RAM: 2 Kilobytes. The controller shall have an FTT transformer-coupled communications port interface for common mode-noise rejection and DC isolation. The controller shall have an internal time clock with the ability to automatically revert from a master time clock on failure. a. Operating Range: 24 hour, 365 day, multi-year calendar including day of week and configuration for automatic day-light savings time adjustment to occur on configured start and stop dates. b. Accuracy: ± minute per month at 77° F (25°) c). c. Power Failure Backup: 24 hours at 32° to 122° F (0° to 50° C). The controller shall have Significant Event Notification, Periodic Update capability, and Failure Detect when network inputs fail to be detected within their configurable time frame. The controller shall have an internal DC power supply to power external sensors. a. Power Output: 20 VDC ±10% at 75 mA. The controller shall have a visual indication (LED) of the status of device: a. Controller operating normally. b. Controller in process of download. c. Controller in manual mode under control of software tool. d. Controller lost its configuration. e. No power to controller, low voltage, or controller damage. f. Processor and/or controller are not operating. The minimum controller Environment ratings: a. Operating Temperature Ambient Rating: 32° to 122° F (0° to 50° C). b. Storage Temperature Ambient Rating: 32° to 122° F (0° to 50° C). c. Relative Humidity: 5% to 95% non-condensing. The controller shall have additional approval requirements, listings, and approvals: a. UL/cUL (E87741) listed under UL916 (Standard for Open Energy Management Equipment) with plenum rating. b. CSA (LR95329-3) Listed c. Meets FCC Part 15, Subpart B, Class B (radiated emissions) requirements. d. Meets Canadian standard C108.8 (radiated emissions). e. Conforms requirements European Consortium standard EN 61000-6-1; 2001 (EU Immunity) f. Conforms requirements European Consortium standard EN 61000-6-3; 2001 (EU Emission). The controller housing shall be UL plenum rated mounting to either a panel or DIN rail (standard EN50022; 7.5mm x 35 mm). The controller shall provide an integrated actuator option. a. Actuator type: Series 60 floating. b. Rotation stroke: 95° ±3° for CW or CCW opening dampers. c. Torque rating: 44 lb-in (5 Nm). d. Run time for 90° rotation: 90 seconds at 60 Hz. The controller shall have four digital inputs (DI), eight digital Triac outputs (DO) or six digital Triac outputs (DO) with Integrated Actuator, three analog outputs (AO), and six universal inputs (UI). BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 23 09 03 - 23 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building a. b. 15. 16. 17. 18. Analog outputs (AO) shall be capable of being configured as digital outputs (DO). Input and Output wiring terminal strips shall be removable form the controller without disconnecting wiring. c. Input and Output wiring terminals shall be designated with color coded labels. The controller shall provide for “user defined” Network Variables (NV) for: a. The controller shall support a range of Network Variables to 62 with a byte count of 31 per variable. b. The controller shall support 1,922 separate data values. The controller shall provide “continuous” automated loop tuning with an Adaptive Integral Algorithm Control Loop. The controller shall have a loop execution response time of 1 second. The controller platform shall have standard HVAC application programs that are modifiable to support both the traditional and specialized “sequence of operations” as outlined in Section 4. a. VAV terminal unit. b. VAV terminal unit fan speed control c. Series fan d. Parallel fan e. Regulated air volume (room pressurization/de-pressurization). f. CV dual-duct g. Room CO2 control. h. Room Humidity i. TOD occupancy sensor stand-by setpoints 2.15 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES A. The VFD shall generate the required variable frequency through three main input voltage lines connected to a coil capacitor LC filter and diode bridge. This shall produce a DC voltage for an insulated gate bi-polar transistor (BGT) bridge. The IGBT Bridge shall produce a pulse-width modulated (PWM) AC voltage for the motor. A microprocessor shall control the motor according to measured signals and control commands set from the VFD control panel. Control commands may be provided by stand-alone sensor input or by output from a DDC building management system. 1. Integral power supply shall be one of the following as required by each motor: a. 200-240 VAC, 3 phase, 45-66 Hz ± 10% b. 380-500 VAC, 3 phase, 45-66 Hz ±10% c. 525-690 VAC, 3 phase, 45-66 Hz ± 10% 2. The ambient ratings and temperature ranges shall: a. Operating 14°F to 104°F (-10°C to 40°C) b. Storage: -40°F to 104°F (-40°C to 60°C) c. Humidity range: 5 to 95% RH, non-condensing The Enclosure shall be rated NEMA 1. The VFD shall be RoHS compliant. The VFD will not contain electrolytic capacitors. The VFD circuit shall be lead-free. All Variable Frequency Drives shall have the following standard features: 1. The VFD shall have Pump and Fan Startup Wizards that can be modified using a personal computer-based commissioning tool with an optional software package, or a field removable control panel. The graphic display shall be removable for separate mounting, a minimum of 45 feet away from the VFD. 2. The VFD shall log and display as a minimum, without adding separate instruments or equipment, the following: a. Temperature of the heat sink. b. Motor temperature B. C. D. BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 23 09 03 - 24 McHugh Engineering Associates E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building c. Output frequency d. Status of analog and digital inputs and outputs e. Motor speed in rmp f. Total kWh consumed g. Total kWh trip counter h. Total kWh run counter i. Total hours run. 3. The VFD shall be UL, cUL, and CE approved. 4. The VFD shall be provided with built-in RFI filters and all models 3 HP or more shall include a DC or AC Choke. 5. The VFD shall have the capability of communicating with over the following protocols: a. BACnet/MSTP and BACnet/IP b. LonBus c. Modbus RTU and Modbus/TCP d. N2 6. The VFD shall accept a 0-10 Vdc or 4-20 mA signal, as well as six programmable digital inputs. 7. The VFD shall have a real-time clock for timed functions. 8. The VFD shall include a minimum of two programmable output relays, to provide signals such as run, ready or fault. It shall also include one 4-20 mA or 0-20 mA programmable output to provide signals such as motor speed, output frequency, or any other selected information. 9. The VFD shall include a Proportional + Integral + Derivative (PID) controller as standard to provide closed loop control directly from a signal transmitter without the need for external signal conditioning. The VFD shall have the ability to be placed into Panel Control mode. In the panel control mode, the operator shall have the ability to enter a speed reference into the display to control the speed of the motor. The VFD shall have sufficient capacity and provide a quality waveform so as to achieve full output power of the motor without causing excessive additional heat rise. 1. The minimum efficiency of the drive shall be: a. >96% at 100% load b. >92% at 20% load The VFD shall comply with the following EMC standards: 1. Immunity: EN50082-1, -2, EN61800-3 2. Emission: EN50081-1, -2, EN61800-3 Output frequency range of 0-320 Hz with a resolution of 0.01 Hz 1. It shall be possible to set switching frequency within the range of 3 kHz to 16 kHz to minimize audible motor noise. A minimum of 8 preset motor speeds shall be available. The VFD shall provide 3 skip frequencies with lower and upper frequency set-points to avoid mechanical resonance. The VFD shall protect itself against: 1. Input transients to VDEO160 class W2 2. Loss of motor phase 3. Grounding of any output phase 4. Loss of speed reference. The VFD shall have an input for a motor thermistor to monitor motor temperature. If a motor thermistor is not connected, the VFD shall model the motor temperature in its software. When overheating of the motor is predicted, an alarm or automatic shutdown shall be initiated. The VFD shall provide full electrical isolation between power and control components, including input and output signals. BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 23 09 03 - 25 McHugh Engineering Associates N. O. P. Q. R. S. T. U. V. W. X. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building The VFD shall have the following protection functions: 1. Heat sink over-temperature. 2. Under-voltage protection. 3. Over-voltage protection. 4. Over-current protection 5. Earth fault protection 6. VFD fault protection 7. Loss of input/output phase protection 8. Motor stalled protection 9. Motor under-load protection 10. Motor over-temperature protection 11. Short circuit protection 12. External fault injection The VFD shall consist of separate modules for the control section, power section, and fan. Each section shall consist of separate modules for the control section, power section, and fan. Each section shall be able to be removed and replaced independent of the other sections. The entire power section must be in a steel enclosure. No other enclosures are acceptable. The control unit section of the VFD shall have the ability to be powered by an external 24 Vdc power supply to allow access to the stored data and to allow for: commissioning, field bus applications, and checkout prior to connecting the main supply. The VFD control panel shall display at least five run status indicators, including: 1. Run 2. Ready 3. Fault 4. Motor Direction 5. Stop The VFD control panel shall have the ability to monitor at least 9 real-time actual values or parameters. The control panel shall allow the user to lock out parameters by choice of a password or parameter selection. The control panel shall have EEPROM to retain all parameters when the VFD is powered down. The control panel shall show, on a fault condition, the following information: 1. Operation days 2. Operation hours 3. Output frequency 4. Motor current 5. Motor voltage 6. Motor Power 7. Motor Torque 8. DC Voltage 9. Unit Temperature 10. Run Status Software 1. The VFD Manufacturer shall offer the following software, at no additional charge or license fee: a. VFD commissioning software b. Updated versions of VFD system software c. Updated versions of VFD applications software d. Updated versions of VFD option board software Installation BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 23 09 03 - 26 McHugh Engineering Associates Y. Z. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building The VFD shall be installed by the mechanical contractor. The contractor shall install the drive in accordance wit the recommendations of the VFD manufacturer, as outlined in the installation manual. The VFD power wiring shall be completed by the electrical contractor. The contractor shall complete all power wiring in accordance with wiring recommendations of the VFD manufacturer, as outlined in the installation manual. Commissioning Commissioning and startup shall be provided by a technician who has been trained and certified by the VFD manufacturer. The VFD shall be commissioned in accordance with the recommendations of the VFD manufacturer, as outline in the application manual. Warranty All VFD components, parts and assemblies shall be guaranteed against defects in materials and workmanship for 36 months. AA. Manufacturer: Honeywell International, Inc, or approved equal. 2.16 ENERGY ANALYSIS AND MANAGEMENT SYSTEM SOFTWARE 1.12.1 Operating System: The Energy Suite shall run Windows XP Professional, Windows 2003 or 2008 Server. The Energy Suite shall employ browser-based functionality for ease of navigation. It shall include a tree view (similar to Windows Explorer) allowing users to view and manipulate underlying systems without the need for dedicated workstations or client software. In addition, menu-pull downs, and toolbars shall employ buttons, commands and navigation to permit the user access to real-time analysis, computations, and reports with a minimum knowledge and basic computing skills. The Energy Suite shall support, as needed, unlimited point and meter capacity. The Energy Suite shall provide a comprehensive M&V Tool that meets International Performance Measurement and Verification Protocol (IPMVP) guidelines. Energy and Enterprise Profiler. The profile shall provide extensive reporting flexibility allowing users to profile any data point over any period of time. The user shall be able to trend and analyze energy, temperature, production, and facility data with, at a minimum, the following reports: Aggregation Analysis. Computes consumption and demand along with load factor for a point or group of points. Average Daily Profile. Displays an average 24 hour period for any day or combination of days. Enterprise Ranking. Ranks energy usage in the enterprise to identify the most and least efficient buildings. Equipment Operation. Displays runtime and runtime percentage for digital points. Exceptions. Allows user to compare data values versus a baseline or against a defined range of values. Load Duration. Identifies the length of time that a demand exceeds a certain level. Point Trending. Performs statistical analysis to determine correlations, standard deviations, slope, regression line, and mean. Relative Contribution. Determines how sub meters or multiple main meters contribute to total energy within or between sites. Spectrum Summary. Utilizes pattern recognition to quickly identify anomalies with inconsistent patterns indicating a need for more detail analysis. Correlation. Shows the correlation between two data logs to determine if any relationship exists between them. Cost Profiler. The profile shall provide extensive reporting flexibility allowing users to compare energy costs based on metered interval data and applicable rate structures. The user shall be able to benchmark facilities, identify inefficiencies, implement changes, and measure the cost impact of BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 23 09 03 - 27 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building energy reduction strategies to proactively manage budgets and calculate accurate cost projections. In addition, the user shall be able to compare different procurement strategies and rate structures without actually switching energy providers or rates. Provide at a minimum the following reports: Bill Reconciliation. Compare utility invoices to calculated values to identify billing errors. User can establish a historical baseline with manually entered date from utility invoices. Cost Contribution. Determine how meters, whether sub meters within a building or main meters across an enterprise, contribute to the aggregate energy expense. Cost Ranking. Ranks meters to determine the most costly. Normalize data based on outside air temperature and floor area. Budget Report. User can enter budgets or use historically generated data, then compare against actual costs and make projections for reporting periods. What-If Analyzer. Enables prediction of future costs. User can manipulate consumption patterns and demand levels to project savings from various strategies. Rate Comparison. Analyze alternative rates and energy providers. Determine the effect of an energy strategy prior to implementation. 2.17 OTHER CONTROL SYSTEM HARDWARE A. Motorized control dampers that will not be integral to the equipment shall be furnished by the BMS contractor. Control damper frames shall be constructed of galvanized, steel, formed into changes and welded or riveted. Dampers shall be galvanized, with nylon bearings. Blade edge seals shall be vinyl. Blade edge and tip seals shall be included for all dampers. Blades shall be 16-guage minimum and 6 inches wide maximum and frame shall be of welded channel iron. Damper leakage shall not exceed 10 CFM per square foot, at 1.5-inches water gauge static pressure. Control damper actuators shall be furnished by the BMS Contractor. Two-position or proportional electric actuators shall be direct-mount type sized to provide a minimum of 5 in-lb torque per square foot of damper area. Damper actuators shall be spring return type. Operators shall be heavy-duty electronic type for positioning automatic dampers in response to control signal. Motor shall be of sufficient size to operate damper positively and smoothly to obtain correct sequence as indicated. All applications requiring proportional operation shall utilize truly proportional electric actuators. Control Valves: Control valves shall be 2-way or 3-way pattern as shown and constructed for tight shutoff at the pump shut-off head or steam relief valve pressure. Control valves shall operate satisfactorily against system pressures and differentials. Two position valves shall be ‘line’ size. Proportional control valves shall be sized for a maximum pressure drop for a maximum pressure drop of 5.0 psi at rated flow (unless otherwise noted or scheduled on the drawings). Valves with sizes up to and including 2 inches shall be “screwed’ configuration and 2-1/2 inch and larger valves shall be “flanged” configuration. All control valves, including terminal unit valves, less than 2 inch shall be globe valves. Electrically-actuated control valves shall include spring return type actuators sized for tight shut-off against system pressures (as specified above) and, when specified, shall be furnished with integral switches for indication of valve position (open-closed). Pneumatic actuators for valves, when utilized, shall be sized for tight shut-off against system pressures (as specified above). Control Valve Actuators: Actuators for VAV terminal unit heating coils shall be “drive-closed” type. All actuators shall have inherent current limiting motor protection. Valve actuators shall be 24-volt, electronic type, modulating or two-position as required for the correct operating sequence. Actuators on valves needing ‘fail-safe’ operation shall have spring return to Normal position. Modulating valves shall be positive positioning in response to the signal. All valve actuators shall be UL listed. All control valves 2 ½” or larger shall have position indication. All hot water control valves shall be Normally-Open arrangement; all chilled water control valves shall be Normally-Closed arrangement. Dynamic Pressure-Regulating Control Valves The valve and actuator combination product family shall be a factory assembled and tested unit. B. C. D. E. F. BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 23 09 03 - 28 McHugh Engineering Associates G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N. O. P. Q. R. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Wall Mount Room Temperature sensors: Each room temperature sensor shall provide temperature indication to the digital controller, provide the capability for a software-limited occupant set point adjustment (warmer-cooler slider bar or switch) and limited operation override capability. Room temperature Sensors shall be 20,000-ohm thermistor type with a temperature range of -40 to 140 degrees F. The sensor shall be complete with a decorative cover and suitable for mounting over a standard electrical utility box. These devices shall have an accuracy of 0.5 degrees, F., over the entire range. Provide unoccupied override button and setpoint adjustment on all sensors except those located in classrooms and public spaces. Duct-mounted and Outside Air Temperature Sensors: 20,000-ohm thermistor temperature sensors with an accuracy of ±0.2°C. Outside air sensors shall include an integral sun shield. Duct-mounted sensors shall have an insertion measuring probe of a length appropriate for the duct size, with a temperature range of -40 to 160 degrees F. The sensor shall include a utility box and a gasket to prevent air leakage and vibration noise. For all mixed air and preheat air applications, install bendable averaging duct sensors with a minimum 8 – foot long sensor element. These devices shall have accuracy of 0.5 degrees F, over the entire range. Humidity sensors shall be thin-film capacitive type sensor with on-board nonvolatile memory, accuracy to plus or minus two percent (2%) at 0 to 90% RH, 12 – 30 VDC input voltage, analog output (0-10 VDC or – 20 mA output). Operating range shall be 0 to 100% RH and 32 59 140 degree F. Sensors shall be selected for wall, duct or outdoor type installation as appropriate. Carbon Dioxide Sensors (CO2): Sensors shall utilize Non-dispersive infrared technology (N.D.I.R.), repeatable to plus or minus five percent (5%) or 75 PPM, whichever is greater. Response shall be less than one minute. Input voltage shall be 20 to 30 VAC or DC. Output shall be 0 – 10 VDC. Sensor shall be wall or duct mounted type, as appropriate for the application, housed in a high impact plastic enclosure. Current Sensitive Switches: Solid state, split core current switch that operates when the current level (sensed by the internal current transformer) exceeds the adjustable trip point. Current switch to include an integral LED for indication of trip condition and a current level below trip set point. Differential Analog (duct) Static Pressure Transmitters provide a pressure transmitter with integral capacitance type sensing and solid-state circuitry. Accuracy shall be plus or minus 1% of full range; range shall be selected for the specific application. Provide zero and span adjustment capability. Device shall have integral static pickup tube. Differential Air Pressure Switches: Provide SPDT type, UL-approved, and selected for the appropriate operating range where applied. Switches shall have adjustable setpoints and barbed pressure tips. Water Flow Switches: Provide a SPST type contact switch with bronze paddle blade, size for the actual pipe size at the location. If installed outdoors, provide a NEMA-4 enclosure. Flow switch shall be UL listed. Temperature Control Panels: Furnish temperature control panels of code gauge steel with locking doors for mounting all devices as shown. All electrical devices within a control panel shall be factory wired. Control panel shall be assembled by the BMS in a UL-Certified 508A panel shop. A complete set of ‘as-built’ control drawings (relating to the controls within the panel) shall be furnished within each control panel. Pipe and Duct Temperature sensing elements: 20,000-ohm thermistor temperature sensors with and accuracy of ±1% accuracy. Their range shall be -5 to 250°F. Limited range sensors shall be acceptable provided they are capable of sensing the range expected for the point at the specified accuracy. Thermal wells with heat conductive gel shall be included. Low Air Temperature Sensors: Provide SPST type switch, with 15 to 55 degrees F., range, vaporcharged temperature sensor. Honeywell model L482A, or approved equivalent. Relays: Start/stop relay model shall provide either momentary or maintained switching action as appropriate for the motor being started. All relays shall be plugged in, interchangeable, mounted on a subbase and wired to numbered terminals strips. Relays installed in panels shall all be DPDT with indicating lamp. Relays installed outside of controlled devices shall be enclosed in a NEMA BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 23 09 03 - 29 McHugh Engineering Associates S. T. U. V. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building enclosure suitable for the location. Relays shall be labeled with UR symbol. RIB-style relays are acceptable for remote enable/disable. Emergency Stop Switches: Provide toggle-type switch with normally-closed contact. Switch shall be labeled “AIR HANDLER EMERGENCY SHUTOFF, NORMAL – OFF.” Transducers: Differential pressure transducers shall be electronic with a 4-20 mA output signal compatible to the Direct Digital Controller. Wetted parts shall be stainless steel. Unit shall be designed to operate in the pressure ranges involved. Control Power Transformers: Provide step-down transformers for all DDC controllers and devices as required. Transformers shall be sized for the load, but shall be sized for 50 watts, minimum. Transformers shall be UL Listed Class 2 type, for 120VAC/24VAC operation. Line voltage protection: All DDC system control panels that are powered by 120 VAC circuits shall be provided with surge protection. This protection is in addition to any internal protection provided by the manufacturer. The protection shall meet UL, ULC 149, IEEE C62.41B A grounding conductor, (minimum 12 AWG), shall be brought to each control panel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SUBMITTALS A. All sequences shall be provided for owner and design engineer review no less than 90 days prior to any programming commences. The materials, equipment and software design shall be submitted as follows: 1. Control Contractor shall submit qualifications as outlined in Part 1, 1.1.A.2.b Control contractor requirement including: a. Names of Tridium certified employees in your employ today. b. List (5) WEBs-AX™/ WEBs-AX™ Supervisor projects of similar size. c. Location of principal place of business that would respond to service requests the first year. d. Letter from Honeywell Regional representative stating your company is in good standing with the ACI and ACS Program. e. Requirements (a thru d above) shall be submitted to project engineer for review for approval. No work shall be allowed without written approval. All information shall be handled in confidence and not for distribution to third parties. f. Requirements of Quality Assurance (1.10) shall apply fully also and acknowledge in written form. 2. Ten copies of shop drawings or the entire control system shall be submitted and shall consist of a complete list of equipment and materials, including manufacturers’ catalog data sheets and installation instructions, samples of written controller checkout sheets and performance verification procedures for applications similar in scope shall be included for approval. 3. Shop drawings shall also contain complete wiring I/O point list for each system, schematic diagrams, sequences of operations, control system bus layout and any other details required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will properly function as a system. Shop drawings shall be approved before any equipment is installed. Please allow 10 days for submission, review and return by engineer. 4. All dampers and actuator valves and actuator shall be sized and submitted with shop drawing. Schedule shall include: a. Identification tag all dampers/valves. b. Location all damper/valves. c. Damper and/or Valve type. B. BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 23 09 03 - 30 McHugh Engineering Associates 5. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building d. Actuator size and type. e. Damper and/or valve pressure drop. Submittal shall also a “sample of prior art” for project of the graphics. This web-based interface with the network via dynamic color shall include a flowchart (site map) indicating how the graphics are to be linked to one another for system navigation. Minimum depiction for graphics for project: a. Building picture and site plot plan (aerial or ground view provided by owner). b. Building floor plan. c. Each mechanical system. d. Control devices depicted by point-and-click graphics. Note: Floor plan shall indicate each mechanical zone with different colors shaded as required to depict which zones are not maintaining temperature/humidity/pressure/CO2, etc programmable levels/limits and which zones are in alarm. Provide animated graphic for each system component including rooftop units, air handling units, UAV terminals, fan powered terminals, exhaust fans, supply fans, hot water systems – boilers, hot water pumps; chilled water systems – chillers, cold water pump condenser water pumps, cooling towers, etc. The graphics are intended to be 20% - 30% complete at this stage with changes to be based on review comments from the engineer and/or owner. B. C. 3.02 Upon completion of the work, provide a complete set of as-built drawings on compact disk (CD). Additionally, all control device furnished with this section shall be programmable directly from Tridium AX™ workbench. Upon completion of this project, the following copies of software shall be included on CD for the owner: 1. The BMS contractor shall use the “contract CD to owner – software package” to simulate all software application programs to ensure such programs are free from design errors and they accurately accomplish the application(s) sequence-of-operation. This simulation shall include the WEBs-AX™ embedded tool in controller allowing for the capability of other Niagara factory certified contractor(s) access to the programming capability. The simulation shall be demonstrated before the owner/engineer at time and place arranged by the owner. Allow for a minimum of (8) hours for the demonstration and software changes resulting from the demonstration the owner feels should be changed/enhanced, etc. will/may result in another demonstration if so requested by owner. These changes will be made at no additional expense to owner. 2. Four copies of the “as-built” drawings shall be provided in addition to the document on compact disk. All “as-built” drawings shall also be installed into the FMCS server in a dedicated directory. For each JACE™ (WEBs-AX™) the station shall be copied to supervisor and distribution file copy back-up and written to CD to owners’ hands. 3. Control contractor shall provide “quote” to owner to install mechanical equipment service information such as, spare parts list, mechanical service contractors, etc into FMCS server as a dedicated directory. Owner, working with engineer, shall develop specification requirements for control contractor. Control contractor shall include (8) hours of technical support, including updating information as requested by owner, covering the time interval of the warranty period. INSTALLATION BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 23 09 03 - 31 McHugh Engineering Associates A. B. C. D. E. F. 3.03 Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Install system and materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, and as detailed on the project drawing set. Line and low voltage electrical connections to control equipment show specified or show on the control diagrams shall be furnished and installed by the Control System Contractor in accordance with these specifications. Equipment furnished by the Mechanical Contractor that is normally wired before installation shall be furnished completely wired. Control wiring normally performed in the field will be furnished and installed by the Control System Contractor. All control devices mounted on the face of control panels shall be clearly identified as to function and system served with permanently engraved phenolic label. Installation of Network 1. Ethernet a. The network shall employ Ethernet LAN architecture, as defined by IEEE 802.3. The Network Interface shall be fully Internet Protocol (IP) compliant allowing connection to currently installed IEEE 802.3, Compliant Ethernet Networks. b. The network shall directly support connectivity to a variety of cabling types. As a minimum provide the following connectivity: 10 Base 2 (ThinNet RG-58 A/U Coaxial cabling with BNC connectors, 10 Base T (Twisted-Pair-RJ-45 terminated UTP cabling). 2. LONWorks a. The network shall employ LonTalk communications FTT-10. 3. BACnet ms/tp a. The network shall employ BACnet MS/TP EIA-485-A Standard. b. The MS/TP EIA-485 network shall use shielded, twisted-pair cable with a characteristic impedance between 100 and 130 ohms. 4. Third Party Interfaces: Contractor shall integrate real-time data from building systems by other trades and databases originating from other manufacturers as specified and required to make the system work as one system. Installation of Digital Controllers and Programming 1. Provide a separate digital control panel for each major piece of equipment, such as air handling unit, chiller, pumping unit etc. Points used for control loop reset such as outdoor air, outdoor humidity, or space temperature could be located on any of the remote control units. 2. Provide sufficient internal memory for the specified control sequences and trend logging. There shall be a minimum of 25 percent of available memory free for future use. 3. System point names shall be modular in design, permitting easy operator interface without the use of a written point index. 4. Provide software programming for the applications intended for the systems specified, and adhere to the strategy algorithms provided. 5. Provide graphics for each piece of equipment and floor plan in the building. This includes each chiller, cooling tower, air handling unit, fan, terminal unit, boiler, pumping unit etc. These graphics shall show all points dynamically as specified in the point list. IT MANAGER’S GUIDE TO NIAGARA Tridium has developed a document that addresses many of the issues that IT managers have relating to Tridium’s Niagara AX Framework™ and platform and station connections. See www. Tridium.com for document. 3.04 WIRING BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 23 09 03 - 32 McHugh Engineering Associates A. B. C. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building All electrical control wiring and power wiring to the control panels, NAC, computers and network components shall be the responsibility of this contractor. The electrical contractor (Division16) shall furnish all power wiring to electrical starters and motors. All wiring shall be in accordance with the Project Electrical Specifications (Division16), the National Electrical Code and any applicable local codes. All FMCS wiring shall be installed in the conduit types specified in the Project Electrical Specifications (Division 16) unless otherwise allowed by the National Electrical Code or applicable local codes. Where FMCS plenum rated cable wiring is allowed, it shall be run parallel to or at right angles to the structure, properly supported and installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. All plenum rated wiring shall run in concealed spaces. All wiring shall be in EMT conduit when exposed and when subject to damage. 3.05 START UP AND COMMISSIONING A. J. Commissioning Agent: Where a commissioning agent has been hired/specified to perform the startup and commission for this project, the BMS contractor shall provide a technician with WEB certified skills and this technician shall be available as requested. The BMS contractor’s technician shall work with the commissioning agent so as to expedite a smooth process of start-up and commissioning. The BAS contractor shall verify that all wiring is properly connected and free of all shorts and ground faults. Verify that all connections are tightened appropriately. Calibrate each device as required by the manufacturer’s recommendations. Verify that the digital output devices operate properly and that the normal positions are correct. Verify that all analog output devices are functional, that start point and span are correct, and that direction and normal positions are correct including fail-safe positions. The contractor shall check all control valves and automatic dampers to ensure proper action and closure. The contractor shall make any necessary adjustment to valve stem and damper blade travel. Complete software shall be installed and tested (dry run) prior to start-up. Software technician shall observe and fine tune all control loops. Alarms and interlocks: 1. Check each alarm separately by including an appropriate signal at a value that will trip the alarm. 2. Interlocks shall be tripped using field contracts to check the logic, as well as to ensure that the fail-safe condition for all actuators is in the proper direction. Interlock actions shall be tested by simulating alarm conditions to check the initiating value of the variable and interlock action. Return the system to a normal operating state after each phase of start-up, commissioning and demonstration. Any points overridden, devices place in manual position, setpoint adjusted, etc. are to be restored to normal operation condition prior to acceptance. Connection to the Internet must be tested and communication confirmed. 3.06 SYSTEM VALIDATION AND DEMONSTRATION A. As part of final system acceptance, a System Demonstration is required (see below). Prior to start of this Demonstration, the contractor is to perform a complete validation of all aspects of the Controls and Instrumentation System. Validation 1. Prepare and submit for approval a Validation Test Plan including Test Procedures for the performance verification tests. Test Plan shall address all specified functions of the Engineering Control Center and all specified sequences of operation. Explain in detail actions and expected results used to demonstrate compliance with the requirements of this specification. Explain the method for simulating the necessary conditions of operation used to demonstrate performance of the system. Test plan shall include a Test Check List to be B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. B. BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 23 09 03 - 33 McHugh Engineering Associates C. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building used by the Installer’s agent to check and initial that each test has been successfully completed. Deliver Test Plan documentation for the performance verification tests to the Architect or Owner’s Representative, 30 calendar days prior to start of performance verification tests. Provide draft copy of operation and maintenance manual with performance verification test 2. After approval of the Validation Test Plan, Installer shall carry out all tests and procedures therein. Installer shall completely check out, calibrate, and test all connected hardware and software to insure that system performs in accordance with approved specifications and sequences of operation submitted. Installer shall complete and submit Test Check List Demonstration 1. System operation and calibration to be demonstrated by the Installer in the presence of the Architect or Owner’s representative on random samples of equipment as dictated by the Owner’s representative. Should random sampling indicate improper commissioning, the owner reserves the right to subsequently witness complete calibration of the system at no additional cost to the owner. 2. Demonstrate to authorities that all required safeties and life safety functions are fully functional and complete. 3. Make accessible personnel to provide necessary adjustments and corrections to systems as directed by balancing agency. 4. Witnessed validation demonstration of Operator’s Terminal functions shall consist of: a. Running each specified report. b. Display and demonstrate each data entry to show site specific customizing capability. Demonstrate parameter changes. c. Step through penetration tree, display all graphics, demonstrate dynamic update, and direct access to graphics. d. Execute digital and analog commands in graphic mode. e. Demonstrate DDC loop precision and stability via trend logs of inputs and outputs 6 loops minimum. f. Demonstrate BMS performance via trend logs and command trace. g. Demonstrate scan, update, and alarm responsiveness. h. Demonstrate spreadsheet/curve plot software, and its integration with database. i. Demonstrate on-line user guide, and help function and mail facility. j. Demonstrate digital system configuration graphics with interactive upline and downline load, and demonstrate specified diagnostics. k. Demonstrate multitasking by showing dynamic curve plot, and graphic construction operating simultaneously via split screen. l. Demonstrate class programming with point options of beep duration, beep rate, alarm archiving, and color banding. 3.07 PROJECT CLOSEOUT - ACCEPTANCE TESTING A. Upon completion of the installation, the BMS Contractor shall load all system software and start-up system. The BMS Contractor shall perform all necessary calibration, testing and de-bugging and perform all required operational checks to insure that the system is functioning in full accordance with these specifications. System Acceptance: Satisfactory completion is when the BMS Contractor has performed successfully all the required testing to show performance compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative. System acceptance shall be contingent upon completion and review of all corrected deficiencies. B. 3.08 OPERATOR TRAINING BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 23 09 03 - 34 McHugh Engineering Associates A. B. C. 3.09 A. B. C. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building During system commissioning and at such time acceptable performance of the Control System hardware and software has been established, the BMS Contractor shall provide on-site operator instruction to the owner’s operating personnel. Operator instruction shall be done during normal working hours and shall be done during normal working hours and shall be performed by a competent representative familiar with the system hardware, software and accessories. The BMS Contractor shall provide 40 hours of comprehensive training in two separate sessions (80 hours total) for system orientation, product maintenance and troubleshooting, programming and engineering, if not provided under a previous contract at the site using the same brand and type of controllers within the previous 3 years. Train the designated staff or representative to enable them to do the following: 1. Day-to-day Operations: a. Proficiently operate the system. b. Understand control system architecture and configuration. c. Understand BMS system components d. Understand system operation, including BMS system control and optimizing routines (algorithms). e. Operate the workstation and peripherals. f. Log on and off the system. g. Access graphics, point reports, and logs. h. Adjust and change system setpoints, time schedule, and holiday schedules. i. Recognize malfunctions of the system by observation of the printed copy and graphical visual signals. j. Understand system drawings and Operation and Maintenance Manuals. k. Understand job layout and location of control components. l. Access data from BMS controllers and application specific controllers. m. Operate portable operator terminals. 2. Advanced Operators: a. Make and change graphics on the workstation. b. Create, delete, and modify alarms, including annunciation and routing of these. c. Create, delete, and modify point trend logs and graphic or print these both on an adhoc basis and at user-definable intervals. d. Create, delete, and modify reports. e. Perform BAS system field checkout procedures. f. Perform BAS controller unit operation and maintenance procedures. g. Perform workstation and peripheral operation and maintenance procedures. h. Perform BAS diagnostic procedures. i. Configure hardware including PC boards, switches, communication, and I/O points. j. Adjust, calibrate, and replace system components. 3. System Managers/Administrators a. Interface with job-specific, third party operator software. b. Add new users and understand password procedures. WARRANTY PERIOD SERVICES Equipment, materials and workmanship incorporated into the work shall be warranted for a period of one year from the time of system acceptance by owner. Within this period, upon notice by the Owner, any defects in the BMS due to faulty materials, methods of installation or workmanship shall be promptly repaired or replaced by the Control System Contractor at no expense to the Owner. Maintenance of Computer Software Programs: The BMS Contractor shall maintain all software during the warranty period. In addition, all factory or sub-vendor upgrades to software shall be BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 23 09 03 - 35 McHugh Engineering Associates D. E. F. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building added to the systems, when they become available, at no additional cost. New products are not considered upgrades in this context. Maintenance of Control Hardware: The Control System Contractor shall inspect, repair, replace, adjust and calibrate, as required, the controllers, control devices and associated peripheral units during the warranty period. The Control System Contractor shall then furnish a report describing the status of the equipment, problem areas (if any) noticed during service work and description of the corrective actions taken. The report shall clearly certify that all software is functioning correctly. Service Period: Calls for service by the Owner shall be honored within 24 hours and are not to be considered as part of routine maintenance. Service Documentation: A copy of the service report associated with each owner-initiated service call shall be provided to the owner. 3.10 WARRANTY ACCESS: Verify with owner(s) and/or IT representative on the model of service access into your BMS system for the warranty period. This access shall cover diagnostics and troubleshooting. A. The Owner shall grant to the BMS Contractor reasonable access to the BMS during the warranty period. Remote access to the BMS (for the purpose of diagnostics and troubleshooting, via the Internet, during the warranty period) will be allowed. 3.11 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. See Part 1 for requirements. O&M manuals shall include the following elements, as a minimum. 1. As-built control drawings for all equipment. 2. As-built Network Communication Diagram. 3. As-built Programming Sequences. 4. General description and specifications for all components. 5. Completed Performance Verification Sheets. 6. Completed Controller Checkout/Calibration sheets. *6. (1) Copy of “Owner’s CD” as specified in Section 15000. 7. All equipment manufacturers/suppliers shall provide in writing (and documented if requested by the Owner) a NICS statement indication the interface with their equipment has no connectivity restrictions. The station and tool “NICS” would be as follows: Property Station Compatibility In Station Compatibility Out Total Compatibility In Total Compatibility Out 3.12 Value All All All All CONTRACT EQUIPMENT PROFILE UNDER BMS CONTRACT The following listed equipment shall be under direct control or monitored by the specified automated systems. Project BMS contractor, under this division, is responsible for all listed equipment and all other equipment references under the specifications and/or mechanical plans for automation interface. NICS full connectivity without restrictions shall apply: BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 23 09 03 - 36 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building PART 4 - SEQUENCES 4.01 CABINET UNIT HEATERS - ELECTRIC A. Provide a wall mounted thermostat which shall energize and de-energize the radiation to satisfy space temperatures. Wiring of thermostat is control wiring to be provided by the mechanical contractor regardless of line or low voltage. B. 4.02 UNIT HEATERS - ELECTRIC A. Provide integral thermostat which shall start and stop the unit heater to maintain space temperatures. Fan shall start and stop with heating element. Wiring of thermostat is control wiring to be provided by the mechanical contractor regardless of line or low voltage. B. 4.03 FREEZESTATS A. B. All units with hot water coils within the units or duct mounted coils shall have averaging freezestats on the leaving side of the hot water coil. The unit shall be de-energized, the outside air damper shall close, the return air damper (if required) shall fully open, and the hot water control valve shall fully open, if the freezestat falls below 40 degrees. 4.04 DUCT MOUNTED SMOKE DETECTORS A. B. C. Furnish and install duct mounted smoke detectors in the supply air and return air of each unit operating at 2,000 CFM or more. Detectors shall de-energize the unit and signal the fire alarm system if smoke is detected. Detectors shall be accessible. 4.05 EXHAUST FANS A. Provide a seven day time clock which shall start and stop the toilet room exhaust fans according to the schedule directed by the owner. Contactors and relays shall be provided by this contractor. Exhaust fans shall be interlocked with the supply system within the area such that whenever the supply system is in the occupied cycle of operation, the associated exhaust fan in the area shall be energized. Exhaust fans shall have automatic motor operated dampers in the roof curb which shall close when the fan is de-energized. Fitness Room exhaust fans shall operate based on space pressure as sensed by space pressure sensor. B. C. D. 4.06 DOMESTIC WATER HEATING SYSTEM A. Provide a tank mounted immersion temperature sensing element which shall, on a fall in tank water temperature below the setpoint (110°F, adjustable), alarm the BAS. 4.07 DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEM BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 23 09 03 - 37 McHugh Engineering Associates A. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Provide space temperature sensor which shall, on a rise of space temperature above setpoint (90°F, adjustable), alarm the BAS. A.08 VAV TERMINAL UNIT CONTROLS A. Provide VAV box controller to communicate with air handling unit, wall temperature sensor/thermostat, CO2 sensor, discharge air temperature sensor, and BAS in order to provide the following sequences: 1.Occupied: Normal operating mode for occupied spaces or daytime operation. When the unit is in the occupied mode the VAV shall maintain the space temperature at the active occupied heating or cooling setpoint. Applicable ventilation and airflow setpoints shall be enforced. The occupied mode shall be the default mode of the VAV. 2.Unoccupied: Normal operating mode for unoccupied spaces or nighttime operation. When the unit is in unoccupied mode the VAV controller shall maintain the space temperature at the stored unoccupied heating or cooling setpoint regardless of the presence of a hardwired or communicated setpoint. When the space temperature exceeds the active unoccupied setpoint the VAV shall modulate fully closed. 3.Occupied Bypass: Mode used to temporarily place the unit into the occupied operation. Tenants shall be able to override the unoccupied mode from the space sensor. The override shall last for a maximum of 4 hours (adj.). The tenants shall be able to cancel the override from the space sensor at any time. During the override the unit shall operate in occupied mode. 4.Heat/Cool Mode: The Heat/Cool mode shall be set by a communicated value or automatically by the VAV. In standalone or auto mode the VAV shall compare the primary air temperature with the configured auto changeover setpoint to determine if the air is "hot" or "cold". Heating mode shall command the VAV to heat only; it implies the primary air temperature is hot. Cooling mode shall command the VAV to cool only; it implies the primary air temperature is cold. 5.Heat/Cool Setpoint: The space temperature setpoint shall be determined either by a local (e.g., thumbwheel) setpoint, the VAV default setpoint or a communicated value. The VAV shall use the locally stored default setpoints when neither a local setpoint nor communicated setpoint is present. If both a local setpoint and communicated setpoint exist, the VAV shall use the communicated value. 6.Cooling Mode: When the unit is in cooling mode, the VAV controller shall maintain the space temperature at the active cooling setpoint by modulating the airflow between the active cooling minimum airflow setpoint to the maximum cooling airflow setpoint. Based on the VAV controller occupancy mode, the active cooling setpoint shall be one of the following: Setpoint Occupied Cooling Setpoint Unoccupied Cooling Setpoint Occupied Standby Cooling Setpoint Occupied Min Cooling Airflow Setpoint Occupied Max Cooling Airflow Setpoint Default Value 74.0 deg. F 85.0 deg. F 78.0 deg. F See VAV Schedule See VAV Schedule The VAV shall use the measured space temperature and the active cooling setpoint to determine the requested cooling capacity of the unit. The outputs will be controlled based on the unit configuration and the requested cooling capacity. 7.Heating Mode: When the unit is in heating mode, the VAV controller shall maintain the space temperature at the active heating setpoint by modulating the airflow between the active BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 23 09 03 - 38 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building heating minimum airflow setpoint to the maximum heating airflow setpoint. Based on the VAV controller occupancy mode, the active heating setpoint shall be one of the following: Setpoint Occupied Heating Setpoint Unoccupied Heating Setpoint Occupied Standby Heating Setpoint Occupied Min Heating Airflow Setpoint Occupied Max Heating Airflow Setpoint Default Value 71.0 deg. F 60.0 deg. F 67.0 deg. F See VAV Schedule See VAV Schedule The VAV controller shall use the measured space temperature and the active heating setpoint to determine the requested heating capacity of the unit. The outputs will be controlled based on the unit configuration and the requested heating capacity. 8.Reheat Control: Reheat shall only be allowed when the primary air temperature is 5.0 deg. F below the configured reheat enable setpoint of 70.0 deg. F (adj.). The reheat shall be enabled when the space temperature drops below the active cooling setpoint and the airflow is at the minimum cooling airflow setpoint. During reheat the VAV shall operate at its minimum heating airflow setpoint and energize the heat as follows: 9.Proportional Hot Water Reheat:If the space temperature is below the heating setpoint the hot water reheat valve shall modulate as required to maintain the active heating setpoint. 4.09 CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLER A. Furnish and install all associated controls required to provide the following sequences: 1. Optimized Start –The BAS shall monitor scheduled occupied time, space temperatures, and occupied space setpoints in order to calculate when Optimized Start sequence shall be enabled. a.Morning Warm-Up Mode – During optimized start, if the average space temperature is below the occupied heating setpoint, Morning Warm-Up Mode shall be activated. When Morning Warm-Up is initiated the heating coil and supply fan shall be enabled, the minimum outside air damper and economizer dampers shall be closed, and the return air damper shall be open. The heating coil and supply fan shall modulate supply air temperature and volume in order to meet the average space temperature setpoint before the next scheduled occupied time. b.Pre-Cool Mode – During optimized start, if the average space temperature is above the occupied cooling setpoint, Pre-Cool Mode shall be activated. When Pre-Cool is initiated the unit cooling coil (and/or economizer) and supply fan shall be enabled, the minimum outside air damper and economizer dampers shall be closed (unless economizing), and the return air damper shall be open. The cooling coil (and/or economizer) and supply fan shall modulate supply air temperature and volume in order to meet the average space temperature setpoint before the next scheduled occupied time. 2. Optimized Stop - The BAS shall monitor scheduled unoccupied time, space temperatures, and occupied standby setpoints in order to calculate when Optimized Stop sequence shall be enabled. When Optimized Stop sequence is initiated the heating and cooling coils shall be disabled, the supply fan shall continue to operate, the minimum outside air damper and return air damper shall modulate to maintain minimum outside air, and the economizer damper shall be closed. The supply fan shall modulate in order to meet the average space temperature occupied standby setpoint before the next scheduled unoccupied time. BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 23 09 03 - 39 McHugh Engineering Associates B. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building 3. Supply Fan - The fan shall be off in the unoccupied mode. During occupied mode, the supply fan shall operate continuously. If the supply fan fails to prove status for 30 seconds (adj.), the fan shall be disabled, the minimum outside air damper and economizer dampers shall be closed, the return air damper shall be open, heating and cooling coils shall disable and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BAS. A manual reset shall be required to restart the fan. A hardwired, high static pressure cut-off switch shall be electrically interlocked with the variable speed drive. If the high static pressure cut-off switch is tripped the fan shall be disabled, the minimum outside air damper and economizer dampers shall be closed, the return air damper shall be open, heating and cooling coils shall disable and an alarm shall be annunciated at the BAS. A manual reset of the high static pressure cut-off switch shall be required to restart the fan. 4. Fan Pressure Optimization – The BAS shall monitor VAV air damper positions in order to determine the duct static pressure setpoint. The fan shall modulate to maintain duct static pressure setpoint. The duct static pressure setpoint shall be shall be reset between the minimum and maximum static pressure limits to maintain at least one VAV air damper in a 100% open position. 5. Supply air temperature reset – The BAS shall utilize outside air dry bulb temperature in order to determine supply air temperature setpoint based on the following reset schedule (adj.): OA-65°F, SAT-55°F; OA-60°F, SAT-57.5°F; OA-55°F, SAT-60°F. The BAS shall reset the supply air temperature setpoint based on the outside air temperature, but will override this reset function and return the supply air temperature setpoint to 55.0 deg. F (adj.) if more than two (adj.) zones begin to overheat. Also, the BAS will override this reset function whenever outdoor dew point is higher than 60.0 deg. F (adj.) or indoor humidity is higher than 60% RH (adj.). If the supply air temperature drops below the minimum limit (adj.), a low temperature alarm will be annunciated and the unit will shut down. If the supply air temperature rises above the maximum limit (adj.), a high temperature alarm will be annunciated. 6. Ventilation Optimization – The BAS shall monitor the occupied status of each zone based on CO2 monitoring, occupancy sensors, calls for occupied bypass, and occupancy schedule. The BAS shall also monitor outside airflow via the airflow measuring station. The BAS shall utilize zone occupied status and outside airflow in order to calculate the minimum required outside airflow. The minimum outside air damper shall modulate to maintain minimum outside airflow setpoint. 7. Occupied standby mode - The BAS shall monitor the status of the “on” and “cancel” buttons of the space temperature sensors. When an occupied bypass request is received from a space sensor, the unit shall transition from its current occupancy mode to occupied bypass mode and the unit shall maintain the space temperature to the occupied bypass setpoints (adj.). 8. Exhaust Fan - Upon a rise in building pressure above building pressure setpoint (0.05" wg, adjustable) as sensed by differential pressure sensor; motor operated damper shall open to minimum position, then fan shall enable. Pressure Control - Fan and motor operated damper shall modulate to maintain building pressure setpoint (0.05" wg, adjustable). Shut-down Upon a fall in building pressure below building pressure setpoint (0.05" wg, adjustable) as sensed by differential pressure sensor; fan shall disable, then motor operated damper shall close. 9. Filter Status - A differential pressure switch shall monitor the differential pressure across the filter when the fan is running. If the differential pressure exceeds the maximum differential pressure setpoint (0.75”wg, adj.) during normal operation a dirty filter alarm shall be annunciated at the BAS. Unit shall have a freezestat on the leaving side of the hot water coil and chilled water coil. If the freezestat falls below 38°F (adj.), the air handling unit shall shutdown, minimum outside air damper and economizer damper shall close, return air damper shall open, and circulation pumps shall be enabled. BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 23 09 03 - 40 McHugh Engineering Associates C. D. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Unit shall have return air temperature and humidity sensors, outside air temperature and humidity sensors, economizer damper, and return damper dampers for dual enthalpy economizer operation. Unit shall be deenergized and dampers close on a signal from the fire alarm system. END OF SECTION BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 23 09 03 - 41 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 23 09 93 - VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. B. C. 1.02 A. B. C. 1.03 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. REFERENCE Refer to section 23 05 00 for requirements which are applicable to this section. Refer to National Electrical Code. Refer to IEEE 444, IEEE 519, UL 508C and NEMA ICS 71. WORK INCLUDED Provide all labor, material, equipment, and supervision necessary to install solid state, PWM, VFC’s for speed control of three phase, squirrel-cage induction motors. Control wiring shall be furnished under this portion of the work. Coordinate all work with electrical contractor. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of VFC, provide dimensions; mounting arrangements; location for conduit entries; shipping and operating weights; and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical ratings, characteristics, and finishes. Shop Drawings: For each type of VFC. 1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following: a. Each installed unit's type and details. b. Nameplate legends. c. Short-circuit current ratings of integrated unit. d. UL listing for series rating of over-current protective devices in combination controllers. e. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of each motor-control center unit. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring for VFC. Provide schematic wiring diagram for each type of VFC. Qualification Data: For testing agency and manufacturer. Field Test Reports: Written reports specified in Part 3 Manufacturer's field service report. Operation and Maintenance Data: For VFCs, all installed devices, and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. Routine maintenance requirements for VFCs and all installed components. 2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate full-load currents. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have been installed and arrange to demonstrate that dip switch settings for motor running overload protection suit actual motor to be protected. VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS 23 09 93 - 1 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. F. G. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain, within 100 miles (160 km) of Project site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance and repairs. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. Source Limitations: Obtain VFCs of a single type through one source from a single manufacturer. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use shall meet or exceed UL 508C and NEMA ICS 7.1 for rated fault current interrupting capacity. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for VFCs, minimum clearances between VFCs, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated dimensions and clearances. Comply with NFPA 70. Comply with IEEE 444 and IEEE 519. 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of VFCs with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Coordinate features of VFCs, installed units, and accessory devices with pilot devices and control circuits to which they connect. Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each VFC and each installed unit with ratings and characteristics of supply circuit, motor, required control sequence, and duty cycle of motor and load. B. C. D. E. B. C. D. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. ABB Power Distribution, Inc.; ABB Control, Inc. Subsidiary. 2. Eaton Corp.; Cutler Hammer Products. 3. General Electrical Distribution & Control. 4. MagneTek Drives and Systems. 5. Rockwell Automation Allen Bradley Co.; Industrial Control Group. 6. Square D Co. 7. Toshiba International Corporation. 8. Approved equal. 2.02 VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS A. The VFD package as specified herein shall be enclosed in a UL Listed Type enclosure, (NEMA rated enclosures are not acceptable) completely assembled and tested by the manufacturer in an VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS 23 09 93 - 2 McHugh Engineering Associates B. C. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building ISO9001 facility. The VFD tolerated voltage window shall allow the VFD to operate from a line of +30% nominal, and -35% nominal voltage as a minimum. 1. Environmental operating conditions: 0 – 400 C continuous. Altitude 0 to 3300 feet above sea level, up to 95% humidity, non-condensing. All circuit boards shall have conformal coating. 2. Enclosure shall be rated UL type 1 and shall be UL listed as a plenum rated VFD. All VFDs shall have the following features: 1. All VFDs shall have the same customer interface, including digital display, and keypad, regardless of horsepower rating. The keypad shall be removable, capable of remote mounting and allow for uploading and downloading of parameter settings as an aid for start-up of multiple VFDs. 2. The keypad shall include Hand-Off-Auto selections and manual speed control. There shall be fault reset and “Help” buttons on the keypad. The Help button shall include “on-line” assistance for programming and troubleshooting. 3. There shall be a built-in time clock in the VFD keypad. The clock shall have a battery backup with 10 years minimum life span. The clock shall be used to date and time stamp faults and record operating parameters at the time of fault. If the battery fails, the VFD shall automatically revert to hours of operation since initial power up. The clock shall also be programmable to control start/stop functions, constant speeds, PID parameter sets and output relays. The VFD shall have a digital input that allows an override to the time clock (when in the off mode) for a programmable time frame. There shall be four (4) separate, independent timer functions that have both weekday and weekend settings. Capacitor backup is not acceptable. 4. The VFD shall be capable of starting into a coasting load (forward or reverse) up to full speed and accelerate or decelerate to setpoint without safety tripping or component damage (flying start). 5. The overload rating of the drive shall be 110% of its normal duty current rating for 1 minute every 10 minutes, 130% overload for 2 seconds. The minimum FLA rating shall meet or exceed the values in the NEC/UL table 430-150 for 4-pole motors. 6. The VFD shall have 5% equivalent impedance internal reactors to reduce the harmonics to the power line and to add protection from AC line transients. The 5% equivalent impedance may be from dual (positive and negative DC bus) reactors, or 5% AC line reactors. VFDs with only one DC reactor shall add an AC line reactor. 7. The VFD shall include a coordinated AC transient protection system consisting of 4-120 joule rated MOV’s (phase to phase and phase to ground), a capacitor clamp, and 5% equivalent impedance internal reactors. 8. The VFD shall provide a programmable proof of flow Form-C relay output (broken belt / broken coupling). The drive shall be programmable to signal this condition via a keypad warning, relay output and/or over the serial communications bus. Relay outputs shall include programmable time delays that will allow for drive acceleration from zero speed without signaling a false under load condition. All VFDs to have the following adjustments: 1. Three (3) programmable critical frequency lockout ranges to prevent the VFD from operating the load continuously at an unstable speed. 2. Two (2) PID Setpoint controllers shall be standard in the drive, allowing pressure or flow signals to be connected to the VFD, using the microprocessor in the VFD for the closed loop control. The VFD shall have 250 ma of 24 VDC auxiliary power and be capable of loop powering a transmitter supplied by others. There shall be two parameter sets for the first PID that allow the sets to be switched via a digital input, serial communications or from the keypad for night setback, summer/winter setpoints, etc. There shall be an independent, second PID loop that can utilize the second analog input and modulate one of the analog VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS 23 09 93 - 3 McHugh Engineering Associates D. E. F. G. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building outputs to maintain setpoint of an independent process (i.e. valves, dampers, etc.). All setpoints, process variables, etc. to be accessible from the serial communication network. 3. Two (2) programmable analog inputs shall accept current or voltage signals. 4. Two (2) programmable analog outputs (0-20ma or 4-20 ma). The outputs may be programmed to output proportional to Frequency, Motor Speed, Output Voltage, Output Current, Motor Torque, Motor Power (kW), DC Bus voltage, Active Reference, and other data. 5. Six (6) programmable digital inputs. 6. Three (3) programmable digital Form-C relay outputs. The relays shall include programmable on and off delay times and adjustable hysteresis. The relays shall be rated for maximum switching current 8 amps at 24 VDC and 0.4 A at 250 VAC; Maximum voltage 300 VDC and 250 VAC; continuous current rating 2 amps RMS. Outputs shall be true Form-C type contacts; open collector outputs are not acceptable. 7. Run permissive circuit - There shall be a run permissive circuit for damper or valve control. Regardless of the source of a run command (keypad, time-clock control, or serial communications) the VFD shall provide a dry contact closure that will signal the damper to open (VFD motor does not operate). When the damper is fully open, a normally open dry contact (end-switch) shall close. The closed end-switch is wired to a VFD digital input and allows motor operation. Two separate safety interlock inputs shall be provided. When either safety is opened, the motor shall be commanded to coast to stop, and the damper shall be commanded to close. 8. Two independently adjustable accel and decel ramps with 1 – 1800 seconds adjustable time ramps. 9. The VFD shall include a motor flux optimization circuit that will automatically reduce applied motor voltage to the motor to optimize energy consumption and audible motor noise. 10. The VFD shall include a carrier frequency control circuit that reduces the carrier frequency based on actual VFD temperature that allows higher carrier frequency without derating the VFD or operating at high carrier frequency only at low speeds. 11. The VFD shall include password protection against parameter changes. The Keypad shall include a backlit LCD display. The display shall be in complete English words for programming and fault diagnostics (LED and alpha-numeric codes are not acceptable). All VFD faults shall be displayed in English words. All applicable operating values shall be capable of being displayed in engineering (user) units. A minimum of three operating values from the list below shall be capable of being displayed at all times. The display shall be in complete English words (alpha-numeric codes are not acceptable) 1. Output Frequency 2. Motor Speed (RPM, %, or Engineering units) 3. Motor Current 4. Drive Temperature 5. DC Bus Voltage 6. Output Voltage The VFD shall include a fireman’s override input. Upon receipt of a contact closure from the fireman’s control station, the VFD shall operate in one of two modes: 1) Operate at a programmed predetermined fixed speed or operate in a specific fireman’s override PID algorithm that automatically adjusts motor speed based on override set point and feedback . The mode shall override all other inputs (analog/digital, serial communication, and all keypad commands), except customer defined safety run interlock, and force the motor to run in one of the two modes above. “Override Mode” shall be displayed on the keypad. Upon removal of the override signal, the VFD shall resume normal operation. Serial Communications 1. The VFD shall have an RS-485 port as standard. The standard protocols shall be Modbus, VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS 23 09 93 - 4 McHugh Engineering Associates H. I. J. K. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building BACnet, Johnson Controls N2 bus, and Siemens Building Technologies FLN. Each individual drive shall have the protocol in the base VFD. The use of third party gateways and multiplexers is not acceptable. All protocols shall be “certified” by the governing authority (i.e. BTL Listing for BACnet). Use of non-certified protocols is not allowed. 2. The BACnet connection shall be an RS485, MS/TP interface operating at 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, or 76.8 Kbps. The connection shall be tested by the BACnet Testing Labs (BTL) and be BTL Listed. The BACnet interface shall conform to the BACnet standard device type of an Applications Specific Controller (B-ASC). The interface shall support all BIBBs defined by the BACnet standard profile for a B-ASC including, but not limited to: a) Data Sharing – Read Property – B. b) Data Sharing – Write Property – B. c) Device Management – Dynamic Device Binding (Who-Is; I-AM). d) Device Management – Dynamic Object Binding (Who-Has; I-Have). e) Device Management – Communication Control – B. 3. Serial communication capabilities shall include, but not be limited to; run-stop control, speed set adjustment, proportional/integral/derivative PID control adjustments, current limit, accel/decel time adjustments, and lock and unlock the keypad. The drive shall have the capability of allowing the DDC to monitor feedback such as process variable feedback, output speed / frequency, current (in amps), % torque, power (kW), kilowatt hours (resettable), operating hours (resettable), and drive temperature. The DDC shall also be capable of monitoring the VFD relay output status, digital input status, and all analog input and analog output values. All diagnostic warning and fault information shall be transmitted over the serial communications bus. Remote VFD fault reset shall be possible. EMI / RFI filters. All VFDs shall include EMI/RFI filters. The VFD shall comply with standard EN 61800-3 for the First Environment, restricted level with up to 100’ of motor cables. No Exceptions. Certified test lab test reports shall be provided with the submittals. All VFDs through 60HP shall be protected from input and output power mis-wiring. The VFD shall sense this condition and display an alarm on the keypad. The VFD shall not be damaged by this condition. OPTIONAL FEATURES – Optional features to be furnished and mounted by the drive manufacturer. All optional features shall be UL Listed by the drive manufacturer as a complete assembly and carry a UL508 label. The bypass enclosure door and VFD enclosure must be interlocked such that input power is turned off before either enclosure can be opened. The VFD and Bypass as a package shall have a UL listed short circuit rating of 100,000 amps and shall be indicated on the data label. 1. A complete factory wired and tested bypass system consisting of an output contactor and bypass contactor, service (isolation) switch and VFD input fuses are required. Bypass designs, which have no VFD only fuses, or that incorporate fuses common to both the VFD and the bypass will not be accepted 2. Door interlocked pad lockable circuit breaker that will disconnect all input power from the drive and all internally mounted options. The following operators shall be provided: a) Bypass Hand-Off-Auto b) Drive mode selector and light c) Bypass mode selector and light d) Bypass fault reset e) Bypass LDC display, 2 lines, for programming and status / fault / warning indications 1. Motor protection from single phase power conditions - The Bypass system must be able to detect a single phase input power condition while running in bypass, disengage the motor in a controlled fashion, and give a single phase input power indication. Bypass systems not incorporating single phase protection in Bypass mode are not acceptable. VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS 23 09 93 - 5 McHugh Engineering Associates 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building The system (VFD and Bypass) tolerated voltage window shall allow the system to operate from a line of +30%, -35% nominal voltage as a minimum. The system shall incorporate circuitry that will allow the drive or bypass contactor to remain “sealed in” over this voltage tolerance at a minimum. The Bypass system shall NOT depend on the VFD for bypass operation. The bypass shall be completely functional in both Hand and Automatic modes even if the VFD has been removed from the enclosure for repair / replacement. Serial communications – the bypass and VFD shall be capable of being monitored and or controlled via serial communications. Provide communications protocols for ModBus; Johnson Controls N2; Siemens Building Technologies FLN (P1) and BACnet in the bypass controller. BACnet Serial communication bypass capabilities shall include, but not be limited to; bypass run-stop control; the ability to force the unit to bypass; and the ability to lock and unlock the keypad. The bypass shall have the capability of allowing the DDC to monitor feedback such as, bypass current (in amps), bypass kilowatt hours (resettable), bypass operating hours (resettable), and bypass logic board temperature. The DDC shall also be capable of monitoring the bypass relays output status, and all digital input status. All bypass diagnostic warning and fault information shall be transmitted over the serial communications bus. Remote bypass fault reset shall be possible. The following additional bypass status indications and settings shall be transmitted over the serial communications bus – keypad “Hand” or “Auto” selected, and bypass selected. The DDC system shall also be able to monitor if the motor is running under load in both VFD and bypass (proof of flow) in the VFD mode over serial communications or Form-C relay output. A minimum of 40 field parameters shall be capable of being monitored in the bypass mode. Run permissive circuit - there shall be a run permissive circuit for damper or valve control. Regardless of the source of a run command (keypad, time-clock control, or serial communications) the VFD and bypass shall provide a dry contact closure that will signal the damper to open (VFD motor does not operate). When the damper is fully open, a normally open dry contact (end-switch) shall close. The closed end-switch is wired to a VFD system input and allows motor operation. Two separate safety interlock inputs shall be provided. When either safety is opened, the motor shall be commanded to coast to stop, and the damper shall be commanded to close. The bypass control shall monitor the status of the VFD and bypass contactors and indicate when there is a welded contactor contact or open contactor coil. This failed contactor operation shall be indicated on the Bypass LCD display as well as over the serial communications protocol. The bypass control shall include a programmable time delay for bypass start and keypad indication that this time delay is in process. This will allow VAV boxes to be driven open before the motor operates at full speed in the bypass mode. The time delay shall be field programmable from 0 – 120 seconds. The bypass control shall be programmable for manual or automatic transfer to bypass. The user shall be able to select via keypad programming which drive faults will generate an automatic transfer to bypass and which faults require a manual transfer to bypass. There shall be an adjustable motor current sensing circuit for the bypass and VFD mode to provide proof of flow indication. The condition shall be indicated on the keypad display, transmitted over the building automation protocol and on a relay output contact closure. VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS 23 09 93 - 6 McHugh Engineering Associates 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building The bypass controller shall have six programmable digital inputs, and five programmable Form-C relay outputs. The relay outputs from the bypass shall programmable for any of the following indications. a. System started b. System running c. Bypass override enabled d. Drive fault e. Bypass fault f. Bypass H-O-A position g. Motor proof of flow (broken belt) h. Overload i. Bypass selected j. Bypass run k. System started (damper opening) l. Bypass alarm m. Over temperature The digital inputs for the system shall accept 24VAC or 24VDC. The bypass shall incorporate internally sourced power supply and not require an external control power source. The bypass power board shall supply 250 ma of 24 VDC for use by others to power external devices. Customer Interlock Terminal Strip – provide a separate terminal strip for connection of freeze, fire, smoke contacts, and external start command. All external safety interlocks shall remain fully functional whether the system is in VFD or Bypass mode. The remote start/stop contact shall operate in VFD and bypass modes. The terminal strip shall allow for independent connection of up to four (4) unique safety inputs. The user shall be able to select the text to be displayed on the keypad when the safety opens. Example text display indications include “Firestat”, “Freezestat”, “Over pressure” and “Low pressure”. The user shall also be able to determine which of the four (4) safety contacts is open over the serial communications connection. Class 10, 20, or 30 (selectable) electronic motor overload protection shall be included. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. C. Examine areas, surfaces, and substrates to receive VFCs for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance. Examine roughing-in for conduit systems to verify actual locations of conduit connections before VFC installation. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 APPLICATIONS A. Select features of each VFC to coordinate with ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and motor; required control sequence; and duty cycle of motor, drive, and load. B. VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS 23 09 93 - 7 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building B. Select rating of controllers to suit motor controlled. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Anchor each VFC assembly to steel-channel sills arranged and sized according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach by bolting. Level and grout sills flush with VFC mounting surface. Controller Fuses: Install fuses in each fusible switch. Ground equipment to building grounding system. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer’s published torque-tightening values. Provide cable, conduit and connections from panelboard to controller and to motor as indicated on the drawings or as required by NEC. B. C. D. E. 3.04 IDENTIFICATION A. B. Identify VFCs, components, and control wiring according to Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods. Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for VFCs, including control sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished metal, and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of VFC units 3.05 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION A. B. C. Install wiring between VFCs and remote devices. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures. Connect hand-off-automatic switch and other automatic-control devices where available. 1. Connect selector switches to bypass only manual- and automatic-control devices that have no safety functions when switch is in hand position. 2. Connect selector switches with control circuit in both hand and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows: 1. Test insulation resistance for each VFC element, bus, and component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality-control testing: 1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS, Sections 7.5, 7.6, and 7.16. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including pretesting and adjusting VFCs. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements. B. C. D. VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS 23 09 93 - 8 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building 3.07 STARTUP SERVICE A. B. C. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements in Division 26 Sections. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.08 CLEANING A. Clean VFCs internally, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. 3.09 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain VFCs. END OF SECTION VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS 23 09 93 - 9 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 23 21 11 - PIPING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCE A. B. C. D. Refer to section 23 05 00 for requirements which are applicable to this section. Refer to International Mechanical Code. Refer to ASHRAE handbooks. Where the contract documents are more stringent but not in conflict with the applicable codes, the more stringent requirement shall be followed. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor, material, equipment, and supervision necessary to install a complete operating heating and cooling system and domestic water system with all devices, appurtenances and accessories to complete the work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. B. Submit shop drawings of all items specified in this section. Grooved joint couplings and fittings may be shown on drawings and product submittals, and shall be specifically identified by the manufacturer’s style or series designation. 1.04 A. B. C. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE Verify that all equipment is installed in accordance with the manufacturer's warranty requirements. Install systems and equipment in accordance with the International Plumbing Code. All grooved joint couplings, fittings, valves, and specialties shall be the products of a single manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the grooved components. a. All castings used for coupling housings, fittings, and valve bodies shall be date stamped for quality assurance and traceability. MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Steel pipe schedule 40: a. Steel pipe schedule 40; Heating HWS & R Chilled Water S & R b. Steel pipe schedule 40, with grooved joints for Victaulic fittings. Heating HWS & R Chilled Water S & R B. PVC Piping Systems: A/C Condensate Piping PART 2 - PRODUCTS PIPING SYSTEMS 23 21 11 - 1 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building 2.01 STEEL PIPE - SCHEDULE 40. A. B. ASTM A53, Seamless. Fittings; 125 lb cast iron screwed ANSI B16.4 up to 2 1/2 inch. Above 2 1/2 inch shall be flanged, weld neck, 150 lb ANSI B16.5 cast steel. 2.02 PVC PIPING AND FITTINGS A. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Schedule 40 ASTMD 2665 2.03 GROOVED JOINT COUPLINGS A. Grooved joint couplings shall consist of two ductile iron housing segments to ASTM A536, pressure responsive gasket to ASTM D2000, and zinc electroplated steel bolts and nuts to ASTM A449. Couplings shall comply with ASTM F1476 Standard Specification for the Performance of Gasketed Mechanical Couplings for Use in Piping Applications. 1. Rigid Type: Coupling housings shall be cast with offsetting, angle-pattern bolt pads to provide joint rigidity and support and hanging in accordance with ANSI B31.1 and B31.9. a. Victaulic Style 107H, Installation-Ready, for direct stab installation without field disassembly, with grade EHP gasket, suitable for water service to +250 deg F. b. Victaulic Style 07 “Zero-Flex” 2. Flexible Type: For use in locations where vibration attenuation and stress relief are required, and for the elimination of flexible connectors. Victaulic Installation-Ready Style 177 or Style 77. 2.04 VALVES - GENERAL A. Unless otherwise noted: Ball valves shall be utilized up to 2-1/2” and high performance butterfly valves shall be utilized from 3” and up. The temperature/pressure rating shall not be less than the design criteria applicable to the system. Manufacturer; Victaulic, Crane, Nibco, Jamesbury, Apollo, Milwaukee, Grinnell and Hammond, or approved equal. B. 2.05 BALL VALVES UP TO 2 1/2 INCH A. B. C. D. All bronze, threaded. 150 lb saturated steam, 600 lb non-shock WOG. Teflon seats, packing and gasket, stainless steel ball. Application; Steel or copper piping systems. 2.06 BUTTERFLY VALVES 2 INCH AND OVER A. Systems applicable: Heating HWS/R and Chilled Water S/R Body shall be one-piece wafer, lug or double flanged design with extended neck to allow for 2” of piping insulation. Flange hole drilling per international flange standard as specified. Provided with top and bottom stem bearings consisting of a 316 stainless steel shell with aTFE/glass fabric liner bearing surface. Equipped with an externally adjustable stem packing system that allows packing adjustment without removing the actuator. Internal over-travel stop shall be provided to prevent overtravel of the disc and minimize possible seat damage. Disc: Disc edge shall be hand polished for minimum torque and maximum sealing capability. B. C. PIPING SYSTEMS 23 21 11 - 2 McHugh Engineering Associates D. E. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Stem shall be one-piece design. Stem shall be provided with blow-out proof stem retention system to assure full retention of the stem in the unlikely event of an internal stem failure. Seat: Design shall consist of a resilient energizer totally encapsulated by the seat. Seat retainer shall be full-faced and firmly attached by bolts located outside the sealing area to protect them from corrosion. The seat assembly shall be locked in the body recess by the full-faced retainer. The seat shall be self-adjusting for wear and temperature changes. The seat shall be easily field replaceable. D. Manufacturers: Bray, Centerline, Victaulic, or approved equal. 2.07 SWING CHECK VALVES UP TO 2 1/2 INCH - SCREWED END A. B. C. D. All bronze, threaded. 125 lb saturated steam, 250 lb non-shock WOG. Regrinding bronze disk. Application; steel piping systems. 2.08 SWING CHECK VALVES UP TO 3 INCH - SOLDER END A. B. C. D. Regrinding bronze disc. 300 lb non-shock WOG. All bronze, ASTM B62. Application; copper piping systems. 2.09 SWING CHECK VALVES OVER 3 INCH - ALL BRONZE A. B. C. D. Renewable bronze seat ring and composition disc, bolted cover, flanged. All bronze, ASTM B62. 175 lb non-shock cold water. Application; copper piping systems. 2.10 SWING CHECK VALVES OVER 2 1/2 INCH - IBBM A. B. C. D. Iron body bronze mounted conforming to MSS SP 71. 125 lb saturated steam, 200 lb non-shock WOG. Renewable and regrindable bronze disk and seat ring, bolted cover. Application; steel piping systems. 2.11 SPRING-ACTUATED CHECK VALVES OVER 2-INCH – VERTICAL OR HORIZONTAL A. B. C. D. Iron body, stainless steel spring and shaft. 300-psig CWP (to 12”) and 230-psig (14” to 24”). Application: Steel piping systems: Heating HWS/R and Chilled Water S/R Basis of Design: Victaulic Series 726. 2.12 A. B. C. STRAINERS Self cleaning "Y" type screwed end up to 2 inch with machined seats and blow-off outlet, stainless steel screen. All bronze, 150 lb steam 300 lb non-shock WOG, for steel or copper piping systems. Self cleaning "Y" type flanged 2 1/2 inch and up with bolted cover flange, blow-off outlet, 125 lb ANSI, brass screen, iron body, for steel piping systems. Self cleaning "Y" type flanged 2 1/2 inch and up with bolted cover flange, blow-off outlet, brass PIPING SYSTEMS 23 21 11 - 3 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building D. E. F. screen. All bronze construction ASTM B-62 150 lb steam 225 lb non-shock WOG, for copper piping systems. Perforations; .033" pipe size to 2 inch, .057" pipe size 2 1/2 to 4 inch, 1/8 " pipe size 6 inch and up. Manufacturers; Muesco, Sarco, Hoffman, Metraflex, Mueller, or approved equal. Grooved End Y or T type strainers, with ductile iron body and coupled cover or factory-fabricated steel body with T-bolt hinged closure, and stainless steel perforated metal / frame and mesh basket, rated to 300-psig CWP. Basis of Design: Victaulic Style 732/W732 and 730/W730. 2.13 THERMOMETERS A. B. C. Separable socket, inserted into fluid flow, adjustable, hermetically sealed, blue colored organic fill, die cast case, baked enamel finish, double strength glass lens, white scale and black graduations. Scale - 30°F to 240°F. Manufacturer; U.S.Gauge, H.O. Trerice, Moeller, Duro, Ernst, or approved equal. 2.14 GAUGES A. B. C. Phosphor bronze bourdon tube, polypropylene case, gasketed glass crystal, aluminum dial, black graduations, 4 1/2 inch diameter. Installed with bronze gauge cock. Manufacturer; Danton, U.S. Gauge, H.O. Trerice, Moeller, or approved equal. 2.15 TEMPERATURE/PRESSURE PLUGS A. B. Furnish and install on the inlet and outlet of all heat exchange devices and terminal equipment, a temperature and pressure insertion device fitting. Provide temperature and pressure reading instrument to owner at completion of the work. 2.16 ISOLATION FITTINGS A. C. Insulated dielectric unions to prevent the flow of electric between adjacent sections of piping. Unions shall have the same pressure and temperature ratings of the installed systems. Fittings shall be screwed union type up to 2 inch and flanged type above 2 inch. Grooved end or Flanged type shall have isolating gaskets and isolated bolt holes. Manufacturer; Victaulic Style 47, Epco Sales Inc., Central Plastics, or approved equal. 2.17 UNIONS A. All equipment, control valves, and coils shall be provided with union connections up to 2 1/2 inch and flanged connections above 2 1/2 inch. Unions and flanges shall have pressure and temperature ratings equivalent to the fittings in the adjacent piping system. Screwed unions shall be bronze to bronze seat. Unions and flanges for servicing and disconnect are not required in installations using grooved joint couplings. (The couplings shall serve as disconnect points.) B. B. C. 2.18 A. B. FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS Flexible connectors shall be provided on the suction and discharge of all base mounted pumps and wherever else indicated on the drawings. Connectors shall be braided hose or reinforced rubber as manufactured by R.K.L. Control Inc., PIPING SYSTEMS 23 21 11 - 4 McHugh Engineering Associates C. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Anaconda, Flexonics, Mason Industries, or approved equal. Three grooved joint (Victaulic) couplings may be used in lieu of a flexible connector at equipment connections to accommodate vibration attenuation and stress relief. The couplings shall be placed in close proximity to the source of the vibration. 2.19 PIPE SADDLES A. Pipe saddles shall be welded to all steel pipe 2 1/2 inches or larger for support of the pipe at hanger locations where the piping conveys hot fluids or steam. The saddles shall be packed with insulation of the same material used for adjacent pipe insulation. B. 2.20 A. PIPE ANCHORS AND GUIDES C. Anchors for retarding and constraining pipe movement shall be installed to maintain the piping in the proper position. Pipe anchors shall be a rigid constraint between the pipe and the building structural system. Where the piping is constrained to move in a designated direction furnish and install pipe alignment guides to control the movement of the pipe. The guides shall be fastened to the building structural system. Guides shall be commercially manufactured by J.J. McNally, Flexonics, Tube Turns, or approved equal. Two sets of guides shall be installed on each side of an expansion joint. 2.21 SUPPORTS A. Piping shall be supported from structure at intervals not exceeding: PIPE SIZE INTERVAL B. COPPER Up to 1" 1 ½" 2" 2 ½" 3" 4" 6" 8" B. C. D. E. 2.22 6' 6' 10' 10' 10' 10' STEEL PVC 7' 9' 10' 11' 12' 14' 17' 20' 3' 3 ½' 3 ½' 4' 4' 4 ½' 5' 5' Piping to be supported at pipe joints not to exceed spacing for copper and steel piping. PVC piping to be supported on 4'-0" spacing. Copper tubing up to 1 1/4" to be supported on 6' spacing, over 1 1/4" to be supported on 10'-0" spacing. Other piping to be supported per manufacturer. Hangers shall be copper or copper plated for copper piping, galvanized or corrosion resistant for steel and PVC piping. Provide insulation saddles for insulated piping. Piping supports shall be clevis type hangers. Piping which is 2 1/2" in diameter or larger and has hangers longer than 12" in length shall be seismic braced. Bracing shall be with angle iron stiffeners at 45° angles attached to the structural support and the clevis hanger. See detail on drawings. Bracing shall be at spacing dimensions given above. SCREWED PIPE FITTINGS PIPING SYSTEMS 23 21 11 - 5 McHugh Engineering Associates A. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building B. Pipe joints made on screwed pipe shall be sealed with Teflon ribbon wrapped on the threads before assembly. Usage shall be in conformance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 2.31 COMPRESSION TANKS A. B. ASME label, carbon steel welded construction, with gauge glass, Airtrol tank fitting. Manufacturers: Amtrol, B&G, The John Wood Company, or approved equal. 2.23 DIAPHRAGM TYPE EXPANSION TANK A. Welded steel, galvanized inside and outside, ASME Section VIII stamped, 125 PSI working pressure, pre-charged to the 12'-0" minimum operating pressure. Diaphragm-type butyl rubber expansion chamber. Bronze fittings. Manufacturer: Amtrol Series AX, Armstrong, TACO, B&G, The John Wood Company, or approved equal. B. C. D. 2.24 A. AIR ELIMINATION VALVE B. Continuous elimination of air, float activated, and remote pressure operated, cast iron and steel, bronze fitted, 125 PSI working pressure. Manufacturer: Amtrol, Armstrong, TACO, B&G, The John Wood Company, or approved equal. 2.25 WATER FEEDERS A. Furnish and install a water makeup and pressure reducing valve for each closed circuit water circulating system. Valve shall be protected with strainer, check valve, isolation valves and bypass valve. 2.26 RELIEF VALVES A. Furnish and install an ASME pressure relief valve on each closed circuit water circulating system capable of relieving the full heat generating capacity of the system. 2.27 BALANCING VALVES A. Balancing valves shall be field setable with orifice taps and calibration setting to adjust the system to the indicated flow. Balancing valves shall be complete with ball valve shut off, (2) P/T ports, air vent and union. Manufacturers: B&G Circuit Sentry. Equal by Tour and Anderson, Wheatly, Armstrong, or approved equal. Each flow control valve shall be preceded by a 20 mesh stainless steel strainer. Strainer shall be line size with combination ball valve shut off, PT port, drain valve and union end. C. D. 2.28 AUTOMATIC BALANCING VALVES A. ½ – 2". The valve shall operate by means of an automatic balancing cartridge with replaceable orifice plate and internal diaphragm. The pressure class of the valve shall be 365 psi/PN25. The PIPING SYSTEMS 23 21 11 - 6 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building valve housing shall be made of DZR brass. The housing shall have one fixed threaded end and one union end. C. 2½ – 12”. The valve shall operate by means of automatic balancing stainless steel cartridges with replaceable orifice plate and internal EPDM diaphragm. The pressure class of the valve shall be PN16/PN25. The valve housing shall be made of ductile iron type GGG40. The valve shall comply with flanges according to EN/ANSI standards. Features a No. 45R Flanged Adapter Nipple featuring a ductile iron body and hardware composed of zinc plated alloy steel 2.29 CHEMICAL FEEDER A. Provide chemical pot feeder for hot water and chilled water systems. Shall be steel with fill funnel and valve, pressure gauge, and sight glass. 2.30 TRIPLE DUTY VALVES A. D. In lieu of a non-slam check valve and balancing valve on the discharge side of centrifugal pumps, contractor may substitute with a triple duty valve. The valve shall have a cast iron body, bronze disc and seat, stainless steel stem and spring, and calibrated name plate. Valve shall be rated for 175 PSIG maximum working pressure and 250 deg F maximum operating temperature. Manufacturers; Bell & Gossett, Taco, Armstrong, Wheatley, or approved equal. 2.31 SUCTION DIFFUSER A. In lieu of a strainer and blowdown on the suction side of a centrifugal pump, contractor may substitute with a suction diffuser. The suction Diffuser shall have a cast ductile iron body, stainless steel inlet vanes, and stainless steel combination diffuser - strainer - orifice cylinder. The orifice cylinder shall be able to withstand pressure differential equal to pump shutoff. Manufacturers; Bell & Gossett, Taco, Armstrong, Wheatley, or approved equal. B. C. B. C. D. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PIPING SYSTEMS A. All piping shall be arranged to drain to a drainable low point. The low point shall be provided with a drain valve at least 1/2 inch and a hose end thread as a minimum. Extensions to floor drains may be required elsewhere in which case the drain line shall gradually slope to the drain and terminate at the drain with a 90 degree elbow. Air vents shall be placed at the high points of all portions of systems which may trap air. This shall apply to piping, equipment, coils, exchangers or any other place that air may collect. At these points install automatic air vents which shall automatically vent the air from the system. Piping shall run square with building lines. Piping shall not be insulated until it is pressure and leak tested and until the building is closed in. Necessary drains, offsets, rises, vents, and drips shall be provided for as part of the contracted work. Where any such rise or drip is necessary the contractor shall install same as part of the work and as directed by the engineer. The drawings are diagrammatic in nature and due to the small scale it is B. C. D. E. PIPING SYSTEMS 23 21 11 - 7 McHugh Engineering Associates F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N. 3.02 Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building not possible to show all necessary drains, vents, offsets and rises which may be required to properly execute the work and such items shall be provided as needed. Running or close nipples are not allowed. Piping shall not be installed over electrical panels, equipment, transformers, motor control centers, switch, gear, or substations. If absolutely necessary piping may be sleeved to prevent water from falling on electrical gear provided the installation is acceptable to the electrical inspectors. Allow clearances for expansion and contraction. Provide swing ells at connection points so as not to strain piping systems. Exposed insulated risers shall be covered with 22 gauge galvanized steel sleeves from floor to ceiling. All piping shall be installed on the interior conditioned side of the building insulation. Utilize eccentric reducers on steam and water piping systems with tops level for water systems and bottoms level for steam systems. Furnish and install dielectric pipe couplings between sections of ferrous and non ferrous piping systems and between copper or brass equipment and ferrous piping systems. Piping shall be supported from adjustable clevis type hangers at distances specified in Section 15000. Provide sway bracing to prevent horizontal movement of pipe. Grooved joint shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s written recommendations. Grooved ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections, or roll marks. The gasket shall be molded and produced by the coupling manufacturer of an elastomer suitable for the intended service. The coupling manufacturer’s factory trained representative shall provide on-site training for the contractor’s field personnel in the use of grooving tools and installation of product. The representative shall periodically visit the job site to ensure best practices in grooved product installation are being followed. (A distributor’s representative is not considered qualified to conduct the training.) PIPING IDENTIFICATION A. B. C. Provide stencils or snap-on labels to identify all piping systems. Labels shall indicate the service of the pipe and the direction of flow. Labels shall be required where piping enters and leaves mechanical rooms, at inlets and outlets of equipment, at 25 foot intervals where exposed. 3.03 VALVE IDENTIFICATION A. B. C. All valves shall be identified except fixture stop valves and terminal device shut off valves. Identification shall consist of a metallic tag chained to the valve with tag number pressed into the metal. Provide a piping system diagram with valve numbers identified. The diagram shall be easily legible, framed in glass, and mounted in the mechanical room or where directed by the owner. Multiple charts may be necessary and required where various piping systems or portions of systems need be identified for simplicity. 3.04 WELDING A. B. All concealed black steel piping shall be fusion welded. Welding shall be performed in conformance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section IX. Elbows, tees, and branch connections shall be made with welding fittings ANSI B16.9. Furnish welder test certificates for review. Certificates of successful welder qualification by the following organizations shall be acceptable; C. D. PIPING SYSTEMS 23 21 11 - 8 McHugh Engineering Associates E. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code ANSI Code for Pressure Piping National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau Military Specification MIL-STD-248. Weld-o-lets and Thread-o-lets are allowed but shall be a maximum of one size smaller than line size, i.e. a maximum of a 3 inch weld-o-let on a 4 inch pipe. 3.05 SOLDERING AND BRAZING A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. Ream or file pipe or tube to remove burrs. Clean and polish contact surfaces. Apply flux to both male and female surfaces. Insert tube full depth into socket. Bring joint to soldering or brazing temperature in as short a time as possible. Form a continuous solder bead or brazing filler bead around entire circumference of the joint. Tin-lead 50-50 shall not be allowed on the site. Brazed joints of 95-5 tin antimony AWS 5.8 shall be used for refrigerant piping, hot water heating piping, drainage piping, domestic hot, cold, and recirculated water piping. Flux shall be non-toxic. I. 3.06 A. B. C. D. 3.07 A. B. 3.08 VALVES Valves shall be installed with their stems above the horizontal. Valves shall be installed on the connections to all equipment and control valves to allow for isolation for repair. Valves installed above 7 feet in mechanical rooms shall have chain operators. Check valves shall be installed on the discharge side of pumps and wherever else indicated on the drawings. STRAINERS Strainers shall be installed on the suction side of all pumps and at the inlets to all control valves. Provide a blow down valve of at least 1/2 inch size connected to each strainer blow off port. GAUGES A. Pressure gauges shall be installed on the suction and discharge side of all pumps and wherever else indicated on the drawings or specified. 3.09 SYSTEM START-UP A. Fill system and thoroughly flush all sediment, dirt, particles and any other material from the system. Furnish and install necessary hose connections as may be necessary to accomplish. Remove all air from the system. This will require several bleeding sequences to remove all air from the system. Provide all necessary air vents to accomplish. Where existing systems are connected, remove air from the existing system also. Clean all strainers after thorough flushing. Provide chemical treatment for first year of operation including all necessary tests, chemicals, additives and service visits. B. C. D. END OF SECTION PIPING SYSTEMS 23 21 11 - 9 McHugh Engineering Associates PIPING SYSTEMS Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building 23 21 11 - 10 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 23 21 12 – DIRECT BURY PIPING SYSTEM PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The direct buy pre-insulated piping system manufacturer (Supplier) shall design, fabricate, assemble, shop test and deliver the direct bury pre-insulated piping system as specified herein and shown on the construction drawing for installation at Ocean County College located in Toms River, NJ. The piping system shall be complete with all components required for installation by others including: piping; fittings; outer jacket; conduit; pipe supports, anchors and guides; insulation; and, closure assemblies, whether shown on the Contract Drawings drawing or not. Included in the Suppliers scope is furnishing shop drawings and field supervision of the installation. B. Refer to installation Owner’s Contract Drawings drawing(s) for the layout, pipe sizes and general requirements of the piping system. 1.02 APPLICABLE CODES A. All items shall be in accordance with the latest edition and revisions of the following Codes and Standards where applicable: i. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM). ii. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). iii. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) iv. American Welding Society (AWS) B. If there is any overlapping of, or conflict between, the requirements of these Codes and this specification, then that requirement which is the most stringent shall take precedence. 1.03 SUBMITTALS C. Supplier shall submit shop drawings with the following for approval by the Owner or Owner’s Engineer: i. Detail layout with the following: 1. Minimum ¼ inch = 1’-0” scale layout with size, type and location of each component to be used in the system. Show shop assembled segments, location of field welds, pipe expansion, cold pull requirements, and forces on anchors. 2. Transition to above ground or standard piping system. DIRECT BURY PIPING SYSTEM 23 21 12 - 1 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building 3. Piping assembly cross section, anchor, guide, gland, and end seal details. 4. Grades and pipe elevations shall be shown. Sections shall be shown on the same sheet as plan views. ii. Provide calculations by a registered professional engineer with his seal and signature on the following: 1. Pipe stress to include Owners piping from the end of the Suppliers system to the nearest anchor per ASME 31.1 Power Piping. 2. Heat loss. D. Schedule of activities. i. Various items of work including test. ii. Quality control inspection. iii. Guarantees iv. Certificates of origin for all materials specified to be manufactured in North America. v. Supplier experience. 1. Submit name of ten installations in successful operation of five years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Hot Water Supply & return: A. General i. Furnish a complete jacketed system of factory pre-insulated steel piping for Hot Water Supply and Return service. ii. The carrier pipe size, carrier pipe wall thickness, insulation thickness and conduit diameter and overall outside diameter of the piping system shall as specified on the contract drawings. iii. The system shall be pre-engineered and pre-fabricated by the direct bury piping system manufacturer. The piping system manufacturer shall make a complete layout of the system showing anchors, expansion provisions, and building entrance details. Means for expansion must be made in the pipe offsets or loops unless specifically shown on the drawings as being compensated with expansion joints. The pipe manufactures shall make allowances for field adjustment and provide field welds to allow for field alignment. iv. The system shall be Ferro-therm as manufactured by Thermacor Process or Owner or DIRECT BURY PIPING SYSTEM 23 21 12 - 2 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Owner’s Engineer approved equal. v. The operating, design conditions and test conditions are: Condition Operating Design Test Pressure 75 psig 150 psig 225 psig Temperature 180 0F 210 0F N/A B. Carrier Pipe i. Carrier pipe shall be of the size and wall thickness per the pipe table shown on the Contract Drawings. Pipe shall be: a. Sizes 2½” and above: ASTM A53, Grade B, seamless or ERW. b. Sizes 2” and below: ASTM A106/A53, Grade B, seamless. c. ASTM A106, Grade B, seamless or ASTM A53, Grade B, seamless. ii. Carrier pipe shall be plain end, beveled for welding. iii. Fittings used on the carrier pipe at expansion loops, offsets, or any other direction changes, branches and anchors including elbows, tees and reducers shall be: 1. Sizes 2½ ” and above: tees and elbows, butt welded, schedule to match pipe, seamless, ASTM-A234, ANSI-B16.9 . 2. Sizes 2” and below: socket welded, Class 3000, ASTM-A105, ANSI B16.11. 3. Provide custom fittings as required to make any non-standard bends required for the pipe layout iv. Flanges shall be Class 150, raised face, ASTM-105, welding neck, ANSI B16.5, bored to match the carrier pipe, use slip-on or socket welded for sizes 2” and below. v. Pipe joints shall be welded in accordance with the Power Piping Code, ASME B 31.1. C. Conduit Insulation and Jacket i. Insulation shall be polyurethane insulation bonded to both the jacketing and carrier pipe and either spray applied or high pressure injected with one shot into the annular space between carrier pipe and jacket with a minimum thickness of 2.5”. Insulation shall be rigid, 90% - 95% closed cell @ 70°F with not less than 2.0 pounds per cubic foot density, having a compressive strength of not less than 30 psi and a coefficient of thermal conductivity (K-Factor) of 0.16 @ 75°F. Maximum operating temperature of the polyurethane insulation shall not exceed 250°F. DIRECT BURY PIPING SYSTEM 23 21 12 - 3 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building ii. Jacketing material shall be extruded, black, high density polyethylene (HDPE), ASTM D-3350, having a minimum wall thickness of 100 mils for jacket sizes equal to or less than 12”, 125 mils for jacket sizes greater than 12” to 24”, and 150 mils for jacket sizes greater than 24”. iii. Terminations inside of manholes or valve boxes shall have a corrosion coated steel sleeve protecting the foam. This steel sleeve shall be fillet welded onto the carrier pipe and come up and extend back on the jacket a distance of 6”. A high temperature shrink sleeve shall be used to seal the steel sleeve to the HDPE jacket. iv. Moisture barrier end seals shall be factory applied to any exposed foam at the end of a pipe length, including the foam that is also protected by the steel sleeve at manhole terminations. End seals shall be high temperature mastic completely sealing the exposed end of the insulation. If any field cutting of the pipe is required, field applied end seals shall be installed to the piping before continuing with the installation. v. Straight run field joints shall be field-insulated per the Supplier’s instructions using polyurethane foam poured in an HDPE sleeve and sealed with heat shrink tape. All field joint insulation and jacketing materials shall be provided by the direct bury pipe system manufacturer. vi. Fittings are factory prefabricated and pre-insulated with polyurethane to the thickness specified and jacketed with a one piece seamless molded HDPE fitting cover, a butt fusion welded, or an extrusion welded and mitered HDPE jacket. All fitting jackets/covers shall be connected to the straight lengths of pipe by electro fusion, butt fusion, or extrusion welding. vii. Expansion/contraction compensation will be accomplished utilizing factory prefabricated and pre-insulated expansion elbows, Z-bends, expansion loops and anchors specifically designed for the intended application. Flexible expansion pads, supplied with the piping system, shall be utilized for external expansion compensation on all fittings having expansion in excess of 1/2". Expansion pads shall be a minimum one inch thick and shall extend to cover both the inside and outside radius of the fittings. The layout drawings shall show the location and thickness of insulation pads required. viii. Anchors shall be ½” thick steel plates welded to the carrier pipe and shall incorporate a steel water shed ring, sized to allow the jacket to slide underneath, that shall be sealed to the HDPE jacket. Anchors are located as shown on the contract drawings. ix. Factory Testing 1. 100% visual shop inspection of all carrier pipe butt welds and fillet welds per ASME B31.1. 2. Air test HDPE jacket to 5 psi for 5 minutes with soap bubbles. 2.02 CHILLED WATER SUPPLY DIRECT BURY PIPING SYSTEM 23 21 12 - 4 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building D. General i. Furnish a complete jacketed system of factory pre-insulated PCV piping for Chilled Water Supply service. ii. The carrier pipe size, carrier pipe wall thickness, insulation thickness and conduit diameter and overall outside diameter of the piping system shall as specified on the contract drawings. iii. The Supplier shall make a complete layout of the system showing anchors, expansion provisions, and building entrance details. Means for expansion must be made in the pipe offsets or loops unless specifically shown on the drawings as being compensated with expansion joints. The pipe manufactures shall make allowances for field adjustment and provide field welds to allow for field alignment. iv. The system shall be Chill-therm as manufactured by Thermacor Process or Owner or Owner’s Engineer approved equal. v. The operating, design conditions and test conditions are: Condition Operating Design Test Pressure 110 psig 150 psig 225 psig Temperature 42 0F 40 0F N/A E. Carrier Pipe i. Carrier pipe shall be of the size and wall thickness per the pipe table shown on the Contract Drawings. Pipe shall be rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) compound, Type 1 Grade 1, ASTM D2241 Pressure Pipe ASTM D1784 Cell Class 12454 pipe compound, Iron Pipe Size (IPS) Schedule 80 in accordance with ASTM D 1785. ii. Carrier pipe shall be plain end, for solvent welding. iii. Fittings used on the carrier pipe at expansion loops, offsets, or any other direction changes, branches and anchors including elbows, tees and reducers shall be: 1. Sizes 2” to 8”: solvent weld socket type ASTM D1784 Cell Class 12454 compound (PVC), Schedule 80 conforming to ASTM D2467. 2. Provide custom fittings as required to make any non-standard bends required for the pipe layout. iv. Flanges shall be solvent weld socket type ASTMD 1784 Cell Class 1245 compound (PCV), ANSI Class 150 flat face, bored to Schedule 80 compatible with ANSI B16.5, Class 150 metal flanges. DIRECT BURY PIPING SYSTEM 23 21 12 - 5 McHugh Engineering Associates v. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Pipe joints shall be solvent welded. Solvent cement for socket joints shall comply with ASTM D2564 and F 656. F. Conduit Insulation and Jacket i. Insulation shall be polyurethane insulation bonded to both the jacketing and carrier pipe and either spray applied or high pressure injected with one shot into the annular space between carrier pipe and jacket. Insulation shall be rigid, 90% - 95% closed cell @ 70°F with not less than 2.0 pounds per cubic foot density, having a compressive strength of not less than 30 psi and a coefficient of thermal conductivity (K-Factor) of 0.16 @ 70°F. Maximum operating temperature of the polyurethane shall not exceed 250 °F. ii. Jacketing material shall be extruded, black, high density polyethylene (HDPE), ASTM D-3350, having a minimum wall thickness of 100 mils for jacket sizes equal to or less than 12”, 125 mils for jacket sizes greater than 12” to 24”, and 150 mils for jacket sizes greater than 24”. The jacket throughout the entire system shall incorporate electric fusion, butt fusion, or extrusion welding at all fittings, joint closures, or other points of connection. iii. Terminations inside of manholes or valve boxes shall have a corrosion coated steel sleeve protecting the foam. This steel sleeve extend back on the jacket a distance of 6”. A high temperature shrink sleeve shall be used to seal the steel sleeve to the HDPE jacket. iv. Moisture barrier end seals shall be factory applied to any exposed foam at the end of a pipe length, including the foam that is also protected by the steel sleeve at manhole terminations. End seals shall be high temperature mastic completely sealing the exposed end of the insulation. If any field cutting of the pipe is required, field applied end seals shall be installed to the piping before continuing with the installation. v. Straight run field joints are insulated using polyurethane foam poured in an HDPE sleeve or heat shrink tape. vi. Fittings are not insulated. Thrust blocks are not required at direction changes with a 100% solvent weld system. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WELDING - STEEL PIPE A. Before proceeding, submit for approval: i. Proposed procedures conforming to latest revision of: 1. ANSI B31.1, Code for Pressure Piping 2. ANSI Z49.1, Safety in Welding and Cutting ii. List of welders. DIRECT BURY PIPING SYSTEM 23 21 12 - 6 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building 1. Qualified per applicable portions of Section IX of ASME, Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and AWS. iii. Examining welder 1. Examined by a certified tested laboratory. 2. Tested in all positions within 9 months of working on this project. 3. Each welder shall be required to identify his weld with his specific code marking signifying his name and assigned number. B. Field procedures. i. Pipe cleaned free from rust, scale and oxide. ii. Pipe beveled each end. 1. Per approved procedures. iii. Defective welds 1. Replace and re-inspect. 3.02 PVC PIPE – SOLVENT WELDING A. General i. Do not install PVC pipe when the temperature is below 40 oF or above 90 oF. ii. Store fittings in their original cartons. iii. Store solvent cement indoors or if outdoors, shade from direct sunlight exposure. Do not use solvent cements which have exceeded their marked shelf life. iv. Check pipes and fittings for cuts, scratches, gouges, buckling or splitting. Removed damaged area as complete cylinder. B. Solvent Weld Joints i. Cut pipe ends square and remove all burrs, chips and filings before joining pipe or fittings. Bevel solvent weld pipe ends as recommended by the pipe manufacturer. ii. Wipe away loose dirt and moisture from the ID and OD of the pipe ends and ID of fittings before applying solvent cement. Do not apply solvent cement to wet surfaces. iii. Makeup solvent welded joints per ASTM D 2855. DIRECT BURY PIPING SYSTEM 23 21 12 - 7 McHugh Engineering Associates iv. 3.03 Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Allow at least 8 hours of drying time before moving solvent weld joints or subjecting the joints to any internal or external loads or pressures. PIPING, FITTING AND PIPING ACCESSORIES. A. To suit proper pressure and temperature. B. Work into place without springing or forcing, unless cold pull is called for on the shop drawings. C. Remove dirt and foreign matter from inside pipe. D. Comply with Supplier’s recommendations. i. Unloading ii. Handling iii. Storage iv. Installation E. Cover at end of day laid-in place underground piping. i. Open end of pipe and conduit. ii. Conduit of fitting connections joined together but not completely sealed. 3.04 FIELD TESTING A. Inspection i. Hydro test to ASME B31.1 to test pressure indicated in the contract drawings. ii. Locate leaks during testing. iii. Repair leaks after testing. iv. Retest until pressure holds for two hours. B. Air testing of jacket at field joints i. 3.05 5 psi air test shall be applied for 5 minutes and all seams shall be soap tested while air test is active. SUPERVISION DIRECT BURY PIPING SYSTEM 23 21 12 - 8 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building A. Factory field observation at critical phases of the installation. i. Technically qualified, factory trained installation instructor with 5 years experience. ii. All costs to be included in bid including salaries, travel, and living expenses. B. Reports i. Deliver to owner daily reports when present at the project site. 3.06 WARRANTY A. Submit written warranty for the period of one year from the date of final acceptance by Owner. Further, state that the installation of the underground distribution system has been witnessed by the manufacturer’s representative, and he certifies it to be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s published instructions. i. During the warranty period the contractor shall do the following at no additional cost to the Owner: 1. Repair defects 2. Furnish all replacement parts to repair the defects. 3. Provide factory-trained instructor of the system manufacturer to assist in repair of defects. END OF SECTION DIRECT BURY PIPING SYSTEM 23 21 12 - 9 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 23 21 13 - PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCE A. Refer to section 23 05 00 for requirements which are applicable to this section. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor, material, equipment, and supervision necessary to install and place into operation pumps and piping systems as specified herein and indicated on the drawings. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. B. C. D. E. Submit shop drawings of pumps. Submit manufacturers' data sheets for capacities. Impeller diameter not more than 85% of the casing cutwater diameter. Factory run and tested with written test report supplied for pumps over 500 GPM. Submit only specified manufacturers or those added by addenda. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Verify that all equipment is installed in accordance with the manufacturer's warranty requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 Split-Coupled Vertical Inline Pumps with Integrated Controls A. Furnish and install Armstrong Series 4300 Design Envelope IVS pumps. The pumps shall be single stage, single or double suction type, vertical inline design with integrated controls. The seal shall be serviceable without disturbing the motor or the piping connections. The capacities and characteristics shall be as outlined in the plans and specifications. The complete pump unit shall be labeled with ETL listing certification that the product conforms to UL Std 778 and is certified to CSA Std C22.2 No.108. Refer to drawings for additional information. Pump casing shall be constructed of ASTM A48 class 30 cast iron with ANSI 125 / PN16 flanges for working pressure below 175 psig (12 bar) at 150°F (66°C) and ASTM A536 ductile iron with ANSI 250 / PN25 flanges for working pressures to 375 psig (25 bar) at 150°F (66°C). The casing shall be hydrostatically tested to 150% maximum working pressure. The casing shall be radially split to allow removal of the rotating element without disturbing the pipe connections. The pump casing shall be drilled and tapped for gauge ports on both the suction and discharge connections and for a drain port at the bottom of the casing. The casing shall have an additional tapping on the discharge connection to allow for the installation of a seal flush line. The pump shall have a factory installed vent/flush line to insure removal of trapped air from the casing and mechanical seal cooling. The vent/flush line shall run from the seal chamber to the pump discharge. B. C. PUMPS 23 21 13 1 McHugh Engineering Associates D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N. O. P. Q. PUMPS Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building The impeller shall be bronze, fully enclosed type. The impeller shall be dynamically balanced to ANSI Grade G6.3 and shall be fitted to the shaft with a key. Two-plane balancing is required where installed impeller diameter is less than 6 times the impeller width. The pump shaft shall be stainless steel. The coupling is to be rigid spacer type constructed of high tensile aluminum alloy. The coupling is to be designed to be easily removed on site to reveal a space between the pump and motor shafts sufficient to remove all mechanical seal components for servicing and to be replaced without disturbing the pump or motor. The pump shall be fitted with an outside balanced type mechanical seal, with Viton elastomers and antimony carbon (or resin bonded carbon for potable water applications) vs. silicon carbide faces rated up to 250°F (121°C). A 316 stainless steel gland plate shall be provided with a factory installed flush line with manual vent. All split coupled pumps shall be provided with a lower seal chamber throttle bushing to ensure seals maintain positively cooling and lubrication. To improve seal chamber cleanliness, supply in the flush line to the mechanical seal a 50 micron cartridge filter and sight flow indicator, to suit the working pressure encountered. Alternately, supply in the flush line to the mechanical seal a maintenance-free sediment separator, with sight flow indicator for pump differential pressures exceeding 30 psig (or 200 kPa). The motor frame shall be NEMA TC type. Motor enclosure is to be ODP or TEFC with NEMA Premium Efficiency rating. Acceptable motor insulation for variable speed operation is NEMA MG-1 Part 31. The variable frequency drive & controls shall be rated UL Type 12 or UL Type 4X and be an integral component of the pumping unit. The integrated VFD shall be of the VVC-PWM type providing near unity displacement power factor (cos Ø) without the need for external power factor correction capacitors at all loads and speeds. The VFD shall incorporate DC link chokes for the reduction of mains borne harmonic currents and to reduce the DC link ripple current thereby increasing the DC link capacitors lifetime. RFI filters will be fitted as standard to ensure the VFD meets low emission and immunity requirements. VFD and motor protection shall include: motor phase to phase fault, motor phase to ground fault, loss of supply phase, over voltage, under-voltage, motor over-temperature, inverter overload, and over-current. Where selected, VFD shall have Sensorless control software to provide automatic speed control in variable volume systems without the need for pump mounted (internal/external) or remotely mounted differential pressure sensor. The default operating mode under Sensorless control shall be Quadratic Pressure Control (QPC) whereby head reduction with reducing flow will be according to a quadratic control curve, the head at minimum flow being 40% of the design duty head. Control mode setting and minimum/maximum head setpoints shall be user adjustable via a built-in programming interface. If the quantity of pumps in a system is 2 to 4-maximum, including any standby, a Sensorless controller shall be added to a pumping unit and set up at the factory to operate in parallel Sensorless mode. The pump controls, which will be linked on site by the control contractor, will automatically stage the units, as appropriate, to maintain the best efficiency pumping and minimum operating cost. The standby unit will be brought into the rotation to exercise and equalize wear. The sequence of controls and staging points will be submitted to the engineer for approval at the time of order. The VFD shall have the following additional features: 1. Sensorless override for BAS/BMS control signal 2. Manual pump control or closed loop PID control 3. Programmable skip frequencies and adjustable switching frequency for noise and vibration control 4. Auto alarm reset 5. Four programmable digital inputs, two analog inputs, one programmable analog / digital output 6. One volt-free contact 23 21 13 2 McHugh Engineering Associates 7. 8. 2.02 A. B. C. D. 2.03 A. B. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building One RS485 port for serial communications to building management systems Standard serial communication protocols Modbus RTU (default), Johnson Controls Metasys N2, or Siemens FLN Environmental IN-LINE PUMPS Furnish and install in-line circulating pumps of the size and capacity indicated on the drawings. Pumps shall be cast iron with stainless shaft and iron impellers. Motors shall be 1750 RPM with internal overload protection. Manufacturers; B&G, Aurora, Armstrong, Peerless, or approved equal. FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS Neoprene flanged connectors for 150 lb ASA drilling, galvanized flanges, neoprene and nylon bellows. Type MFNC or MFNEC as manufactured by Mason Industries Inc, or equal by Amber/Booth, or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. PUMPS - GENERAL. Install pump in accordance with pump manufacturer’s instructions and the Hydraulic Institute. Piping shall not generate any load on pump casing. Pumps shall be mounted on a 6 inch high housekeeping pad and vibration isolation as specified or indicated elsewhere. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge. Provide pressure gauges on suction and discharge. Provide a strainer at pump suction and check valve at pump discharge. Suction reducers shall be eccentric, discharge increases concentric. Long radius elbows installed only in vertical position and adequately supported to prevent load on pump casing. Verify alignment prior to grouting. Provide factory authorized startup of pumps over 200 GPM. Provide balancing valve on pump discharge. END OF SECTION PUMPS 23 21 13 3 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 23 23 00 - REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. B. C. 1.02 A. B. 1.03 REFERENCE Refer to section 23 05 00 for requirements which are applicable to this section. Refer to 1990 ASHRAE Refrigerant Handbook, applicable ANSI safety codes, and IBC Code. Refer to manufacturers sizing requirements and piping recommendations. WORK INCLUDED Provide all labor, material, equipment, and supervision necessary to furnish and install refrigeration equipment, piping, and accessories, and to place DX systems into operation. PHFA Requirement: Exposed refrigerant piping, power, and control wiring extending from the building to the remote condensing units shall be protected and insulated with split type insulation with PVC jacket and cemented joints. SUBMITTALS A. B. Submit shop drawings of refrigeration accessories. Submit piping diagrams of manufacturer’s recommendations for piping installation. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. Verify that all equipment is installed in accordance with the manufacturer's warranty requirements. Install systems and equipment in accordance with International code. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. REFRIGERATION PIPING Piping shall be ACRL Type tubing with forged fittings brazed with silver solder. Piping shall comply with ASTM B 280. Refrigerant piping must be absolutely clean. Utilize precleaned and sealed tubing by the manufacturer, if required for warranty, or utilize the following cleaning sequence: 1. 2. 3. 4. Draw clean, lint less cloth through tubing. Draw clean, lint less cloth saturated with Refrigerant 113 or Virginia #10 Degreasing Solvent through tubing several times until cloth comes through clean. Draw clean, lint less cloth saturated with compressor oil and squeezed dry through tubing. Draw clean, lint less, dry cloth through tubing. 2.02 FILTER-DRIER A. Brass, sweat fittings, porous core with high affinity for water, acid neutralizing, filter media. REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEM 23 23 00 - 1 McHugh Engineering Associates B. C. 2.03 Sporlan or approved equal. One per system. SIGHT GLASS A. B. C. D. Sight glass to be "DRI-EYE" Type. Brass, sweat fittings, removable cap over glass. Mueller Brass Co., or approved equal. One per system. 2.04 SERVICE VALVES A. B. C. Brass, sweat fittings, back seating, with seal cap. Mueller Brass Co., Superior Valve Co., Henry, or approved equal. At each equipment connection. Condensing unit and fan/coil. 2.05 A. B. C. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building RELIEF VALVES Furnish and install refrigerant pressure relief valves on the high and low pressure sides of each condensing unit. Valves shall be brass and as manufactured by Mueller, Spartan, Superior, Henry, or approved equal. One per system. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. 3.02 A. B. C. D. PIPING & FITTINGS - INSTALLATION Provide oil trap at base of risers of hot gas and suction risers when risers are over 8 feet vertically. All refrigerant risers shall be evaluated for requirement of oil traps. Traps shall be constructed from a street elbow and regular elbow keeping horizontal down to a minimum. Piping is to slope down 1/2 inch per 10 feet from AHU to compressor. Provide double risers for unloading compressors. The liquid line shall contain properly sized manual shutoff valves at the evaporator and condenser units, refrigerant charging valves, filter dryer with isolation valve, solenoid valve, sight glass, and expansion valve. The suction line is to be insulated with a minimum of 5/8" molded Armaflex. Contractor is to seal all end joints, longitudinal joints, and fittings with a sealant. Support refrigerant tubing at 6 foot intervals up to 1 1/4" diameter and at 6 foot intervals over 1 1/4" diameter. Contractor is to install hangers prior to insulating. Refrigerant pipe sizing shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. SWEAT JOINTS Cut square with miter box or tubing cutter, and ream to remove burrs. Outside of tubing and inside of joint to be burnished. Fill tubing and joints with inert gas, nitrogen or carbon dioxide. Brazing flux applied to joint brought to brazing temperature. Apply silver solder for copper to brass and Sil-fos for copper to copper joints. REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEM 23 23 00 - 2 McHugh Engineering Associates E. F. 3.03 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. 3.04 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. 3.05 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. 3.06 A. B. C. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Remove coil from solenoid valves before brazing. Remove glass from sight glass before brazing. TESTING Refer to manufacturer’s instructions or as described below: Plug control and relief valves to prevent damage. Close valves at compressor suction and discharge. Open liquid line shutoff valve and liquid line solenoid valve. Connect dry nitrogen to charging valve, pressurize to 150 psi or to local code pressure in prescribed increments "for safety". Tap each joint to check for leakage that may start from subsequent vibration. Brush connections with soap to locate leaks. Repair joints by total disassembly, cleaning, and rebrazing. Retest. Bleed nitrogen from system. Charge refrigerant to pressures established by manufacturer. Check for leaks at joints with halide torch or leak detector. Leave test on for 24 hours. Allow for 3 psi change due to 10 degrees temperature change. Observe no appreciable change in pressure. Test complete, witness, date, and record. EVACUATION Refer to manufacturer’s instructions or as described below: Install vacuum gauges to liquid and suction lines. Connect vacuum pump and run until 29" Hg is registered. Close suction valve or pump. Charge to atmospheric pressure with dry nitrogen. Re-evacuate. Vacuum system to maintain 29.7" Hg for 2 hours with vacuum pump off. Evacuation complete, witness, date, record. CHARGING Refer to manufacturer’s instructions or as described below: Check for entire system to be operational, lubricated, proper oil levels, gauges operational, voltage at motors, belts on, etc. Energize crankcase heater for 24 hours. Charge high side through liquid line charging valve. Start system. Continue to charge until estimated refrigerant charge has entered the system. Observe liquid flow and pressures. Add refrigerant as necessary. Allow to run until sight glass is clear. Check for overcharging pressures. Leave system operate for 48 hours of test run. Charging complete, witness, date, record. SYSTEM CHECKOUT Refer to manufacturer’s instructions or as described below: Adjust pressure switches, low pressure, high pressure for cut in and cut-out settings. Check each interlock function. REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEM 23 23 00 - 3 McHugh Engineering Associates D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Measure temperature and pressure of suction gas near the remote bulb of expansion valve. Utilize test quality gauges. Check super heat against manufacturer’s recommendations. Check compressor oil level. Check amps on each leg of compressor, not to exceed 2% variation. Check volts on each leg of compressor, not to exceed 2% variation. Check all belts, bearings, motor rotations, dampers, controls, bolt tightness, etc. Lubricate all required points. Check out complete, witness, date, record. Refrigeration System Report is to include settings of controls and safety devices, including relief valves. END OF SECTION REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEM 23 23 00 - 4 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 23 31 13 - DUCTWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Construct rectangular ductwork to meet all functional criteria defined in Section VII, of the SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible" latest edition. This shall be subsequently referred to as the SMACNA Manual. All ductwork must comply with all local, state and federal code requirements. Refer to Section 23 05 00 for requirements which are applicable to this section. The SMACNA Manual, ASHRAE Handbooks, International Mechanical Code, and NFPA Pamphlet 90A shall apply to this work. Provide labor, material, equipment, and supervision necessary to install a complete air handling system as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. Contractor is to furnish and install volume dampers in all supply, return, exhaust, and outside air branch ductwork. If these are omitted from the drawings, the contractor is to make an allowance to install them. B. C. D. E. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. C. D. E. Ductwork shop drawings must be properly submitted. Any ductwork installed without prior approval by the engineer and found to be incorrect, shall be replaced at the expense of the contractor. Submit shop drawings of all sheet metal for review. Drawings shall be not less than 1/4" scale and show all light fixtures, steel, piping, conduit, equipment and architectural features. It is unacceptable to resubmit and modify McHugh design documents for sheet metal drawing purposes. 1. Indicate structural steel and elevation of bottom of beams and joists or floor to bottom dimension. 2. Indicate ductwork elevation and/or floor to bottom of duct. Verify ductwork fits in available space. 3. Indicate waste and storm piping where it occurs in the area of ductwork. 4. Locate electrical gear on plan. Ductwork is not to run above panels. 5. Ductwork is to be shown double line with indicated width and height. Allowance to be made for lining and/or insulation. 6. Duct sizes shown on contract drawings may be flattened to a 4 to 1 ratio when necessary to establish clearance. Such transitions are to be included in the contract price. 7. Ductwork fabrication shall not proceed until shop drawings are submitted for review. 8. All dampers, grilles, registers, diffusers, access panels, louvers, coils, filters, and other components of the system are to be indicated. 9. Provide detail of fire damper assembly. 10. Provide drawing sections when requested by the engineer. Coordinate sheet metal drawings with light fixture layout and sprinkler system piping and heads and shown on the drawing. Submit manufacturer’s literature and performance data of equipment and devices for review. Samples: Furnish at request of A/E. Contractor to coordinate work with sprinkler piping and head locations. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE B. DUCTWORK 23 31 13 -1 McHugh Engineering Associates A. B. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building The contractor must comply with the enclosed specification in its entirety. If on inspections, the specifier finds changes have been made without prior approval, the contractor will make the applicable changes to comply with this specification, at the contractor’s expense. At the discretion of the specifier, sheet metal gauges, and reinforcing may be checked at various times to verify all duct construction is in compliance. 1.04 DUCTWORK LEAKAGE CRITERIA A. E. All transverse joints and longitudinal seams shall conform to SMACNA's Class A sealing requirements as defined on page 1-6 of the 1985 SMACNA Manual, First Edition. Constant Volume Systems/Supply Ductwork Allowable Leakage 1% of design cfm. Constant Volume Systems/Return Ductwork Allowable Leakage 2% of design cfm. Variable Air Volume Systems/Supply Ductwork Fan to VAV boxes 1% of design cfm VAV Boxes to registers 2% of design cfm. Variable Air Volume Systems/Return Ductwork Allowable Leakage 2% of design cfm. 1.05 GAUGES A. B. C. D. Supply ductwork unit down shaft to floor: 3" w.g. Supply ductwork shaft to VAV: 2" w.g. Supply ductwork VAV to diffusers: 1" w.g. All other exhaust, relief, transfer, return ductwork: 1" w.g. B. C. D. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FABRICATED DUCT REQUIREMENTS - DUCTMATE A. All interior rectangular ducts shall be constructed with G-60 or better galvanized steel (ASTM A-653-94) LFQ, chem treat. Exterior ductwork shall be G-90 or better galvanized steel LFQ, chem treat. Kitchen, shower, or dishwasher exhaust shall be aluminum with aluminum joints. Materials: Support, access doors not part of ducts, bar or angle reinforcing damper rods and items made of uncoated mild steel shall be painted with two coats of primer or provide galvanized equivalent. Longitudinal Seams. Pittsburgh lock shall be used on all longitudinal seams. All longitudinal seams will be sealed with mastic sealant. Snaplock is not acceptable. Flanged interior Gasket. Ductmate 440 or a Butyl Rubber Gasket which meets Mil-C 18969B, Type II Class B, TT-C-1796 A, Type II Class B, and TTS-S-001657 must also pass UL-723. This material, in addition to the above, shall not contain vegetable oils, fish oils, or any other type vehicle that will support fungal and/or bacterial growth associated with dark, damp areas of ductwork. The recommended test procedure for bacterial and fungal growth is found in 21CFR 177, 1210 closures with sealing gaskets for food containers. Ductmate or W.D.C.I. proprietary duct connection systems will be accepted. Duct constructed using these systems will refer to the manufacturers guidelines for sheet gauge, intermediate reinforcement size and spacing, and joint reinforcements. Formed - on flanges (T.D.C./T.D.F./T-25A/T-25B) be accepted. Formed on flanges will be constructed as SMACNA T-25 flanges, whose limits are defined on page 1.36 1995 SMACNA Manual, Second Edition. No other construction pertaining to formed - on flanges will be accepted. Formed on flanges shall be accepted for use on ductwork 42" wide or less and must include the use of corners, bolts and cleat. (Over 42", the reinforcement/joint deflection criteria no longer conform B. C. D. E. F. DUCTWORK 23 31 13 -2 McHugh Engineering Associates G. H. I. J. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building with the UMC). Rectangular ductwork in the pool and pool equipment room shall be aluminum construction with stainless steel (317L or 904L) hangers, supports, and fasteners. Rectangular ductwork above the roof or outside shall be 4" water gauge construction. Pool return or exhaust ductwork above the roof shall be 4" water gauge aluminum. All ductwork in moist areas (Toilet Rooms, locker rooms, kitchens, etc) shall be aluminum construction with aluminum hangers, supports, and fasteners. 2.02 DUCTWORK - SMACNA STANDARDS A. All sheet metal supply, exhaust, relief, outside and return ductwork shall be formed from galvanized steel sheet unless otherwise specified. Galvanizing shall conform to SMACNA Standards. Exposed rectangular ductwork in finished areas shall have drive slip joints on transverse seams and Pittsburgh lock joints on longitudinal seams. Round spiral air conditioning ductwork supply shall be double wall lined. This applies to round ductwork in the Fitness Room. All ductwork in moist areas (Toilet Rooms, locker rooms, kitchens, etc) shall be aluminum construction with aluminum hangers, supports, and fasteners B. C. D. E. 2.03 ROUND AND FLAT OVAL DUCTS A. B. Construction: In accordance with HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Section III. Round ductwork shall be spiral seam construction only. Gauges shall be in accordance with SMACNA Duct construction Standard and fittings in accordance with SMACNA Duct Construction Standard, except as noted: 1. C. Joints 0"-20" diameter, interior slip coupling beaded at center, fastened to duct, with sealing compound applied continuously around joint before assembling and after fastening. Wrap joints with 3 inch wide duct tape. 2. Joints 21" - 72" diameter, use 3 piece, gasketed, flanged joints consisting of 2 internal flanges (with integral mastic sealant) split to accommodate minor differences in duct diameter, and one external closure band designed to compress gasketing between internal flanges. Example: Ductmate Spiralmate or equal. 3. Joints 73" diameter and up, use companion angle flanged joints only as defined on page 3-6 of the SMACNA Manual. Refer to manual for proper sizing and construction details. Ductwall to be welded longitudinal seams. All ductwork in moist areas (Toilet Rooms, locker rooms, kitchens, etc) shall be aluminum construction with aluminum hangers, supports, and fasteners 2.04 FIBERGLASS DUCTBOARD A. Fiberglass ductboard is not acceptable. 2.05 SEALERS A. Duct sealer shall be flexible, water-based, adhesive sealant designed for use in all pressure duct systems. After curing, it shall be resistant to ultraviolet light and shall seal out water, air and moisture. Sealer shall be UL listed and conform to ASTM E84. Sealer shall be Ductmate PROseal or an approved equal. All joints shall be sealed. B. DUCTWORK 23 31 13 -3 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building 2.06 DUCTWORK HANGER/SUPPORT A. B. Hang and support ductwork as defined by SMACNA, Section IV 1995 Manual, Section Edition, or as defined within. Hanger spacing not to exceed 8'. Not Permitted: Sheetmetal screws in a metal deck. 2.07 ACCESS DOORS IN DUCTWORK A. Access doors shall be hinged or Ductmate Sandwich Type Access Doors manufactured by Ductmate Industries, Inc., or approved equal. Doors shall be of adequate size to allow easy access to hardware which needs to be maintained. 2.08 TURNING VANES A. Turning vanes shall be Harper single wall turning vanes fabricated from the same material as the duct. Tab spacing shall be SMACNA standard. Rail systems with non-standard tab spacing’s shall not be accepted. All tabs shall be used, do not skip tabs. Mounting rails shall have friction insert tabs which align the vanes automatically. Vanes shall be subjected to tensile loading and be capable of supporting 250 lbs. when fastened per the manufacturer's instructions. Approved Systems: Ductmate PRO-Rail 2.09 A. B. C. D. E. F. 2.10 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. 2.11 A. SOUND ATTENUATING DUCT LINING All supply, outside, and return ductwork shall be lined. Kitchen supply and return ductwork shall not be lined. Insulate with 2" duct wrap with vapor proof jacket. Duct liner shall have a flame spread of not over 25, a fuel contributed of not over 50 and a smoke developed of not over 50. Liner shall be minimum 1 inch thick, 1.5 Lbs./Cu. Ft. density with a thermal conductance of .24 at 50 deg. F. mean temperature. (Conductance: BTU/Sq. Ft./F/Hr.). Liner shall not spall or deteriorate at air velocities to 4000 FPM when installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Liner shall be Johns-Manville Linacoustic or approved substitute by Owens-Corning, CertainTeed, Knauf, or approved equal. Observe all installation instructions. Any ductwork in unconditioned spaces or outdoors shall have insulation totaling R-8.3. FLEXIBLE INSULATED DUCTWORK Contractor may utilize flexible factory insulated ductwork for short connections from trunk ducts to diffusers when concealed. Lengths shall not exceed 10 feet. Pressure rating: Minimum 10" w.g. Outer Jacket: Aluminum equivalent to Flexmaster 5M 4.2 vapor barrier Insulation for ductwork in conditioned spaces: R-4.2. Insulation for ductwork in unconditioned spaces/outdoors - R-8. Liner: Wire with laminated mylar Manufacturer: Atco, Flexmaster, or approved equal. Applies to supply ductwork only. Exhaust and return ductwork to be rigid ductwork. Flexible insulated ductwork to comply with 25/50 flame spread and smoke density ratings. FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS Between all fans, air handlers, A/C units and ductwork. DUCTWORK 23 31 13 -4 McHugh Engineering Associates B. C. 2.12 A. B. C. D. 2.13 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. 2.14 A. B. C. D. E. F. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Material: Woven fiberglass with mounting accessories. Minimum 1" and maximum 4" between adjacent sections. DAMPERS Location: Where required to control flow of air or to balance air systems. Additionally includes at each supply/return/outside/exhaust air branch ductwork, each air device, individual duct risers, branch ductwork off duct risers, VAV box inlet. Type: Opposed blade, bearings at each end, adjustment quadrant and locking device for ducts over 1 square foot. Under 1 square foot dampers may be single blade with locking device. Leakage: 10 cfm maximum at 4" S.P. for 4 Sq. Ft. damper. Material: galvanized steel in galvanized steel ductwork, extruded aluminum in aluminum ductwork. FIRE DAMPERS Furnish and install pre-manufactured dampers with 1 1/2 hr. UL Label where required by code or indicated on the drawings. Fusible links shall be set at 160 deg. F. Provide 10 % extra links to the owner. SET FIRE DAMPERS IN 20 GAUGE SLEEVES WITH BREAKAWAY CONNECTIONS TO THE DUCTWORK ON EACH SIDE. SEE STANDARD SMACNA DETAILS FOR INSTALLATION. DAMPERS INSTALLED INCORRECTLY WILL BE REQUIRED TO BE REMOVED AND REPLACED CORRECTLY. Damper shall be set in wall or floor construction. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and the authority having jurisdiction. Damper blades shall be held out of airstream for ducts smaller than 14". Provide 12" x 12" access door in ductwork for access to each damper. Label "FIRE DAMPER ACCESS" with 2" high stenciled letters. Manufacturers; Prefco, American Warming and Ventilating, Air Balance, Phillips, Nailor-Hart, Lloyd, or approved equal. Fire dampers in fiberglass ductboard systems shall be installed in steel sleeves. The fiberglass duct shall be terminated and the steel sleeve installed at the fire wall or floor. Rigid ductboard shall not continue thru the fire wall. SMOKE DAMPERS (COMBINATION SMOKE/FIRE DAMPERS) Furnish and install smoke dampers of the size indicated on the drawings or required by the sheet metal shop drawings as a result of field coordination. Dampers shall meet all of the requirements per the latest edition of NFPA 90. Dampers shall be furnished with both the 1 1/2 hour (or 3 hour) UL label for fire dampers - UL 555 and the UL label for leakage resistance (smoke) - UL 555S. The leakage rating of the dampers shall be no more than 11 CFM/2 @ 1" W.G. after exposure to 1,000 deg. F. for one (1) hour. To maintain this leakage rating the amount of torque required to hold the damper closed shall not exceed 0 Lb. In. Dampers shall incorporate an integrated resettable and reusable UL listed electric link / mechanical lock assembly replacing standard fusible links and separate locking devices. The link shall be activated and the damper shall close and lock by either smoke detector signaled release (120V or 240V A.C. /D.C.) or excessive duct ambient temperature. Upon cessation of the detector signal or normalization of the duct ambient temperature the link assumes it original position enabling the damper to be reopened by the motor actuator automatically. Dampers shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers UL installation instructions. All combination smoke/fire dampers shall be Prefco Products, Cesco, Inc. model 5010 or equal by Phillips, Nailor-Hart, or approved equal. DUCTWORK 23 31 13 -5 McHugh Engineering Associates 2.15 A. B. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building FIRE PROOF ENCLOSURES H. Fire proof enclosures shall be installed where indicated on drawings or specified herein. Non-combustible, inorganic mineral fiberboard, 1 to 4 hour rated as required, capable of withstanding temperatures in excess of 2,000 deg F. Composed of hydrous calcium silicate made from high purity lime, silica, and reinforcing fibers. Protected from freeze/thaw conditions and high humidity areas with silicone emulsion, metal, or other suitable weatherproof coverings. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Suitable for outdoor applications, water repellant coating for all cut surfaces and filled areas to provide full water repellency. Approvals: National Evaluation Service Committee Report No. NER-332 Published by Council of American Building Officials (ICBO, BOCA, SBCCI) Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Fire Resistance Directory. Manufacturer: PABCO Firetemp or approved equal. 2.16 SPIRAL DUCT LINING A. B. C. D. Supply spiral duct shall be lined with 1" Johns Manville Spiracoustic Plus or Spiracoustic round duct liner, or approved equal. Material shall meet NFPA 90A and 90B as well as FHC 25/50 flame/smoke ratings. Material shall conform to ASHRAE 62/89. Install per manufacturer’s instructions. 2.17 VOLUME DAMPER CONTROL - REMOTE EXTERNAL CONTROL A. B. C. Applications: Drywall ceilings or where shown on drawings. Location: In ductwork where required to control air flow or balance air systems. Volume damper type: Opposed single blade round butterfly damper for external control, EPDM low leakage seals, scoop and spin-in type shell, Young Regulator Co. 5020 CC Series, or approved equal. Rectangular: #830-CC Series, or approved equal. Leakage: 10 CFM maximum at 4" s.p. for 4 square foot damper. Material: Galvanized steel in galvanized steel ductwork, extruded aluminum in aluminum ductwork. Controls: Bowden Cable Control Kit 270-896C to include hardware, for ceiling mounting in conjunction with external control of round or rectangular dampers, flush 7/8" diameter cold rolled steel cover is zinc plated for painting, 12" wrench (damper adjustments), metal clad control cable. C. D. E. F. G. D. E. F. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 DUCTWORK A. B. C. D. E. F. G. Dimensions on drawings are inside of lining. Ducts shall be concealed unless otherwise indicated. Changes in direction shall be made with radius bends or turning vanes. Ducts shall be cross-broken or machine grooved over 18 inches in width. Supports: Galvanized steel per SMACNA. Longitudinal joints; Pittsburg Lock or Inside Groove. Connections to wall louvers shall be sloped down to louver connection to prevent water draining into DUCTWORK 23 31 13 -6 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building H. interior. All ducts to have nested takeoffs, 45 degree cants, or adjustable turning vanes at all branch duct takeoffs. 3.02 ACCESS DOORS A. Furnish and install at all fire dampers, heating coils, humidifiers, filters, smoke dampers, valves, volume dampers and wherever indicated on the drawings. Minimum 12" x 12" double thick 22 gauge with 1" fiberglass, fully gasketed and with cam lock or latches. B. 3.03 LOUVERS A. Ductwork to an intake or exhaust louver shall slope down to the louver as to prevent water entering the ductwork. 3.04 LEAK SEALING A. B. All joints shall be sealed to prevent leakage. Systems shall be sealed with high velocity duct sealant. END OF SECTION DUCTWORK 23 31 13 -7 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 23 34 00 - FANS AND ROOF VENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. B. 1.02 A. B. 1.03 A. B. REFERENCE Refer to Section 23 05 00 for requirements which are applicable to this section. Refer to NFPA Codes and in particular Pamphlet 90A and 96 for requirements which are applicable to the work of this section. SUBMITTALS Submit shop drawings and catalog cuts of all items specified in this section. Submit performance data and electrical requirements of all items. QUALITY ASSURANCE Insure that all items are installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Items are required to be wired in accordance with the National Electrical Code and be installed in conformance with the requirements of International Mechanical Code and the authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ROOF EXHAUST FAN - SPUN ALUMINUM TYPE A. F. Furnish and install roof mounted exhaust fans of the size and capacity indicated on the drawing. Fans shall have a heavy gauge spun aluminum housing, weatherproof, with an integral weather shield. Fan wheels shall be centrifugal design and be statically and dynamically balanced. The drive shall be adjustable with a v-belt and the drive shall be capable of 150% of the listed load. Motor and drive shall be mounted on vibration isolating mounts. Fans shall be UL listed. The fans shall be provided with multiple blade interlocking motor operated backdraft dampers mounted in the curb throat. Fans shall be selected with consideration given to sound levels such that the generated noise level shall be less than the background level of the space being ventilated. A matching self-flashing roof curb shall be provided for each fan. Curb shall be insulated with 2 inch fiberglass. Curb shall have integral counter flashing with neoprene gasket. Manufacturers; Cook “ACE” Series, Penn Barry, Carnes, Acme, Greenheck, or approved equal. 2.02 CEILING EXHAUST FANS A. Furnish and install recessed ceiling exhaust fans of the size and capacity indicated on the drawings. Fans shall be UL listed and have steel centrifugal wheels, galvanized steel housing, backdraft damper, and thermal overload motor protection. B. C. D. E. FANS AND ROOF VENTS 23 34 00 - 1 McHugh Engineering Associates B. C. D. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building The fan shall be removable from casing, be sound attenuated, and be complete with matching grille. Commercial Application Manufacturers; Cook “GC/GN” Series or approved substitute by Carnes, Jenn, Greenheck, Penn Barry, or approved equal. Residential Application (Apartments, Houses, Condominiums) Manufacturers; Panasonic, Nutone, Broan, or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. B. 3.02 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. COORDINATION Coordinate wall, roof, and ceiling opening locations and sizes with the general contractor. Coordinate all electrical requirements with the electrical contractor. INSTALLATION Cooperate with the roofing contractor in the setting and flashing of the roof fans and roof vents. Each fan and vent shall be carefully set, flashed and counter flashed to provide a watertight roof penetration. The architect must approve the installation prior to acceptance of the installation. The ceiling exhaust fan shall be supported from construction above, not ceiling tiles or ceiling runners or grids. Connect to ductwork and extend ductwork to the perimeter of the building. Each fan shall be connected to ductwork with a flexible connection. The contractor shall be responsible for all control wiring associated with interlocking the fans with the air conditioning systems. Control wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code. Install fans with vibration isolating mounts wherever horsepower is 1/2 or over. Kitchen exhaust fan shall be installed within the requirements of NFPA. Verify wall opening or roof opening size before proceeding. Verify electrical branch wiring, circuit breaker and safety switch before proceeding. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Any steel shall be primed with Rustoleum and coated with 2 coats of enamel paint. Wire in accordance with the N.E.C. Provide local wall switch where directed by the Architect or Owner if not specified in 23 09 00 have ATC control. END OF SECTION FANS AND ROOF VENTS 23 34 00 - 2 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 23 36 18 - VARIABLE AIR VOLUME TERMINALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. B. 1.02 A. B. C. 1.03 A. B. C. D. 1.04 A. B. REFERENCE Refer to Section 23 05 00 for requirements which are applicable to this section. The SMACNA Low Velocity Duct Manual, ASHRAE Handbooks, International Mechanical Code, and NFPA shall apply to this work. WORK INCLUDED Provide all labor, material, equipment, and supervision necessary to install a complete functioning variable air volume system. Control wiring shall be furnished under this portion of the work. Power wiring will be provided under the electrical portion of the work. SUBMITTALS Submit shop drawings of VAV Terminal device. Submit manufacturers' performance data sheets and electrical requirements. Submit control features and wiring diagrams. Submit heating coil data. QUALITY ASSURANCE Verify that all equipment is installed in accordance with the manufacturer's warranty requirements and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. All materials are to be in accordance with NFPA-90A and UL 181 Standards. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. B. C. D. VAV TERMINAL DEVICE- SINGLE DUCT The units shall be pressure independent and shall reset to any air flow between zero and the maximum scheduled air volume. At an inlet velocity of 2000 fpm, the differential static pressure for any unit sizes 6 through 16 shall not exceed 0.25" w.g. for the basic unit. The units shall be designed, installed and field adjusted if necessary, to maintain controlled pressure independent air flow. Where inlet flow detections and/or turbulence affect factory calibration by more than 10%, installers shall field adjust the controller calibration to compensate. Features to accommodate field calibration and readjustment of air volume settings shall include gauge taps for balancing with a standard pressure gauge, and adjustable flow settings at the controller. Unit casing shall be 22 ga. galvanized steel with round or flat oval inlets. Outlets to be rectangular with slip and drive connections. Valve assemblies of 16 ga. steel are to have opposed blade VARIABLE AIR VOLUME TERMINALS 23 36 18 - 1 McHugh Engineering Associates E. F. 2.02 A. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building dampers to reduce air turbulence and fitted with special seals for tight closure and minimized sound generation. In the fully closed position, air leakage past the closed damper shall not exceed 3% of the nominal catalog rating at 3" inlet static pressure, as rated by the Air Diffusion Council test procedure. All units are lined with 1", 1 1/2 lb. density fiberglass insulation. Edges are sealed against air flow erosion. Materials are in accordance with NFPA-90A and UL 181 standards. Options and Accessories: 1. Hot Water Reheat Assembly. CONTROL FEATURES Direct Digital Electronic 1. The power source is a low voltage current. Signals from an electronic velocity sensor, together with signals from the room temperature sensor, are converted to digital impulses in the controller (microcomputer). 2. The controller not only performs the reset and pressure independent volume control functions, but is to be capable of adjusting and programming either locally or remotely for timed duty cycles. PART 3- EXECUTION A. ITEM Contractor and Manufacturer Responsibilities FURNISHED BY MOUNTED BY CONNECTED BY VAV Box VAV MFR Mech. Contractor Mech. Contractor Damper Actuator ATC Contractor VAV MFR VAV MFR Air-flow Pickup VAV MFR VAV MFR VAV MFR Hot Water Coil VAV MFR VAV MFR Mech. Contractor Control Valve ATC Contractor Mech. Contractor Mech. Contractor Valve Actuator ATC Contractor (4) ATC Contractor 24-V Transformer (5) VAV MFR VAV MFR Low Voltage Side VAV MFR Line Voltage Side See Note 2 Air-flow Transducer ATC Contractor ATC Contractor See Note 3 Wall Module ATC Contractor ATC Contractor ATC Contractor Digital Controller ATC Contractor VAV MFR Per Above (1) Mechanical contractor makes ductwork and piping connections. (2) By electrical contractor (preferably) or ATC Contractor, per plans and specs. (3) VAV MFR connects air-flow pick-up, ATC Contractor connects wiring (factory mounted and wired on to controller). (4) If not integral to control valve. (5) If the terminal has no fan, the 24 volt power source should be furnished, mounted and connected by the ATC Contractor. B. Testing and Balancing 1. After the system is installed, the test-and-balance contractor should proceed, box by box, as follows: a. Cycle the box to its maximum air flow setpoint. b. Compare actual air flow (using a flow hood) to the velocity displayed on the control VARIABLE AIR VOLUME TERMINALS 23 36 18 - 2 McHugh Engineering Associates C. D. E. F. G. H. I. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Center contractor's portable display terminal. As necessary, reset the displayed value using the display terminal calibration application software routine. c. Cycle the box to its minimum air flow setpoint. d. Compare and reset as above. The ATC Contractor should provide necessary instruction data and training assistance to the test-and-balance personnel, but should not assist in check-out of the boxes. Test device software should be provided by the ATC Contractor. The test-and-balance contractor should sign a receipt for acceptance of the device and protect all device software from unauthorized use or copying. VAV devices with hot water coils shall have one row copper tube, aluminum fin coil with copper sweat connections. Terminal unit controls shall consist of all sensors, controls, actuators, and relays necessary. All control components are to be factory mounted and checked for proper operation prior to shipment. The terminal units will be provided with flow-measuring taps and flow vs. pressure differential chart to all field calibration as appropriate to the DDC package. The terminal unit controls shall be capable of controlling airflow rates within +/- 5% based on thermostat demand from minimum inlet static pressure up to 3 inches inlet static pressure. Manufacturers: Nailor Industries Inc., Kruegar, Tuttle and Bailey, Trane, Carnes, Titus or approved equal. END OF SECTION VARIABLE AIR VOLUME TERMINALS 23 36 18 - 3 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 23 37 00 - AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. B. C. 1.02 A. B. REFERENCE Refer to Section 23 37 00 for requirements which are applicable to this section. The SMACNA Low Velocity Duct Manual, ASHRAE Handbooks, International Mechanical Code, and NFPA Pamphlet 90A shall apply to this work. Refer to Section 23 31 13 Ductwork. WORK INCLUDED Provide labor, material, equipment, and supervision necessary to install a complete air handling system with all supply and return distribution devices as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. Contractor is to furnish and install a volume damper in all supply, return, exhaust, and outside air branch ductwork. If these are omitted from the drawings, the contractor is to make an allowance to install one. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. B. Submit manufacturer’s literature and performance data of equipment and devices for review. Samples; Furnish at request of A/E. 1.04 A. B. QUALITY ASSURANCE Verify that all equipment is installed in accordance with manufacturer’s warranty requirements. Provide adequate supervision of labor force to see that installations are correct. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. B. C. D. AIR DIFFUSERS Furnish and install terminal air diffusers of the size and capacity indicated on the drawings. Room terminal air velocity shall not exceed 50 fpm. NC level shall not exceed 40. Air static pressure drop shall not exceed 0.10" wg. Diffusers shall be square plaque face with separable outer frame and removable inner core assembly, 1-2-3 or 4 way below, 22 gauge, 18" x 18" face size for 24" x 24" lay-in with round neck sized for volume and not to exceed 0.10" s.p. drop. Not to exceed 1/4" drop from ceiling to bottom of louver face. Titus Omni or equivalent by listed manufacturers. Diffusers shall be steel with a baked enamel finish unless otherwise specified with screwdriver adjustable opposed blade volume control from face, removable face, and adjustable pattern control. Finish shall be #26 white, and must pass ASTM D117 Corrosive Environment Salt Spray Test, ASTM 870 Water Immersion Test, and ASTM D-2794 Reverse Impact Cracking Test with a 50 #force applied. AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES 23 37 00 - 1 McHugh Engineering Associates E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Each diffuser shall have a mounting flange specifically selected for the particular type of ceiling finish. Contractor to coordinate with architectural ceiling details. Furnish and install equalizing grids and turning vanes at duct connection. Face size shall be 24" x 24" unless otherwise indicated on drawings. Manufacturers; Titus, Carnes, Tuttle and Bailey, Krueger, Nailor Hart, Metal Aire, Anemostat. Price, or approved equal. Performance shall be tested in accordance with ASHRAE 70-1991. Where other than 360 degree pattern is required, provide sectorizing baffler to control air flow. Perforated face ceiling diffusers are not acceptable With earthquake tabs. Those diffusers located in moist areas including toilet rooms, locker rooms, kitchens, etc. shall be similar but all aluminum construction. 2.02 HIGH CAPACITY NOZZLE DIFFUSERS A. B. C. D. Diffusers shall be adjustable horizontally and vertically to 38° Diffuser shall be provided with Aperture volume damper accessible by face of nozzle. Finish shall be selected by architect from standard finishes. Basis of Design: Titus TND-AA. Other manufacturer’s Price, Carnes, Tuttle and Bailey, Krueger, Nailor, Meta Aire, or approved equal. 2.03 LINEAR DIFFUSERS A. B. Linear slot diffusers shall have a single 2.5” slot and shall be 4’-0” in length. Linear slot diffusers shall be provided with a friction type volume damper located in the entry collar of the supply air plenum, accessible through the slot diffuser. For lay-in ceilings provide hanger wire support clips that are integral with the linear slot diffusers allowing the linear slot diffusers to be supported from the building structure with ceiling wire. For hard ceilings, provide clips that are integral with the linear slot diffusers allowing the diffusers to be secured directly to the ceiling framing without the requirement for hanger supports. Provide spline clips to secure joints and ceiling tees to the diffusers. Provide ends and corners as required. Ends shall be mitered picture frame type factory installed. Corners shall be mitered one piece unit. Pattern controllers shall be one piece extruded aluminum, 24 inches long maximum, positioned between spring loaded spacers. Pattern controllers shall allow the airstream to be directed flat against the ceiling in either direction or downward as well as allowing throw reduction every two feet along the entire length of the linear slot diffusers. Pattern controllers shall be designed to allow the airstream to be jetted into the occupied space and be adjustable to vector the airstream as required. Flanges exposed to view shall be painted factory standard white. All other surfaces shall be painted flat black. Provide paint samples if requested. Linear slot diffusers shall be provided with manufacturer provided plenum with 12” entry collar. Plenums shall be minimum 24-gauge galvanized steel and lined inside with black matte fiberglass insulation. Basis of design: Titus model FL-25 – 1-SLOT. Other manufacturer’s Price, Carnes, Tuttle and Bailey, Krueger, Nailor, Meta Aire or approved equal. C. D. E. F. G. H. 2.04 REGISTERS AND GRILLES A. B. C. D. Furnish and install where indicated on the drawing. Registers and grilles shall be steel with #26 white finish. Registers shall have opposed blade volume control. Registers and grilles shall have separable frames, or removable cores, with extruded aluminum AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES 23 37 00 - 2 McHugh Engineering Associates E. F. G. H. I. 2.05 A. B. C. D. E. F. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building blades on 1/2" centers for return and exhaust and 3/4" centers for supply, single set at 45 degrees for return or exhaust and double deflection adjustable for supply. Reinforced corners, mitered. Furnish and install turning vanes for connections to ducts. Where registers or grilles are located low near floor they shall be heavy duty 14 gauge steel with fixed 45 degree blades on 1/2" centers. In damp areas they shall be extruded aluminum. Where drawings indicate linear return grilles they shall be linear extruded aluminum with 1/8" bars 3/4" long on 1/4" centers. Manufacturers: Same as diffusers. Provide separable frames in drywall, plaster, or masonry construction. LOUVERS At a minimum the following criteria shall apply. Architect shall make final selction. Louvers shall be extruded aluminum with 12 gauge blades and frames 2" deep up to 12" in height. 4" deep from 12" to 36" in height, and 6" deep above 36" in height. Louvers shall be storm proof design and shall not pull rain through the blades at the capacity required by the system. Furnish a bird screen on each louver mounted at the inside face. Frames shall be miter welded with reinforced corners. Louver finish shall be determined by the architect. Contractor to coordinate Manufacturer; Arrow, Airstream Products Co., Air Balance, Arrow, American Warming and Ventilating, Ruskin, Greenheck and Pottorff, United Enertech, or approved equal. 2.06 AIR FILTERS A. B. Refer to drawings and schedules for certain air filtration requirements for various systems. These filters are to be installed in air handling equipment if the equipment is capable of receiving them. If not, the contractor shall install the filters in a filter frame with gasketed doors on the entering side of the unit. The filter frame in either case shall provide an air tight fit with gaskets. Manufacturers: CAMFIL/FARR Co., ECO Air Filters, Flanders, American Air Filter, or approved equal. C. 2.07 ABOVE THE ROOF DUCT CURBS A. Furnish and install - RPS Duct Mounting Pedestals as manufactured by RPS Products and Systems Corp., or approved equal at all necessary specified points or as shown on drawings. The duct mounting pedestal shall include an equipment rail, a matching length steel slide channel attached to "U" shaped mounting brackets and secured to side of equipment rail with lag bolts. The duct mounting assembly shall have galvanized 18' long continuous threaded rods for 12" vertical adjustment, lateral adjust spacer bracket for 12" horizontal adjustment, and galvanized slide assembly. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GRILLES, REGISTERS, DIFFUSERS A. B. Device face shall be flush with wall, ceiling or floor. Supports: Galvanized steel per SMACNA. AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES 23 37 00 - 3 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building 3.02 LOUVERS A. B. C. D. Louvers shall be set plumb in wall openings left by general contractor. Coordinate openings with G. C. Louvers shall be anchored in masonry construction. Frames shall be caulked water tight. Color of caulking shall be acceptable to the architect Connections to wall louvers shall be sloped down to louver connection to prevent water draining into interior. E. 3.03 A. B. FILTERS All filters shall be clean prior to acceptance by the owner. Renewable media filters shall be replaced with new filters. Cleanable filters shall be removed and cleaned just prior to acceptance. Provide one spare set of replaceable filters for each system to the owner prior to acceptance of the work. AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES 23 37 00 - 4 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 23 74 14 - CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCE A. B. C. Refer to section 23 05 00 for requirements which are applicable to this section. Refer to NFPA and IBC 2009 Code. Refer to ASHRAE, ARI, ASTM and ANSI standards. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. B. C. Provide all labor, material, equipment, and supervision necessary to furnish, install, and place into operation roof mounted central station VAV HVAC units as specified herein. Power wiring will be provided under the Electrical portion of the work. Control wiring shall be furnished under this portion of the work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. B. C. D. E. F. G. Submit shop drawings of equipment. Submit manufacturers' data sheets of performance Submit manufacturers' certificates of conformance with applicable codes. Submit wiring diagrams of electrical system. Submit piping diagrams of refrigeration system. Submit sound criteria, supply, return, radiated, in 8 octave bands re 10-8 db. Submit drawings indicating components, dimensions, weights and loadings, required clearances, and location and size of field connections. Submit product data indicating rated capacities, weights, accessories, service clearances and electrical requirements. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Submit operation and maintenance data. H. I. J. 1.04 A. B. C. D. QUALITY ASSURANCE Verify that all equipment is installed in accordance with the manufacturer's warranty requirements. Install systems and equipment in accordance with International code, NFPA and ARI standards Provide adequate supervision of labor force to see that installations are correct. LEED Construction IAQ - Contractor shall not utilize any new permanently installed HVAC equipment during the construction process; protect all equipment and ductwork openings with plastic. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Provide a full parts warranty for one year from start-up or 18 months from shipment, whichever occurs first. Provide Five year extended warranty for compressors including parts. B. CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS 23 74 14 - 1 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building 1.06 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Furnish complete service and maintenance of packaged rooftop units for one year from Date of Substantial Completion. Provide maintenance service with a two month maximum time interval between calls. Provide 24-hour emergency service on breakdowns and malfunctions. Include maintenance items as outlined in manufacturer's operating and maintenance data. Submit copy of service call work order or report to the Owner, and include description of work performed. B. C. D. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Unit shall conform to UL 1995/CSA 22.2 #236 for construction of packaged air conditioner and shall have UL/CSA label affixed to rooftop package. 1. In the event the unit is not UL/CSA approved, the manufacturer shall, at his expense, provide for a field inspection by a UL/CSA representative to verify conformance to UL/CSA standards. If necessary, contractor shall perform required modifications to the unit to comply with UL/CSA, as directed by the UL/CSA representative, at no additional expense to the Owner. 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS A. B. Provide one spare set of pre and final filters for each unit. Furnish one complete set per applicable motor of fan motor drive belts. 1.09 SUMMARY A. The contractor shall furnish and install packaged rooftop air conditioning unit(s) as shown and as scheduled on the contract documents. The unit(s) shall be installed in accordance with this specification and perform at the conditions specified, scheduled or as shown on the contract drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. B. C. GENERAL DESCRIPTION Configuration: Fabricate as detailed on drawings. Performance: Conform to AHRI 410 and 430 Standards. See schedules on prints. ( Acoustics: Sound power levels (dB) for the unit shall not exceed the specified levels shown on the unit schedule. The manufacturer shall provide the necessary sound treatment to meet these levels if required. 2.02 UNIT CONSTRUCTION A. Fabricate unit with heavy gauge channel posts and panels secured with mechanical fasteners. All panels, access doors, and ship sections shall be sealed with permanently applied bulb-type gasket. Gasketing shall not be shipped loose. CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS 23 74 14 - 2 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building B. Panels and access doors shall be constructed as a 2-inch nominal thick; thermal broke double wall assembly, injected with foam insulation with an R-value of not less than R-13. 1. The outer panel shall be constructed of G60 painted galvanized steel. 2. The inner liner shall be constructed of G90 galvanized steel. 3. The floor plate shall be constructed as specified for the inner liner. 4. Unit will be furnished with solid inner liners. C. Panel deflection shall not exceed L/240 ratio at 125% of design static pressure, maximum 5 inches of positive or 6 inches of negative static pressure. Deflection shall be measured at the panel midpoint. D. The casing leakage rate shall not exceed .5 cfm per square foot of cabinet area at 5 inches of positive static pressure or 6 inches of negative static pressure (.0025 m3/s per square meter of cabinet area at 1.24 kPa static pressure). E. Module to module field assembly shall be accomplished with an overlapping, full perimeter internal splice joint that is sealed with bulb type gasketing on both mating modules to minimize on-site labor and meet indoor air quality standards. F. Access doors shall be flush mounted to cabinetry, with minimum of two six inch long stainless steel piano-type hinges, latch and full size handle assembly. Access doors shall swing outward for unit sections under negative pressure. Access doors on positive pressure sections, shall have a secondary latch to relieve pressure and prevent injury upon access. G. Provide cross broke roofcap system to divert water from the top surface of the air handler. The rain shed roofcap shall have 2”standing seams covered with splice cap channels to seal top seam. Splice cap shall break down over sides of standing seam to protect the ends of the seam. 1. Cooling coil piping vestibule 24” deep shall be factory installed of standard cabinet construction on the coil connection side of the unit. Roofcap over vestibule shall be a continuous single piece covering both the coil section and the vestibule. Roofcap seams between coil section and vestibule are not allowed. 2. Heating coil piping vestibule 24” deep shall be factory installed of standard cabinet construction on the coil connection side of the unit. Roofcap over vestibule shall be a continuous single piece covering both the coil section and the vestibule. Roofcap seams between coil section and vestibule are not allowed. H. The unit shall have a 6-inch curb ready base for structural rigidity and condensate trapping. The curb-ready base shall be designed with sloped drip pans located under all unit sections except duct openings and shall be supported by frame member. I. Roof curb kit of 16-inch height shall provide support for the air handler on the building roof and provide a weather protected area for terminating and securing the roof membrane. The roof curb kit shall be manufactured by the air handler unit manufacturer. J. Construct drain pans from stainless steel with cross break and double sloping pitch to drain connection. Provide drain pans under cooling coil section. Drain connection centerline shall be a minimum of 3’’ above the base rail to aid in proper condensate trapping. Drain connections that protrude from the base rail are not acceptable. There must be a full 2’’ thickness of insulation under drain pan. CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS 23 74 14 - 3 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building 2.03 FAN ASSEMBLIES A. Acceptable fan assembly shall be a single width, single inlet, class II, belt-drive type plenum fan dynamically balanced as an assembly, as shown in schedule. Belt tensioners shall be provided. If not provided by the manufacturer, belt tensioners shall be provided by the contractor. Maximum fan RPM shall be below first critical fan speed. Fan assemblies shall be dynamically balanced by the manufacturer on all three planes and at all bearing supports. Copper lubrication lines shall be provided and extend from the bearings and attached with grease fittings to the fan base assembly near access door. If not supplied at the factory, contractor shall mount copper lube lines in the field. Fan and motor shall be mounted internally on a steel base. Provide access to motor, drive, and bearings through hinged access door. B. Fan and motor shall be mounted internally on a steel base. Factory mount motor on slide base that can be slid out the side of the unit if removal is required. Provide access to motor, drive, and bearings through hinged access door. Fan and motor assembly shall be mounted on 2" deflection spring vibration type isolators inside cabinetry. 2.04 BEARINGS, SHAFTS, AND DRIVES A. Bearings: Basic load rating computed in accordance with AFBMA - ANSI Standards. The bearings shall be designed for service with an L-50 life of 200,000 hours and shall be a heavy duty pillow block, self-aligning, grease-lubricated ball or spherical roller bearing type. B. Shafts shall be solid, hot rolled steel, ground and polished, keyed to shaft, and protectively coated with lubricating oil. Shafts shall not be hollow. C. V-Belt drives shall be cast iron or steel sheaves, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed. Fixed sheaves, matched belts, and drive rated based on motor horsepower. Belt tensioners shall be provided. If not provided by the manufacturer, belt tensioners shall be provided by the contractor. Minimum of 2 belts shall be provided on all fans. Standard drive service factor minimum shall be 1.1 S.F. for 1/4 HP – 7.5 HP, 1.3 S.F. for 10 HP and larger, calculated based on fan brake horsepower. 2.05 ELECTRICAL A. Units shall conform to bi-national standard ANSI/UL Standard 1995/CSA Standard C22.2 No. 236. B. Fan motors shall be manufacturer provided and installed, Open Drip Proof, premium efficiency (meets or exceeds EPAct requirements), 1750 RPM, single speed, 460V / 60HZ / 3P. Complete electrical characteristics for each fan motor shall be as shown in schedule. C. Wiring Termination: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Enclosed terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70. D. Manufacturer shall provide ASHRAE 90.1 Energy Efficiency equation details for individual equipment to assist Building Engineer for calculating system compliance. E. Installing contractor shall provide weatherproof GFI receptacle within 25 feet of unit to satisfy National Electrical Code requirements. CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS 23 74 14 - 4 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building F. Air handler manufacturer shall provide, mount and wire variable speed drive with electrical characteristics such as indicated on project schedule and shown on manufacturer's data sheets. See related specification for list of acceptable VFD manufacturers. 1. Air handler manufacturer shall provide and mount a 120 volt transformer. 2.06 COOLING AND HEATING COILS A. Certification: Acceptable water cooling & water heating coils shall be certified in accordance with AHRI Standard 410 and bear the AHRI label. B. Water cooling coil shall be provided. Provide access to coil(s) for service and cleaning. Enclose coil headers and return bends fully within unit casing. Coil connections must be factory sealed with grommets on interior and exterior panel liners to minimize air leakage and condensation inside panel assembly. If not factory packaged, Contractor must supply all coil connection grommets and sleeves. Coils shall be removable through side and/or top panels of unit without the need to remove and disassemble the entire section from the unit. 1. Headers shall consist of seamless copper tubing to assure compatibility with primary surface. Headers to have intruded tube holes to provide maximum brazing surface for tube to header joint, strength, and inherent flexibility. Header diameter should vary with fluid flow requirements. 2. Fins shall have a minimum thickness of 0.0075 inch aluminum plate construction. Fins shall have full drawn collars to provide a continuous surface cover over the entire tube for maximum heat transfer. Tubes shall be mechanically expanded into the fins to provide a continuous primary to secondary compression bond over the entire finned length for maximum heat transfer rates. Bare copper tubes shall not be visible between fins. 3. Coil tubes shall be 5/8 inch OD seamless copper, 0.020 inch nominal tube wall thickness, expanded into fins, brazed at joints. 4. Coil connections shall be carbon steel, NPT threaded connection. Connection size to be determined by manufacturer based upon the most efficient coil circuiting. Vent and drain fittings shall be furnished on the connections, exterior to the air handler. Vent connections provided at the highest point to assure proper venting. Drain connections shall be provided at the lowest point to insure complete drainage and prevent freeze-up. 5. Coil casing shall be a formed channel frame of galvanized steel. C. Water heating coil shall be provided. Provide access to coil(s) for service and cleaning. Enclose coil headers and return bends fully within unit casing. Coil connections must be factory sealed with grommets on interior and exterior panel liners to minimize air leakage and condensation inside panel assembly. If not factory packaged, Contractor must supply all coil connection grommets and sleeves. Coils shall be removable through side and/or top panels of unit without the need to remove and disassemble the entire section from the unit. 1. Headers shall consist of seamless copper tubing to assure compatibility with primary surface. Headers to have intruded tube holes to provide maximum brazing surface for CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS 23 74 14 - 5 McHugh Engineering Associates 2. 3. 4. 5. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building tube to header joint, strength, and inherent flexibility. Header diameter should vary with fluid flow requirements. Fins shall have a minimum thickness of 0.0075 inch aluminum plate construction. Fins shall have full drawn collars to provide a continuous surface cover over the entire tube for maximum heat transfer. Tubes shall be mechanically expanded into the fins to provide a continuous primary to secondary compression bond over the entire finned length for maximum heat transfer rates. Bare copper tubes shall not be visible between fins. Coil tubes shall be 5/8 inch OD seamless copper, 0.020 inch nominal tube wall thickness, expanded into fins, brazed at joints. Coil connections shall be carbon steel, threaded connection. Connection size to be determined by manufacturer based upon the most efficient coil circuiting. Vent and drain fittings shall be furnished on the connections, exterior to the air handler. Vent connections provided at the highest point to assure proper venting. Drain connections shall be provided at the lowest point to insure complete drainage and prevent freeze-up. Coil shall be furnished as an uncased galvanized steel track to allow for thermal movement and slide into a pitched track for fluid drainage. 2.07 FILTERS A. Furnish combination filter section with 2-inch pleated MERV 8 flat pre-filter with microbial resistant coating and 12-inch Varicel SH cartridge 95% efficient (MERV 15) final filter. Provide side loading and removal of filters. B. Filter media shall be UL 900 listed, Class I or Class II. C. Differential pressure (dirty filter) sensor shall be provided and alarm the BAS upon a rise in differential pressure above differential pressure setpoint. 2.08 ADDITIONAL SECTIONS A. Plenum section shall be provided and properly sized for inlet and/or discharge air flow (between 600 and 1500 feet per minute). The plenum shall provide single or multiple openings as shown on drawings and project schedule. B. Access section shall be provided for access between components. Floor options shall include .125-inch aluminum treadplate or drainpan as shown on project schedule. C. Blender / air mixer section to provide proper air mixing and distribution of the outside and return airstreams. Provide proper spacing provided in the direction of airflow as recommended by the blender manufacturer. D. Economizer section shall be provided with right side outside air opening and end return air opening and bottom exhaust air opening with parallel low leak airfoil damper blades. Dampers shall be hollow core galvanized steel airfoil blades, fully gasketed and have continuous vinyl seals between damper blades in a galvanized steel frame. Dampers shall have stainless steel jamb seals along end of dampers. Linkage and ABS plastic end caps shall be provided. Return and outside air and exhaust dampers must be driven separately. Damper Leakage: Leakage rate shall be less than two tenths of one percent leakage at 2 CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS 23 74 14 - 6 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building inches static pressure differential. Leakage rate tested in accordance with AMCA Standard 500. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Unit shall be mounted on a vibration isolating fleeting roof curb with a minimum of 1" static deflection. Verify power requirements with electrical contractor. Provide factory start-up service and commissioning. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Mount units on factory built roof mounting frame providing watertight enclosure to protect ductwork. Install roof mounting curb level. C. D. E. F. 3.02 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES A. Manufacturer shall furnish a factory-trained service engineer without additional charge to start the unit(s). Package rooftop unitary manufacturers shall maintain service capabilities no more than 25 miles from the jobsite. 3.03 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE A. Unit fan drives shall be provided with variable frequency drives to track CFM requirement of units on both supply and return fans. Refer to Section 23 09 13 for specification. B. PART 4 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS 4.01 CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS A. Furnish and install all associated controls required to provide the following sequences: 1. Optimized start 2. Optimized stop 3. Fan pressure optimization 4. Supply air temperature reset 5. Ventilation optimization a. CO2 demand controlled ventilation b. Occupancy demand controlled ventilation c. Time of day demand controlled ventilation. 6. Occupied standby mode. 7. Variable heating airflow. Unit shall have a freezestat on the leaving side of the chilled water coil. If the freezestat falls below 38 degrees, the air handling unit shall shutdown, outside air damper fully closed, return damper fully open, and circulation pump shall be enabled. B. CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS 23 74 14 - 7 McHugh Engineering Associates C. D. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Unit shall have mixed air stats and modulating outside, return, and relief dampers for a full economy cycle of operation where indicated on the drawings. Unit shall be deenergized and dampers close on a signal from the fire alarm system. END OF SECTION CENTRAL STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS 23 74 14 - 8 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 23 81 27 - DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCE A. Refer to Section 23 05 00 for requirements which are applicable to this section. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. F. Provide all labor, material, equipment, and supervision necessary to furnish, install, and place into operation ductless split systems as specified herein.. Power wiring will be provided under the Electrical portion of the work. Control wiring shall be furnished under this portion of the work. Furnish ductless split system heat pumps or air conditioning units of the quantity, size and capacity shown on the equipment schedules. System shall be a complete factory package consisting of compressor, evaporator coil, fan and motor, condenser coil fan and motor and complete refrigeration and heat pump temperature controls, and interconnecting wiring and refrigerant piping. Unit shall be rated in accordance with latest version ARI Standard 380 and shall be U.L. listed. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. B. C. D. Submit shop drawings of all equipment. Submit manufacturers' data sheets of capacity. Submit wiring diagrams of control system. Submit piping diagrams of refrigeration interconnection. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Verify that all equipment is installed in accordance with the manufacturer's warranty requirements. B. C. D. E. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 INDOOR UNIT A. B. C. D. E. The unit shall have a self-diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism. Factory pre-charge of R410A adequate for 33 feet of total length. The indoor units shall have a white, “flat screen” finish. The cabinet shall be supplied with a mounting plate to be installed onto a wall for securely mounting the cabinet. The evaporator fan shall be an assembly consisting of a direct-driven fan by a single motor. The fan shall be statically and dynamically balance and operate on a motor with permanent lubricated bearings. DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEM 23 81 27 - 1 McHugh Engineering Associates F. G. 2.02 The return air filter provided will be a removable and washable filter. The evaporator coil shall be a nonferrous, aluminum fin on copper tube heat exchanger with factory pressure tested. OUTDOOR UNIT A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. 2.03 Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building The outdoor unit shall be specifically matched to the corresponding indoor unit size. The outdoor unit shall be complete factory assembled and pre-wired with all necessary electronic and refrigerant controls. The cabinet shall be Ivory White with a finished powder coated backed enamel paint. The fan shall be a direct drive, propeller type fan. The motor shall be inverter drive, permanently lubricated type bearings, inherent. The fan shall be capable of operating in “silent operation” which lowers the outdoor fan speed in either cool, heat or auto modes. A fan guard is provided on the outdoor unit to prevent contact with fan operation. The outdoor coil shall be nonferrous construction with corrugated fin tube. The compressor shall be a rotary swing inverter-driven compressor. The outdoor unit shall have an accumulator, four-way reversing valve. The compressor shall have an internal thermal overload. The outdoor unit can operate with a maximum vertical height difference of 49 feet and overall maximum length of 66 feet without any oil traps, liquid or suction line changes. REMOTE CONTROLLER A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. Microprocessor technology with remote controller with LCD display. Operation Mode Setting (Heat, Auto, Cool/Dry). Temperature setting (in units of two degrees Fahrenheit) Self-Diagnostic Display. Room Temperature Display. Twenty-Four Hour On/Off Timer. Fan Speed Indicator. Auto/Speed Vane Operation Memory (for storing operation functions) Low Ambient Operation Whisper-Quiet Operation EMS Gateway Available to Management System via RS-232 Cable. 2.04 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Daikin or equal by Mitsubishi, Sanyo, EMI, or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEM 23 81 27 - 2 McHugh Engineering Associates B. C. D. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Mount compressors on Neoprene pads on roof curbs. Mount indoor unit on concealed blocking for additional support. Install pre-charged refrigerant lines through manufactured roof curbs by Pate or approved equal. Maintain water tight integrity of penetration. END OF SECTION DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEM 23 81 27 - 3 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 23 83 33 - ELECTRIC HEATERS AND HEAT TRACING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCE A. B. Refer to Section 23 05 00 for requirements which are applicable to this section. Refer to International, NFPA, NEC, and UL requirements for standards relating to these specifications. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, material, equipment, and supervision necessary to install and place into operation all of the equipment specified in this section. 1.03 A. 1.04 A. B. SUBMITTALS Submit manufacturers shop drawings and catalog data sheets of all items in this section. QUALITY ASSURANCE Verify that all equipment is installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Provide benchmark construction for review of the owner and architect prior to installation of remaining units. Benchmark unit shall, after review and approval, become the standard against which all other units will be matched. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FAN FORCED WALL HEATERS A. B. Unit to be U. L. listed and of the size and capacity indicated on the drawings. Overheat protection, integral thermostat, nickel chromium alloy heating elements, permanently lubricated motor, proportional heating element control, and proportional fan control. Finish to be selected by Architect. Manufacturers: QMark, Berko, or approved equal. C. D. 2.02 A. B. C. D. E. F. ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS - SUSPENDED Built in or remote thermostat as indicated on the drawings. Mounting brackets. Totally enclosed, permanently lubricated motor. Element steel finned sheath, zinc plated. Auto reset cutout, UL listed. Manufacturer: QMark, Berko, Trane, or approved equal. ELECTRIC HEATERS AND HEAT TRACING 23 83 33 - 1 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building 2.03 ELECTRIC PIPELINE HEAT TRACING A. Furnish and install where required by specification or indicated on the drawings, a complete system of electrical heat tracing. The trace shall be a mineral insulated cable of copper or copper alloy sheathed heating element in dielectric refractory material. Piping is to be appropriately marked as required by NEC 427.13. Furnish cable in lengths and wattages required to maintain the pipe above 40 degrees at an outside temperature of 10 degrees. All piping shall be insulated after installation of the heating element. Use 3 watts per ft. for piping up to and including 1 inch in diameter, 4 watts per ft for piping to and including 2 inch, 5 watts per ft. for piping to and including 3 inch, 7 watts per ft. for 4 inch, and 10 watts per ft. for 6 inch. Allow an additional 15 % for valves and fittings. Cable shall be Type MI as manufactured by Chromalox, Raychem, or approved equal and be complete with adjustable thermostat for each location. B. C. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. B. C. D. E. INSTALLATION Coordinate locations and rough-in requirements with other trades prior to installation. Coordinate electrical requirements with the electrical contractor prior to purchasing equipment. Verify voltages and amperages for feeders. Provide for benchmark construction as described above. Adjust, place in service, and provide instructions, guarantees, and maintenance manuals to the owner. Install electrical heat tracing cable in conformance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Test heating circuits before insulating. Arrange with electrical contractor for electrical power circuits. END OF SECTION ELECTRIC HEATERS AND HEAT TRACING 23 83 33 - 2 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 00 00 - STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REGULATIONS, CODES, STANDARDS A. Reference Codes, applicable sections of the following codes and standards shall be considered as binding to the work of this project: NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers' Association NEC National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) - 2014 Edition NECA National Electrical Contractors’ Association NEIS National Electrical Installation Standards EGSA Electrical Generating Systems Association IBC International Building Code NFPA National Fire Protection Association IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers UL Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. IES Illuminating Engineering Society OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration ANSI American National Standards Institute ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials FM Factory Mutual IRI Industrial Risk Insurers ISO Insuring Services Office IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineers Assoc. ADA Americans with Disability Act NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association All local codes to be incorporated. Latest adopted codes and latest editions of standards shall be the basis of conformance. Obtain and pay for all permits and inspections, and any associated charges. Inspection Agency Certificate of Inspection to be provided at completion of the work. Inspection by Middle Dept or other local inspection agency. Drawings, Contract, General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions form a part of this section, by reference thereto and shall have the same force and effect as if printed herewith in full. Failure to review these sections shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to fully comply with the terms therein. Where the contract documents are more stringent but not in conflict with the applicable codes, the more stringent requirements shall be followed. B. C. D. E. F. G. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. The procedure for submissions of shop drawings shall be as specified in Division 1, or as a minimum, as indicated below. Furnish submissions of shop drawings and samples of materials and equipment as indicated in these sections, on the drawings, or as directed by the A\E. Submissions will be made in a timely fashion such that adequate time exists to review the drawings, or material, and arrive at the site in accordance with the project schedule. B. STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK 26 00 00 - 1 McHugh Engineering Associates C. D. E. F. G. H. I. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Submissions will not be accepted with work defined as "By Others". Identify contractor by name and with his approval so indicated. Submissions are required prior to purchasing, fabrication, or installation of any material or equipment. Submissions shall be reviewed and certified by the submitting contractor that they are in accordance with the project documents. When requested by the engineer, shop drawings shall be required to be submitted to designated agencies for review and approval prior to submission to the engineer. Contractor shall arrange and pay for all tests and inspections specified herein or required by above agencies and furnish required certificate of inspection to owner. Performance test data and wiring diagrams of all electrical equipment. Submissions shall include warrantees by the manufacturer for equipment being provided. Submissions for commonly related items such as fixtures, trim, carriers, shall be combined in a single brochure with all items being furnished clearly identified. Shop drawings and submittals shall be checked and stamped by the contractor before submitting. They shall conform to measurements made at the site, the contract requirements, and coordinated with all other trades. Specific models in catalog sheets must be identified as well as all options, voltages, phases, etc. identified so as to be clear on what is being provided. 1.03 SUBSTITUTIONS A. B. Substitution of other than specified manufacturers shall not be allowed after bid date. Prior approval is required for other manufacturers. If the contractor wishes alternate materials or equipment be considered, he must submit information at least 10 days before bid date. If acceptable, an addendum will be issued which will allow the contractor to utilize the alternate. Samples shall be provided when directed by the architect or engineer. If the contractor submits alternate equipment, manufacturers, systems, methods, or materials, not specifically identified in the specifications, additional review and investigation time may be required by the engineer. If the engineer determines additional review time is required because of the substitution then this will be a billable service by the engineer at the rate of $150.00/hr. for such services. Also billable will be any redesign time and revisions to drawings should they be necessary for incorporation into the work. Services will be billable to the contractor making such substitutions and will be payable prior to approval or rejection. If the contractor elects to submit alternate equipment, manufacturers, systems, methods, or materials, not specifically identified in the drawings and specifications, it is the contractor’s responsibility to coordinate the work with other trades and pay for any associated costs with the substitution or change. C. D. E. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. B. C. Deliver materials and equipment in manufacturer’s original cartons or on skids. Store materials in dry enclosure out of way of work progress. Protect equipment, fixtures, and lenses after placement. 1.05 REFERENCE A. B. C. D. Requirements established within the portions of this Project Manual titled Division 1, General Requirements are collectively applicable to the work of this section. Instructions to Bidders, Special Conditions and Addenda as issued are part of this specification. Electrical drawings along with all other project drawings represent the work of this Division. Drawings, Contract, General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions form a part of this section, by reference thereto and shall have the same force and effect as if printed herewith in full. Failure to review these sections shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to fully STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK 26 00 00 - 2 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building comply with the terms therein. 1.06 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N. O. P. Q. 1.07 WORK SUMMARY Provide labor, materials, equipment and supervision necessary to install complete operating electrical systems as indicated on the drawings and specified herein, including all work at the site and within the proposed construction areas to accomplish the require work. Contractor shall provide all demolition necessary to remove, replace, repair, install new or modify existing work whether it be walls, floors, ceilings, structure, mechanical or electrical required to install his work. Contractor shall replace all work to leave in a finished condition. Pipe, conduit, ductwork and wiring shall be cut back behind wall surfaces above ceilings and below floor levels so that a patch can be placed over the opening. All work shown on the drawings and not expressly mentioned in the specifications and all work specified but not shown on the drawings, but necessary for the proper execution of same shall be performed by the contractor. It is not the intent of the drawings and specifications to describe every feature and detail of the work. No additions to the contract amount will be approved for any materials, equipment, or labor to perform additional work unless it can be clearly shown to be beyond the scope and intent of the drawings and specifications. Roof penetration for electrical work and all associated roof work. Provide 3 phase, 4 wire electrical service of the size as indicated on the drawings at 480Y/277V with distribution to all equipment at 480V, lighting at 277V. Provide stepdown transformers for distribution at 208Y/120V and/or 120/240V for 208V/240V loads and 120V for general purpose receptacles. Provide a power system study. The study is to include short circuit, protective device evaluation, protective coordination study and arc fault evaluation studies. Provide addressable fire alarm system with battery backup, (horn/strobes) (speaker/strobes), pull stations, detectors, strobes, duct detectors, remote annunciator, elevator controls for recall and shutdown of power, telephone auto dialer, fire fighter phones, and all associated controls and appurtenances. Provide exit and emergency lighting throughout with emergency power supply in addition to normal power. Provide power to HVAC and plumbing equipment as necessary to have complete operating systems. Provide lighting throughout, with exterior lighting at all exit doors. Provide telephone conduit system. Provide (2) CAT 3 plenum rated telephone cables from the telephone demarcation point to the fire alarm control panel for the auto dialer. Provide Uninterruptible Power Supply System (UPS) with input filter, transformer, battery, and all associated controls and appurtenances. Provide grounding system for facility in accordance with the National Electrical Code. Base bid is to provide all primary cable, transformer coils, busways, switchboards, panelboards and all feeders as copper conductors. Alternate bid is to provide all as aluminum conductors of equivalent current carrying capacity. Provide code required signage (i.e., NEC 110.34, NEC 700.8, and 695.4 B3). Provide third party certification of all packaged systems by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) in accordance with OSHA Federal Regulations 29CFR1910.303 and .399 as well as Pamphlet #70 and National Electrical Code Article 90-7. SITE INSPECTION STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK 26 00 00 - 3 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building A. B. C. 1.08 A. B. C. D. E. F. 1.09 A. Visit site, inspect, and become aware of all conditions which may affect the work. Investigate utilities, protection requirements for adjacent facilities, storage locations, and access to the construction area. Submission of a bid will be deemed evidence of having compiled with this requirement. Contractor may not request additional costs for existing conditions which were evident from inspection of the site. Before ordering materials or commencing with any work, the contractor shall verify all measurements at the building. Coordination of equipment, materials, spaces, and dimensions are the responsibility of the contractor. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS Drawings and specifications are intended to be taken as a whole and each is to supplement the other. It is not intended that all work must be both shown on drawings and specified in the specifications. An item shown on the drawings and not indicated in the specifications is to be understood to be required for the project. An item specified and not shown on the drawings is to be understood to be required for the project. If there is a conflict between the drawings and specifications it is to be understood that the more strict or more expensive interpretation shall govern. Also, if a conflict exists between specification sections or between drawing plans and details, it is to be understood that the more strict or more expensive interpretation shall govern. The architects or engineers interpretation of the documents shall be binding upon the contractor. If a question arises, the contractor shall ask for an interpretation prior to bidding and an answer shall be issued as an addendum to all bidders. If a questions arises after bidding the A/E interpretation shall govern. The drawings are generally diagrammatic and necessary field coordination and adjustment must be provided by the contractor prior to installation. Such deviations to the work to allow for coordination shall be kept to a minimum and any such deviations shall be at no extra cost. MINIMUM INTEGRATED EQUIPMENT SHORT CIRCUIT RATING: Where the contract documents indicate secondary service from the utility Company (208/120V, 3 phase or 480/277V, 3 phase) available short circuit currents including system motor contribution (amperes RMS symmetrical) at the line terminals of the UL service entrance labeled main distribution panelboard or switchboard, shall be in accordance with the following tabulation: _____________________________________________________________________ Service Minimum Service Entrance Panelboard Rating Transformer Rating ______________________________________________________________________ KVA %Z 208/120 480/277 ______________________________________________________________________ 75 112.5 150 225 300 500 750 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 5.5 14,500 22,000 29,000 43,000 58,000 96,000 42,200 STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK 10,000 10,000 13,000 19,000 25,000 42,000 18,000 26 00 00 - 4 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building 1000 5.5 56,100 24,500 1500 5.5 85,000 37,000 2000 5.5 49,000 2500 5.5 51,000 3000 5.5 73,500 ______________________________________________________________________ B. C. D. The Integrated Equipment short circuit rating of the MDP or switchboard shall meet or exceed the tabulated minimum values. This shall be construed to mean that the equipment withstand capability (bus bracing), and interrupting capacities of main and feeder devices, shall each meet or exceed the tabulated minimum values. Service transformer ratings shall be as indicated on the drawings. If said ratings are not indicated, the contractor shall contact the engineer and/or utility company for clarification. The only deviations from this tabulation that are permissible shall be the results of a short circuit study (if and as specified in Section 26 05 73 Power System Studies), or documented data from the utility company. 1.10 PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. Provide a project schedule which shall show start, sequence of each type of work, milestone schedule, and completion of each type of work, with overall completion date. 1.11 COST SCHEDULE A. B. Provide a detailed cost breakdown indicating labor and material amounts for various types of work. AIA forms are required for this submission. 1.12 OFFICE A. The contractor shall set up his job office (desk) where directed by the owner. 1.13 STORAGE A. Material shall be stored only where directed by the owner. 1.14 SANITARY A. The contractor will at his own expense, provide and maintain in a sanitary condition, a portable chemical toilet. Toilet will be located where directed by the owner. B. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. B. All materials and equipment shall be new and in present production of major manufacturers. All materials and equipment shall be in conformance with accepted trade standards as a STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK 26 00 00 - 5 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building C. D. minimum. Where specifications exceed any minimum standard, the specifications shall govern. Reference of equipment in the singular shall be deemed to apply to as many such items as may be required to complete the work. The word “provide” means “furnish and install complete, tested, and adjusted as necessary with all accessories, circuiting, switching, lenses, mounting hardware, cover plates, hangers and supports”. 2.02 FASTENERS AND SUPPORTS A. B. C. D. E. F. G. All work shall be securely fastened to building construction. Utilize toggle or machine bolts in hollow construction. Utilize machine screws for steel construction. Utilize expansion shields for masonry construction. Utilize lag bolts for wood construction. All fasteners shall be galvanized or plated with rustproof finish. Maximum load on fasteners shall be at a safety factor of 4 to 1 for a tested sample. 2.03 MOTOR STARTERS AND CONTACTORS A. Single phase manual motor starters with overloads shall be provided under the electrical portion of the work for fractional horsepower motors up to ½ HP. Polyphase motor starters and motor starters above ½ HP shall be furnished under other portions of the work. The starters in A or B above shall be installed under the electrical portion of the work. Polyphase starters shall be magnetic combination type, across-the-line electrically operated, electrically held, three pole assemblies, with arc extinguishing characteristics, silver to silver renewable contacts, 3 pole thermal bi-metallic, red run pilot light, individual phase protection, with overload heaters matched to motors installed and with 4 auxiliary contacts, Hand-Off-Auto switch, and control transformer. For single phase motors above ½ HP provide magnetic combination, single phase motor starters with overloads, non-fusible disconnect switch, red run pilot light, integral 120 volt control transformer with dual primary fusing, auxiliary contacts. Starters shall be as manufactured by G.E., Cutler Hammer, Siemens, Square D, Allen Bradley, or approved equal. Contactors shall be across the line, electrically operated, mechanically held 3 pole assemblies for tungsten and ballast lighting loads. Acceptable manufacturers: GE, Cutler Hammer, Siemens, Square D, Allen-Bradley or approved equal. Manual motor starters without overloads in NEMA 1 enclosure equal to G. E. Type TC shall be used for the following load: 1. 30 amperes or less continuous 2. 1 hp or less at 120 volts 3. 2 hp or less at 240 volts B. C. D. E. F. G. H. 2.04 MANUFACTURERS’ NAMES A. Manufacturers’ names are included herein to establish those suppliers who may provide products for this project subject to the requirements of the specifications. Although a manufacturer’s name may appear as an acceptable supplier it is not understood that a standard product is acceptable. Products must also meet the technical, performance, and physical requirements of the project as well as being names in the specification. Any STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK 26 00 00 - 6 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building B. deviations from this must be acknowledged at bid time by the supplier and he shall be solely responsible for any and all costs associated with the application of his product in the project. A design cannot be prepared which accommodates the installation of all suppliers and is not intended to do so. If certain modifications must be made to accommodate one particular supplier’s equipment it shall be considered the contractor’s responsibility to arrange for such accommodations and be financially responsible for same. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 WELDING A. All electric power for arc welding shall be supplied by the contractor performing the work. 3.02 VEHICLES A. Vehicle access to the site will be as directed by the owner. 3.03 RUBBISH DISPOSAL A. Except for items or materials identified to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain properly of the owner or tenant, demolished materials shall become the contractor’s property and shall be removed, recycled or disposed from the project site in an appropriate and legal manner. Burning of debris on the site shall not be permitted. All debris, refuse, and waste shall be removed from the premises at regular intervals. No accumulation shall be permitted. B. 3.04 WORKMANSHIP A. B. Maintain all public walks and access ways. Erect and maintain barricades, warning signs, and other protective means as may be directed by the owner for protection of all persons and property from injury or damage. Plug or cap open ends of piping systems and conduit. Stored materials shall be covered to prevent damage by inclement weather, sun, dust or moisture. Protect all installed work until accepted in place by the owner. Protect lighting fixtures. Do not install plates, covers, and other finished devices until masonry, title, and painting operations are complete or protect otherwise. Protect all existing or new work from operations which may cause damage such as hauling, welding, soldering, painting, insulation and covering. All devices and exposed raceways are to be plumb and true. All exposed raceways in finished areas are to be coordinated with the architect/engineer prior to installation. C. D. E. F. G. H. 3.05 SCAFFOLDING A. The contractor shall at his own expense, install, operate, protect, and maintain temporary services such as scaffolding, material hoists, access walks, etc., as may be required. 3.06 SITE UTILITIES STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK 26 00 00 - 7 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building A. B. C. 3.07 A. The contractor may use the existing water and electric power for temporary construction needs. The owner will direct where these services may be tapped. Those services that are used during construction, but are to remain, shall be refurbished to a new condition before turning back to the owner. CLEAN-UP B. C. Remove all visible temporary tags or labels as well as any protective coverings and wrappings from fixtures and equipment. Remove all spots, stains, soil, paint, spackle, and other foreign matter from all finished work. Remove all trash and debris from the premises. 3.08 LUBRICATION A. B. C. Furnish and install and maintain all required lubrication of any equipment operated prior to acceptance by the owner. Lubrication shall be as recommended by the equipment manufacturer. Provide one year’s supply of lubricants to owner at date of acceptance. Verify that required lubrication has taken place prior to any equipment start up. 3.09 EQUIPMENT START UP A. B. C. Verify proper installation by manufacturer or his representative. Advise A/E 2 days prior to actual start up. Verify proper operation. Obtain signed statement by manufacturer or his representative that equipment is operating within warranty requirements. Submit statement to A/E. 3.10 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MANUALS A. G. Properly and fully instruct owner’s personnel in the operation and maintenance of all systems and equipment. Insure that the owner's personnel are familiar with all operations to carry on required activities. Such installation shall be for each item of equipment and each system as a whole. Provide report that instruction has taken place. Include in the report the equipment and/or systems instructed, date, contractor, owners personnel, vendor, and that a full operating and maintenance manual has been reviewed. Manual shall include all instructions on operation, maintenance, repair parts list, lubrication requirements, brochures, catalogue cuts, wiring diagrams, piping diagrams, control sequences, service requirements, names and addresses of vendors, suppliers and emergency contacts. 3 manuals shall be provided to owner. Submit manuals for review prior to operating instruction period. Manuals shall be 8 1/2" x 11" with hard cover suitably bound. Provide to the owner any special tools necessary to operate any of the equipment. 3.11 PENETRATION SEALING A. All penetrations of Natatorium walls, fire walls, smoke walls, and floors shall be sealed around conduits and wiring to prevent the flow of gases or smoke. B. C. D. E. F. STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK 26 00 00 - 8 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building B. C. D. The sealant shall be foamed in place between the conduit or wiring and the adjacent walls and floors with DOW Corning RTV foam or Fire Stop Caulk. All penetrations through roof structure shall be coordinated with other trades to minimize the potential for water seepage and leakage through such penetrations. When electrical boxes located on opposite side of a fire resistance rated wall assembly are within 24" horizontally of each other, both devices are to be wrapped with Spec Seal Putty Pads as manufactured by Specified Technologies, Inc. or approved equivalent. 3.12 EQUIPMENT SETTING A. C. D. Furnish and install as a minimum, a 4" thick concrete pad beneath all floor mounted equipment. Furnish and install as a minimum, spring vibration isolators under any equipment 10 HP and over and rubber-in-shear vibration isolation under all equipment less than 10 HP. Reinforce concrete with No. 4 rods 12' on center both ways. Pad to have 3/4" dowels into concrete at 1 per 4 square feet. 3.13 INSTALLATION MOUNTING HEIGHTS A. To be verified by Architect, but in general shall be as follows (top of device elevation above finished floor): B. Lighting switches, controls: Duplex receptacles: Duplex receptacles over counters: Telephone data wall plate and modular jack, desk phone: Telephone, data wall plate and modular jack, wall phone: Special outlets: Fire alarm annunciating devices: Fire alarm manual pull stations: Clock receptacles: CATV wall plates and modular jacks: CATV wall plates and modular jacks mounted near ceiling: Thermostats (forward reach): Thermostats (side reach): Thermostats with lockable cover: 3 ft. 10 in. 1 ft. 8 in. +8" above countertop 1 ft. 8 in. 3 ft. 10 in. As required for equip. 85" 3 ft. 10 in. As indicated on dwgs. 1 ft. 8 in. Coordinate mounting height with Architect. 3 ft. 10 in. 3 ft. 10 in. 4 ft. 6 in. B. Requirements of the Americans with Disability Act and/or ANSI A117.1 shall be met. Structural and mechanical details shall be coordinated before roughing in. 3.14 COORDINATION A. B. Coordinate with work of other trades prior to installation. Arrange for minor variations for complete coordinated installation. Provide all necessary offsets to install the work and to provide clearances for other trades. 3.15 CUTTING AND PATCHING STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK 26 00 00 - 9 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building A. B. C. Provide for cutting and patching for all electrical work. Patching to be performed by tradesmen skilled in the particular trade. Contractor shall patch and repair any existing openings created by the demolition work in floors, walls, partitions, and ceilings not being reused for the new construction. 3.16 BALANCING AND TESTING A. B. C. Electrically balance connected loads in panels. The entire wiring system shall be tested to be free from grounds and faults. Identify all circuits and all phase wiring at terminations. 3.17 EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHERS A. B. This contractor shall make final electrical connections to equipment furnished by other contractors or the owner. Provide electrical service and disconnects as required by code to supply such equipment. 3.18 EXCAVATION, SHORING, PUMPING, BACKFILLING A. Perform all excavation required to install the work. Deposit excavated material as so not to create a slide hazard. Maintain excavations free of water. Backfill with clean material and pneumatically tamp in 8 inch layers. Remove excess material, including rock, from site or as directed by the A/E. Return to original conditions any areas disturbed for excavation. Install all work neat, trim, and plumb with building lines. Install work in spaces allocated. Cutting and patching shall be performed by skilled tradesmen normally employed for the work involved. B. C. D. E. F. G. 3.19 RECESSES A. B. Furnish information to the General Contractor as to sizes and locations of recesses required to install panels, boxes, grilles, and other equipment or devices which is to be recessed in walls. Make offsets or modifications as required to suite final locations. 3.20 LABELING A. C. All equipment panels, controls, safety switches, and devices shall be provided with permanent black laminated micarta white core labels with 3/8 inch letters. This shall also apply to all controllers, remote start/stop pushbuttons, equipment cabinets, and where directed by the A/E. This shall not apply to individual room thermostats, and local light switches. 3.21 GUARANTEE A. All work shall be guaranteed to be free from defects for a period of 1 year of operation from date of acceptance by the owner unless otherwise specified. Guarantee shall be extended for all non-operational periods due to failure within the B. B. STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK 26 00 00 - 10 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building guarantee period. 3.22 AS BUILT DRAWINGS A. At the completion of the work and prior to final payment, the contractor shall furnish a reproducible as-built drawings to the A/E for approval. The drawings shall indicate all work installed and its actual size, location and identify all systems installed with locations of concealed devices, conduit, piping and other equipment and complete wiring diagrams of all systems. If acceptable, the A/E will submit the as-built drawings to the owner as record drawings. If not acceptable, the A/E will return the drawing to the contractor to make corrections as required. The contractor will resubmit for approval. The as-built drawings shall indicate measured dimensions of underground lines and other concealed work. B. 3.23 SAMPLE CONSTRUCTION A. (One double and one single patient room) (one apartment) (one tenant space) shall be constructed and approved by the owner, architect/engineer and local code officials (electrical inspector or underwriter, building code official, fire marshal) before all other rooms are constructed. This room shall represent the standard against which all others will be constructed. Installation will include all units, ducts, piping, wiring, fixtures, devices, etc. which are required for complete rooms. B. C. 3.24 MAIN ELECTRICAL ROOM DRAWING A. Provide 3/8" = 1'-0" scale drawings of the Main Electrical Room indicating all electrical, mechanical, plumbing, telephone, security, fire alarm and life safety equipment to be installed within this room. Exact dimensions of equipment, pads, etc., are to be indicated. Show two cross sections at important points. Obtain information from other subs as appropriate. Submit for review and approval along with electrical equipment submittals. Equipment will not be approved prior to review of this drawing. B. C. 3.25 GENERAL ELEVATOR REQUIREMENTS A. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install an elevator safety switch sized to match the requirement of the elevator motor. Switch shall be located within the Elevator Machine Room on the strike side of the entrance doorway. The Electrical Contractor shall provide the branch circuit to the safety switch and make terminations between the switch and the elevator motor. Furnish and install a 20 Amp dedicated circuit and disconnect switch for the elevator cab(s) lighting system. The disconnect switch is to be located within the Machine Room on the strike side of the entrance doorway. This circuit is to be ground fault protected. Furnish and install a dedicated 20 Amp circuit for the elevator pit and Machine Room. Furnish and install GFI receptacles and a porcelain socket with wire guard and 100 watt lamp located within the elevator pit. Pit devices and lighting switch are to be located adjacent to pit access. Furnish and install a telephone back box and conduit in the Elevator Machine Room for the elevator cab telephone circuit and local telephone jack. Furnish and install smoke detectors for elevator recall at each elevator lobby when building is B. C. D. E. STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK 26 00 00 - 11 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building F. G. three stories or more. These automatic initiation devices are to be interlocked with elevator controller and building Fire Alarm Control Panel. Heat detectors are to be provided in the Machine Room and at the top and bottom of the elevator shaft. Furnish and install fire rated enclosures for the back boxes of any electrical devices recessed in the walls of the elevator equipment room or shaft. Walls are fire rated. Furnish and install (2) 20 Amp 120V circuits for sump pump and sump pump alarm. Coordinate with plumbing contractor. 3.26 ELEVATOR SHUNT TRIP (SPRINKLED BUILDING) A. The elevators are required to be provided with a shunt trip circuit breaker serving the equipment. All feeder circuit breakers (both on normal and emergency/standby power sources) are to be provided with the shunt trip device. The activation of the shunt trip is to be in the sequence described below. 1. Upon activation of the fire alarm system by any manual or automatic means, including the smoke detectors required for recall, a signal is sent from the fire alarm control panel to the elevator controller to initiate recall of the elevator to the lowest non-fire floor. Upon activation of the 135 o F heat detector located within 2 feet of all sprinkler heads in either the Elevator Machine Room, the Elevator Pit or the top of the shaft, a signal is sent from the fire alarm control panel to immediately shunt trip the power supply. This sequence will allow the elevator to be recalled to the lowest non-fire floor before the shunt trip is activated. The sprinkler heads in the Elevator Machine Room and elevator shaft are to be rated at 200 o F, which will allow the shunt trip to activate prior to the sprinkler head. 3.27 WORK COMPLETION A. The contractor shall promptly correct work rejected by the engineer or failing to conform to the requirements of the contract documents, whether discovered before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected work, including additional testing and inspections and compensation for the engineer’s services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at the contractor’s expense. 3.28 SHOP DRAWING REQUIREMENTS A. The following is a list of required shop drawings for this project. ELECTRICAL DATE REC’D ACTION DATE REC’D ACTION Basic Materials and Equipment (Section 26 05 00 and 26 27 00) High Voltage Cable and Equipment Panelboards (Section 26 24 16) Bus Duct (Section 26 25 00) Safety Switches - (Section 26 28 16) STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK 26 00 00 - 12 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building ELECTRICAL DATE REC’D ACTION DATE REC’D ACTION Transformers (Section 26 22 00) Surge Suppression (Section 26 43 13) Lighting (Section 26 50 00 and 26 09 00) Lightning Protection (Section 26 41 13) Fire Alarm and Detection Systems (Section 28 30 00) As-Builts Warranties Maintenance Manuals Instructions Ground Test END OF SECTION STANDARD CONDITIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK 26 00 00 - 13 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 26 05 13 - CABLES - HIGH VOLTAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. B. C. D. E. F. 1.02 A. 1.03 A. B. C. 1.04 A. B. C. D. REFERENCE Refer to section 26 00 00 for requirements which are applicable to this section. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 1072-86 Medium-voltage Power Cables - 02/8/89. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70-90 National Electrical Code (NEC) National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): WC 7-88 Cross-linked Thermosetting-Polyethylene Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of the Electric Energy WC 8-88 Ethylene-propylene-Rubber-insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electric Energy Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): 48-90 Test Procedures and Requirements for High Voltage Alternating Current Cable Terminations 386-85 Separable Insulated Connector Systems for Power Distribution Systems above 600 Volts 404-86 Cable joints for use with Extruded Dielectric Cable Rated 5000 Volts through 46000 volts and cable joints for use with laminated dielectric cable rated 2500 volt through 500,000 volt 592-77 Exposed semiconducting shields on premolded high voltage cable joints and separable insulated connectors WORK INCLUDED Provide all labor, material, equipment, and supervision necessary to furnish, install, splice, terminate, test and place into operation (5)(15)(35) KV cable as specified herein. SUBMITTALS Submit shop drawings of cable and terminations. Submit manufacturers' data sheets of performance. Submit manufacturers' certificates of conformance with applicable codes. QUALITY ASSURANCE Verify that all equipment is installed in accordance with the manufacturer's warranty requirements. Install systems and equipment in accordance with the local utility. Provide adequate supervision of labor force to see that installations are correct. Installer Approval: 1. Employees who install the splices and terminations shall have not less than three years of experience splicing and terminating cables which are equal to those being spliced and CABLES-HIGH VOLTAGE 26 05 13 - 1 McHugh Engineering Associates 2. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building terminated, including experience with the materials in the kits. Furnish satisfactory proof of such experience for each employee who splices or terminates the cables. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 HIGH VOLTAGE CABLE A. Single conductor shielded power cable suitable for use in wet or dry locations in conduit, underground duct systems, direct buried, or aerial installation. The cable shall be rated 105̊C for normal operation, 140̊C for emergency overload operation, and 250̊C for short circuit conditions. Single conductor class B strand compact bare copper conductor, extrude semiconducting strand screen, ethylene-propylene rubber (EPR) insulation, extruded semiconducting insulation screen, bare copper shielding tape, and polyvinylchloride jacket overall. The cable shall meet or exceed the latest editions of the following industry specifications: ICEA S-68-516 AEIC (Latest Edition) ASTM B-496 ASTM B-496 UL-1072 (Type MV-90) The cable shall be uncoated soft copper, compact Class B stranded, in accordance with ASTM B-496. An extruded layer of thermosetting semiconducting EPR compound with a volume resistivity not in excess of 10 ohm-meters at 105̊C shall be applied over the conductor. The compound shall have a minimum elongation after an air oven test at 121̊C for 168 hours of 100% and a brittleness temperature not warmer than -50̊C. The thickness of the insulation screen shall be per AEIC CS6. The insulation shall be a thermosetting ethylene-propylene based elastomer which meets or exceed the electrical and physical characteristics of ICEA S-68-516 and AEIC CS6. The ethylene content of the base elastomer shall not exceed 72% by weight. The thickness shall be per Table I. The insulation shall be a triple tandem extruded with the conductor and insulation screens, and be applied in accordance with the above referenced industry standards. The insulation screen shall be an extruded semiconducting EPR compound with a volume resistivity not in excess of 10 ohm-meters at 105̊C and have a minimum elongation after oven test at 121̊C for 168 hours of 100% and brittleness temperature not warmer than -50̊C. The screen shall be applied in complete accordance with AEIC CS6. The outer semiconducting screen shall be covered with a 5 mil bare copper tape shield applied helically with 12.5% nominal overlap. The overall jacket shall be black polyvinylchloride and shall meet the requirements of ICEA S-68-516, Part 4. The thickness shall not be less than 80% of the specified minimum average. An identifying legend shall be printed on the jacket with contrasting ink or by indent printing and be repeated at two foot intervals. The minimum information shall include: Manufacturer’s Name Conductor Size - Conductor Material (copper or aluminum) - Insulation Type and Thickness Voltage Rating Applicable UL Ratings. The conductor shall meet the electrical resistance requirements of ICEA S-68-516, Section 2.5. The insulation resistance test shall be performed in accordance with ICEA S-68-516, Part 6.28, and shall have an insulation resistance constant of at least 50,000 megohms-100 ft. at 15.6̊C. A high voltage ac test shall be performed in accordance with Part 6.27 of ICEA S-68-516. The test voltages shall be as specified in Table I. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. TABLE I CABLES-HIGH VOLTAGE 26 05 13 - 2 McHugh Engineering Associates Voltage (Kv) 5 15 35 Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Insulation Wall (mils) AC Test Voltage (Kv) 115 220 345 23 44 69 The shield resistance shall be measured and recorded from end to end on the completed cable. The cable shall be corona discharge tested in accordance with Section G of AEIC CS6. The maximum allowable discharge in picocoilombs is 5 pc throughout the entire specified test voltage range. Certified test reports shall be furnished for all cables. Prior to award of an order, the cable manufacturer shall supply upon request a copy of their latest AEIC Qualification Test Report. The results of the tests performed shall met or exceed the requirements of AEIC CS6 (latest edition). L. The acceptable manufacturers under this specification are the Okonite Company, Elkins Wire & Cable, BICC Co., Pirelli, or approved equal. 2.02 MATERIAL, SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS A. The materials shall be compatible with the conductors, insulations and protective jackets on the cables and wires. The splices shall insulate and protect the conductors not less than the insulation and protective jackets on the cables and wires which protect the conductors. In locations where moisture might be present, the splices shall be watertight. In manholes and hand holes the splices shall be submersible. Splicing and Terminating Fittings: Shall be in accordance with IEEE 386, 404 and 592. 1. Shall be heavy duty, pressure type fittings, which will assure satisfactory performance of the connections under conditions of temperature cycling and magnetic forces from available short circuit currents. 2. The fittings shall be suitable designed and the proper size for the cables and wires being spliced and terminated. Terminations to bus shall be with two hole lugs. 3. Where the Government determines that unsatisfactory fittings have been installed, remove the unsatisfactory installations and install approved fittings at no additional cost to the Government. Splicing and Terminating Kits: 1. General: a. Shall be assembled by the manufacturer or supplier of the materials and shall be packaged for individual splices and terminations or for groups of splices and terminations. b. Shall consist of materials designed for the cables being spliced and terminated and shall be suitable for the prevailing environmental conditions. c. Shall include detail drawings and printed instructions for each type of splice and termination being installed, as prepared by the manufacturers of the materials in the kits. d. Detail drawings, and printed instructions shall indicate the cable type, voltage rating, manufacturer's name and catalog numbers for the materials indicated. e. Voltage ratings for the splices and terminations shall be not less than the voltage B. C. D. CABLES-HIGH VOLTAGE 26 05 13 - 3 McHugh Engineering Associates E. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building ratings for the cables on which they are being installed. f. Shall include shielding and stress cone materials. 2. Taped splices and terminations with insulating and semiconducting rubber tapes shall withstand 200 percent elongation without cracking, rupturing or reducing their electric and self-bonding characteristics by more than 5 percent. 3. Epoxy resin kits shall be as follows: a. Compatible with the cable insulations and jackets and make the splices watertight and submersible. b. Thermosetting and generate its own heat so that external fire or heat will not be required. c. Set solid and cure in approximately 60 minutes in 70 degree F ambient temperature. d. Not deteriorate when subjected to oil, water, gases, salt water, sewage and fungus. e. Furnished in pre-measured quantities, sized for each splice and each termination, with two resin components in an easy mixing plastic bag which will permit mixing the resin without entrapping air or contaminants. Other methods of packaging and mixing the epoxy resin components will be considered for approval, provided they include adequate safeguards to assure precise proportioning of the resin components and to prevent entrapping air and contaminants. f. Use snap-together, longitudinally-split, interlocking seam, transplant mold bodies or taped frameworks, injection fittings and injection gun or pouring equipment. Completely fill voids within the splices and terminations. Premolded Rubber Splices and Terminations: 1. Splices and terminations shall be in accordance with IEEE 48, 386, 404 and 592. 2. Premolded rubber devices shall have a minimum of 0.125 inch semi-conductive shield material covering the entire housing. Test each rubber part prior to shipment from the factory. 3. Grounding of metallic shields shall be accomplished by a solderless connector enclosed in a watertight rubber housing covering the entire assembly. The grounding device and splice or terminator shall be of same manufacturer to insure electrical integrity of the shielded parts. 4. The premolded parts shall be suitable for indoor, outdoor, submersible, or direct-burial applications. 2.03 MATERIAL, FIREPROOFING TAPE A. The tape shall consist of a flexible, conformable fabric of organic composition coated one side with flame-retardant elastomer. The tape shall be self-extinguishing and shall not support combustion. It shall be arc proof and fireproof. The tape shall not deteriorate when subjected to water, gases, salt water, sewage, or fungus. It shall be resistant to sunlight and ultraviolet light. The finished application shall withstand a 200 ampere arc for not less than 30 seconds. Securing tape: Shall be glass cloth electrical tape not less than 7 mils thick, and 3/4 inch wide. B. C. D. E. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, HIGH VOLTAGE CABLE CABLES-HIGH VOLTAGE 26 05 13 - 4 McHugh Engineering Associates A. B. C. D. E. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, and as shown on the drawings. Use suitable lubricating compounds on the cables and wires to prevent damage to them during pulling-in. Provide compounds that are not injurious to the cable and wire jackets and do not harden or become adhesive. Splice the cables and wires only in manholes and accessible junction boxes. Ground shields in accordance with Section GROUNDING. In manholes, trenches and vaults install the cables on suitable porcelain insulators with steel cables racks. Ground cable racks in accordance with Section GROUNDING. In manholes, underground raceways and other outdoor locations: 1. Seal the cable ends prior to pulling them in to prevent the entry of moisture. 2. For ethylene propylene rubber and polyethylene insulated cables, use bags of epoxy resin which are not less than 1/4 inch larger in diameter than the overall diameter of the cable. Clean each end of each cable before installing the epoxy resin over it. 3.02 INSTALLATION, SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS A. Install the materials as recommended by their manufacturer including special precautions pertaining to air temperature during installation. Ethylene Propylene Rubber and Polyethylene Insulated Cables: 1. Cables rated 8000 volts or less: Install epoxy resin splices and terminations, or premolded rubber splices and terminations. 2. Cables rated more than 8000 volts: install taped splices and terminations, or premolded rubber splices and terminations. Installation shall be accomplished by qualified personnel trained to accomplish high voltage equipment installations. All instructions of the manufacturer shall be followed in detail. B. C. 3.03 INSTALLATION, FIREPROOFING A. C. Cover all power cables located in manholes, handholes and junction boxes with arc proof and fireproof tape. Apply the tape in a single layer, one-half lapped or as recommended by the manufacturer. Install the tape with the coated side towards the cable and extend it not less than one inch into each duct. Secure the tape in place by a random wrap of glass cloth tape. 3.04 FEEDER IDENTIFICATION A. In each manhole and pull box install permanent tags on each circuit's cables and wires to clearly designate their circuit identification and voltage. In manholes the tags shall be the embossed brass type and shall also show the cable type and voltage rating. Position the tags so they will be easy to read after the fireproofing is installed. 3.05 FIELD TESTS FOR HIGH VOLTAGE CABLE A. New Cable: 1. Acceptance tests shall be performed on new cable see IEEE 48. 2. Test new cable after installation, splices, and terminations have been made, but before connection to equipment and existing cable. High Potential Test: 1. Leakage current test shall be by high potential dc step voltage method. 2. Prior to high potential test, test the cable and shields for continuity, shorts, and grounds. 3. High potential test shall measure the leakage current from each conductor to the insulation shield. Use corona shields, guard rings, taping, mason jars, or plastic bags to prevent B. B. CABLES-HIGH VOLTAGE 26 05 13 - 5 McHugh Engineering Associates C. D. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building corona current from influencing the readings. Unprepared cable shield ends shall be trimmed back one inch or more for each 10 KV of test voltage. Safety Precautions - Exercise suitable and adequate safety measures prior to, during and after the high potential tests, including placing warning signs and preventing people and equipment from being exposed to the test voltages. Test voltages: 1. New shielded EPR and CCLP cable dc test voltages shall be as follows: Rated Circuit Voltage Wire Size Phase-to-Phase Volts AWG or MCM Test Voltage KV 133 percent Insul Level Insul Level ______________________________________________________________________________ 2001- 5000 8-1000 25 25 5001- 8000 6-1000 35 35 8001-15000 2-1000 55 65 15001-25000 1-1000 80 100 25001-28000 1-1000 85 -28001-35000 1/0-1000 100 -______________________________________________________________________________ 2. Existing cable of all types interconnected to a new cable shall be tested at 1.7 times the existing cable rated voltage (maintenance test). E. High Potential Test Method: 1. Apply voltage in approximately 8 to 10 equal steps. 2. Raise the voltage slowly between steps. 3. At the end of each step, allow the charging currents to decay, and time the interval of decay. 4. Read the leakage current and plot a curve of leakage currents versus test voltage on graph paper as the test progresses. Read the leakage current at the same time interval for each voltage step. 5. Stop the test if leakage currents increase excessively or a "knee" appears in the curve before maximum test voltage is reached. a. For new cable, repair or replace the cable and repeat the test. b. For existing cable interconnected to new cable, notify the Resident Engineer for further instructions. 6. Upon reaching maximum test voltage, hold the voltage for five minutes. Read the leakage current at 30 second intervals and plot a curve of leakage current versus time on the same graph paper as the step voltage curve. Stop the test if leakage current starts to rise, or decreases and again starts to rise. Leakage current should decrease and stabilize for good cable. 7. Terminate test and allow sufficient discharge time before testing the next conductor. F. Field test reports: After testing, submit four certified copies of each of the graphs, specified under field testing, to the Resident Engineer. Adequate information shall be included identifying the cable locations, types, voltage rating and sizes. G. Splices and terminations, after having been installed and tested, deliver four copies of a certificate by the Contractor to the Resident Engineer which includes the following: 1. A statement that the material, detail drawings and printed instructions used were those contained in the kits approved for this contract. 2. Statement that each splice and each termination was completely installed without any overnight interruption. 3. A statement that field made splices and terminations conform to the following requirements: a. Pencil the cable insulation precisely. b. Connector installations: 1. Use tools which are designed for the connectors being CABLES-HIGH VOLTAGE 100 percent 26 05 13 - 6 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building installed. Round and smooth the installed connectors to minimize localized voltage stressing of the insulating materials. c. Remove contaminants from all surfaces within the splices and terminations before installing the insulating materials. d. Solder block throughout stranded grounding wires which will penetrate the splicing and terminating materials. e. Use mirrors to observe the installation of materials on the back sides of the splices and terminations. f. Eliminate air voids throughout the splices and terminations. g. Stretch each layer of tape properly during installation. List all of the materials purchased and installed for the splices and terminations for this contract including the material descriptions, manufacturer's names, catalog numbers and total quantities. 2. 4. END OF SECTION CABLES-HIGH VOLTAGE 26 05 13 - 7 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING SYSTEMS: GENERAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented by special requirements of system described in other Sections. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 26 Section “Lightning Protection” for additional grounding and bonding materials. B. 1.03 A. B. C. SUBMITTALS Product Data - For the following: 1. Ground rods. 2. Chemical rods. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in “Quality Assurance” Article. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports to include the following: 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Testing agency as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7 or a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Testing Agency’s Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 1. Comply with UL 467. Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. B. C. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: GROUNDING AND BONDING SYSTEMS: GENERAL 26 05 26 - 1 McHugh Engineering Associates 1. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Grounding Conductors, Cables, Connectors, and Rods: a. Chance/Hubbell b. Copperweld Corp. c. Erico Inc.; Electrical Products Group. d. Framatome Connectors/Burndy Electrical e. Galvan Industries, Inc. f. Ideal Industries, Inc. g. Kearney/Cooper Power Systems. h. Korns: C.C. Korns Co.; Division of Robroy Industries. i. Lyncole XIT Grounding. j. O-Z/Gedney Co.; a business of the EGS Electrical Group.\ k. Raco, Inc.; Division of Hubbell. l. Salisbury: W.H. Salibury & Co. m. Superior Grounding Systems, Inc. n. Thomas & Betts, Electrical o. or approved equal 2.02 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. B. C. D. K. For insulated conductors, comply with Division 16 Section “Conductors and Cables.” Material: Aluminum, copper-clad aluminum, and copper. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation. Isolated Ground Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation with yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, use colored tape, alternating bands of green and yellow tape to provide a minimum of three bands of green and two band of yellow. Grounding Electrode Conductors: Stranded cable. Underground Conductors: Bare, tinned, stranded, unless otherwise indicated. Bare Copper Conductors: Comply with the following: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Assembly of stranded Conductors: ASTM B8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B33. Copper Bonding Conductors: As follows: 1. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG copper conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter. 2. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded copper conductor. 3. Bonding Jumper: Bare copper tape, braided bare copper conductors, terminated with copper ferrules: 1-5/8" wide and 1/16" thick. 4. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided copper conductors, terminated with copper ferrules: 1-5/8" wide and 1/16" thick. Aluminum Bonding Conductors: As follows: 1. Bonding Cable: 10 strands of No. 14 AWG aluminum conductor 1/4" in diameter. 2. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded aluminum conductor. 3. Bonding Jumper: Aluminum tape, braided bare aluminum conductors, terminated with aluminum ferrules: 1-5/8" wide and 1/16" thick. Ground Conductor and Conductor Protector for Wood Poles: As follows: 1. No. 4 AWG aluminum, soft-drawn copper conductor. 2. Conductor Protector: Half-round PVC or wood molding. If wood, use pressure-treated fir, or cypress or cedar. Grounding Bus: Bare, annealed copper bars of rectangular cross section, with insulators. 2.03 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS E. F. G. H. I. J. GROUNDING AND BONDING SYSTEMS: GENERAL 26 05 26 - 2 McHugh Engineering Associates A. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building B. C. Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467; listed for use for specific types, sizes and combinations of conductors and connected items. Bolted Connectors: Bolted-pressure type connectors, or compression type. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welded type, in kit form, and selected per 2.04 GROUNDING ELECTRODES A. B. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel. Ground Rods: Section type; copper-clad steel. 1. Size: 5/8 in diameter. Chemical Electrodes: Copper tube, straight or L-shaped, filled with nonhazardous chemical salts, terminated with a 4/0 bare conductor. Provide backfill material recommended by manufacturer. C. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. B. C. D. E. F. APPLICATION Use only copper conductors for both insulated and bare grounding conductors in direct contact with earth, concrete, masonry, crushed stone, and similar materials. In raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for underground connections, except those at test wells. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Use bolted pressure clamps. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Use insulated spacer; space 1 inch from wall and support from wall 6 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. 2. At doors, route the bus up to the top of the door frame, across the top of the doorway, and down to the specified height above the floor. Underground Grounding Conductors: Use tinned copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum. Bury at least 24 inches below grade or bury 12 inches above duct bank when installed as part of the duct bank. 3.02 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. Comply with NFPA 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NFPA 70 are indicated. Install equipment grounding conductors in all feeders and circuits. Install insulated equipment grounding conductor with circuit conductors for the following items, in addition to those required by NEC: 1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs. 7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs. B. C. GROUNDING AND BONDING SYSTEMS: GENERAL 26 05 26 - 3 McHugh Engineering Associates D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N. O. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from the grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment grounding bar terminal on busway. Computer Outlet Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in branch-circuit runs from computer-area power panels or power-distribution units. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate grounding conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service, unless otherwise indicated. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply raceway with a nonmetallic raceway fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a separate equipment grounding conductor. Isolate equipment grounding conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service, unless otherwise indicated. Nonmetallic Raceways: Install an equipment grounding conductor in nonmetallic raceways unless they are designated for telephone or data cables. Air Duct Equipment Circuits: Install an equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners and heaters. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Anti-frost Heating Cables: Install a separate equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater, heat-tracing, and anti-frost heating cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components. Signal and Communication Systems: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication systems, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet and central equipment location. 1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor on a 1/4 by 2 by 12 inch grounding bus. 2. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal. Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Provide a grounding electrode in addition to installing a separate equipment grounding conductor with supply branch-circuit conductors. Common Ground Bonding with Lightning Protection System: Bond electrical power system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode conductor, and install a conduit. Bond all whirlpools, pool, hot tubs, metal parts, motor frames, fittings, plumbing pipes, drains, metal conduit, metal surfaces within 5', and all electrical devices and controls within 5' of whirlpool, sauna, hot tub or spa with a #6 AWG, 19 strand copper conductor. Motors shall be grounded by means of a grounding conductor in the same raceway with the motor feeder connected to the grounding bushing at the motor terminal box and the ground bus in the motor control center or to the incoming conduit grounding bushing of an individually mounted motor starter. 3.03 COUNTERPOISE A. Ground the steel framework of the building with a driven ground rod at the base of every corner column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet apart. Provide a grounding conductor (counterpoise), electrically connected to each ground rod and to each steel column, extending around the perimeter of the building. Use tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 2/0 AWG for counterpoise and for tap to building steel. Bury counterpoise not less than 18 inches below grade and 24 inches from building foundation. GROUNDING AND BONDING SYSTEMS: GENERAL 26 05 26 - 4 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Ground Rods: Install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes. 1. Drive ground rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductors. Use exothermic welds, except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging copper coating. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install so vibration by equipment mounted on vibration isolation hangers and supports is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, unless a disconnect-type connection is required; then, use a bolted clamp. Bond straps directly to the basic structure taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. Install straps only in locations accessible for maintenance. Metal Water Service Pipe: Provide insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes by grounding clamp connectors. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor to street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with grounding clamp connectors. Bond interior metal piping systems and metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated pumps, fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Use braided-type bonding straps. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system upstream from equipment shutoff valve. Ufer Ground (Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode only if ground rod electrode does not provide minimum ground resistance specified): Fabricate according to NFPA 70, Paragraph 250-81(c), using a minimum of 20 feet of bare copper conductor not smaller than No. 4 AWG. If concrete foundation is less than 20 feet long, coil excess conductor within the base of the foundation. Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least four locations and to anchor bolts. Extend grounding conductor below grade and connect to building grounding grid or to a grounding electrode external to concrete. C. D. E. F. G. G. H. 3.05 CONNECTIONS A. General: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible. 1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact points closer to order of galvanic series. 2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact. 3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechanical clamps. 4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and mechanical clamps. 5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pressure-type B. C. GROUNDING AND BONDING SYSTEMS: GENERAL 26 05 26 - 5 McHugh Engineering Associates D. E. F. G. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with winged pressure-type connectors. Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations: If metallic raceways terminate at metal housings without mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each conduit with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to grounding bus or terminal in housing. Bond electrically non-continuous conduits at entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors, unless otherwise indicated. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A. Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by connector manufacturer. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding conductor. Moisture Protection: If insulated grounding conductors are connected to ground rods or grounding buses, insulate entire area of connection and seal against moisture penetration of insulation and cable. 3.06 UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM GROUNDING A. Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod close to wall and set rod depth so 4 inches will extend above finished floor. If necessary, install ground rod before manhole is placed and provide a No. 1/0 AWG bare, tinned-copper conductor from ground rod into manhole through a waterproof sleeve in manhole wall. Protect ground rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure-sensitive tape or heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches above to 6 inches below concrete. Seal floor opening with waterproof, non-shrink grout. Connections to Manhole Components: Connect exposed-metal parts, such as inserts, cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole, to ground rod or grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4 AWG minimum, stranded, hard-drawn copper conductor. Train conductor’s level or plumb around corners and fasten to manhole walls. Connect to cable armor and cable shields as recommended by manufacturer of splicing and termination kits. Pad-Mounted Transformers and Switches: Install two ground rods and counterpoise circling pad. Ground pad-mounted equipment and noncurrent-carrying metal items associated with substations by connecting them to underground cable and grounding electrodes. Use tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 2 AWG for counterpoise and for taps to equipment ground pad. Bury counterpoise not less than 18 inches below grade and 6 inches from the foundation. B. C. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following field quality-control testing: 1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at ground test wells. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after the last trace of precipitation, and without the soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. Perform tests, by the fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81. (Ensure that the test is performed with all ground -to -neutral bands broken. The grounding system must be completely isolated for the test to be valid.) 3. Provide drawings locating each ground rod and ground rod assembly and other grounding electrodes, identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and GROUNDING AND BONDING SYSTEMS: GENERAL 26 05 26 - 6 McHugh Engineering Associates 4. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results. a. Equipment Rated 500 kVA and less: 10 ohms. b. Equipment Rated 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms. c. Equipment Rated More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms. d. Substations and Pad-Mounted Switching Equip: 5 ohms. e. Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Engineer promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. END OF SECTION GROUNDING AND BONDING SYSTEMS: GENERAL 26 05 26 - 7 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 26 05 73 - POWER SYSTEM STUDY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. B. C. GENERAL Short Circuit Studies, Protective Device Evaluation Studies, Protective Service Coordination Studies and Arc Flash Hazard Studies shall be performed by the switchboard/switchgear manufacturer. The studies shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to receiving final approval of the distribution equipment shop drawings and/or prior to release of equipment for manufacture. The studies shall include all portions of the electrical distribution system from the utility service at the facility through the utility transformer, main service entrance rated equipment, distribution and branch panelboards, motor control centers, significant motor loads, generators and all emergency power distribution. Normal system connections and those which result in maximum fault conditions shall be adequately covered in the study. The Short Circuit Study shall be developed in accordance with ANSI C37.5-1969 (R1975), IEEE St'd. 399-1980 and IEEE Standard 141-1976. 1.02 SHORT CIRCUIT STUDY A. B. The short circuit study shall be performed with the aid of a digital computer program. The short circuit study input data shall include the utility company's short circuit contribution, resistance and reactance component of the branch impedances, the X/R ratios, base quantities selected and other source impedances. Short circuit momentary duty values and interrupting values shall be calculated on the basis of assumed three-phase bolted short circuits at each switchgear bus, medium voltage controller, switchboard, low voltage motor control center, distribution panelboard, pertinent branch circuit panel and other significant locations throughout the system (i.e., chillers, fire pumps, elevators, etc.). The short circuit tabulations shall include symmetrical fault currents and X/R ratios. For each vault location, the total duty on the bus in addition to the individual contribution from each connecting branch shall be listed with its respective X/R ratio. C. 1.03 A. B. C. PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY A protective device coordination study shall be performed to provide the necessary calculations and logic decisions required to select or check the selection of power fuse ratings, protective relay characteristics of associated current transformers and low voltage circuit breaker trip characteristics and settings. The objective of the study is to obtain optimum protective and coordination performance from these devices. The coordination study shall include all medium and low voltage classes of equipment from the utility incoming line protective device down to and including the largest rated 480 and 208 volt motor control center, distribution switchboards, panelboards and individual switches and circuit breakers. The phase and ground over current protection shall be included as well as settings of all other adjustable protective devices. The time-current characteristics of the specified protective devices shall be drawn on Keuffel and Esser log paper. The plots shall include complete titles representative of one-line diagrams and legends, associated utility company's relay or fuse characteristics, significant motor starting characteristics, complete parameters of transformers, complete operating bands of low voltage circuit breaker trip curves and fuse curves. The coordination plots shall indicate the types of POWER SYSTEM STUDY 26 05 73 - 1 McHugh Engineering Associates D. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building protective devices selected, proposed relay taps, time dial and instantaneous trip settings, transformer magnetizing inrush and ANSI transformer withstand parameters, cable thermal over current withstand limits and significant symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents. All restrictions of the National Electrical Code shall be adhered to and proper coordination intervals and separation of characteristic curves shall be maintained. The coordination plots for phase and ground protective devices shall be supplied on a system basis. A significant number of separate curves shall be used to clearly indicate the coordination achieved. The selection and settings of the protective devices shall be provided separately in a tabular form listing circuit identification, IEEE Device number, current transformer ratios and connections, manufacturer and type, range of adjustment and recommended settings. A tabulation of the recommended power fuse selection shall be provided for the medium voltage fuses where applied in the system. Any discrepancies, areas of coordination conflict or other inadequacies shall be promptly brought to the Engineer's attention. 1.04 PROTECTIVE DEVICE EVALUATION STUDY A. A protective device evaluation shall be performed to determine the adequacy of power circuit breakers, molded case circuit breakers, switches, automatic transfer switches and fuses by tabulation of all devices and comparing such device ratings with calculated fault currents. 1.05 ARC FLASH EVALUATION STUDY A. Provide an Arc Flash Hazard Study for the electrical distribution system. The study shall include all medium and low voltage classes of equipment from the utility incoming equipment down to and including all motor control centers, switchboards, panelboards, individual switches and circuit breakers and load centers. The study shall include creation of Arc Flash Hazard Warning Labels. The label shall include the following: 1. Flash Hazard Protection Boundary 2. Limited Approach Boundary 3. Restricted Boundary 4. Prohibited Boundary 5. Incident Energy Level 6. Required Personal Protection Equipment Class 7. Type of fire rated clothing 8. Equipment name 9. Equipment voltage The label shall be printed in color and shall be moisture-proof adhesive backed vinyl. B. 1.06 REPORTS A. The results of the power system study shall be summarized in a final report. Six (6) bound copies of the final report shall be submitted to the Engineer. The report shall include the following sections: 1. Description, purpose, basis and scope of the study and a single line diagram of the portions of the power system which is included in the scope of the study. 2. Tabulation of circuit breaker, fuse and other protective device ratings compared to calculated short circuit duties with commentary regarding same. 3. Protective device time versus current curves, tabulation of relay and circuit breaker trip settings, fuse selection with commentary regarding same. 4. Fault current calculations including a definition of terms and guide for interpretation of computer printouts. B. POWER SYSTEM STUDY 26 05 73 - 2 McHugh Engineering Associates 5. 6. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Arc Flash Evaluation Summary Spreadsheet. Arc Flash Hazard Warning Labels. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION A. B. C. D. The power system study is to be performed prior to release of equipment for manufacturer. Electrical contractor is to adjust all circuit breaker trip settings as indicated by the study. Electrical contractor is to ensure proper rating of all equipment prior to installation. Electrical contractor is to install the Arc Flash Hazard Warning Labels. END OF SECTION POWER SYSTEM STUDY 26 05 73 - 3 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 26 09 00- LIGHTING CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. 1.02 A. 1.03 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. REFERENCE This section includes manually operated, digital lighting controls with external signal source, relays, and control module. Refer to Section 26 00 00 for other requirements of this section. Source Limitations: Obtain lighting control module and power distribution components through one source from a single manufacturer. Electrical Components, Devices and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. Comply with 47 CFR, Subparts A and B, for Class A digital devices. Comply with NFPA 70. Refer to 26 27 00 for other lighting controls (switches, motion sensors, etc.) WORK INCLUDED Provide all labor, material, equipment, and supervision necessary to furnish and install complete, operating, lighting control system specified herein. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For control modules, power distribution components, manual switches and plates, and conductors and cables. Shop Drawings: Detail assemblies of standard components, custom assembled for specific application on this Project. 1. Outline Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, arrangement of components, and clearance and access requirements. 2. Block Diagram: Show interconnections between components specified in this Section and devices furnished with power distribution system components. Indicate data communication paths and identify networks, data buses, data gateways, concentrators, and other devices to be used. Describe characteristics of network and other data communication lines. 3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Coordinate nomenclature and presentation with a block diagram. Coordination Drawings: Submit evidence that lighting controls are compatible with connected monitoring and control devices and system specified in other Sections. 1. Show interconnecting signal and control wiring and interfacing devices that prove compatibility of inputs and outputs. 2. For networked controls, list network protocols and provide statements from manufacturers that input and output devices meet inter-operability requirements of the network protocol. 3. Show equipment locations on floor plans of similar scale as contract documents. Field quality control test reports. Software licenses and upgrades required by and installed for operation and programming of digital and analog devices. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting controls to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. LIGHTING CONTROLS 26 09 00 - 1 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building 1.04 COORDINATION A. Coordinate lighting control components to form an integrated interconnection of compatible components. 1. Match components and interconnections for optimum performance of lighting control functions. 2. Coordinate lighting controls with HVAC controls. Design display graphics showing building areas controlled; include the status of lighting controls in each area. 3. Coordinate lighting controls with that in Sections specifying distribution components that are monitored or controlled by power monitoring and control equipment. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of lighting controls that fail in materials or workmanship or from transient voltage surges within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure of software input/output to execute switching or dimming commands. b. Failure of modular relays to operate under manual or software commands. c. Damage of electronic components due to transient voltage surges. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.06 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT A. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for two years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. 2. Lighting Control & Design, Inc. 3. Lightolier Controls; a Genlyte Company. 4. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 5. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc. 6. MicroLite Lighting Control Systems. 7. Watt Stopper (The). 8. Or approved equal 2.02 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. Expandability: System shall be capable of increasing the number of control functions in the future by 25 percent of current capacity; to include equipment ratings, housing capacities, spare relays, terminals, number of conductors in control cables, and control software. Performance Requirements: Manual switch operation, an internal timing and control unit and external sensors, send a signal to Programmable system control module that processes the signal according to its programming and B. LIGHTING CONTROLS 26 09 00 - 2 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building routes an open or close command to one or more relays in the power-supply circuits to groups of lighting fixtures or other loads. 2.03 CONTROL MODULE A. Control Module Description: Comply with UL 916 (CSA C22.2, No. 205); Microprocessor based, solid-state, 365-day timing and control unit. Output circuits shall be switched on or off by internally programmed time signals or by program-controlled analog or digital signals from external sources. Output circuits shall be pilot-duty relays compatible with power switching devices. An integral keypad shall provide local programming and control capability. A key-locked cover and a programmed security access code shall protect keypad use. An integral alphanumeric LCD or LED shall display menu-assisted programming and control. 2.04 POWER DISTRIBUTION COMPONENTS A. Modular Relay Panel: Comply with UL 508 (CSA C22.2, No. 14) and UL 916 (CSA C22.2, No. 205); factory assembled with modular single-pole relays, power supplies, and accessory components required for specified performance. 1. Cabinet: Steel with hinged, locking door. a. Barriers separate low-voltage and line-voltage components. b. Directory: Mounted on back of door. Identifies each relay as to load groups controlled and each programmed pilot device if any. c. Control Power Supply: Transformer and full-wave rectifier with filtered dc output. 2. Single-Pole Relays: Mechanically held unless otherwise indicated; split-coil, momentary-pulsed type. a. Low-Voltage Leads: Plug connector to the connector strip in cabinet and pilot light power where indicated. b. Rated Capacity (Mounted in Relay Panel): 20 A, 125-V ac for tungsten filaments; 20 A, 277-V ac for ballasts. c. Endurance: 50,000 cycles at rated capacity. d. Mounting: Provision for easy removal and installation in relay cabinet. 2.05 MATERIALS A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Class 2 Power Source: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG, complying with Division 16 Section "Basic Materials." Class 1, 2, and 3 Control Cables: Multi-conductor cable with copper conductors as recommended by the manufacturer. Digital and Multiplexed Signal Cables: Unshielded, twisted-pair cable with copper conductors, complying with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Category 5e for horizontal copper cable. Manual Controllers: Comply with Division 16 Section “Basic Materials.” B. C. D. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 WIRING INSTALLATION A. B. C. Comply with NECA 1. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceways except where installed in accessible ceilings. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points. Separate LIGHTING CONTROLS 26 09 00 - 3 McHugh Engineering Associates D. E. F. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building power-limited and non-power-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions. Install field-mounting transient voltage suppressors for lighting control devices in Category A locations that do not have integral line-voltage surge protection. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in terminal cabinets, equipment enclosures, and in junction, pull, and outlet boxes. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and assist in field testing. Report results in writing. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Test for circuit continuity. 2. Verify that the control module features are operational. 3. Check operation of local override controls. 4. Test system diagnostics by simulating improper operation of several components. B. 3.03 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION A. Install and program software with initial settings of adjustable values. Make backup copies of software and user-supplied values. Provide current licenses for software. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors and to assist Owner's personnel in making program changes to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 3.05 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting controls and software training for PC-based control systems. END OF SECTION LIGHTING CONTROLS 26 09 00 - 4 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 26 10 00 - MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of transformers with medium-voltage primaries: 1. Pad-mounted, liquid-filled transformers. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. B. C. D. E. F. G. 1.04 A. Product Data: Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum clearances, installed devices and features, location of each field connection, and performance for each type and size of transformer indicated. Shop Drawings: Wiring and connection diagrams including power wiring. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that transformer assembly and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 16 Section "Seismic Controls for Electrical Work." Include the following: 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. Source quality-control test reports. Field quality-control test reports. Follow-up service reports. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformer and accessories to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. QUALITY ASSURANCE Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the International Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 26 10 00 - 1 McHugh Engineering Associates B. C. D. E. F. 1.05 A. 1.06 A. 1.07 A. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the International Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of transformers and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements." Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. Comply with IEEE C2. Comply with ANSI C57.12.28, IEEE C57.12.10, IEEE C57.12.70, and IEEE C57.12.80. Comply with NFPA 70. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Store transformers so condensation will not form on or in units. Provide temporary heating according to manufacturer's written instructions. PROJECT CONDITIONS Service Conditions: IEEE C37.121 COORDINATION Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. 2.02 A. B. MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products 1. Acme Electric Corporation; Power Distribution Products Division. 2. Cooper Industries; Cooper Power Systems Division. 3. Cutler-Hammer. 4. GE Electrical Distribution & Control. 5. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 6. Square D/Groupe Schneider NA. 7. Virginia Transformer Corp. 8. Or approved equal by one of the following: PAD-MOUNTED, LIQUID-FILLED TRANSFORMERS Description: ANSI C57.12.13, IEEE C57.12.00, IEEE C57.12.22 pad-mounted, 2-winding transformers. Stainless-steel tank base. Insulating Liquid: Mineral oil, complying with ASTM D 3487, Type II, and tested according to ASTM D 117. MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 26 10 00 - 2 McHugh Engineering Associates C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. 2.05 A. 2.06 A. 2.07 A. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Insulation Temperature Rise: 65 deg. C when operated at rated kVA output in a 40 deg. C ambient temperature. Transformer shall be rated to operate at rated kilovolt ampere in an average ambient temperature of 30 deg. C over 24 hours with a maximum ambient temperature of 40 deg. C without loss of service life expectancy. Basic Impulse Level: 95 kV. Full-Capacity Voltage Taps: Four 2.5 percent taps, 2 above and 2 below rated high voltage; with externally operable tap changer for de-energized use and with position indicator and padlock hasp. High-Voltage Switch: 200 A, make-and-latch rating of 10-kA RMS, symmetrical, arranged for loop feed with 3-phase, 4-position, gang-operated, load-break switch that is oil immersed in transformer tank with hook-stick operating handle in primary compartment. Primary Fuses: 150-kV fuse assembly with fuses complying with IEEE C37.47. 1. Current-limiting type in dry-fuse holder wells, mechanically interlocked with liquid-immersed switch in transformer tank to prevent disconnect under load. Surge Arresters: Distribution class, one for each primary phase; complying with IEEE C62.11 and NEMA LA 1; support from tank wall within high-voltage compartment. Transformers shall have three arresters for loop-feed circuits. High-Voltage Terminations and Equipment: Live front with externally clamped porcelain bushings and cable connectors suitable for terminating primary cable. Accessories: 1. Drain Valve: 1 inch (25 mm), with sampling device. 2. Dial-type thermometer. 3. Liquid-level gage. 4. Pressure-vacuum gage. 5. Pressure Relief Device: Self-sealing with an indicator. IDENTIFICATION DEVICES Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each transformer, mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Materials." SEISMIC RESTRAINTS Design and fabricate transformers, and anchorage devices for them, to withstand static and seismic forces in any direction. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL Factory Tests: Perform design and routine tests according to standards specified for components. Conduct transformer tests according to [IEEE C57.12.90]. 1. Resistance measurements of all windings on rated-voltage connection and on tap extreme connections. 2. Ratios on rated-voltage connection and on tap extreme connections. 3. Polarity and phase relation on rated-voltage connection. 4. No-load loss at rated voltage on rated-voltage connection. 5. Excitation current at rated voltage on rated-voltage connection. 6. Impedance and load loss at rated current on rated-voltage connection and on tap extreme connections. 7. Applied potential. MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 26 10 00 - 3 McHugh Engineering Associates 8. 9. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Induced potential. Temperature Test: If transformer is supplied with auxiliary cooling equipment to provide more than one rating, test at lowest kilovolt-ampere Class OA or Class AA rating and highest kilovolt-ampere Class OA/FA or Class AA/FA rating. a. Temperature test is not required if record of temperature test on an essentially duplicate unit is available. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. B. E. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for medium-voltage transformers. Examine roughing-in of conduits and grounding systems to verify the following: 1. Wiring entries comply with layout requirements. 2. Entries are within conduit-entry tolerances specified by manufacturer and no feeders will have to cross section barriers to reach load or line lugs. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where transformers will be installed. Verify that ground connections are in place and that requirements in Division 16Section "Grounding and Bonding" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at location of transformer. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install transformers on concrete bases. C. D. 1. 2. B. 3.03 Anchor transformers to concrete bases according to manufacturer's written instructions. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit and 6 inches (100 mm) high. 3. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement. 4. Install dowel rods to connect concrete bases to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around full perimeter of base. 5. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts, for supported equipment, that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor. 6. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 7. Tack-weld or bolt transformers to channel-iron sills embedded in concrete bases. Install sills level and grout flush with floor or base. Maintain minimum clearances and workspace at equipment according to manufacturer's written instructions and NFPA 70. CONNECTIONS MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 26 10 00 - 4 McHugh Engineering Associates A. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service Representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections. Report results in writing. 1. After installing transformers but before primary is energized, verify that grounding system at substation is tested at specified value or less. 2. After installing transformers and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 3. Perform electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.2. Certify compliance with test parameters. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above. Test Reports: Prepare written reports to record the following: 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective actions taken to achieve compliance with requirements. B. C. 3.05 FOLLOW-UP SERVICE A. Voltage Monitoring and Adjusting: If requested by Owner, perform the following voltage monitoring after Substantial Completion but not more than six months after Final Acceptance: 1. During a period of normal load cycles as evaluated by Owner, perform seven days of three-phase voltage recording at secondary terminals of each transformer. Use voltmeters with calibration traceable to National Institute of Science and Technology standards and with a chart speed of not less than 1 inch (25 mm) per hour. Voltage unbalance greater than 1 percent between phases, or deviation of any phase voltage from nominal value by more than plus or minus 5 percent during test period, is unacceptable. 2. Corrective Actions: If test results are unacceptable, perform the following corrective actions, as appropriate: a. Adjust transformer taps. b. Prepare written request for voltage adjustment by electric utility. 3. Retests: After corrective actions have been performed, repeat monitoring until satisfactory results are obtained. 4. Report: Prepare written report covering monitoring and corrective actions performed. END OF SECTION MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 26 10 00 - 5 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 26 13 16 - 15 KV LOAD INTERRUPTER SWITCH PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCE A. B. Refer to section 26 00 00 for additional requirements of this section. Refer to requirements of the National Electrical Code, UL, NEMA, and NFPA. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. B. Submit manufacturer’s shop drawings of all equipment specified in this section Provide an electrical coordination study. See Section 26 05 73 for details. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 15 KV LOAD INTERRUPTER SWITCH A. Load interrupter switches shall be three-pole, single throw, gang-operated stored energy type with quick-make, quick-break operation. 1. Manually operated. 2. Non-removable switch handle. 3. Separate main and arcing contacts to provide maximum endurance for fault close and load interrupting duty. 4. Arcing contacts shall be spring loaded so that on opening they break after the main contacts, on closing they make after the main contacts. Arc interruption to take place in an interruption chute. Outdoor metal enclosed, NEMA 3R, tamper proof construction. Tested and assembled in accord with IEEE, NEMA, ANSI owner and/or AE to be made aware of test for witness. Electrical Characteristics 1. Maximum design Voltage 15.0 kV 2. Basic Insulation Level (BIL) 95 kV 3. Frequency - 60 HZ 4. Continuous Ampere - 600 Amp. 5. Switch duty cycle, fault closing, Symmetrical Amps: 40. Welded steel frame construction with solid steel side sheets braced to function properly under normal operating and short-circuit conditions. Kirk key interlock on switch handle and fuse compartment door. Additionally, the 15 kV switch shall be mechanically interlocked to prevent access to the fuse compartment without fuse in the open position. Provisions shall be available for padlocking the switch in either the open or closed position. Window on door to permit viewing switch-blade positions when door is closed. All frames to have an inner hinged, full height Lexan door. OSHA and NEC warning signs. Sections capable of lifting, rolling, or jacking in filed. 10 gauge base, not dipped, galvanized. 11 B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. 15 KV LOAD INTERRUPTER SWITCH 26 13 16 - 1 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Center K. L. gauge enclosure, epoxy primer, plus finish coat and two polyurethane coats. Bus shall be mounted on high strength porcelain or polyester insulators. Incoming main compartment, cable connectors, stress cones and 15 kV distribution type lightning arrestors shall be factory installed. 2.02 POWER FUSES A. Power fuses shall be of the solid material type having a minimum interrupting capacity 50kA RMS symmetrical current rating at rated voltage of the integrated assembly. All power fuses shall be provided with grounding provisions on the load side. Non-tracking insulating barriers shall be provided between all fuses and between the fuses and side sheets. Barriers between fuses shall be centered and barriers at the sides shall be properly supported between barriers and the side sheets. The fuses furnished shall be the product of one of the following approved manufacturers and type: G. E. Co. Type EJO-1, or approved equal. Sizes as shown on single line diagram. One set (3) spare fuses for each size shown shall be provided. B. C. D. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. D. E. F. G. H. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, applicable requirements of the NEC and in accordance with recognized industry practices. Use jumper cables, as provided by the switchgear manufacturer, to connect the primary surge arrestors. Bending of high-voltage cables should be avoided or minimized. All necessary bends should meet at lease the minimum radii specified by the cable manufacturer. Provide direct path to ground for lightning arrestors. Provide warning labeling and signs per OSHA and NEC. Installation to be in secured area. Do not energize until secured. All work to be performed with manufacturer's approval. Set trips as required by coordination study. 3.02 GROUNDING A. Install ground connections to driven ground rods, water services and building structural system. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed by (the installing contractor) (a separate contractor furnished by the owner). Report results in writing. Visually inspect for physical damage. Perform mechanical operator tests in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Check blade alignment and arc interrupter operations of each load interrupter switch. Check torque of all bolted connections, including cable terminations, either by observing the B. C. B. C. D. 15 KV LOAD INTERRUPTER SWITCH 26 13 16 - 2 McHugh Engineering Associates E. F. G. H. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Center bead of indicating compound to confirm that it is still intact, or with a torque wrench to confirm the joint is tightened to the manufacturer's specifications. Tough-up paint all chips and scratches with manufacturer-supplied paint and leave remaining paint with Owner. Verify key interlock operation. Perform insulation resistance test on each phase to ground and each phase to each other phase. Record results. Perform low-frequency withstand tests according to ANSI/IEEE C37.20.3, paragraph 5.5. END OF SECTION 15 KV LOAD INTERRUPTER SWITCH 26 13 16 - 3 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 26 22 00 - TRANSFORMERS DRY TYPE (NEMA TP-1) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. B. 1.02 A. 1.03 REFERENCE Refer to section 26 00 00 for requirements which are applicable to this section. Refer to National Electrical Code WORK INCLUDED Provide all labor, material, equipment, and supervision necessary to install and place into operation dry type transformers of the size and capacity indicated on the drawings. SUBMITTALS A. B. C. Submit shop drawings of transformer. Submit manufacturers' certificates of conformance with applicable codes. Submit wiring diagrams of transformer. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. Verify that all equipment is installed in accordance with the manufacturer's warranty requirements. Install equipment in accordance with the NEC. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. B. C. D. E. LIGHTING AND POWER TRANSFORMERS Furnish and install, as indicated on the electrical plans, energy efficient dry-type transformers as manufactured by Square D Company, Siemens, Cutler Hammer, GE, or approved equal. Single phase transformers shall be 480 volt primary and 120/208 volt secondary. Three phase transformers shall be 480 delta primary and 208Y/120 secondary. Transformers 15 kVA and larger shall have a minimum of 4-2 1/2 percent full capacity primary taps. Exact voltages and taps to be as designated on the plans or the transformer schedule. Transformers 15 kVA and above shall be 150° C temperature rise above 40° C ambient. All insulating materials to be in accordance with NEMA ST20 standards for a 220° C UL component recognized insulation system. Transformer shall be a low loss type with minimum efficiencies per NEMA TP-1 when operating at 35% of full load capacity. Efficiency shall be tested in accordance with NEMA TP-2. Transformer coils shall be of the continuous wound copper construction and shall be impregnated with nonhygroscopic, thermosetting varnish. All cores to be constructed of high grade, non-aging silicon steel with high magnetic permeability, and low hysteresis and eddy current losses. Magnetic flux densities are to be kept well below the saturation point. The core laminations shall be clamped together with structural steel angles. The TRANSFORMERS DRY TYPE (NEMA TP-1) 26 22 00 - 1 McHugh Engineering Associates F. G. H. J. K. L. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building completed core and coil shall then be bolted to the base of the enclosure but isolated therefrom by means of rubber, vibration-absorbing mounts. There shall be no metal-to-metal contact between the core and coil and the enclosure. On transformers 500 kVA and smaller, the vibration isolating system shall be designed to provide a permanent fastening of the core and coil to the enclosure. Sound isolating systems requiring the complete removal of all fastening devices will not be acceptable. Transformers 15 kVA and larger shall be in a heavy gauge, sheet steel, ventilated enclosure. The ventilating openings shall be designed to prevent accidental access to live parts in accordance with UL, NEMA, and National Electrical Code standards for ventilated enclosures. Transformers through 75 kVA shall be designed so they can be either floor or wall mounted. Above 75 kVA they shall be floor mounted design. The entire transformer enclosure shall be degreased, cleaned, phosphatized, primed, and finished with a grey, baked enamel. The maximum temperature of the top of the enclosure shall not exceed 50° C rise above a 40° ambient. The core of the transformer shall be visibly grounded to the enclosure by means of a flexible grounding conductor sized in accordance with applicable NEMA, IEEE, and ANSI standards. Sound levels shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer not to exceed the following: 15 to 50 kVA - 45 DB 51 to 150 kVA - 50 DB 151 to 300 kVA - 55 DB 301 to 500 kVA - 60 DB The transformer shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratory for the specified temperature rise. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. B. C. D. DRY TYPE TRANSFORMER Install in accordance with the NEC. Ground transformer to earth grounding system. Provide with adequate clearance for maintenance and service. Insure that adequate ventilation is available. END OF SECTION TRANSFORMERS DRY TYPE (NEMA TP-1) 26 22 00 - 2 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 26 24 16 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCE A. B. Refer to Section 26 00 00 for additional requirements of this section. Refer to requirements of the National Electrical Code, UL, and the NFPA. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor, material, equipment and supervision necessary to furnish and install panelboards as specified. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturers shop drawings of all equipment specified in this section. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Verify that all equipment is installed in accordance with the manufacturers’ warranty requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. B. C. D. E. DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS (MDP or PP) GENERAL - Furnish and install distribution and power panelboards as indicated in the panelboard schedule and where shown on the plans. Panelboards shall be equipped with thermal-magnetic, molded case circuit breakers of frame and trip ratings as shown on the schedule. BUSSING ASSEMBLY AND TEMPERATURE RISE - Panelboard bus structure and main lugs or main breaker shall have current ratings as shown on the panelboard schedule. Bus shall be plated copper. CIRCUIT BREAKERS - Circuit breakers shall be equipped with individually insulated, braced and protected connectors. Circuit breakers shall be flush with each other. Tripped indication shall be clearly shown. Provisions for additional breakers shall be such that no additional connectors will be required to add breakers. Mechanical lugs are to be copper. For 480 V applications over 1000 Amp, the main breaker is to include electronic trip with LSIG characteristics. EQUIPMENT SHORT CIRCUIT RATING (FULLY RATED) - Each panelboard shall have a short circuit current rating equal to or greater than the integrated equipment rating shown on the panelboard schedule or on the plans. Panelboards shall be marked with their maximum short circuit current rating at the supply voltage and shall be UL listed. CABINET - Panelboard assembly shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet. The rigidity and gauge of steel to be as specified in UL Standard 50 for cabinets. The size of wiring gutters shall be in accordance with UL Standard 67. Cabinets to be equipped with latch and tumbler-type lock on door of trim. Doors over 48" long shall be equipped with three-point latch and vault lock. All locks shall be keyed alike. End walls shall be removable. Fronts shall be of code gauge steel. Baked PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 - 1 McHugh Engineering Associates F. G. H. I. 2.02 A. B. C. D. E. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building enamel finish electro-deposited over cleaned phosphatized steel. SAFETY BARRIERS - The panelboard interior assembly shall be dead front with panelboard front removed. Main lugs or main breakers shall have barriers on five sides. The barrier in front of the main lugs shall be hinged to a fixed part of the interior. The end of the bus structure opposite the mains shall have barriers. UL LISTING - Panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories and shall bear the UL label. When required, panelboards shall be suitable for use as service equipment. NAMEPLATES - Provide laminated black phenolic resin with white core with 3/16 inch high engraved lettered nameplates for each circuit breaker to indicate the feeder, panelboard and equipment served. Mounted, with plated screws, adjacent to or on front of the breaker. Panelboards shall be by Square D, Siemens, Cutler Hammer or GE. LIGHTING & RECEPTACLE PANELS (LP or RP) GENERAL - Furnish and install circuit breaker lighting panelboards as indicated in the panelboard schedule and where shown on the plans. Panelboards shall be equipped with thermal-magnetic molded case circuit breakers with frame and trip ratings as shown on the schedule. CIRCUIT BREAKERS - Shall be quick-make, quick-break, thermal-magnetic, trip indicating and have common trip on all multipole breakers. Trip indication shall be clearly shown by the breaker handle taking position between "ON" and "OFF" when the breaker is tripped. Branch circuit breakers feeding convenience outlets shall have sensitive instantaneous trip settings of not more than 10 times the trip rating of the breaker to prevent repeated arcing shorts resulting from frayed appliance cords. Single pole 15 and 20 ampere circuit breakers shall be UL listed as "Switching Breakers" at 120V AC and carry the SWD marking. UL Class A ground fault circuit protection shall be provided on 120V AC branch circuits as specified on the plans or panelboard schedule. This protection shall be an integral part of the branch circuit breaker which also provides overload and short circuit protection for branch circuit wiring. Tripping of a branch circuit breaker containing ground fault circuit interruption shall not disturb the feeder circuit to the panelboard. A single pole circuit breaker with integral ground fault circuit interruption shall require no more panelboard branch circuit space than a conventional circuit breaker. A UL listed combination arc fault circuit interrupter (AFCI) shall be provided for all 120V, 15 or 20 Amp branch circuits as indicated on the plans or panelboard schedule or as required by the National Electrical Code. This protection shall be an integral part of the branch circuit breaker which also provides overload and short circuit protection for the branch circuit wiring. This breaker shall require no more panelboard branch circuit space than a conventional circuit breaker. Connections to the bus shall bolt-on. PANELBOARD BUS ASSEMBLY - Bus bar connections to the branch circuit breakers shall be the "distributed phase" or "phase sequence" type. Single phase, three-wire panelboard bussing shall be such that any two adjacent single pole breakers are connected to opposite polarities in such a manner that two pole breakers can be installed in any location. Three phase, four-wire bussing shall be such that any three adjacent single pole breakers are individually connected to each of the three different phases in such a manner that two or three pole breakers can be installed at any location. All current carrying parts of the bus assemble shall be plated copper. Mains ratings shall be shown in the panelboard schedule or on the plans. WIRING TERMINALS - Terminals for feeder conductors to the panelboard mains and neutral shall be UL listed as suitable for the type of conductor specified. Terminals for branch circuit wiring, both breaker and neutral, shall be UL listed as suitable for the type of conductor specified. CABINETS AND FRONTS - The panelboard bus assemble shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet. The size of the wiring gutters and gauge of steel shall be in accordance with NEMA and UL Standards. The box shall be fabricated from galvanized steel or equivalent rust resistant steel. Fronts shall include doors and have flush, cylinder tumbler-type locks with catches and spring-loaded stainless steel door pulls. Doors shall be mounted with completely concealed steel hinges. Fronts shall not be removable with door in the locked position. A circuit directory frame and PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 - 2 McHugh Engineering Associates F. G. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building card with a clear plastic covering shall be provided on the inside of the door. Fronts shall be of code gauge steel. EQUIPMENT SHORT CIRCUIT RATING (FULLY RATED) - Each panelboard shall have a short circuit current rating equal to or greater than the integrated equipment rating shown on the panelboard schedule or on the plans. Panelboards shall be marked with their maximum short circuit current rating at the supply voltage and shall be UL listed. UL LISTING - Panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories and bear the UL label. Equal panelboards may be provided by Square D, G.E., Cutler Hammer, or Siemens. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. B. C. D. E. F. 3.02 A. PANELS Tops not to exceed 72 inches above floor. Provide labeling and complete directories. Ductwork or piping shall not pass over panels. Space shall be clear 36" in front of panel floor to structural slab or roof above. All conduit entering the panel shall have a screwed hub with an insulated bushing and no sharp edges. Wires shall be labeled and neatly arranged in the wiring gutters with wires cut to proper lengths and neatly racked. GROUNDING All panels shall be grounded to the building equipment grounding system per NEC 408.40. Ground resistance shall not exceed NEC values. END OF SECTION PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 - 3 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 26 27 00 - BASIC MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT FOR METAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. B. 1.02 A. B. REFERENCE Refer to Section 26 00 00 for additional requirements of this section. Refer to NECA 1-2000 for general installation requirements. SUBMITTALS Submit shop drawings and manufacturer’s catalog sheets of all specified items unless waived by the engineer. Submit switches and receptacles as a minimum. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. B. C. D. E. 2.02 A. B. C. D. E. 2.03 A. B. C. D. E. RIGID METAL CONDUIT (GRS) Material; Steel, Zinc coated Fed. Spec. WW-C-581d, ANSI C801. Fittings; Malleable iron, Threaded NEC; Article 344 Application; Indoor, above ground, enamel coated, all occupancies not subject to severe corrosive influences. Manufacturer; Hubbell, Allied Tube and Conduit Corp. or approved equal. ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) Material; Galvanized steel, U.L. labeled, Fed. Spec. WWC-563 (latest revision), ANSI C80.3. Fittings; Threadless compression type for up to 1 1/4", set screw for 1 ½" and larger. Installation in accordance to Article 358 of the National Electrical Code and U.L. general information card #FJMX. NEC; Article 358 Application; Exposed and concealed work not subject to physical damage. Manufacturer; Hubbell, Allied Tube and Conduit Corp. or approved equal. FLEXIBLE METAL TUBING (FMT) Material; Hot dipped galvanized interlocking convolutions of steel tape in circular cross section. Fed. Spec. WW-C-566. Fittings; Hot dipped galvanized steel NEC; Article 344 Application; All areas other than wet locations, hoistways, hazardous locations, below ground, and areas with exposure to oil, gasoline, or other materials having an adverse effect on rubber. Manufacturer; Electri-flex Company Liquatite Type BR, Hubbell, Allied Tube and Conduit Corp., AFC, or approved equal. BASIC MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT FOR METAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS 26 27 00 - 1 McHugh Engineering Associates 2.04 A. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building RIGID NON-METALLIC CONDUIT (SCHEDULE 40 PVC) E. Material; U.L. 651, ANSI/NEMA TC-2, Fed. Military Spec. WC-1094A, 90 deg. wire rated and sunlight resistant. Fittings; PVC, same as above. NEC; Article 352 Application; In walls, floors, ceilings, wet locations, underground, and locations subject to severe corrosive influences. Manufacturer; Carlon Schedule 40 electrical conduit or approved equal. 2.05 LIQUATITE FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Material: Hot dipped galvanized interlocking convolutions of steel tape in circular cross section with PVC jacket. Fittings: Hot dipped galvanized steel. NEC Article 350 (LFMC) Application: All areas other than elevator hoistways, hazardous locations and where subject to physical damage. Manufacturers: Electriflex Company Liquatite Type LT, Hubbell, Allied Tube and Conduit Corp., AFC, or approved equal. B. C. D. B. C. D. E. 2.06 CONDUCTORS A. Type; THHN, 98% conductivity copper, 600 volt, dry locations. Type THWN for wet locations. Conductors shall be U.L. listed. Equipment terminations for circuits rated 100 Amps or less (#14 AWG - #2 AWG) shall be rated 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). Equipment termination for circuits rated over 100 Amps (#1 or larger) shall be rated 75 degrees C (167 degrees F). Refer to NEC for allowable exceptions. 90 degrees C (194 degrees F) rated conductors shall be used as indicated on the drawings or as indicated within these specifications. Solid copper conductors for #10 and #12 wire size. #8 and larger shall be stranded copper. Separate green ground conductor for all 480 volt circuits including branch, homerun, and feeders. All conductors shall be color coded as follows: 120/208 Volt Systems Phase A Black Phase B Red Phase C Blue Neutral Grey or Natural White 277/480 Volt Systems Phase A Brown Phase B Orange Phase C Yellow Neutral Grey or Natural White Minimum size conductor shall be #12 AWG except that #14 AWG shall be used for control wiring. All circuit conductors shall be run in the same raceway system. A grounding conductor shall be provided to each electrical device in accordance with the National Electrical Code. Conductor sizes shall be as shown on drawings and/or specified in this specification. Conductors shall not be installed in raceways until construction is advanced to allow conductors to be installed completely without damage to conductors and there is not possibility of water or other B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. BASIC MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT FOR METAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS 26 27 00 - 2 McHugh Engineering Associates J. K. L. 2.07 A. B. C. 2.08 Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building contaminants entering the raceway system. Conductors shall be installed between convenient terminating points. An approved pulling compound shall be used to assist in pulling of conductors. Aluminum Alloy Conductors for Distribution Feeder Applications: 1. Distribution feeder conductors sizes #6 AWG to 1000 Kcmil may be copper (Base Bid) or aluminum alloy (Alternate). Aluminum alloy conductors shall be compact standard conductors of a recognizable Aluminum Association 8000 Series aluminum alloy conductor material (AA-8000 series alloy). AA-8000 series alloy conductor must be Alcan Cable Stabiloy or approved equal. 2. Compliance with the elongation requirement per Table 10.1 of UL Standard 1581 for stranded AA-8000 series aluminum alloy conductors shall be determined on wires taken from the conductor after stranding by manufacturer. 3. Insulation: a. For use in raceways: Type XHHW-2, temperature rating 90o C. b. For use in cable trays: Sizes #1/0 AEG and larger. Type XHHW-2, temperature rating 90o C and marked: “SUN RES”, “VW-1"”, “GASOLINE AND OIL-RESISTANT II”, “FOR CT USE”. Manufacturers: Alpha Wire, Southwire, Tamaqua Cable, Triangle Wire & Cable, American Insulated Wire, BICC, General Cable, or approved equal. JUNCTION BOXES Material; Galvanized steel, accessible. Manufacturers; Keystone, Hubbell, Penn Panel and Box Co, or approved equal. NEC; Article 314 OUTLET AND SWITCH BOXES A. B. Material; Galvanized steel with knockouts to suit raceway system. Manufacturer; Crouse Hinds Co., Steel City Div., Raco Inc., or approved equal. 2.09 WALL PLATES - METAL- COMMERCIAL SPECIFICATION GRADE A. B. C. Wall plates shall be standard size, metal, commercial grade. Plates shall be provided for all switches, receptacles, blanks, telephone, and special purpose outlets. Plates must be of modern design having rounded edges and corners, and be complete with color-matched mounting screws. Plates must be of one design throughout the building and shall conform to UL, CSA, and NEMA standards. Engraving shall be done by plate manufacturer in accordance with the schedule. Acceptable Manufacturers: Cooper Wiring Devices, Pass & Seymour, Hubbell, Leviton, or approved equal. D. E. F. 2.10 RECEPTACLES - DECORA - SPECIFICATION GRADE A. B. C. Impact-resistant nylon face. One-piece, triple-wire brass power contacts. Corrosion resistant, plated, wrap-around steel strap locked into assembly to prohibit strap from bending away from body. Terminal compartments isolated from each other for positive conductor containment. Available in hospital grade & specification grade. D. E. BASIC MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT FOR METAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS 26 27 00 - 3 McHugh Engineering Associates F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Heavy-duty compact design for easier installation and long lasting performance. Automatic grounding clip standard for positive ground to metal boxes. All devices fit standard #26 opening wall plate. Side and backwire accepts #14 - #10 AWG. In compliance with UL 498. Pre-wired pigtail connectors that accommodate Fed. Spec. Receptacles are approved. Must be crimped and welded terminal right angle application within the connector. Receptacle shall be Federal Specification, WC896 compliant. Marking should be clearly identifiable on face or strap. Acceptable manufacturers: Cooper Wiring Devices, Pass & Seymour, Hubbell, Leviton, or approved equal. Leviton 16352, 20 amp, white, ivory, grey, black or almond. * Those receptacles installed on the emergency system shall be clearly identifiable as distinct from normal receptacles (RED). 2.11 GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTING RECEPTACLES - STANDARD GRADE A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. S. Side or screw pressure plate back wire with #14 or #12 AWG solid or y-stranded copper wire. Extra-long strap. High-impact resistant thermoplastic construction. Ground screw with a wire guide channel. Dual-direction test and reset buttons. Line and load terminations supplied backed out, and ready to wire. 2 back wire holes per terminal. Ultrasonic welding of face to back body. Mis-wire label applied to load terminals. GFCI receptacle shall have SafeLock protection. If critical components are damaged and ground fault protection is lost or if mis-wired, power to receptacle is disconnected. Class A rated GFCI 1 ½ HP rating on Motor Control GFCI switch (2081 series). Button colors match the device face. Supplied with matching wall plate. In compliance with UL-943, UL-498, UL-508. Pre-wired pigtail connectors that accommodate Fed. Spec. receptacles are approved. Must be crimped and welded terminal right angle application within the connector. Receptacle shall be Federal Specification, WC896 compliant. Marking should be clearly identifiable on face or strap. Acceptable Manufacturers: Cooper Wiring Devices, Pass & Seymour, Hubbell, Leviton, or approved equal. Leviton 6898, 20 amp, ivory, white, almond, or mahogany. 2.12 TAMPER RESISTANT RECEPTACLES - DECORA A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. Thermoplastic shutter for reliable tamper-resistant design. High-impact thermoplastic face and body. One-piece Brass Alloy grounding system. High performance copper alloy contacts assure the highest degree of blade retention. Ground contacts are encapsulated in thermoplastic body. Side or back wiring accepts #10, #12 or #14 AWG copper. 8-hold back wiring for convenient feed thru wiring. In compliance with UL-498. K. L. M. N. O. P. Q. R. BASIC MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT FOR METAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS 26 27 00 - 4 McHugh Engineering Associates I. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building L. Pre-wired pigtail connectors that accommodate Fed. Spec. Receptacles are approved. Must be crimped and welded terminal right angle application within the connector. Receptacle shall be Federal Specification, WC896 compliant. Marking should be clearly identifiable on face or strap. Acceptable manufacturers: Cooper Wiring Devices, Pass & Seymour, Hubbell, Leviton, or approved equal. Leviton 16262-SG, 20 Amp, ivory, white, red or orange. 2.13 RECEPTACLES - FLOOR OUTLET A. B. C. D. E. H. Solid brass covered plate with matching flush fitting brass cap. Receptacle made of durable thermoplastic. Supplied with foam rubber gasket. O-ring and metal 18" cubic box. In compliance with UL 498. Pre-wired pigtail connectors that accommodate Fed. Spec. receptacles are approved. Must be crimped and welded terminal right angle application within the connector. Receptacle shall be Federal Specification, WC896 compliant. Marking should be clearly identifiable on face or strap. Acceptable manufacturers: Cooper Wiring Devices, Pass & Seymour, Hubbell, Leviton, or approved equal. Leviton 5362/5361, 20 Amp, ivory, white, grey, black, brown or almond. 2.14 ROCKER SWITCHES - SPECIFICATION GRADE A. B. C. L. Impact-resistant thermoplastic nylon back body and frame. Cushioned nylon paddle assures smooth, quiet, long term operation. Unique single rocking butterfly contact provides long term consistent performance with significantly fewer moving parts. Internal back and side wire capability for easy installation with #14 - 10 stranded or solid copper/copper clad wire. Terminals made of high conductivity brass and serrated for maximum wire gripping. Color-coded back bodies for positive identification of switch rating. Silver alloy contacts integrally formed to the butterfly actuator assures reliable performance. Integral auto ground clip for positive ground to metal boxes. Brass binding head terminal screws are combination phillips/slotted. All terminal screws backed out, ready to install. In compliance with UL 20. Switches shall be Federal Specification, WC596 compliant. Marking should be clearly identifiable on face or strap. Acceptable Manufacturers: Cooper Wiring Devices, Pass & Seymour, Hubbell, Leviton, or approved equal. Leviton 5621-2/5623-2/5624-2, 20 amp, 120/277V ivory, white, black, grey, almond. 2.15 LIGHTED ROCKER SWITCHES - SPECIFICATION GRADE A. B. C. Impact-resistant thermoplastic back body and frame. Cushioned thermoplastic paddle assures smooth, quiet, long term operation. Unique single rocking butterfly contact provides long term consistent performance with significantly fewer moving parts. Internal back & side wire capability for easy installation with #14 - 10 stranded or solid copper/copper clad wire. Terminals made of high conductivity brass and serrated for maximum wire gripping. J. K. F. G. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. D. BASIC MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT FOR METAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS 26 27 00 - 5 McHugh Engineering Associates E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Color-coded back bodies for positive identification of switch rating. Silver alloy contacts integrally formed to the butterfly actuator assures reliable performance. Integral auto-ground clip for positive ground to metal boxes. Brass binding head terminal screws are combination phillips/slotted. All terminal screws backed out, ready to install. In compliance with UL 20. Switches shall be Federal Specification, WC596 compliant. Marking should be clearly identifiable on face or strap. Acceptable manufacturers: Cooper Wiring Devices, Pass & Seymour, Hubbell, Leviton, or approved equal. Leviton 5631-2/5633-2/5659-2/5649-2, 20 amp 120/277V, ivory, white, brown, black, red, grey, light almond. 2.16 AC MOTOR RATED SWITCH A. B. C. D. 30 A and/or 40 A, 600 V AC rated. Double pole or triple pole, single-throw. UL 508, UL 94 (flammability) Listed. All molded parts are made of thermoplastic material to assure superior resistance to repeated impact, chemical degradation, extreme temperature fluctuations, tracking and arcing. Positive-contact design enhances fast make/slow break mechanism by minimizing bounce and arcing upon contact closure and teasing upon separation. Free-travel toggle design protects closed contacts from accidental disengagement and contact teasing. Silver alloy contacts provide maximum conductivity and prolonged service life. Side and back wire terminal screws accept up to #10 AWG solid copper wire. For standard #8 AWG wire, remove terminal clamp and use ring terminal. Oversized #10, triple-combination, vibration-resistant terminal screws. Mounting yoke is made from nickel-plated brass for superior corrosion resistance. Insulating barriers between terminal screws provide isolation from each phase. Device are permanently marked with catalog number, amperage, voltage and horse-power ratings to assist with identification. Large toggle provides positive actuation, even when operated with gloved hand. Leviton MS302 (30 A, 2 P), MS 303 (30 A, 3 P), MS402 (40 A, 2 P) or MS403 (40 A, 3 P) or equivalent by Cooper Wiring Devices, Hubbell or Pass & Seymour. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N. O. 2.17 A. B. C. D. DIMMER SWITCHES - DECORA SLIDE TYPE- SPECIFICATION GRADE F. G. H. Maximum ratings are for continuous full load. RFI suppression built in. Extra-heavy use models supplied with matching cover. Leviton 80800/80800-3/81000/81000-3/82000/82000-3, 800 watt, 1,000 watt, 2,000 watt - 120V, 277V. Acceptable manufacturers: Cooper Wiring Devices, Pass & Seymour (Titan Series), Hubbell, Leviton, or approved equal. Full on bypass. Ivory, white, grey. Pre-set on-off switch. 2.18 SURFACE METAL RACEWAY AND WIREWAY E. BASIC MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT FOR METAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS 26 27 00 - 6 McHugh Engineering Associates A. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building G. Provide surface metal raceway system complete with all fittings, wiring, devices, etc. Surface raceway shall have baked enamel finish. These raceways are permitted only in dry locations where not subject to severe physical damage and must have metal not less than .04 inches thick. Do not use in hoistways and in any hazardous classified areas. The number, type, and size of conductors permitted in raceway shall be clearly marked on raceway or on shipping label. Splices and taps may be made providing raceway has an accessible removable cover. Wireway made of 14 gauge sheet metal forming a square trough with hinged cover and complete with couplings, 90 deg. elbows, tees, junction boxes, end plates, and supports may be used for surface wiring at load centers and other locations to the extent permitted by the NEC. Wireways in sizes 2 1/2" x 2 1/2" up to 12" x 12" square may be used; however, no conductor larger than that which the wireway is designed shall be installed therein. Wireway shall not contain more than thirty current carrying conductors at any cross-section and the sum of cross-sectional areas of all contained conductors at any cross-section shall not exceed 20% of the interior cross-sectional area of wireway. Wireways shall be treated with rust resistant primer and finished gray baked enamel. 2.19 MC CABLE A. B. C. Type; UL listed Type MC Cable with galvanized steel armor outer casing, color coded circuit conductors, insulated green grounding conductor. Each conductor insulated with thermoplastic insulation. NEC; Article 330, 518 and to comply with Federal Specification J-C-30B. Manufacturers: AFC Cable Systems MC, Alean Cable, BICC, Tamaqua Cable, or approved equal. 2.20 FIRE ALARM MC CABLE A. B. C. Type; UL listed Type MC Cable with galvanized steel armor outer casing, bare grounding conductor, color coded circuit conductors. Each conductor insulated with thermoplastic insulation. NEC; Article 760 and to comply with Federal Specification J-C-30B. Manufacturer: AFC Cable Systems Fire Alarm Cable or approved equal. 2.21 SECURITY PLATES A. C. D. E. Receptacle, switch, telephone, and GFI plates in secure areas shall be made of minimum 14 gauge one piece die formed cold rolled steel. Baked white enamel finish, polyester powder, 5 stage pre-treatment, 85% glass, minimum 2H hardness. Back plate 10 gauge prime galvanized steel with 4 threaded holes. Security screws Torx T-20. U.L. Listed. Manufacturers: Hubbell, or approved equal. 2.22 RECESSED FLOOR BOX (CONCRETE FLOOR) A. B. C. D. E. F. 1, 2, or 3 gang box, cast iron for on or below grade, stamped steel for above grade. Fully adjustable before and after concrete pour. Shallow box as necessary. Removable dividers as necessary for multi-service applications. 1, 2, or 3 gang cover plates; Carpet, tile, or brass as per application. Walker Wiremold Omnibox Multiservice Floor Box series. B. C. D. E. F. B. BASIC MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT FOR METAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS 26 27 00 - 7 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building G. Acceptable Manufacturers: Wiremold, Hubbell, Thomas & Betts, Crouse Hinds, or approved equal. 2.23 MULTI-SERVICE FLUSH POKE-THRU (4" FLOOR CORE) A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. Flush poke-thru with 4 Category 5 communications jacks and power. Communication adapter for protection of Category 5 cables. EMI/RFI shielded divider, UL recognized. Manufacturers furnish 20 Amp isolated grounding specification grade duplex receptacle. 2 hour fire rating, UL Listed. Grommets for unused data jack parts (coordinate with data communications contractor). Wiremold RC2001 Category 5 Flush Poke-thru. Acceptable Manufacturers: Wiremold, Hubbell, Thomas & Betts, or approved equal. 2.24 3 SERVICE FURNITURE FEED POKE-THRU (3" FLOOR CORE) A. B. C. D. E. Flush poke-thru for telephone, data, and power (up to 10 wire) feeds to furniture partitions. Communication adapter for protection of communications cables. Up to 4 hour UL Listed fire rating as indicated on drawings or specifications. Wiremold RC700 - 6A series flush poke-thru. Acceptable manufacturers: Wiremold, Hubbell, Thomas & Betts, or approved equal. 2.25 MULTI SERVICE WALL SOURCE BOX A. The new construction box system shall be the WallSource Multi Service Box as manufactured by the Wiremold Company, or approved equal. (2) (3) or (4) Gang Box. The box and all system components must be UL listed in full compliance with the standard for 514A and 514C; steel shall be galvanized with a minimum wall thickness of .063 throughout. Backfeed brackets shall be .050 min. Steel with a gray or ivory, suitable for field painting. The device mounting bracket shall be molded from color matching UL approved resins. 1. The box shall include the box, dividers and mounting brackets. The dimensions of each shall be a minimum of 32 cubic inches per gang and shall be manufactured of 16 gauge min. thick steel. The box shall accommodate standard power and communication devices. 2. The box shall have knockouts located on top and bottom, 2 1/4” from the face to accommodate combinations of 1/2”, 3/4" and 1" trade size conduits. 3. The box shall have a separate ground terminal provided for each gang. 4. The box shall adjust for a flush installation with the finished wall. Device Mounting. The self-leveling device mounting bracket shall accommodate standard power devices, Interlink Activate connectivity inserts, and Wiremold 5507 Series faceplates. A mounting bracket designed to accept other manufacturer’s devices shall be available. The bracket accommodates up to four power devices or 12 communications inserts. All Wiremold standard faceplates, mounting brackets and trim rings shall be color matched. Fiber Optic/Category 5 Radius. The depth of the box shall accommodate a 1 1/4" cable bend radius which meets or exceeds the specifications for fiber Optic and Category 5 cabling and TIA/EIA - 569A requirements for communications pathways. Device Covers. Device cover plates in the following configurations must be available: duplex device cover plates, single 1.40" and 1.59" diameter receptacle cover plates, switch plates, GFCI cover plates, Sentrex surge receptacle cover plates and other rectangular faced plates. Single-gang cover plates shall be of modular design and shall be compatible with wire and cable management systems. Communication Devices and Accessories. The box manufacturer will provide a complete line of connectivity outlets and modular multi-media inserts for voice, data, video, audio, etc. with faceplates B. C. D. E. F. BASIC MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT FOR METAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS 26 27 00 - 8 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building H. and bezels to facilitate mounting. A complete line of preprinted station and port identification labels, snap-in icon buttons and write-on station identification labels shall be available. Support Bracket. A support bracket for mounting on 16" center studs must be provided on boxes more than two-gang. Dividers. Dividers must be removable without any tools. 2.26 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS G. A. B. C. D. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Hubbell Lighting. 2. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. 3. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 4. Novitas, Inc. 5. RAB Lighting, Inc. 6. Sensor Switch, Inc. 7. TORK. 8. Watt Stopper (The). 9. Pass & Seymour 10. Or approved equal General Description: Wall- or ceiling-mounting, solid-state units with a separate relay unit. 1. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when covered area is occupied and off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes. 2. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit. 3. Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Power supply to sensor shall be 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source as defined by NFPA 70. 4. Mounting: a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box. b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 0.5" knockout in a standard electrical enclosure. c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged door. 5. Indicator: LED, to show when motion is being detected during testing and normal operation of the sensor. 6. Bypass Switch: Override the on function in case of sensor failure. 7. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 - 200 fc; keep lighting off when selected lighting level is present. PIR Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by sensing a combination of heat and movement in area of coverage. 1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6" minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in. 2. Detection Coverage (Room): Detect occupancy anywhere in a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96" high ceiling. 3. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy within 90' when mounted on a 10' high ceiling. Ultrasonic Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by sensing a change in pattern of reflected ultrasonic energy in area of coverage. 1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches. BASIC MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT FOR METAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS 26 27 00 - 9 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building 2. E. Detection Coverage (Small Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 600 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch high ceiling. 3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch high ceiling. 4. Detection Coverage (Large Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 2000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch high ceiling. 5. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy anywhere within 90 feet when mounted on a 10-foot high ceiling in a corridor not wider than 14 feet Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by using a combination of PIR and ultrasonic detection methods in area of coverage. Particular technology or combination of technologies that controls on-off functions shall be selectable in the field by operating controls on unit. 1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology. 2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in. and detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s. 3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch high ceiling. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. 3.02 A. WIRING DEVICES Lighting outlet boxes to have fixture studs - 3/8 inch. Exterior boxes shall be gasketed and watertight. Switch and device plates to be mounted with all 4 corners touching adjacent surface. All devices to be installed true and plumb. Switch plates and receptacles shall not be placed back to back in adjacent rooms. Offset locations a minimum of 3 inches to restrict noise transfer. This shall also apply to TV outlets, telephone outlets, data outlets. All devices on opposite side of a fire resistance rated wall assembly are to be separated by a horizontal distance of not less than 24 inches. Ground fault circuit interrupters shall be provided on all outdoor receptacle circuits, receptacle circuits within toilet and bath rooms, areas in close proximity to water, and wherever else indicated on the drawings or required by Code. While-in-use type covers are to be used in exterior wet locations. Tamper resistant receptacles are to be installed in day care areas, pediatric health care, psychiatric care as well as where indicated on the drawings. Refer to NEC 406.11 and 517.18 (C). Arc fault circuit interrupters shall be provided on all 15 Amp & 20 Amp receptacle circuits in dwelling unit bedrooms. Dimmer switch devices shall be appropriately sized for derating when a minimum of two or more are ganged together in a common wall box. WIRING METHODS Exposed interior wiring, panel feeders, home runs, equipment feeders; EMT. EMT conduit shall be securely fastened at intervals not exceeding 10 feet and within 3' of all boxes. NOTE: Exposed BASIC MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT FOR METAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS 26 27 00 - 10 McHugh Engineering Associates B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. 3.03 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building means all wiring which is not installed within walls, above suspended ceilings, or within a pre-manufactured raceway. Any raceway that is to be exposed in a finished area is to be coordinated with the architect/engineer prior to installation. Concealed branch circuiting above suspended ceilings, and in stud partitions; MC Cable. MC Cable shall be securely fastened at intervals not exceeding 4.5 feet, and within 12" of all boxes or fittings. All home runs shall be in EMT. Wiring in concrete slabs or decks is not permitted unless approved by the architect or structural engineer. Exposed exterior wiring; Intermediate rigid conduit Wiring below concrete slabs in earth; PVC conduit. * Provide GRS conduit sweep elbow through concrete slab. Service wiring; PVC conduit encased in 2" of reinforced concrete from utility transformer or pole to the building (below slab is not required to be encased). Concrete encasement; 2" minimum cover around each conduit requiring encasement. Reinforcement consisting of 4" x 4" No. 4 wire mesh on top level of conduit. Emergency feeder from generator set (if outside building) to building; PVC conduit encased in 2" of concrete, IMC within building. Minimum conduit size is 3/4". Flexible connections to all motors. Maximum length of flexible conduit is to be 36". RACEWAY SYSTEMS All secondary wiring shall be installed in rigid metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing, or MC Cable as specified in these Specifications. Electrical metallic tubing shall be employed in lieu of rigid metal conduit in all locations except: 1. Underground 2. In gravel, cinder, concrete, or other sub-base floor construction. PVC may be used under floor. 3. Horizontal runs in concrete floor slabs. PVC may be used in slabs. 4. Where subject to possible mechanical injury 5. In masonry construction below finished grade. PVC may be used. 6. Vertically in poured concrete walls 7. For service work 8. For main distribution feeders All raceway components shall be fastened at intervals not exceeding 8'-0". 1. Conduits shall not fasten or come in contact with piping of other trades as installed in this building. 2. Conduit shall be separated not less than 6 inches from any water, steam or gas lines as may be installed in the building. Conduits and raceway systems shall be run concealed in walls, partitions and floor slabs. Conduit which must be exposed shall be arranged as to not pass in front of windows, doors, access panels, access doors, sky lights, HVAC equipment access for coil removal or filter removal or required service clearances. Pulling fittings shall be provided for any conduit run which exceeds 200 feet in length. All high voltage conduits (all conduit serving equipment over 600V) are to be painted red and labeled “HIGH VOLTAGE” on 10' intervals. This does not apply to conduit below grade. All exposed fire alarm conduits are to be painted red, unless directed otherwise by the architect. This is to include the 120 V feed to the control panel. Junction boxes are to be labeled “FIRE ALARM.” All emergency circuits (MC Cable and conduit) are to be painted red unless directed otherwise by the architect. Junction boxes are to be labeled “EMERGENCY XXXV.” Appropriate voltage is to BASIC MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT FOR METAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS 26 27 00 - 11 McHugh Engineering Associates I. J. 3.04 A. B. C. D. E. F. 3.05 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building be indicated. All conduits and raceway components installed under this Section for completion by others shall be provided with a pull wire affixed at both ends of conduit. Insulating bushings shall be used on all conduit terminations entering enclosures, boxes and panels to protect the conductor from damage during installation. POWER WIRING Wire between motors, starters, disconnects and source. Verify proper motor rotation. Check for smooth operation. Furnish and install weatherproof disconnects, as indicated. All panel feeders shall be run in EMT raceway system. All wiring to roof top units, fans, and HVAC units shall be installed complete between panel, disconnect switches and motor or unit connections. Disconnects shall be mounted adjacent to electrical and mechanical equipment. Indoor installations shall utilize NEMA 1 enclosures. Outdoor installations shall utilize NEMA 3R enclosures. GROUNDING All electrical equipment and systems shall be grounded. Grounding system shall consist of a ground bus bar connected to a driven ground rod. Utilize ground type clamp fitting. All connections to conduit, equipment and devices shall be made with compression type connections. The grounding system shall comply with the NEC. All outside lighting fixtures and poles shall be grounded. All equipment and devices shall be grounded in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. The ground system shall have a resistance of 25 ohms or less in compliance with the NEC. Utilize the fall of point method. Furnish a ground system test report at the completion of the work. Substation area grounding shall be in accordance with local utility company standards. END OF SECTION BASIC MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT FOR METAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS 26 27 00 - 12 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 26 28 16 - SAFETY SWITCHES - HEAVY DUTY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. B. C. 1.02 A. 1.03 A. 1.04 A. B. C. REFERENCE Refer to section 26 00 00 for requirements which are applicable to this section. Refer to NFPA and in particular the National Electrical Code. Refer to NEMA, UL, and IEEE Standards. WORK INCLUDED Provide all labor, material, equipment, and supervision necessary to furnish and install and place into operation safety switches where indicated on the drawings and specified herein. SUBMITTALS Submit manufacturer's shop drawings of devices. QUALITY ASSURANCE Verify that all equipment is installed in accordance with the manufacturer's warranty requirements. Install systems and equipment in accordance with the National Electrical Code and local codes having jurisdiction. Provide adequate supervision of labor force to see that installations are correct. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. B. HEAVY DUTY SAFETY SWITCHES APPLICATION DATA 1. 30-1200 amperes 2. 600 volts AC for 480 V applications 3. 240 Volt-AC for 240 V and 208 V applications. 4. NEMA 1 - General Purpose, painted sheet steel 5. NEMA 3R - Rainproof, painted galvanized steel 6. Maximum - Time delay (dual element) fuse CONSTRUCTION 1. Visible blades 2. Handle attached to box, not cover 3. Handle position indicates "ON" or "OFF" 4. Top hinged cover on NEMA 3R 5. Operating mechanism is quick-make, quick-break 6. Plated current carrying parts 7. Provisions for padlocking the switch in the "OFF" position 8. Class R fuse standard for 30 - 600 Amp switches. 9. Class L fuses standard for 800-1200 Amp switches. SAFETY SWITCHES - HEAVY DUTY 26 28 16 - 1 McHugh Engineering Associates C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building NEUTRAL AND GROUNDING Provisions for field installation of solid neutral assembly. Ground kits for field installation TERMINALS UL listed for Al or Cu wires UL listed for 60 deg. or 75 deg. C. wires Meets UL 486 B requirements FUSE CLIPS Spring reinforced Plated APPLICATION Fusible - Class R or Class L as indicated above Not fusible NEMA STANDARDS KS1 - 1975 UL LISTING UL 98 Enclosed Switches Maximum HP ratings UL LISTED SHORT CIRCUIT RATING: 200,000 RMS Symmetrical Amperes with proper rejection kit and Class R fuses. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Siemens 2. Cutler Hammer 3. GE 4. Square D 5. Or approved equal PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. B. C. D. E. SAFETY SWITCHES Furnish and install safety switches on all motors which do not have integral equipment disconnect devices, local starters and/or where indicated on the drawings. Furnish and install safety switches where indicated on the drawings. Safety switches shall be installed to meet the area classification as to standard, hazardous, rainproof, etc. Safety switches shall be installed securely to building structure or be provided with supplemental support steel such as angle iron or uni-strut when required to locate on other than building structure. All safety switches shall be grounded. END OF SECTION SAFETY SWITCHES - HEAVY DUTY 26 28 16 - 2 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 26 41 13 - LIGHTNING PROTECTION (ADD ALTERNATE) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. B. This Section includes lightning protection for each building. Provide a complete design layout with details for review. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. B. E. Product Data: For air terminals and mounting accessories. Shop Drawings: Detail lightning protection system, including air-terminal locations, conductor routing and connections, and bonding and grounding provisions. Include indications for use of raceway and data on how concealment requirements will be met. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include data on listing or certification by nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) or trade association. Certification, signed by Contractor, that roof adhesive for air terminals is approved by manufacturers of both the terminal assembly and the single-ply membrane roofing material. Field inspection reports indicating compliance with specified requirements. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. C. D. E. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who is NRTL listed or who is certified by LPI as a Master Installer/Designer. Listing and Labeling: As defined in NFPA 780, Article 2-2, "Definitions." Provide UL Master Label. Provide LPI certification of system. Provide ETL Master Label indicating system complies with specified requirements. 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of lightning protection with installation of other building systems and components, including electrical wiring, supporting structures and building materials, metal bodies requiring bonding to lightning protection components, building finishes, and roof systems. C. D. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS LIGHTNING PROTECTION 26 41 13 - 1 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. A-C Lightning Security, Inc. 2. Automatic Lightning Protection. 3. Harger Lightning Protection, Inc. 4. Heary Bros. Lightning Protection Co. Inc. 5. Independent Protection Company, Inc. 6. Robbins Lightning, Incorporated. 7. Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc. 8. Warren Lightning Rod Company 9. Preferred Lightning Protection 10. East Coast Lightning Equipment, Inc. 11. Or approved equal 2.02 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. B. Comply with UL 96. Roof-Mounting Air Terminals: NFPA Class I or II as appropriate, solid copper, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Single-Membrane, Roof-Mounting Air Terminals: Designed for single-membrane roof materials. Stack-Mounting Air Terminals: Solid copper. Ground Rods, Ground Loop Conductors, and Concrete-Encased Electrodes: Comply with Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding" and standards referenced in this Section. C. D. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. B. Install lightning protection components and systems according to UL 96A, LPI-175, and NFPA 780. Conceal the following conductors: 1. System conductors. 2. Down conductors. 3. Interior conductors. 4. Conductors within normal view from exterior locations at grade within 200 feet (60 m) of building. 5. Notify Architect at least 48 hours in advance of inspection before concealing lightning protection components. Cable Connections: Use approved exothermic-welded connections for all conductor splices and connections between conductors and other components, except those above single-ply membrane roofing. Air Terminals on Single-Ply Membrane Roofing: Comply with adhesive manufacturer's written instructions. Bond extremities of vertical metal bodies exceeding 60 feet (18 m) in length to lightning protection components. A counterpoise installation based on requirements in Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding" may be used as a ground loop required by NFPA 780, provided counterpoise conductor meets or exceeds minimum requirements in NFPA 780. C. D. E. F. LIGHTNING PROTECTION 26 41 13 - 2 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building 1. 2. G. Bond ground terminals to counterpoise conductor. Bond grounded metal bodies on building within 12 feet (3.6 m) of ground to counterpoise conductor. 3. Bond grounded metal bodies on building within 12 feet (3.6 m) of roof to interconnecting loop at eave level or above. Bond lightning protection components with intermediate-level interconnection loop conductors to grounded metal bodies of building at 60 foot (18 m) intervals. 3.02 CORROSION PROTECTION A. Do not combine materials that can form an electrolytic couple that will accelerate corrosion in the presence of moisture unless moisture is permanently excluded from junction of such materials. Use conductors with protective coatings where conditions would cause deterioration or corrosion of conductors. B. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Periodic Inspections: Engage an LPI inspector to perform periodic inspections during construction and at its completion, according to LPI-177. UL Inspection: Apply for inspection by UL as required to obtain a UL Master Label for system. ETL Inspection: Engage an ETL inspector to inspect completed system for compliance with specified requirements. B. C. END OF SECTION LIGHTNING PROTECTION 26 41 13 - 3 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 26 43 13 - SURGE SUPPRESSION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCE A. B. C. D. Refer to Section 26 00 00 for requirements which are applicable to this section. Refer to National Electrical Code (NEC). Refer to UL, ANSI, IEEE, and NEMA Standards. Refer to Computer Business Manufacturer’s Association (CBEMA), Information Technology Industry Council (ITIC) and International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) for clamping voltage tolerance guidelines for sensitive equipment. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor, material, equipment, and supervision necessary to install and place into operation surge suppression where indicated on drawings and/or specifications. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. B. C. Submit shop drawings, product data, and manufacturer’s installation instructions. The surge suppression submittal shall also include: 1. Dimensional drawing of each suppressor type indicating mounting arrangements. 2. UL 1449 Third Edition documentation (SCCR, VPR, MCOV, I-n). All Surge Protective Devices shall be of the same manufacturer. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. C. D. Verify that all equipment is installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s warranty requirements. Install equipment with accordance with NEC. Provide adequate supervision of labor force to see that installations are correct. Surge protection devices shall be manufactured in the USA, by a company normally engaged in the design and manufacture of such devices for at least ten (10) years. 1.05 SAFETY AGENCY APPROVALS A. Suppressers shall be listed in accordance with UL 1449 3rd Edition documentation, standard for safety, surge protective devices and meet requirements in UL 1283 for electromagnetic interference filters. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SERVICE ENTRANCE A. Surge protection devices shall be installed at all service entrances of each building and/or as shown on the riser diagram. SURGE SUPPRESSION 26 43 13 - 1 McHugh Engineering Associates B. C. D. E. F. G. H. Suppressers shall be tested per ANSI/IEEE C62.45. Wye systems shall have suppression elements between each phase conductor and the system neutral, between each phase conductor and the system ground and between the neutral conductor and ground (true 10 mode protection). Each phase shall have a minimum of two modules. The surge modules shall be fused at a minimum rating of 30 amps. Modules and fuses shall be field replaceable. Fuses shall be surge suppression fuses. (Ferraz Shawmut VPS Series) Visible indication of proper suppresser connection and operation shall be provided. The indicator shall consist of an LED array. No single LED or neon indicators will be used. The surge protection device shall be equipped with an audible alarm that shall actuate when any part of the surge circuitry has been damaged. A silence button shall be provided with the alarm. The suppressor shall exhibit Sine Wave Tracking circuitry and shall provide high frequency noise filtering up to 50dB attenuation (100 kHz - 100 MHz). Suppressors shall meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. Minimum single impulse current rating (L-N + L-G): 160,000 amperes per phase, 80kA per mode. 2. Incorporate hybrid circuitry. 3. UL 1449 3rd Edition voltage protection ratings shall not exceed the following: VOLTAGE 120/208 277/480 I. J. K. L. 2.02 Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building L-N 800 1200 L-G 800 1200 N-G 800 1200 L-L 1200 2000 MCOV 150 320 Suppressors shall exhibit redundant protection for each phase and consist of solid-state components and shall operate bi-directionally. Suppressor shall be equipped with a surge counter with a reset and battery backup. Suppressor short circuit current rating shall meet or exceed that of the service panelboard. Total Protection Solutions (Joslyn) Surge Track ST160 or approved equivalent by Advanced Protection Technologies, Inc., Siemens, GE, Eaton, Square D or LEA International. SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION INTEGRATED SUPPRESSION PANELS: A. B. C. D. E. F. G. Surge Protective Devices shall be installed in secondary distribution panels as shown on the riser diagram. Suppressor shall be tested per ANSI/IEEE C62.45. Wye systems shall have suppression elements between each phase conductor and the system neutral, between each phase conductor and the system ground and between the neutral conductor and ground (true 10 mode protection). Visible indication of proper suppressor connection and operation shall be provided. The surge protective device shall be equipped with an audible alarm that shall actuate when any part of the surge circuitry has been damaged. A silence button shall be provided with the alarm. The suppressor shall exhibit Sine Wave Tracking circuitry. The surge suppressor shall have suppression circuitry that is field replaceable without disturbing the conduit or enclosure. Suppressors shall meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. Minimum single impulse current rating (L-N + L-G): 80,000 amperes per phase, 40kA per mode. 2. UL Clamping voltage shall not exceed the following: VOLTAGE 120/208 277/480 SURGE SUPPRESSION L-N 800 1200 L-G 800 1200 N-G 800 1200 L-L 1200 2000 MCOV 150 320 26 43 13 - 2 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building H. I. J. Suppressors shall consist of solid-state components and operate bi-directionally. The manufacturer of the surge panel shall offer either a surface or flush cover, as required by the job conditions. Suppressor short circuit current rating shall meet or exceed that of the panelboard. Total Protection Solutions (Joslyn) Surge Track ST80 or approved equal by Advanced Protection Technologies, Inc., LEA International, Siemens, GE, Eaton or Square D. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SERVICE ENTRANCE A. D. Install one primary suppressor at each utility service entrance. Follow manufacturer's installation instructions. Suppressor shall be installed on the load side of the service entrance. Conductors between suppressor and point of attachment shall be at least #6 AWG stranded copper conductor or larger. The conductors shall be kept as short and straight as possible. Lead length of connecting conductors shall be within 36 inches. Suppressor's ground shall be bonded to the service entrance ground. 3.02 SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION PANELS A. D. Install one secondary suppressor at each distribution panel location or as indicated on the riser diagram. Follow manufacturer's installation instructions. Suppressor shall be installed on the service panel, per the manufacturer's installation instructions. Contractor shall install circuit breaker in panel to attached surge panel to electrical distribution system if necessary. Conductors between suppressor and point of attachment shall be at least #6 AWG stranded copper conductor or larger. The conductors shall be kept as short and straight as possible. The maximum length of connecting wiring shall not exceed 18 inches. Pre-wired suppressors with conductors smaller than #6 wire are not acceptable. Suppressor’s ground shall be connected to the distribution panel ground. 3.03 CERTIFIED TESTS A. The surge suppresser manufacturer shall provide certified test results on the actual product being shipped to the job site. The test results shall be certified by an officer or engineer of the company as being performed on the product after manufacture. The test conducted shall be per ANSI/IEEE C62.45. The units shall be tested in all modes listed in this specification. B. C. B. C. B. 3.04 WARRANTY A. The surge suppresser shall warrant the surge protective devices and supporting components against defects in material and workmanship for a minimum period of five years. 3.05 TESTING SURGE SUPPRESSION 26 43 13 - 3 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building A. Perform field quality control testing under the supervision of the manufacturer’s factory authorized service representative. 3.06 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory authorized service representative to train owner’s personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain equipment. END OF SECTION SURGE SUPPRESSION 26 43 13 - 4 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 26 50 00 - LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. B. C. D. 1.02 A. B. C. D. E. 1.03 A. B. C. 1.04 A. B. C. REFERENCE Refer to Section 26 00 00 for other requirements of this Section. All work to conform to the National Electrical Code. Refer to standards of the Illuminating Engineering Society. All exit and emergency lighting shall comply with NFPA Life Safety Code 101, ADA, and other local codes as may apply. SCOPE Furnish and install a complete and operating lighting system in new and renovated spaces, including all fixtures, wiring, lamps, and ballasts. All lighting outlets shall have a fixture. If a fixture designation is missing, furnish and install a fixture in similar use in the project. All fixtures shall have a home run. If these are omitted on the drawings the contractor shall allow for a home run to the nearest appropriate panel. All rooms are to be provided with lighting controls. Provide manual switch and code required control devices as appropriate. Provide exit and emergency lighting as required by Code in all spaces to meet requirements of the AHJ. Allow for 10 additional fixtures to be installed where directed by the AHJ. MOUNTING The contractor shall be responsible for selecting particular mounting arrangements of fixtures to suit the construction or ceiling types. Contractor or his agent shall review architectural drawings to establish ceiling types prior to preparing shop drawings for submission. It is NOT to be understood that the fixture schedule accounts for the mounting types. Frequently ceiling types are changed after the fixture schedule has been completed. Fixtures shall be mounted on structurally secure supports. The contractor shall provide miscellaneous steel supports to span between structural elements to provide a base of support for the fixtures at the locations shown on the drawings. Refer to architectural and structural drawings for locations of beams, joists, purlins, etc. Exterior fixtures shall be mounted with anchor bolts of suitable size secured into concrete bases. The mounting arrangement shall be capable of withstanding a continuous wind of 100 mph with gales to 130 mph. EPA of fixture shall be rated with pole to provide required performance. APPROVALS Furnish shop drawings and catalog cuts of all fixtures for review by the engineer prior to ordering. Provide samples of any particular fixture or fixtures when requested by the owner, architect, or engineer. Provide a point by point lighting level calculation for parking areas, areas when requested by the engineer, and for high profile areas (i.e., main lobbies, atriums, pools, gymnasiums, etc.), when an alternate manufacturer or fixture is being presented for approval. Calculation shall be provided by the manufacturer or the local manufacturer’s representative. Footcandle levels are to be indicated LIGHTING 26 50 00 - 1 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building at a maximum of 10' intervals (outside) or 5' intervals (inside). A drawing is to be provided at the same scale as the contract documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. FIXTURES Fixtures shall be complete with wiring, lamp holders, lamps, reflectors, glassware, canopies, shades, bases, pendants, etc. Fixtures shall be wired with type AF fixture wire. Pendants and canopies of the type required for the particular fixture and mounting shall be provided. Plastic lenses shall not be used. Provide either virgin acrylic, high impact polycarbonate or tempered glass or as specified in the fixture schedule. Any exposed fixture housing surface, trim frame, door frame and lens frame shall be free of light leaks either between fixture components or between fixture and adjacent surface. Hinged door closure frames shall operate smoothly and easily without binding when installed and latches shall function easily by finger action without the use of tools. Recessed incandescent fixtures installed in an insulated ceiling shall be listed for use in insulated ceilings. Fixtures in pool environments (or similar condition) shall be fabricated with stainless steel and utilize stainless steel hardware. The fixtures shall be fully gasketed with an Ingress Protection Classification of at least IP-64 in addition to the requirements listed in the Lighting Fixture Schedule. Fixtures in kitchens, showers, and other damp areas shall be gasketed, vapor tight, and fabricated with aluminum instead of steel. These fixtures shall have pressure clamping devices in lieu of latches. Fixtures located in other harsh environments are to be of suitable construction and finish for the intended environment in addition to the requirements listed in the Lighting Fixture Schedule. All fixture lenses shall, from the manufacturer, be shipped within a protective covering, i.e. plastic bag, paper wrapped, to prevent dust, dirt, smudges prior to final acceptance. Ballasts shall be easily serviceable when installed and shall not be mounted to removable reflectors or wire way covers. 2.02 ELECTRONIC DIMMING BALLASTS A. The electronic ballast shall be physically interchangeable with standard electromagnetic ballasts. The electronic ballast shall be provided with integral leads or color-coded connectors that comply with ANSI standard C82.11 (latest revision). The electronic ballast shall operate from a nominal line voltage of 120 or 277 volts, 50/60Hz. 120V ballast shall operate from 90V - 145V. 277V ballast shall operate from 200V - 305V. The electronic ballast shall maintain constant light output, for line voltage variations from 90% to 110% of rated supply voltage. For T8 and CFL, ballast shall control lamp light output from a ballast factor of 1.0 to .05 (100% - 5% relative light output). For T5/H0, ballast shall control lamp light output from a ballast factor of 1.0 to 0.03 (100% - 1% relative light output). The electronic ballast shall start the lamps at any selected light output setting without first starting at maximum light output. The electronic ballast input current shall have Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of less than 10% at maximum light output for primary lamps. Total Harmonic Current (THC) at minimum light output shall not exceed THC at maximum light output. B. C. D. E. F. LIGHTING 26 50 00 - 2 McHugh Engineering Associates G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N. O. P. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building The electronic ballast shall have a Power Factor greater than 98% at maximum light output for primary lamps. The electronic ballast shall have a Programmed-Start lamp ignition. The electronic ballast shall be Sound Rated A. The electronic ballast output frequency to the lamps shall be above 40kHz to minimize interference with infrared control systems and eliminate visible flicker. The electronic ballast shall meet ANSI C82.11 and shall withstand transients specified in ANSI C62.41, Location Category A3. The electronic ballast for compact fluorescent lamps shall have a lamp end of life detection and shut down circuit. The electronic ballast shall be Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Listed (Class P) and CSA Certified where applicable. The electronic ballast shall be furnished with integral protection circuitry to withstand connection of control leads to mains power supply. In this event, ballast shall default to the maximum light output level. The electronic ballast shall carry a five year warranty from the date of manufacture. Warranty shall be valid for a maximum case temperature of 70°C. Ballast shall be Advance Mark VII or equivalent by Universal Lighting Technologies, Osram, Lutron, Robertson, or approved equal. 2.03 COMPACT FLUORESCENT BALLAST A. The electronic ballast shall be furnished with poke-in wire trap connectors, color coded to ANSI standard C82.11. The electronic ballast shall operate from a line voltage range of 108 - 305 volts, 50/60 Hz. The electronic ballast input current shall have Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of less than 10% when operated at the nominal line voltage (120V, 277V) with primary lamp(s) and have a Power Factor greater than 96%. The electronic ballast shall have a Programmed-Start type system. The electronic ballast shall have a lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. The electronic ballast shall be sound rated A. The electronic ballast output frequency to the lamps shall be above 65kHz to minimize interference with infrared control systems, and eliminate visible flicker. The electronic ballast shall meet ANSI C82.11, where applicable and withstand transients specified in ANSI C62.41, Location Category A3. The electronic ballast shall be Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Listed (Class P) and CSA Certified where applicable and rated for use in air handling spaces. The electronic ballast shall carry a five year warranty from the date of manufacture for operation at a case temperature of 75°C or less. When operated at a case temperature between 75°C and 85°C, the warranty shall be three years from the date of manufacture. Ballast shall be Advance Smartmate or equivalent by Universal Lighting Technologies, Osram, Lutron, Robertson, or approved equal. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. 2.04 ELECTRONIC FLUORESCENT BALLAST (PROGRAMMED START) A. Ballast shall operate from a nominal line voltage of (120, 277) volts, 50/60 Hz. 120V ballast shall operate from 90V-145V. 277V ballast shall operate from 200V - 305V. Ballast shall maintain constant light output for a line voltage variation of +/- 10%. Ballast shall meet ANSI C62.41 Category A transient voltage protection requirements. Ballast shall be programmed rapid start (Advance soft start). B. C. D. LIGHTING 26 50 00 - 3 McHugh Engineering Associates E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Ballast Power Factor shall be >99% and THD shall be <10% for all lamp types. Ballast shall meet FCC Class A (non-consumer) specifications for EMI/RFI. Ballast shall start the lamp at a minimum temperature of 0°F. Ballast shall have a lamp current crest factor <1.5 for F32T8 lamps. Ballast shall be sound rated A. Ballast shall be UL Listed Class P and CSA Approved. Ballast output to the lamps shall be above 42Khz to minimize interference with infrared control systems. The electronic ballast shall carry a five-year warranty from the date of manufacture. Warranty shall be valid for a maximum case temperature of 70°F. Ballast shall be Advance Mark V or equivalent by Universal Lighting Technologies, Osram, Lutron, Robertson, or approved equal. 2.05 HID BALLASTS A. Ballasts shall be designed in accordance with all applicable ANSI specifications including ANSI C82.4. The Core & Coil ballast shall be designed with class “H” (180°C) or higher insulation system and vacuum impregnated with a 100% solid based resin. Core & Coil ballasts shall be designed to operate at least 180 cycles of 12 hours on and 12 hours off, with the lamp circuit in an open or short-circuited condition and without undue reduction in ballast life. Core & Coil ballast and starter combinations shall be designed to provide a reliable lamp starting down to -40°C for High Pressure Sodium and -30°C for Metal Halide at minimum rated line voltage. Manufacturer shall provide written warranty against defects in workmanship, including replacement, for three years from date of manufacture. Individual over current protection. Constant wattage HPF type with a current crest factor not to exceed 1.6. Ballasts shall have external pulse igniter. B sound ratings or best available. Manufacturers: Advance, Universal Lighting Technologies, Osram, Robertson, or approved equal. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. 2.06 A. LAMPS C. D. E. F. Incandescent: 125 volt, inside frosted, long life, "A" bulb, unless indicated otherwise in the fixture schedule. Fluorescent: F32T8, 32 watt, 2900 lumens, 3500 K, 20,000 hr, 85 CRI, unless indicated otherwise in fixture schedule. Compact fluorescent: As indicated in the fixture schedule. Metal Halide: Pulse start, color as indicated in fixture schedule. Manufacturers; Philips, G.E., Osram Sylvania, Inc., Panasonic, Venture, or approved equal. Contractor is to coordinate lamp color for all fixtures. Lamp color is to be similar in all spaces. 2.07 EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT POWER SUPPLY UNIT A. Internal Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit factory mounted within fixture body. Comply with UL 924. 1. Test Switch and Light-Emitting Diode Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or entering ceiling space. 2. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type with minimum 10-year nominal life. B. LIGHTING 26 50 00 - 4 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building 3. 4. B. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from unit when normal supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamp and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. 5. Light output: a. Full light output, parallel connected lamps for T5, T8 or T12 applications. b. Minimum 750 lumens for compact fluorescent lamps. Manufacturer: Bodine B30 or B33 Series or approved equivalent for T5, T8 and T12 applications. Bodine B75C, B84CG, B94CG, B426, B4CFG or BDL94C or approved equivalent for compact fluorescent applications. 2.08 EXIT SIGNS A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Refer to Lighting Fixture Schedule on drawings. Internally lighted Signs: B. 1. 2. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type) Integral automatic charger in a self-contained power pack. a. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. b. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. c. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. d. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. e. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. f. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FIXTURES A. All recessed fluorescent troffers (2' x 2', 2' x 4', and 1’ x 4') and recessed fixtures weighing up to 20 lbs. are to be installed in grids with mounting clips and with grid secured at diagonal corners of fixture to the building structure. (4' x 4') fixtures to be secured at 4 corners. Recessed fixtures between 20 and 50 pounds are to have, in addition to above, 12 gauge steel safety chains at opposite corners hung slack from the building structure. Fixtures above 50 pounds to be independently supported directly from the structure with approved hangers and angular sway bracing according to manufacturer’s installation guidelines. Surface mounted and pendant fixtures under 15 pounds can be supported directly from the outlet B. C. LIGHTING 26 50 00 - 5 McHugh Engineering Associates D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. 3.02 A. B. C. D. E. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building box when all of the following apply: screws pass through round holes and not key slots in the fixture body, the outlet box is attached to a main ceiling runner, and the outlet box is supported vertically from the building structure. Surface fixtures between 15 and 50 pounds shall be bolted to the ceiling independent of the outlet box. Fixtures over 50 pounds shall be secured to the building structure using a manufacturer’s approved mounting method. Fixtures to be set plumb. Provide six foot flexible leads on recessed fixtures to allow easy removal. Recessed fixtures to be set with mounting frames. Coordinate final location of all fixtures with other disciplines to avoid interferences and potential obstructions as the work progresses. Fixtures used for temporary lighting during construction shall be re-lamped prior to acceptance of the lighting system. Fixtures shall be cleaned and free of all dirt, dust, smudges and surface imperfections just prior to final acceptance. Fixtures which are recessed in a fire rated ceiling shall be provided with an enclosure around the fixture which shall maintain the fire rating integrity of the ceiling system. The installation of the enclosure shall meet the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. The fixture shall be insulation rated for higher temperature operation. All recessed or surface mounted fixtures on or in sloped ceilings shall have sloped ceiling adapters to allow for vertical light distribution. Recessed fluorescent fixtures installed in an insulated ceiling shall have a bent chicken wire “insulation spacer hat” to maintain required 3" clearance per NEC. SWITCHING Provide lighting control switch legs to wall switches for all fixtures except for those operated by pull chains or integral switches. Provide 3-way or 4-way control where indicated and for rooms with more than one entrance. Provide multiple level lighting switching for 3 or 4 lamp fluorescent fixtures. Provide inboard/outboard ballast switching allowing fixtures to have two levels of lighting. Provide a single time clock, contactors and relays as indicated on the drawings and as necessary for site lighting, HID interior lighting, and parking lot lighting control. Provide lighting controls to meet IBC 2012/IECC 2012/ ASHRAE 90.1. Refer to Spec. 26 09 00 for additional requirements. END OF SECTION LIGHTING 26 50 00 - 6 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 27-0500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 A. 1.02 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. Communications equipment coordination and installation. 2. Sleeves for pathways and cables. 3. Sleeve seals. 4. Common communications installation requirements. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For sleeve seals and firestop systems. B. UL Listed firestop system: For sleeve seals and firestop systems. 1.05 A. COORDINATION Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of communications equipment: 1. 2. 3. 4. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope. So connecting pathways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment. B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed. C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for communications items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames." D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping". Common Work Results for Communications  2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-0500 - 1 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SLEEVES FOR PATHWAYS AND CABLES A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends. B. Fire Stop Systems: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. C. Cables passing through fire-rated floors or walls shall pass through fire-rated wiring devices which contain an intumescent insert material that adjusts automatically to cable additions or subtractions. The device (per code requirements) shall include both internal and external firestopping. Cables penetrating through fire-rated floors or walls shall utilize fire-rated pathway devices capable of providing an F rating equal to the rating of the barrier in which the device is installed. The device shall be tested for smoke leakage (L rating) and shall not require the use of any optional sealing materials to achieve the published rating. The device shall utilize a fire and smoke sealing system that automatically adjusts to the addition or removal of cables. Wiring devices shall be capable of allowing a 0 to 100-percent visual fill of cables. Wire devices shall be of a sufficient size to accommodate the quantity and size of electrical wires and data cables required and shall be suitable for use with new or existing cable installations. The installed device (in normal use) shall require no maintenance and shall accommodate future cable changes without mechanical adjustment and/or removal or replacement of protective materials. Wire devices to be provided with steel wall plates allowing for single or multiple devices to be ganged together. The device shall be modular and shall provide mechanical installation options for common wall and floor constructions as well as common construction conditions including over-sized or damaged openings or existing sleeves. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Specified Technologies Inc. a. 2.02 A. EZ-PATH Fire Rated Pathway or approved equal SLEEVE SEALS Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and pathway or cable. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: Specified Technologies Inc. a. 2. EZ-PATH Fire Rated Pathway or approved equal Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide an approved firestop assembly product by of the following: Specified Technologies Inc. a. EZ-PATH Fire Rated Pathway PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION Common Work Results for Communications  2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-0500 - 2 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall mounted items. C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements. D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both communications equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity. E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope. 3.02 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS PENETRATIONS A. Communications penetrations occur when pathways, cables, wireways, or cable trays penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls. C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall. E. STI EZ Path assemblies shall be installed at all fire rated penetration of walls. F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 4inches above finished floor level. G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4inch annular clear space between sleeve and pathway or cable, unless indicated otherwise. H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry. 1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing. I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and pathway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pathway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal pathway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual pathways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work. L. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve. Common Work Results for Communications  2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-0500 - 3 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site M. 3.03 Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations. B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for pathway or cable material and size. Position pathway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pathway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. 3.04 A. FIRESTOPPING Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for communications installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." END OF SECTION Common Work Results for Communications  2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-0500 - 4 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 27-0528 - INTERIOR COMMUNICATION PATHWAYS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. SUMMARY SCOPE : This section includes minimum requirements for the following: 1. 2. B. Minimum composition requirements and installation methods for the following pathways: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. C. Conduit Innerduct Sleeves Cable tray Cable hangers Wireways and wire troughs Power/communication poles Underfloor duct Floor Boxes and Poke Throughs Surface Raceways – Metallic Surface Raceways – Non-Metallic Outlet Boxes Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 1.02 Interior Horizontal Cabling Communication Pathways Interior Backbone Cabling Communication Pathways 27-1300 COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 27-1500 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All pathways and associated equipment shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. All methods of construction that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents shall be subject to the control and approval of the Network & Telecommunications Department. Equipment and materials shall be of the quality and manufacture indicated. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable manufacturers listed. Where "approved equal" is stated, equipment shall be equivalent in every way to that of the equipment specified and subject to approval. B. Materials and work specified herein shall comply with the applicable requirements of: 1. National Electric Code (NFPA 70) including the following Articles: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. 318 - Cable Trays 331 - Electrical Nonmetallic tubing 348 - Electrical metallic tubing 349 - Flexible metallic tubing 350 – Flexible metal conduit 351 – Liquid-Tight Flexible metal conduit and Liquid-Tight flexible nonmetallic conduit. 352A - Surface Metal Raceways 352B - Surface Nonmetallic raceways 353 – Multioutlet Assembly 354 - Underfloor raceways 362 - Metal Wireways and nonmetallic Wireways 370 - Outlet, Device, Pull and Junction Boxes, Conduit Interior Communications Pathways © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-0528 - 1 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site m. n. o. p. 2. c. d. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Design Manual (10th edition) BICSI Customer Owned Outside Plant Design Manual (2nd edition) BICSI Telecommunications Cabling Installation Manual (2nd edition) The following UL Standards: a. b. c. d. e. f. 1.03 ANSI/TIA/EIA – 568-B Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard ANSI/TIA/EIA – 569-A Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathway and Spaces EIA/TIA-606-A Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings EIA/TIA-607 Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding requirements for Telecommunications The following BICSI guidelines: a. b. c. 5. ANSI-C80.3 - Specification for Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc-coated The following Telecommunication Industry Association (TIA) standards. a. b. 4. Bodies and Fittings 645 - Information Technology Equipment 770 - Optical Fiber Cables and Raceways 800 - Communications Circuits The following American National Standards Institute (ANSI) standards: a. 3. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building UL 1, 2000 Flexible Metal Electrical Conduit UL 3, 1999 Flexible Nonmetallic Tubing for Electric Wiring UL 5, 1996 Surface Metal Electrical Raceways and Fittings UL 360, 1996 Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit, Electrical UL 514B, 1996 Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes. UL 797, 1997 Electrical Metallic Tubing UL 870, 1995 Electrical Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters and Associated Fittings SUBMITTALS - Provide product data for the following: A. Conduit B. Sleeves C. Cable tray D. Cable hangers E. Wireways and wire troughs F. Power/communication poles G. Underfloor duct H. Floor Boxes and Poke Throughs I. Surface Raceways – Metallic J. Surface Raceways – Non-Metallic Interior Communications Pathways © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-0528 - 2 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site K. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Outlet Boxes PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUIT A. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit shall be hot-dipped galvanized steel, including threads. B. Electrical Metallic Tubing shall be electro-galvanized steel. C. Rigid Non-Metallic PVC Conduit: 1. 2. D. Fittings: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. E. 3. 4. 5. Fittings for rigid non-metallic conduit shall be solvent cemented in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Connectors shall have insulated throat up to and including 1" size. For sizes 1-1/4" and larger, provide plastic insulating bushing. Die-cast or pressure cast fittings are not permitted. Provide conduit body types, shapes and sizes as required to suit application and NEC requirements. Provide matching gasketed covers secured with corrosion-resistant screws. Provide expansion fittings with external grounding straps at building expansion joints. Galvanized steel expansion joints for RGS or EMT conduit, PVC for PVC conduit. Minimum 4” movement in either direction. Weatherproof for outdoor applications. At expansion joints in concrete pours, provide Deflection/Expansion fittings capable of movement of ¾” in all directions from the normal. Waterproofing Seals: 1. 2. G. Rigid galvanized steel fittings shall be fully threaded and shall be of the same material as the respective raceway system. Fittings for electrical metallic tubing shall be single screw indenter fittings for conduits up to 2" and double screw indenter fittings for conduits 2" and larger. Expansion Fittings: 1. 2. F. Extra-Heavy wall conduit: Schedule 80, constructed of polyvinyl chloride, rated for use with 90 degree C conductors, and UL listed for direct burial and normal above ground use. Heavy wall conduit: Schedule 40, constructed of polyvinyl chloride, rated for use with 90 degree C conductors, and UL listed for direct burial and concrete encasement. Provide watertight expanding link-type seals for installation between the conduit and the sleeve or core drilled hole. Design Make: Link Seal, or approved equal Pull and Junction Boxes shall be constructed of not less than 14 gauge galvanized steel with trim for flush or surface mounting in accordance with the location to be installed. Provide screw-on type cover boxes installed in damp or wet locations shall be of rain-tight construction with gasketed cover and threaded conduit hubs. In no case shall boxes be sized smaller than as indicated in Article 370 of the National Electrical Code for conduit and conductor sizes installed. Boxes shall be NEMA approved for the environmental condition of the location where they will be installed. Interior Communications Pathways © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-0528 - 3 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site H. 2.02 Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Flush floor junction boxes shall be recessed cover boxes designed for flush mounting in masonry. (Approved by Network & Telecommunications Department) INNERDUCT A. Shall be constructed of a PVC Riser rated or plenum rated plastic as required. B. Shall be 1" or 1 1/4" in diameter as called for on the drawings. C. Shall be UL listed to 2024 standard. 2.03 A. 2.04 CABLE TRAY Trough Bottom Cable Trays shall be aluminum construction including accessories. Maximum rung spacing 8 in. on centers is welded to side rails with flanges in 4-in. wide channel rungs. Aluminum alloy side rails and rungs. Standard lengths 12 ft. - 0 in. long. Cover required where called for. Provide divider strip where called for. Minimum radius of horizontal elbows shall be 12 in. Provide special radius elbows where required for field conditions. Provide a safety-loading factory of 1.5 for uniformly distributed loads when supported as a simple span in accordance with the NEMA standard listed. CABLE HANGERS A. Provide prefabricated, zinc coated, carbon steel hangers designed specifically for UTP and Optical Fiber cable installations. B. Hangers shall have open top, rolled edges and a 3” or 4” minimum diameter loop. C. Provide beam clamps, rod fasteners, flange clips and brackets as job conditions require. 2.05 FLOOR BOXES A. Classification and Use: Floor boxes shall have been examined and tested by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. to meet UL514A and/or UL514C and Canadian Standard C22.2, No. 18.1-04 and 18.2-06 and bear the U.S. and Canadian UL Listing Mark. Floor boxes shall also have been tested by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. and classified for fire resistance and bear the U.S. and Canadian UL Classification Mark. Devices shall be classified for use in 2-hour rated, unprotected reinforced concrete floors and 2-hour rated floors employing unprotected steel floor units and concrete toppings (D900 Series Designs) or concrete floors with suspended ceilings (fire resistive designs with suspended ceilings should have provisions for accessibility in the ceiling below the floor boxes). Floor boxes shall also conform to the standards set in Section 300-21 of the National Electrical Code. Floor boxes shall meet UL scrub water requirements, but are not suitable for wet or damp locations, or other areas subject to saturation with water or other liquids such as commercial kitchens. Floor boxes shall also have been evaluated by UL to meet the applicable U.S. and Canadian safety standards for scrub water exclusion when used on tile, bare concrete, terrazzo, wood, and carpet covered floors. Floor boxes shall be suitable for use in air handling spaces in accordance with Section 300-22 (C) of the National Electrical Code. B. Floor Boxes, General: Wiremold Evolution Series Floor (or approved equal) Boxes for use on above grade concrete floors, raised floors or wood floors. Provide boxes with a component to permit installation in polished concrete or terrazzo floors. Boxes shall be compatible with complete line of Ortronics® workstation connectivity outlets and modular inserts. 1. Floor boxes provide the interface between power, communication and audio/video (A/V) cabling in above-grade floors, on-grade concrete floors, raised floors, wood floors, and fire-classified floors and the workstation or activation location where power and communication and/or A/V device outlets are required. Boxes shall provide recessed device outlets that will not obstruct the floor area. Refer to Drawings for size and types. Interior Communications Pathways © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-0528 - 4 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 2. C. 2.06 A. Floor boxes shall permit all wiring to be completed at floor level. The FC models shall be used as defined by the UL Fire Resistance Directory at a minimum spacing of two (2) ft [610mm] on center. Wiremold Model EFB6S-OG Floor Boxes or approved equal: Manufactured from stamped steel approved for use in above grade and on-grade floor applications. Boxes shall have the ability to accept a component (EFB610-CTR) that will allow the box to be installed in polished concrete or terrazzo floors. Boxes shall be painted with a fusion-bonded epoxy designed for use on metal reinforcement bar and related accessories before encapsulation in concrete, and be approved for use on-grade and above grade floors. Boxes shall be 15-3/16” L x 13-7/8” W x 4-3/16” H [385mm x 351mm x 107mm]. Provide boxes with six (6) independent wiring compartments that allow for up to six (6) duplex receptacles, communication and/or audio/video services. Boxes shall have removable and relocatable dividers to permit custom configuration of compartments as well as permit feed to adjacent compartments. Boxes shall permit feed to compartments on the opposite side of the box through a tunnel. Each of the four (4) outer compartments shall have a minimum wiring capacity of 32-in3 [524ml]. Each of the two (2) center compartments shall have a minimum wiring capacity of 38.5-in3 [630ml]. Each of the six (6) compartments shall have a minimum depth of 3-7/8” [98mm] behind the plate. Provide boxes with removable compartments to facilitate installation. The compartments shall be removable from the top of the floor box. Provide boxes with two (2) cable guides to organize and maintain the cables egress out of the box. The box shall contain the following number of knockouts: 10 1” trade size, six (6) 11/4” trade size, six (6) 3/4” trade size, and two (2) 2” trade size. Boxes shall be able to accept up to (6) six 2” trade size conduit feeds in the sides of the boxes, through the use of the EFB6S-2HUB and maintain a 4-inch deep concrete pour. Boxes shall be fully adjustable, accommodating a maximum 2inch [51mm] pre-concrete pour and a maximum 1/2” [12.7mm] post-concrete pour adjustment. The box shall be able to accept 2-3/4” x 4-1/2” standard size wall plates. Include mounting brackets with the boxes that will accommodate 15 amp, 20 amp straight blade, 20 amp turn loc, 30 amp straight blade and 30 amp turn loc receptacles, Ortronics® workstation connectivity and modular adapters, a variety of audio/video devices from most manufacturers, and other open system devices. POKE-THRU DEVICES Classification and Use: Furniture feed poke-thru devices shall have been examined and tested by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. to meet UL514A and/or UL514C and Canadian Standard C22.2, No. 1898 and bear the U.S. and Canadian UL Listing Mark. Furniture poke-thru devices shall also have been tested by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. and Classified for fire resistance and bear the U.S. and Canadian UL Classification Mark. Poke-thru devices are approved for use in recessed and flush floor construction and meet and exceed the UL scrub water exclusion test. 1. 2. 3. B. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Devices shall be classified for use in 1-, 1-1/2-, or 2-hour rated, unprotected reinforced concrete floors and 1-, 1-1/2-, or 2-hour rated floors employing unprotected steel floor units and concrete toppings (D900 Series designs), or concrete floors with suspended ceilings. Fire resistive designs with suspended ceilings shall have provisions for accessibility in the ceiling below the poke-thru fittings. These devices are not suitable for wet or damp locations, or other areas subject to saturation with water or other liquids such as commercial kitchens. Poke-thrus shall be suitable for use in air handling spaces in accordance with Section 300-22(c) of the National Electrical Code. Wiremold 4FFATC15 Furniture Feed Poke-Thru Assembly or approved equal: Consists of an insert and activation cover. Overall poke-thru assembly length shall be 16-15/16" [430mm]. 1. Insert: Insert body shall have the necessary channels to provide complete separation of power and communication services. There shall be one (1) 3/4-inch trade size channel for power and one (1) 1-1/2-inch trade size channel for communication cabling. Interior Communications Pathways © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-0528 - 5 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site a. b. The body will consist of an intumescent fire stop material to maintain the fire rating of the floor slab. The intumescent material will be held securely in place in the insert body and shall not have to be adjusted to maintain the fire rating of the unit and the floor slab. Insert shall have a spring-steel retaining ring that will hold the poke-thru device in the floor slab without additional fasteners. The poke-thru insert shall also consist of one (1) 3/4-inch trade size conduit stub and one 1-1/2-inch trade size conduit stub that are connected to the insert body. There shall also be a 24.5 cu in [402ml] stamped steel junction box for wire splices and connections. The stamped steel junction box shall also contain the necessary means to electrically ground the poke-thru assembly. Activation Cover: The activation cover shall provide two (2) conduit openings to feed modular furniture applications and provide a flush appearance. The activation cover trim flange shall be one-piece and be manufactured of die-cast aluminum alloy and be capable of being powder coated or plated. Coated finish is to be textured, two-stage epoxy paint in gray, black, brass, nickel, bronze. Activation cover trim flange shall also be available in brushed aluminum finish. Aluminum finish shall be a brushed finish with a lacquer sealant. The activation cover shall be 8-1/4 inches [210mm] in diameter. A gasket is attached to the underside of the trim flange assembly to maintain scrub water tightness by preventing water, dirt, and dust from entering the power and communication compartments. 1) C. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building The activation cover insert shall provide one (1) 3/4-inch NPSM threaded opening for power and one (1) 1-1/2-inch NPSM threaded opening for communication to feed modular furniture workstations. Each activation cover shall also be supplied with one (1) 3/4-inch trade size and one (1) 1-1/2-inch trade size threaded conduit connectors and one (1) 3/4-inch trade size and one (1) 1-1/2-inch trade size conduit closure plugs. Wiremold 6AT Poke-Thru Assembly or approved equal: Poke-thru devices provide the interface between power, communication and audio/ visual (A/V) cabling in an above grade concrete floor and the workstation or activation location where power communication and/or A/V device outlets are required. These poke-thru devices provide recessed device outlets that will not obstruct the floor area. This assembly consists of an insert and an activation cover. Overall poke-thru assembly length shall be 16 3/4" [425mm] 1. 2. 3. Insert: The insert body shall recess the devices a minimum of 2 3/4” [69 mm] and have a polyester based backing enamel finished interior (ivory). There shall be the necessary channels to provide complete separation of power and communication services. There shall be three compartments that allow for up to three duplex receptacles that can be wired as a standard receptacle or isolated ground and/or twelve communication ports and/or ten of Extron® Electronics MAAP™ and/or two AAP™ devices. The body will consist of an intumescent fire stop material to maintain the fire rating of the floor slab. The intumescent material will be held securely in place in the insert body and shall not have to be adjusted to maintain fire rating of the unit and the floor slab. The insert shall have retaining feature that will hold the poke-thru device in the floor slab without additional fasteners. The poke-thru insert shall also consist of a 3/4" trade size conduit stub that is connected to the insert body and a 24.5 cu. in. [402ml] stamped steel junction box for wire splices and connections. The stamped steel junction box shall also contain the necessary means to electrically ground the poke-thru device to the system ground. Activation Cover: The activation covers shall be manufactured of die-cast aluminum alloy and be available in powder-coated gray, black, or plated in brass, nickel or bronze finish. Two gaskets (one for carpet and one for tile) are provided to go under the trim flange to maintain scrub water tightness. The activation cover shall be 7 1/4" [184mm] in diameter. The activation covers shall be available in carpet and tile versions. The carpet covers shall be surface mounted and the tile covers shall be flush with the finished floor covering. The cover shall have spring loaded slides to allow cables to egress out of the unit and maintain as small an egress opening as possible. Interior Communications Pathways © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-0528 - 6 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 4. 2.07 A. Single channel suitable for up to (10) 0.2” O.D. Cables Two piece raceway with single compartment, length as indicated on the drawings. Nominal 23/4” x 1-7/16” with flush, snap on cover. Color shall be ivory. Two channel with devices suitable for up to (48) #12 AWG conductors or (50) 0.2” O.D. Cables. 1. D. Two piece raceway with single compartment. Nominal 1-9/32” x ¾” with snap on cover. Color shall be ivory. Single channel suitable for up to (50) 0.2” O.D. Cables 1. C. Communication Modules Mounting Accessories: The activation shall have three locations to mount communication connectors. Connectors shall be mounted using a mounting bracket. Mounting brackets shall be provided to mount up to twelve Ortronics TracJack Category 6 insert modules or TechChoice™ Category 6 discrete keystone connectors. The unit will also be supplied with two Category 6 keystone connectors and two Lucent® keystones. The unit shall also accommodate a mechanism to permit protection of communication cabling. This mechanism shall be stamped steel construction and accept both flexible and rigid conduit. This mechanism shall accept 3/4", 1-1/4" or 2" trade size conduits. SURFACE METALLIC RACEWAY 1. B. Two piece raceway with divider for power and communications. Nominal 4-3/4” x 1-3/4” with flush, snap on cover. Color shall be as specified by the Architect. One-piece raceway 1. 2. Shall have finish as specified by the Architect. Size race way as required based on the following: a. b. c. E. 2.08 Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building .025” steel suitable for (2) 0.2” O.D. cables .040” steel suitable for (3) 0.2” O.D. cables .040” steel suitable for (5) 0.2” O.D. cables Provide miscellaneous boxes, fittings and supports designed and manufactured by the raceway manufacturer as required to make a complete job. SURFACE NON-METALLIC RACEWAY A. Manufactured of rigid UV stabilized PVC compound with texture with finish as specified by the Architect. Provide the manufacturers standard fittings as required for the installation. All system components shall meet UL 94 requirements for nonflammable, self-extinguishing characteristics. B. Shall have a voltage rating of 300 V AC maximum. C. Shall be UL listed. D. Fitting shall comply with EIA/TIA UTP/Optical Fiber bend radii requirements. E. Raceways shall have the following wiring capacities: 1. 2. 3. One Piece, Single Channel - .32 sq. in. suitable for (5) 0.18” O.D. cables One Piece, Dual Channel - .97 sq. in. suitable for (6) 0.18” O.D. cables Two Piece, Single Channel - .29 sq. in. or .87 sq. in. suitable for (4) 0.18” O.D. cables or .87 sq. in. suitable for (13) 0.18” O.D. cables Interior Communications Pathways © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-0528 - 7 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 4. F. Two Piece, Triple Channel – 1.514 sq. in. per channel suitable for (24) 0.18” O.D. cables per channel without devices. Design Make: 1. 2. 3. One-Piece Raceway: Two-Piece Raceways, Single Channel Raceway: Two-Piece Raceway, Triple Channel Raceway: a. b. 2.09 A. Outlet Boxes and Covers 3. 4. 2. 3. 4. 5. Shall be Manufactured of rigid UV stabilized PVC compound with texture with finish specified by the Architect. Provide the manufacturers standard fittings as required for the installation. All system components shall meet UL 94 requirements for nonflammable, self-extinguishing characteristics. Shall have a voltage rating of 300 V AC maximum. Shall be UL listed. Shall be of size indicated drawings. Shall be of sufficient depth to maintain CAT 6 bend radii requirements. Low Voltage Mounting Brackets 1. 2. 2.10 Shall be galvanized steel, not less than 2 ¾” deep X 4 11/16" square or octagonal, with knockouts. Outlet boxes exposed to moisture, exterior, wet or damp locations shall be cadmium cast alloy complete with threaded hubs and gasketed screw fastened covers. Boxes shall be approved for the environmental condition of the location where they will be installed. Install with mud ring where possible Non Metallic Surface Outlet Boxes 1. C. Provide Communication devices as specified in wiring devices and indicated on the drawings. Provide divider in raceways utilized for power and communications. OUTLET BOXES 1. 2. B. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Shall mount to any wall thickness from ¼” – 1”. Shall be constructed of a non-metallic material. SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Supports, support hardware and fasteners shall be protected with zinc coating or treatment of equivalent corrosion resistance using approved alternative treatment, finish or inherent material characteristic. Products used for outdoor applications shall be hot dipped galvanized. B. Provide clevis hangers, riser clamps, conduit straps, threaded c clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets and spring steel clamps as applicable. C. 14 gauge U-Channel systems with 9/16 inch diameter holes at a minimum of 1 7/8 inches on center in the top surface. Provide fittings and accessories that match and mate channel. D. Provide carbon steel or wedge or sleeve type expansion anchors, steel springhead toggle bolts and heat-treated steel power driven threaded stud fastening equipment as required by construction types. Interior Communications Pathways © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-0528 - 8 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site E. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Provided field fabricated supporting devices such as angles, channels, pipe supports, etc. All fabricated supports shall be of metal construction as called for in 2.1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONDUIT A. Electrical Metallic Tubing, Rigid Metal Conduit and Rigid PVC are allowed conduit types. Flexible metal conduit is not allowed. B. Install with a minimum of bends and offsets. Bends shall not kink or destroying the interior cross section of the raceway. Factory made bends shall be used for raceway’s 1" trade size and larger. Bends radius shall be 6 times the internal diameter for conduit sizes up to 2 inches. A conduit greater than 2 inch shall have bend radius at least 10 times the diameter of the conduit. C. Runs exceeding 100 feet or 180 degrees total bends shall be broken with suitable sized pull or splice boxes. (LB or similar conduit fittings are not acceptable for runs of riser cables. D. Do not locate riser pull boxes at bends without prior review and approval by Engineer. Where possible use instead sweeps for the bend and locate in a straight pull nearby. E. Conduit runs to work areas shall serve no more than one (1) communication outlet. F. Plug the ends of each roughed-in raceway with an approved cap or disc to prevent the entrance of foreign materials during construction. G. Secure within three feet of each outlet box, junction box, cabinet or fitting. H. Install raceways in concrete floor slabs as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. I. All conduits in concrete floor slabs shall be rigid galvanized steel with concrete tight threaded fittings. Provide expansion fittings where conduits cross building expansion joints. Install conduit below the reinforcing mesh. Locate conduits to provide a minimum of 2” of concrete around conduit. Wherever a cluster of four-(4) or more conduits rise out of floor exposed, provide neatly formed 4-in. high concrete envelope, with chamfered edges, around raceways. Provide conduit supports based on the following table: Conduit Trade Size 1”, 1 ¼” Type of Run Concealed Horizontal Spacing in Feet 8 Vertical Spacing in Feet 10 1 ½”, & Larger Concealed 10 10 ½”, ¾” Exposed 5 7 1”, 1 ¼” Exposed 7 8 1 ½” & Larger Exposed 10 10 J. Where conduits puncture roof, install pitch pockets as required in order that the roof warranty is maintained. K. Conduit System Installation: Interior Communications Pathways © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-0528 - 9 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 1. 2. 3. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Cable in exterior, above grade locations: Rigid Galvanized Steel Interior locations: Electrical Metallic Tubing Cable below grade: PVC Schedule 40 L. Identification: Clearly label conduit at exposed ends indicating closet or outlet where conduit terminates and the length of the conduit. Label pull boxes indicating destination of conduits entering and exiting. M. Include intra- and inter-building raceways. Including conduits, sleeves and trays for the placement of cables from the communications center to communications rooms, from the communications center to the entrance room or space and from communication center to communication center in different building in a campus environment. 1. Conduit fill shall be as follows: Trade Size 1” Area of Conduit (sq. inches) 0.87 1 Cable 53% Fill (sq. in.) 0.46 2 Cables 31% Fill (sq. in.) 0.27 3 Cables & Over 40% Fill (sq. in.) 0.35 1 ¼” 1.51 0.80 0.47 0.60 1 ½” 2.05 1.09 0.64 0.82 2” 3.39 1.80 1.05 1.36 2 ½” 4.82 2.56 1.49 1.93 3” 7.45 3.95 2.31 2.98 3 ¼” 9.96 5.28 3.09 3.98 4” 12.83 6.80 3.98 5.13 5” 20.15 10.68 6.25 8.06 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Backbone pathways shall be in the form of 4” conduits or sleeves between the main communication equipment rooms and spaces and closets shall be provided as shown on drawings: Fire stop all pathways as called for in section 25 01 00 of this document. All backbone conduits shall be marked with 1” reflective tape every 25 feet. Coordinate color with Network & Telecommunications Department. Pull boxes shall be marked with 1” wide reflective tape. Stub out conduits into closets only enough to attach connector and bushings, except conduits shall rise a minimum of 6 inches above the finished floor. Bush all conduit ends. Conduits shall be concealed except in the following areas: a. b. 3. Mechanical Rooms Electric Rooms Unfinished basements or crawl spaces N. Do not install raceways adjacent to hot surfaces or in wet areas. O. Install conduits to edges of access boxes so as to maximize the total number of conduits that can be routed through the pull box. Interior Communications Pathways © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-0528 - 10 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building P. Provide expansion fittings with external grounding straps at building expansion joints. Q. Do not install conduit horizontally in concrete or block partitions. R. Arrange neatly to permit access to the raceway, outlet, pull, and junction boxes, and work installed by other trades. S. If it is necessary to burn holes through webs of beams or girders, call such points to the attention of the Owner and receive written approval both as to location and size of hole before proceeding with work. All holes shall be burned no larger than absolutely necessary. T. Core drill, sleeve, and fire stop all penetrations through existing floors. U. Support all raceways with malleable iron pipe clamps or other approved method. In exterior or wet locations, provide minimum ¼” air space between raceway and wall. Secure raceway within 3 ft. of each outlet box, junction box, cabinet or fitting. V. Install junction and pull boxes in readily accessible locations. Equipment, piping, ducts and the like shall not block access to boxes. Provide all necessary junction or pull boxes required due to field conditions and size as required by the National Electrical Code. 3.02 A. 3.03 SLEEVES Enter information here about sleeve – support, firestop and size as per drawing CABLE TRAYS A. Hang Cable tray using threaded, galvanized rod hangers, with rods extended through support steel and double nutted. Size support member within load rating of member section; and without visible deflection. Install cable tray level and straight. B. A minimum of 12” headroom shall be provided above all cable trays. C. Provide aluminum body expansion connectors at building expansion joints. Minimum 4-in. movements, greater if expansion movement conditions warrant. D. Provide external grounding strap at expansion joints, sleeves, crossovers and at other locations where tray continuity is interrupted. E. Provide necessary elbows, tees, crosses, risers, offsets, fittings, reducers, connectors, clamps, rod suspension, trapeze hangers, etc., as required to make a complete job. F. Provide conduit to tray fitting at each conduit entrance to tray. G. Install divider in trays where cables of different systems are carried in the same tray. H. Provide (1) 6” long piece of ½” EMT conduit on each threaded rod hanger to prevent scoring of cable insulation when cable is pulled in. I. Install fire stop wall frames around cable tray at penetrations through firerated walls, and where called for. Seal these openings with pliable fire resistant sealant. J. Cable Trays shall not pass through any firewall or fire-rated soffits. Cabletray shall end before the firewall and transition to a minimum of two (2) 4" EMT sleeves with connectors and insulated bushings as called for is this specification section. Interior Communications Pathways © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-0528 - 11 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 3.04 Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building CABLE HANGERS A. Provide cable hangers a maximum of 3’ on center wherever cable tray or conduit is not present. B. Ceiling ties and rods shall not be used to hang cable or cable supports without the approval of the Owner. C. Load hangers as recommended by the manufacturer. Provide hangers side by side on a common bracket where cable quantities require. D. Do not install cables loose above lock-in type, drywall or plaster ceilings. E. Cables shall be installed at least 3 in. above the ceiling tiles and shall not touch the ceiling. F. Do not support cable from ceiling system tie wires or grid in fire rated systems. G. Provide a minimum of 2 spare bracket mounted hangers in new construction. 3.05 A. UNDERFLOOR DUCT The method of pour and depth of concrete shall determine the positioning of the duct as follows (Verify floor structure prior to submitting layout drawings): 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Monolithic pour - installed at the midpoint of the slab. Slab on grade - midpoint of slab. Double pour floor - installed in structural slab, Second pour buries the duct system. Post tensioned pour - preset inserts shall be used. Prefabricated concrete - buried in concrete topping B. Location: Locate runs parallel to outside wall five foot on center with final runs two feet from walls. Provide cross runs as indicated on drawings. C. Provide conduit access to cross runs as indicated on drawings. D. Perform cutting, hole sawing and drilling necessary for installation of wiring to devices, through service fitting, from under floor raceway. Provide devices and service fittings at points of use indicated. Install raceway aligned, level, and parallel or perpendicular to building walls or as indicated. Under-floor raceways shall be free from burrs, sharp edges, dents and mechanical defects. Provide caps or plugs on open raceway ends and on boxes and openings. E. Provide flush service boxes with trim rings and carpet or tile flanges as indicated on the plans. F. Seal raceways, cells, inserts and trenches to prevent the entrance of water, concrete or foreign matter into the raceway system, before and during pouring of slab or placing of fill. Provide tape or sealing compound at joints, as recommended by the duct manufacturer. G. Install all products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. H. Provide expansion fittings with bonding jumper where duct crosses building expansion joints. I. Securely hold junction boxes and raceways in place during concrete pours to avoid floating or other movement. J. Install under-floor duct with tops of preset inserts 1/8” below finished floor line. Locate raceways as indicated on Drawings. Interior Communications Pathways © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-0528 - 12 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building K. Place schedule on the inside of cover-plate of each junction box indicating distance to first insert in each direction, measured from the center of the box. Also, include the pane-board and circuit number of each circuit located in the junction box. Use self-adhesive labels for schedule. L. Support Couplers and Supports: Join raceway lengths using combination support couplers where practical. Provide additional supports at intervals of not over 5 feet (1.5 m), within 30 inches (750 mm) each side of junction boxes, and as close as practical to elbows, bends, and terminations. M. Install insert within 12 inches (30 mm) of edge of junction box. Align inserts on same centers for all services. N. Do not extend inserts into special floor finishes, such as terrazzo, marble, or wood. O. Install a duct marker in each insert adjacent to junction box, at end of each duct run, on both sides of permanent partitions, and on both sides of change of direction of duct. Install markers flush with finished floor material. In carpeted areas, install marker screws level with carpet backing. P. Install surface service fittings after installation of floor finishes. Cut floors as necessary. Following duct manufacturer's recommendations. Replace damaged floor construction and finish. Q. Install trench duct trim flush with cover-plates; maintain covering of factory-applied tape for protection. 3.06 FLOOR BOXES AND POKE THROUGHS A. Floor outlet boxes shall be installed flush with finished floor, adjust level and tilt as required. Where finished floor is terrazzo, provide boxes specifically designed for installation in terrazzo. Where floors are to receive carpet, provide floor outlet with carpet flange. B. Coordinate the location of flush floor boxes with furniture layout. Provide coordination drawings for approval. 3.07 3.08 SURFACE RACEWAY - METALLIC A. Provide raceway as shown on the drawings. Leave a tagged nylon pull tape in each raceway (including raceways in use). Bush ends of all stubbed out raceways. B. Cut raceways square, ream ends to remove burrs, and bush where necessary. C. Install raceways parallel or perpendicular to building walls, floors and ceilings. SURFACE RACEWAYS – NON METALLIC A. Support with expansion anchors, concrete inserts, masonry inserts or toggle bolts as field conditions require. Provide supports every 4 foot on center. B. Provide all fittings, connectors, elbows, tees, boxes etc. as required for the installation. C. Surface raceway shall be filled to 40% maximum. 3.09 A. BOXES AND CABINETS Consider location of outlets shown on drawings as approximate only. Study architectural, electrical, process piping, mechanical, plumbing, structural, roughing-in, etc., drawings and note surrounding areas in which each outlet is to be located. Locate outlet so that when fixtures, motors, cabinets, equipment, etc., Interior Communications Pathways © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-0528 - 13 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building are placed in position, outlet will serve it’s desired purpose. Where conflicts are noted between drawings, contact Network & Telecommunication Department for decision prior to installation. B. Outlet boxes in separate rooms shall not be installed "back-to-back" without the approval of the Network & Telecommunications Department. C. Outlet boxes shall be sized to accommodate the wiring device(s) to be installed. D. Outlet boxes installed in plaster, gypsum board or wood paneled walls shall be installed with raised plaster covers or raised tile covers. E. Outlet boxes installed in tile, brick or concrete block walls shall be installed with extra-deep type raised tile covers or shall be 3-1/2" deep boxes with square corners and dimensions to accommodate conductors installed. F. Surface ceiling mounted outlet boxes shall be minimum 4" square, 1-1/2" deep, galvanized sheet metal. G. Surface wall mounted metallic outlet boxes shall be cast type boxes having threaded or compression type threadless hubs. Exterior boxes shall be cast type with threaded hubs and gasketed cover plates secured by non-ferrous screws. H. Unless otherwise noted, mount devices and equipment at heights measured from finished floor to device/equipment centerline as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Desktop telephone outlets 18" Data outlets 18" Data or desktop telephone outlets, above hot water or steam baseboard heaters. Do not install receptacle outlets above electric baseboard heaters. 30" Television outlet 18” Wall Mounted 48” Bracket Mounted Television 96” I. Where structural or other interference prevent compliance with mounting heights listed above, consult Network & Telecommunication Departments for approval to change location before installation. J. Where communications outlets are shown on, behind, below or above furniture or millwork. Verify the exact location and mounting height with the project coordinator. The communications contractor shall be responsible for moving all communications outlets that are in conflict with furniture or millwork, including cutting, patching and painting, at no cost to the Network & Telecommunication Department. K. Pull boxes used for angle or U pulls shall have a distance between each raceway entry inside the box and the opposite wall of the box of at least 6 times the trade-size diameter of the largest raceway. This distance being increased by the sum of the trade size diameters of the other raceways on the same wall of the box and have a distance between the nearest edges of each raceway enclosing the same conductor of at least 6 times the trade size diameter of the raceway or 6 times the trade size diameter of the larger raceway if they are of different sizes. L. Install outlet boxes as per sizes indicated on the drawings. M. Install Low Voltage Mounting Brackets for fishable wall installation location that does not have an available outlet box. 3.10 A. SUPPORTING DEVICES Hangers and Supports: Interior Communications Pathways © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-0528 - 14 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 1. 2. 3.11 Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Provide steel angles, channels and other materials necessary for the proper support of wallmounted cabinets, racks, panels, etc. Cabinets, large pull boxes, and cable support boxes shall be secured to ceiling and floor slab and not supported from conduits. Small equipment boxes, etc., as approved by Owner, may be supported on walls. Racks for support of conduit and heavy equipment shall be secured to building construction by substantial structural supports. FURNITURE RACEWAYS A. Furniture Pathways - Shall comply with UL 1286 and NEC Article 605. B. It shall be the contractors’ responsibility to verify the furniture layout and communication outlet with respect to the furniture. Obtain approved shop drawings from the architect detailing furniture heights, cable openings etc. Prior to roughing in the outlet box, verify height and location for all communication outlets near furniture or cabinetry. Boxes roughed in the wrong location shall be relocated at the contractors’ expense. C. Provide a concealed transition from outlet box to furniture. 3.12 GENERAL A. Support raceways from building construction. Do not support raceways from ductwork, piping, or equipment hangers. B. Support outlet, pull, and junction boxes independently from building construction. Do not support from raceways. C. Coordinate all raceway runs with other trades. D. All open raceways shall be installed a minimum of 6 in. away from any light fixture or other source of EMI (Electro-magnetic interference). E. All horizontal pathways shall be bonded and grounded per the NEC Article 250. END OF SECTION Interior Communications Pathways © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-0528 - 15 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 27 05 29 - TELEPHONE/DATA CONDUIT SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCE A. Refer to Section 26 00 00 for requirements which are applicable to this section. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, material, and supervision necessary to install all service and distribution as outlined in this section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 WALL BOXES - TELEPHONE A. B. Single gang galvanized steel with single gang device ring and wall plates. Modular jack to accept phone system wiring with two RJ-11 connectors. 2.02 WALL BOXES - DATA A. B. Single gang galvanized steel with single gang device ring and wall plates. Face plate to accommodate data system wiring. 2.03 WALL BOXES - TELEPHONE AND DATA A. B. C. Double gang galvanized steel with steel divided raceway. Double face plate with modular RJ-11 jacks for telephone and 2 data outlet grommets. Two raceways to accessible ceiling space. 2.04 CONDUIT A. B. 3/4" EMT from boxes to accessible ceiling space. Two 4" conduits from backboard through building foundation to exterior of the building, with pull wires. 2.05 PLYWOOD BACKBOARDS A. Furnish and install 3/4" thick marine grade plywood backpanels of the size and location where indicated. Install as a minimum a standard quad outlet and an isolated ground outlet at each location. Install a ground bar and insulated ground cable back to the building electrical service entrance ground. B. C. TELEPHONE/DATA CONDUIT SYSTEM 27 05 29 - 1 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONDUIT SYSTEM A. B. C. D. E. Provide and install where indicated for the device being installed. Provide pull wire in empty conduit Provide ground for system. Provide 120 volt quad receptacle at telephone backboard. Provide a 3/4 " thick marine plywood telephone backboard where indicated for use by the Telephone Company for the mounting of equipment. END OF SECTION TELEPHONE/DATA CONDUIT SYSTEM 27 05 29 - 2 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 27-1100 - COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. 1.02 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. B. Related Sections: 1. 2. 3. 1.03 Telecommunications mounting elements. Backboards. Telecommunications equipment racks and cabinets. Telecommunications service entrance pathways. Grounding. Power Strips Optical Fiber Patch Cords 66 System Patch Cords - Category 6 – Voice Uninterruptable Power Supplies (UPS) Division 27 Section "Communications Backbone Cabling" for voice and data cabling associated with system panels and devices. Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for voice and data cabling associated with system panels and devices. Division 28 Section "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security" for voice and data cabling associated with system panels and devices. DEFINITIONS A. Basket Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of wire mesh bottom and side rails. B. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International. C. Channel Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of a one-piece, ventilated-bottom or solid-bottom channel not exceeding 18 inches D. Ladder Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of two longitudinal side rails connected by individual transverse members (rungs) in width. E. LAN: Local area network. F. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer. G. Solid-Bottom or Nonventilated Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of a bottom without ventilation openings within integral or separate longitudinal side rails. H. Trough or Ventilated Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of integral or separate longitudinal rails and a bottom having openings sufficient for the passage of air and using 75 percent or less of the plan area of the surface to support cables. Communications Equipment Room Fittings © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1100 - 1 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 1.04 A. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Seismic Performance: Floor-mounted cabinets and cable pathways shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7, if applicable. 1. 1.05 Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for equipment racks and cabinets. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: For communications equipment room fittings. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. 2. 3. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Equipment Racks and Cabinets: Include workspace requirements and access for cable connections. Grounding: Indicate location of grounding bus bar and its mounting detail showing standoff insulators and wall mounting brackets. C. Qualification Data: For Installer, qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector. D. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For floor-mounted cabinets, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. 2. 3. 1.06 A. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. Base certification on the maximum number of components capable of being mounted in each rack type. Identify components on which certification is based. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff. 1. 2. 3. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings shall be under the direct supervision of an RCDD. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of an RCDD or Registered Technician, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Project site. Field Inspector: Currently registered by BICSI as an RCDD to perform the on-site inspection. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A. Communications Equipment Room Fittings © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1100 - 2 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site D. 1.07 A. 1.08 A. Grounding: Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A. PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install equipment frames and cable trays until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and work above ceilings is complete. COORDINATION Coordinate layout and installation of communications equipment with Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers. Coordinate service entrance arrangement with local exchange carrier. 1. 2. 3. 4. B. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Meet jointly with telecommunications and LAN equipment suppliers, local exchange carrier representatives, and Owner to exchange information and agree on details of equipment arrangements and installation interfaces. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute them to other participants. Adjust arrangements and locations of distribution frames, cross-connects, and patch panels in equipment rooms to accommodate and optimize arrangement and space requirements of telephone switch and LAN equipment. Adjust arrangements and locations of equipment with distribution frames, cross-connects, and patch panels of cabling systems of other communications, electronic safety and security, and related systems that share space in the equipment room. Coordinate location of power raceways and receptacles with locations of communications equipment requiring electrical power to operate. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PATHWAYS A. General Requirements: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A. B. Cable Support: NRTL labeled. Cable support brackets shall be designed to prevent degradation of cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable. Cable tie slots fasten cable ties to brackets. 1. 2. 3. 4. C. Comply with NFPA 70 and UL 2043 for fire-resistant and low-smoke-producing characteristics. Support brackets with cable tie slots for fastening cable ties to brackets. Lacing bars, spools, J-hooks, and D-rings. Straps and other devices. Cable Trays: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, by the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to: a. b. 2. Cooper B-Line, Inc. or approved equal GS Metals Corp. or approved equal Cable Tray Materials: Metal, suitable for indoors and protected against corrosion by hot-dip galvanizing, complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M, Grade 0.55, not less than 0.002165 inch (0.055 mm) Communications Equipment Room Fittings © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1100 - 3 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site a. b. c. d. D. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Basket Cable Trays: 18 inches wide and 6 inches deep. Wire mesh spacing shall not exceed 2 by 4 inches. Trough Cable Trays: Nominally 18 inches wide. Ladder Cable Trays: Nominally18 inches wide, and a rung spacing of 12 inches Channel Cable Trays: One-piece construction, nominally 18 inches wide. Slot spacing shall not exceed 4-1/2 inches o.c. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." 1. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 4 inches wide, 4 inches high, and 2-1/2 inches deep with a single gang reducer plate. 2.02 BACKBOARDS A. Backboards: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, painted white, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches, furred off the finished wall utilizing 2”x4” studs spaced at 13 inches on center. Comply with requirements for plywood backing panels specified in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry." Install backboards with 96-inch dimension vertical. Butt adjacent sheets tightly, and form smooth gap-free corners and joints. 2.03 EQUIPMENT FRAMES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, by the following: 1. B. General Frame Requirements: 1. 2. 3. C. Furnished by telecommunications contractor, installed by telecommunications contractor. Contractor shall provide and mount cabinet mounted vertical cable managers. Contractor shall provide blanking panels for all blank spaces within the cabinets. Reference construction documents for specific part numbers. Modular Wall Cabinets: 1. F. Furnished by telecommunications contractor, installed by telecommunications contractor. Vertical and horizontal cable management channels, top and bottom cable troughs, grounding lug. Baked-polyester powder coat finish. Reference construction documents for specific part numbers. Modular Freestanding Cabinets: 1. 2. 3. 4. E. Distribution Frames: Freestanding, modular-steel units designed for telecommunications terminal support and coordinated with dimensions of units to be supported. Module Dimension: Width compatible with EIA 310 standard, 19-inch Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked-polyester powder coat. panel mounting. Floor-Mounted Racks: Modular-type, steel construction. 1. 2. 3. 4. D. Ortronics, Inc. or approved equal (refer to T-Drawings) NOT USED. Cable Management for Equipment Frames: 1. 2. 3. Furnished by telecommunications contractor, installed by telecommunications contractor. Metal, with integral wire retaining fingers. Baked-polyester powder coat finish and cabinets Communications Equipment Room Fittings © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1100 - 4 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 4. 5. 2.04 A. 2.05 Vertical cable management panels shall have front and rear channels, with covers. Provide horizontal crossover cable manager at the top of each relay rack, with a minimum height of two rack units each. POWER STRIPS Description: Geist SP064-1020TL or approved equal Surge suppression, 20A, 120V, Horizontal rack mounting, (6) NEMA 5-15R, power switch, breakered, 10 ft. power cord with L5-20P. The unit shall conform to the following specifications: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. B. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Qty. of inputs: 1 Voltage: 120V Current: 20A VA per input (Load Capacity): 1.9kW Frequency: 50/60 Hz Over Current Protection: 20A Thermal Breaker Switch: Yes Indicators LED: Power ON Green LED Power Cable Wire Gauge: 12/3 Power Cable Length: 10 ft. Plug Type: NEMA L5-20P Twistlock Receptacle/Socket Type #1: NEMA-5-15R Quantity on rear #1: 6 Style #1: Duplex Maximum Output per Receptacle/Socket #1: 15A Voltage per Receptacle/Socket #1: 120V Joule Rating: 720 UL 1449 Rating (500A): 330V Clamping Level: <315V Response Time: <5 nanoseconds Technology Used: Super MOVS Surge Indicator: Red LED Continuous Operating Temperature Range: 10-45C / 50-113F Chassis: Heavy Steel, Black Powder Coat Configuration: 19 in. / 435mm Horizontal Rackmount Flush Mount: Yes Chassis Dimensions (HxWxD): 1.72 in. x 17 in. x 3.75 in. Shipped Weight: 6lbs. Quantity required (installed) I per rack MODULAR 110 SYSTEM BLOCKS A. The connecting hardware block shall support the appropriate Category 6, applications and facilitate cross-connection and/or inter-connection using either approved cross-connect wire or patch cords. B. Shall be modular 110 System IDC style blocks. C. Be UL VERIFIED or equivalent for TIA/EIA proposed Category electrical performance. D. Be ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-A and ISO/IEC 11801 Category 6 compliant. E. The following requirements shall also be met (NEXT Loss and FEXT tested in both Differential and Common Mode): Communications Equipment Room Fittings © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1100 - 5 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site Parameters NEXT Loss FEXT Insertion Loss (Attenuation) Return Loss Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Performance @ 100 MHz 43.0 dB 35.1 dB .4 dB 20 dB F. Be UL VERIFIED or equivalent for TIA/EIA proposed Category electrical performance. G. Be CSA C22.2 approved or equivalent. H. Be made of flame-retardant thermoplastic. I. Be available in 50-, 100-, and 300-pair sizes. J. Have 50-, 100, - and 300 pair blocks available without legs while the 100, and 300 pair blocks are available without legs. K. Blocks shall include means to identify cables/services per ANSI/TIA/EIA-606. L. Have clear label holders with the appropriate colored inserts available for the wiring blocks. The insert labels provided with the product shall contain vertical lines spaced on the basis of circuit size (3-, 4- or 5pair) and shall not interfere with running, tracing or removing jumper wire/patch cords. Label holders must be capable of mounting in the under portion of the wiring block. M. Have connecting blocks used for either the termination of cross-connect (jumper) wire or patch cords. The connecting blocks shall be available in 3-, 4- and 5-pair sizes. All connecting blocks shall have colorcoded tip and ring designation markers and be of single piece construction. N. Have connecting blocks with a minimum of 200 re-terminations without signal degradation below standards compliance limit. O. Support wire sizes: Solid 22-26 AWG (0.64 mm - 0.40 mm), and 7-strand wires. P. Be made by an ISO 9001 Certified Manufacturer. Q. Shall be 300 pair blocks, typical for feed and station cable, unless otherwise noted. R. Provide keep-off indicator buttons on all active cross-connected pairs used for alarm and security purposes. Coordinate the color and use with the owner's representative. S. Provide connecting block designation label strips of the colors conforming to EIA/TIA 606, including but not limited to the following: 2.06 GROUNDING A. Comply with requirements in the telecommunications drawing package for grounding conductors and connectors. B. Telecommunications Main Bus Bar: 1. Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar. 2. Ground Bus Bar: Copper, minimum 1/4 inch thick by 4 inches wide with 9/32-inch holes spaced 1-1/8 inches apart. 3. Stand-Off Insulators: Comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V. Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V. Communications Equipment Room Fittings © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1100 - 6 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site C. 2.07 Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A. LABELING A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers. B. Refer to T-series drawings for additional information on labeling schemes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ENTRANCE FACILITIES A. Contact telecommunications service provider and arrange for installation of demarcation point, protected entrance terminals, and a housing when so directed by service provider. B. Install all pathways complying with recommendations in TIA/EIA-569-A, "Entrance Facilities" Article. 3.02 INSTALL ENTRANCE PATHWAY COMPLYING WITH DIVISION 26 SECTION "RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS." A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Comply with BICSI TDMM for layout and installation of communications equipment rooms. C. Cable Trays: Comply with NEMA VE 2 and TIA/EIA-569-A-7. D. Bundle, lace, and train conductors and cables to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. 3.03 FIRESTOPPING A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping. "Comply with TIA/EIA-569A, Annex A, "Firestopping” and Division 27 05 00 Common Work Results For Communications. B. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article. 3.04 GROUNDING A. The telecommunications grounding backbone, telecommunications grounding bars and subsequent bonding is to be provided by the Electrical contractor. Bonding of all subsystems to the telecommunications grounding bars shall be by the contractor installing the subsystem. B. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter. C. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A. D. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall allowing at least 2inch clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar with a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable electrical building ground. E. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG equipment grounding conductor. Communications Equipment Room Fittings © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1100 - 7 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 3.05 Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems.” Comply with requirements in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" for painting backboards. For fire-resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label. B. See Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for additional identification requirements. See Evaluations for discussion of TIA/EIA standard as it applies to this Section. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA/EIA-606-A for Class 2 level of administration including optional identification requirements of this standard. C. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type. END OF SECTION Communications Equipment Room Fittings © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1100 - 8 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 27-1300 - COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 A. 1.02 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. B. Related Sections: 1. 1.03 Pathways. UTP cable. Optical fiber cabling. Cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross-connects. Cabling identification products. Division 28 Section "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security" for voice and data cabling associated with system panels and devices. DEFINITIONS A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International. B. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or crossconnection. C. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. D. IDC: Insulation displacement connector. E. LAN: Local area network. F. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer. G. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. 1.04 BACKBONE CABLING DESCRIPTION A. Backbone cabling system shall provide interconnections between communications equipment rooms, main terminal space, and entrance facilities in the telecommunications cabling system structure. Cabling system consists of backbone cables, intermediate and main cross-connects, mechanical terminations, and patch cords or jumpers used for backbone-to-backbone cross-connection. C. Backbone cabling cross-connects may be located in communications equipment rooms or at entrance facilities. Bridged taps and splitters shall not be used as part of backbone cabling. 1.05 A. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS General Performance: Backbone cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in TIA/EIA-568C, when tested according to test procedures of this standard. Communications Backbone Cabling  2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1300 - 1 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 1.06 Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide (2) two copies of manufacturer’s product sheets for each type of product indicated on the Bill of Materials. D. Shop Drawings: 1. 2. 3. Retain one of first two subparagraphs below. Cabling administration drawings and printouts. Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics including the following: a. b. c. 4. 5. Cross-connects. Patch panels. Patch cords. Cross-connects and patch panels. Detail mounting assemblies, and show elevations and physical relationship between the installed components. Cable tray layout, showing cable tray route to scale, with relationship between the tray and adjacent structural, electrical, and mechanical elements. Include the following: a. b. c. d. Vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions. Clearances for access above and to side of cable trays. Vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or bottom of ceiling structure. Load calculations to show dead and live loads as not exceeding manufacturer's rating for tray and its support elements. C. Qualification Data: For Installer, qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector. D. Source quality-control reports. E. Field quality-control reports. F. Maintenance Data: For splices and connectors to include in maintenance manuals. 1.07 A. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff. 1. 2. 3. B. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, Cabling Administration Drawings, and field testing program development by an RCDD. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of an RCDD or a Registered Technician, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Project site. Testing Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site testing. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site testing. C. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Communications Backbone Cabling  2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1300 - 2 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building E. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A. F. Grounding: Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A. 1.08 A. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Test cables upon receipt at Project site. 1. 2. 3. 1.09 A. 1.10 A. 1.12 A. 1.13 A. Test optical fiber cable to determine the continuity of the strand end to end. Use optical fiber visual fault locator or optical loss test set. Test optical fiber cable while on reels. Use an optical time domain reflectometer to verify the cable length and locate cable defects, splices, and connector, including the loss value of each. Retain test data and include the record in maintenance data. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits. PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cables and connecting materials until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. COORDINATION Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications pathways and cabling with Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers, and all other trades. EXTRA MATERIALS NOT USED. MANUFACTURER’S WARRANTY Provide a twenty (20) year warranty for an end to end permanent link horizontal and backbone subsystem of the structured cabling system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PATHWAYS A. General Requirements: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A. B. Cable Support: NRTL labeled for support of Category 6 cabling, designed to prevent degradation of cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable. 1. 2. 3. C. Support brackets with cable tie slots for fastening cable ties to brackets. Lacing bars, spools, J-hooks, and D-rings. Straps and other devices. TR Cable Trays: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, by the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to: a. Chatsworth Products, Inc. or approved equal Communications Backbone Cabling  2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1300 - 3 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 2. Cable Tray Materials: Metal, suitable for indoors and protected against corrosion by hot-dip galvanizing, complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M, Grade 0.55, not less than 0.002165 inch (0.055 mm). a. b. D. A. 2.03 Ladder Cable Trays: Nominally 18 inches wide, and a rung spacing of 12 inches thick. Channel Cable Trays: One-piece construction, nominally 18 inches wide. Slot spacing shall not exceed 4-1/2 inches o.c. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." 1. 2.02 Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Refer to T0.01 for requirements. BACKBOARDS Backboards: Provided by the General Contractor. Plywood, fire-retardant treated, Painted white, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches, furred off the finished wall utilizing 2”x4” studs spaced at 13 inches on center. UTP CABLE A. Comply with requirements for plywood backing panels specified in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry." A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following manufacturer offering products to be incorporated into the Work including, but not limited to: 1. C. Emergency Telephone System Backbone: 1. 2. 2.04 A. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company or approved equal. Telephone system Backbone shall be No. 24 AWG, 100 Ohm, 50 Pair, telephone cable Comply with TIA/EIA –568 standard; Category 3 and NFPA 70; Type CMP. Refer to plan drawings for and pair counts. Telephone system Terminations: All Telephone system Back Bone terminations will be made on 110 protector blocks with electronic fuses: Circa 50 pair protector blocks (or approved equal), size as required based category 3 cable runs (refer to plan drawings for cable assignments and pair count requirements) RISER CABLE SPECIFICATIONS Plenum Backbone Cable – 50 Pair 1. The plenum cable shall consist of 24-AWG solid-copper conductors insulated with color-coded PVC. All 50-pair and larger cable shall be conformance tested to meet ANSI/TIA/EIA 568B for Category 3 cables. The cable shall be UL Listed for Fire Safety and ISO 9001 Certified. The plenum cable shall be available in 50 pair B. Provide riser cables from the MDF to each IDF as indicated on Drawings or as indicated herein. C. Description: 100-ohm, 50-pair UTP, covered with a gray thermoplastic jacket and overall metallic shield. D. Performance and Criteria 1. The following information listed below is considered the minimum performance and criteria accepted in accordance with TIA/EIA-568-C.2. Communications Backbone Cabling  2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1300 - 4 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 2. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Category 3 Telecommunications a. Cable Use and Construction Type: 1) b. Cable 1) 2) 3) c. d. Cable Sizes: Refer to drawings. Conductor Size: 24 AWG Electrical Specification 1) 2) f. Category 3 Construction: Unshielded Twisted Pair Medium: Solid Annealed Copper Length Limitations: 2600-feet (800m) Physical Specification 1) 2) e. Plenum Rated Frequency: 1-16MHz Characteristic Impedance: 100 Ohms Transmission Performance (min.) 1) Permanent Link Category 3 – Permanent Link Frequency Insertion Loss NEXT (MHz) (dB) (dB) 1.0 3.5 40.1 4.0 6.2 30.7 8.0 8.9 25.9 10.0 9.9 24.3 16.0 13.0 21.0 2) Channel Category 3 – Channel Frequency Insertion NEXT (MHz) Loss (dB) (dB) 1.0 4.2 39.1 4.0 7.3 29.3 8.0 10.2 24.3 10.0 11.5 22.7 16.0 14.5 19.3 3) Connecting Hardware Category 3 – Connecting Hardware Frequency Insertion NEXT (MHz) Loss (dB) (dB) 1.0 3.5 40.1 4.0 6.2 30.7 8.0 8.9 25.9 10.0 9.9 24.3 16.0 13.0 21.0 Communications Backbone Cabling  2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1300 - 5 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site E. Cable Requirements 1. General: a. This cable shall meet the minimum requirements noted in Performance and Criteria Section for Category 3. 2. Application: Building backbone and riser installation within duct, conduits or cable trays telecommunications backbone cable. 2. Construction: a. b. c. d. 4. 5. 7. 8. Insulation: Flame retardant semi-rigid PVC. Shield/Sheath: None. Filling Compound: None. Jacket: Flame retardant PVC. Color: Grey. Temperature a. b. 2.05 Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Operating: -4 to +140º F (-10 to -60º C). Storage: -4 to +140º F (-10 to +60º C). Pulling Tensions (max): 150lb (68kg). Compliances: ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C.2, NEC/CEC Type CMP UTP CABLE HARDWARE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following manufacturer products to be incorporated into the Work including, but not limited to: 1. Ortronics or approved equal. B. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C, IDC type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher. C. Cross-Connect: Modular array of Category 3 connecting blocks arranged to terminate building cables and permit interconnection between cables. 1. D. Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables. Patch Panel: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered jack units with IDC-type connectors at each jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables. 1. Number of Jacks per Field: One for each pair UTP cable indicated, plus spares and blank positions adequate to suit specified expansion criteria. E. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: Modular, color-coded, eight-position modular receptacle units with integral IDC-type terminals. F. Patch Cords: Factory-made, 4-pair cables in quantities and lengths specified on T-drawings; terminated with 8-position modular plug at each end. 1. Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots and color-coded icons to ensure Category 6 performance. Patch cords shall have latch guards to protect against snagging. Communications Backbone Cabling  2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1300 - 6 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 2. 2.06 A. Patch cords shall have color-coded boots for circuit identification OPTICAL FIBER CABLE Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following manufacturer products to be incorporated into the Work including, but not limited to: 1. B. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Berk-Tek or approved equal. In-Building Fiber Cable Description: Singlemode, 24 strand (48 pairs), nonconductive, tight buffer, optical fiber cable with factory manufactured pigtails fusion spliced to both ends. Fiber shall be terminated with SC connectors at both ends. 1. 2. 3. 4. Comply with ICEA S-83-596 for mechanical properties. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3 for performance specifications. Comply with TIA/EIA-492AAAA-B for detailed specifications. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 444, UL 1651, and NFPA 70 for the following types: a. Plenum Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNP, complying with NFPA 262. b. Plenum Rated, Conductive: Type OFCP or OFNP, complying with NFPA 262. 5. C. Jacket: 1. 2. 3. 2.07 A. Jacket Color: Yellow. Cable cordage jacket, fiber, unit, and group color shall be according to TIA/EIA-598-B. Imprinted with fiber count, fiber type, and aggregate length at regular intervals not to exceed 40 inches. OPTICAL FIBER CABLE HARDWARE Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following manufacturer products to be incorporated into the Work including, but not limited to: 1. B. Conductive cable shall be steel armored type. Corning or approved equal. Cross-Connects and Patch Panels: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered, duplex cable connectors. 1. Number of Connectors per Field: One for each fiber of cable or cables assigned to field, plus spares and blank positions adequate to suit specified expansion criteria. C. Patch Cords: Factory-made, dual-fiber cables in quantities and D. Cable Connecting Hardware: lengths specified on T-drawings. 1. 2. 3. 2.07 Comply with Optical Fiber Connector Intermateability Standards (FOCIS) specifications of TIA/EIA-604-2, TIA/EIA-604-3-A, and TIA/EIA-604-12. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3. Quick-connect, simplex and duplex, Type LC connectors. Insertion loss not more than 0.75 dB. Type SFF connectors may be used in termination racks, panels, and equipment packages. COAXIAL CABLE – NOT USED Communications Backbone Cabling  2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1300 - 7 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 2.08 Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building GROUNDING A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." For grounding conductors and connectors. B. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A. 2.09 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. 2.10 Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables. B. Factory test cables on reels according to TIA/EIA-568-C.3. C. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA/EIA-568-C. D. Factory test multimode optical fiber cables according to TIA/EIA-526-14-A and TIA/EIA-568-C.3. E. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. 3.02 A. ENTRANCE FACILITIES Coordinate backbone cabling with the protectors and demarcation point with owner. WIRING METHODS Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters and except in accessible ceiling spaces, in attics, and in gypsum board partitions where unenclosed wiring method may be used. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces. 1. 2. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." B. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible. C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables within enclosures. Connect to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS A. Cable Trays: Comply with NEMA VE 2 and TIA/EIA-569-A. B. Comply with requirements for demarcation point, pathways, cabinets, and racks specified in Division 27 Section "Communications Equipment Room Fittings." Drawings indicate general arrangement of pathways and fittings. Communications Backbone Cabling  2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1300 - 8 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building C. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends between pull points. D. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for installation of conduits and wireways. E. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows whenever possible. F. Pathway Installation in Communications Equipment Rooms: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. G. 3.04 Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard where a single piece of plywood is installed, or in the corner of room where multiple sheets of plywood are installed around perimeter walls of room. Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these positions. Secure conduits to backboard when entering room from overhead. Extend conduits 4 inches Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to grounding system. above finished floor. Backboards: Install backboards with 96-inch dimension vertical. Butt adjacent sheets tightly, and form smooth gap-free corners and joints. INSTALLATION OF CABLES A. Comply with NECA 1. B. General Requirements for Cabling: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. C. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices." Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer. from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Use lacing bars and distribution spools. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before de-reeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating. In the communications equipment room, install a 10-foot Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions. long service loop on each end of cable. UTP Cable Installation: 1. 2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.2. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry. Communications Backbone Cabling  2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1300 - 9 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site D. Optical Fiber Cable Installation: 1. 2. E. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.3. Cable may be terminated on connecting hardware that is rack or cabinet mounted. Open-Cable Installation: 1. 2. 3. F. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment. Suspend UTP cable not in a wireway or pathway, a minimum of 8 inches above ceilings by cable supports not more than 60 inches apart. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items. Separation from EMI Sources: 1. 2. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA/EIA-569-A recommendations for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. b. c. 3. 4. 6. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows: a. b. c. 5. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. b. c. 3.05 Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches. FIRESTOPPING A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A, Annex A, "Firestopping." B. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A, Annex A, "Firestopping." C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article. 3.06 GROUNDING Communications Backbone Cabling  2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1300 - 10 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter. B. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A. C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall allowing at least 2inch clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar with a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable electrical building ground. D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG equipment grounding conductor. 3.07 A. IDENTIFICATION Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with ANSI-J-STD-607-A and ANSI/TIA/EIA 606A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. 2. Administration Class: 2. Color-code cross-connect fields and apply colors to voice and data service backboards, connections, covers, and labels. B. Comply with requirements in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" for painting backboards. For fire resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label. C. See Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for additional identification requirements. See Evaluations for discussion about TIA/EIA standard as it applies to this Section. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA/EIA-606-A for Class 2 level of administration including optional identification requirements of this standard. D. Comply with requirements in Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for cable and asset management software. E. Cable Schedule: Install in a prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. List incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for Project. F. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration-point labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets, backbone pathways and cables, entrance pathways and cables, terminal hardware and positions, horizontal cables, work areas and workstation terminal positions, grounding buses and pathways, and equipment grounding conductors. G. Cable and Wire Identification: 1. 2. 3. 4. Label each cable within 4 inches Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at device if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within panel or cabinet. of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable at intervals not exceeding 15 feet. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel. a. b. Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips and identify each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a building-mounted device with name and number of particular device as shown. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames. Communications Backbone Cabling  2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1300 - 11 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 5. H. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware. Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling, use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area and font color that contrasts with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in TIA/EIA 606-A, for the following: 1. 3.08 Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flexes as cables are bent. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Perform tests and inspections. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. 2. 3. Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA/EIA-568-C.1. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components. Test UTP copper cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross-connection. a. 4. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-C.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration. Optical Fiber Cable Tests: a. b. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-C.1. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration. Link End-to-End Attenuation Tests: 1) 2) Horizontal and multimode backbone link measurements: Test at 1310 or 1550 nm in 1 direction according to TIA/EIA-526-14-A, Method B, One Reference Jumper. Attenuation test results for backbone links shall be less than 2.0 dB. Attenuation test results shall be less than that calculated according to equation in TIA/EIA568-C.3. D. Data for each measurement shall be documented. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted. E. Remove and replace cabling where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. F. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. Communications Backbone Cabling  2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1300 - 12 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site G. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION Communications Backbone Cabling  2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1300 - 13 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 27-1314 – COMMUNICATIONS OUTSIDE PLANT CABLING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Refer to Site Drawing for Outside Plant Cabling installation route. 1.02 SUMMARY A. The work included under this specification consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, materials, and supplies and performing all operations necessary to complete the installation of this structured cabling system in compliance with the specifications and drawings. The Telecommunications contractor will provide and install all of the required material to form a complete system whether specifically addressed in the technical specifications or not. The Electrical contractor will provide all conduits related to the outside plant cabling work. Telecommunication contactor to include cost of present field investing /maintenance contractor for supervision of all work – splicing direction, available fiber, live fiber work, terminations, patch panel locations, testing and B. The work shall include, but not be limited to the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 1.03 Furnish and install a complete telecommunications outside plant cabling infrastructure comprised of the following: a. One new Berk-Tek or approved equal Furnish, install, and terminate all UTP and Optical Fiber cable. Furnish and install all punch blocks, fuses LIU boxes, adapters, couplers, and connectors. Furnish any other material required to form a complete system. Perform link or channel testing (100% of backbone links /channels) and certification of all components. Furnish test results of all cabling to the owner on disk and paper format, listed by each termination point, or by requirements. Provide owner training and documentation, testing documentation and as-built drawings Provide materials from one manufacturer and installation for a complete and integrated structured cabling system with a minimum of 25 years warranty. REGULATORY REFERENCES A. All work and materials shall conform in every detail to the rules and requirements of the National Fire Protection Association, the local Electrical Code and present manufacturing standards. B. All materials shall be UL Listed and shall be marked as such. If UL has no published standards for a particular item, then other national independent testing standards shall apply and such items shall bear those labels. Where UL has an applicable system listing and label, the entire system shall be so labeled. C. The cabling system described in this is derived from the recommendations made in recognized telecommunications industry standards. The following documents are incorporated by reference: 1. 2. ANSI/TIA/EIA - 568-B.1, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 1: General Requirements, April, 2001 ANSI/TIA/EIA - 568-B.2, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 2: Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling Components, April, 2001 Communications Outside Plant Cabling  2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1314 - 1 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building ANSI/TIA/EIA - 568-B.2-1, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 2: Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components, Addendum 1 – Transmission Performance Specifications for 4-pair 100 Ù Category 6 Cabling ANSI/TIA/EIA - 568-B.3, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 3: Optical Fiber Cabling Components, March, 2000 ANSI/TIA/EIA – 569-A, Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces, February, 1998 ANSI/TIA/EIA – 570-A, Residential Telecommunications Cabling Standard, October, 1999 ANSI/TIA/EIA – 606 - A, Administration Standard for Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings, February, 2002 ANSI/TIA/EIA – 607, Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications, August, 1994 ANSI/ TIA/EIA – 758, Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Cabling Standard, April 1999 B ICSI - TDMM, B uilding Industries Consult ing Services Internat ional, Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM) – 11th Edition, 2006 National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA – 70), National Electrical Code (NEC) –2014. D. If this document and any of the documents listed above are in conflict, then the more stringent requirement shall apply. All documents listed are believed to be the most current releases of the documents. The Contractor has the responsibility to determine and adhere to the most recent release when developing the proposal for installation. E. This document does not replace any code, either partially or wholly. The contractor must be aware of local codes that may impact this project. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Backbone: A facility (e.g., pathway, cable, or conductors) between telecommunications rooms or floor distribution terminals, the entrance facilities, and the equipment rooms within or between buildings. B. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International. C. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or crossconnection. D. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. E. IDC: Insulation displacement connector. F. LAN: Local area network. G. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer. H. RMC : R i gi d me t a l li c c o n d ui t . I. UTP: Unshielded t w ist ed pair. J. CA N: C a m p us A re a Net w ork . K. OS P : O ut si de p la n t . L. CMP: communication Plenum Cable. Communications Outside Plant Cabling  2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1314 - 2 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 1.05 Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each component specified, including detailed manufacturer's specifications. Include data on features, ratings, and performance. Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of components. Show access and working-space requirements. C. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Provide evidence of applicable registration or certification as an OSP system installer. D. Field test and observation reports from a qualified independent inspecting and testing agency indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance with performance requirements of the installed systems. All testing must comply with the EIA/TIA 568B standards, testing must take place on certified test equipment and 2 copies of the results must be printed and bound and turned over to the Owner along with CAD asbuilts. Testing device calibration certification must be provided. E. Maintenance data for products to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1. F. Evidence of listing of products specified to be listed in the "Quality Assurance" Article. G. Provide a diskette copy of final comprehensive schedules for the Project in the software and format selected by Owner. H. The contractor will detail pre-installed prints and as-builts, CAD/CAM prints to include station locations, riser cables, closet locations and elevations, etc. The owner prior to the start of work will inspect these for accuracy. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is a registered communications distribution designer, certified by the Building Industry Consulting Service International (BICSI) and/or a major structure cable systems manufacturer in the product line to be installed. The contractor must have a minimum of 3 years experience with copper cable installation and a minimum of five years fiber cable installation; additionally the contractor shall have a minimum of five years OSP experience. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage firms experienced in manufacturing components listed and labeled under EIA/TIA-568B and who comply with these Specifications. C. Comply w it h NFPA 70. D. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100. E. Work Coordination: Coordinate Work of this Section with Owner's cable head end, workstation, local area network (LAN), and Campus area network (CAN) equipment suppliers. 1. 2. Meet jointly with representatives of the above organizations and Owner's representatives to exchange information and agree on details of equipment arrangements and installation interfaces. Warranty: Within 10 working days of test completion, the Contractor shall submit a Guarantee stating all portions of the work are in accordance with Contract requirements. The Communications Outside Plant Cabling  2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1314 - 3 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Contractor shall guarantee all work against faulty and improper material and workmanship, including work and materials of all subcontractors, manufacturers, suppliers, and sub-trade specialists, for a period of one (1) year from the date to final acceptance by the Owner. Where guarantees or warranties for longer terms are provided, such longer terms shall apply. With 24 hours after notification, the Contractor shall correct any deficiencies, which occur during the GUARANTEE Period, at no additional cost to the Owner. Applicable application assurance and extended systems warranties shall be secured from the various product vendors. These System warranties may dictate which products must be installed to provide a complete system. The minimum structured cabling system warranty that will be accepted is twenty-five (25) years. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 A. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Berk-Tek or approved equal SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. General: Coordinate the features of the additional expansion materials and equipment so they form an integrated system with the installed newly expanded systems. Match components and interconnections for optimum future performance. B. Expansion Capability: Unless otherwise indicated, quantity of spare positions in LIU, and space in cable trays conduits and wireways shall be adequate to accommodate a 25 percent future increase in active workstations. 2.03 WIRING PATHWAY AND EQUIPMENT MOUNTING ELEMENTS A. Electrical contractor to install conduit and related work for the new fiber and telephone cable installation. Refer to electrical design documents for conduit and related installation requirements. Coordinate all work with electrical contractor for final conduit routing to meet site conditions and Owner’s direction. B. Supporting of Cabling above suspended ceiling: 1. 2.04 Per NEC Article 300-11, appropriate cable fasteners will be used. No bridle rings or nylon cable ties will be allowed. TWISTED PAIR TELEPHONE CABLE , CONNECTORS, AND TERMINAL EQUIPMENT A. Listed as Complying with Category 3 of the most current EIA/TIA standards at the time of the submission of the bid. Provide evidence of listing for all products specified in this Article. B. Conductors: Solid copper. C. UTP Horizontal Plenum Cable: Listed for use in air-handling spaces. Features are as specified above, except materials are modified as required for listing. D. All Voice Back Bone terminations will be made on 110 protector blocks with fuses: Circa 50, 100 & 300 pair protector blocks (or approved equal), size as required based category 3 cable. E. Back Bone OSP Copper Cable: 1. Qty. 2 - No. 24 AWG, 100 Ohm, High pair count 25 Pair. Communications Outside Plant Cabling  2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1314 - 4 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site a. 2. 3. 4. 2.05 A. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building All pairs terminated in building MDF. Comply with TIA/EIA –568 standard, Category 3. T y p e : O S P CMP/Plenum rat ed Manufact urer: Berk -Tek EXTERIOR/INTERIOR BACKBONE CABLING AND TERMINATION CONFIGURATION – FIBER BACKBONE FIBER-OPTIC CABLES, CONNECTORS, AND TERMINAL EQUIPMENT Fiber Optical Cables shall comply with the following specifications: 1. Fiber: a. b. c. d. e. f. 2. Loose Tube: a. b. c. d. e. f. 3. Type: Step index single-mode optical fiber with protective UV cured acrylate coating. Proof Test: Entire length of fiber shall have been subjected to a 0.7 GPa (100 kpsi) minimum proof stress as per TIA/EIA FOTP-31. Coating Diameter: 245 ± 10µm Reference PS 0309 for fiber specifications. Fibers shall have factory manufactured pigtails fusion spliced to both ends. Fiber shall be terminated with SC connectors at both ends. Buffer Tube Jacket Material: Thermoplastic Buffer Tube Jacket OD: 3.0 mm (o.118 in.) Buffer Tube Color Code; Blue, Orange, Green, Brown, Slate, White, Red, Black, Yellow, Violet, Rose, and Aqua per TIA/EIA-598. Buffer tubes 13-24 repeat the color sequence with a tracer stripe: e.g. tube 13 is blue with tracer stripe. WS Powder: Water-blocking filler to prevent water ingress. Fiber Color Coating: UV cured colorant Fiber Colors: Blue, Orange, Green, Brown, Slate, White, Red, Black, Yellow, Violet, Rose, and Aqua as per TIA/EIA-598. Cable: a. b. c. d. e. f. Configuration: Loose tubes are helically stranded in dual core around a central strength member and ripcords shall be applied under outer jacket. Dry Core: Water absorbent members shall prevent water penetration and provide tensile strength. Jacket Material: Plenum rated thermoplastic Jacket Color: Yellow (for single-mode) Cable Weight: 436 kg/km (293 lb. /1000 ft.) nominal Cable Outer Diameter: 1) 2) 4. 144 strand cable: 16.3 mm (0.640 in.) nominal 288 strand cable: 21.2 mm (0.833 in.) nominal Cable Ratings: a. b. c. d. Flame Listing: Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Type OFNP (Nonconductive Optical Fiber Plenum Cable) and c(UL) OFN-FT6 75C. Operating Temperature: -40º C to +75º C Installation Temperature: -60º C to +85º C Storage Temperature: -20º C to +60º C Communications Outside Plant Cabling  2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1314 - 5 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Maximum Loading: Installation 4448 N (1000 lb.) and Long Term 1335 N (300 lb.) Minimum Bend Radius: Installation 31.7 cm (12.5 in.) and Long Term 21.2 cm (8.3 in.) Qualified to ICEA S-104-696 and Telcordia GR-409. Compression (crush) Strength: 110 N/cm per TIA/EIA FOTP-41 Impact: 2 impacts at 5.88 N-m per TIA/EIA FOTP-25 Cable Flex: 500 cycles per TIA/EIA-104 Compliant to TIA/EIA 568.C.3 Maximum Continuous Length: 2.5 km (8200 ft.) 5. Manufacturer/Type: Berk-Tek Adventum Indoor/Outdoor or approved equal 6. Part Numbers: a. b. 144 strand cable: LPT12B144 288 strand cable: LPT 12B288 B. Plenum Cable: Listed for use in plenums. Cable Connectors: Quick-connect, simplex- and duplex-type ST couplers with self-centering, axial alignment mechanisms. Insertion loss not greater than 0.75 dB. C. Fiber interconnect housing termination Boxes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 2.06 Permanent Connection: One end of each connector module is permanently connected to an installed cable fiber. Number of Connectors per Field: One for each fiber of cable or cables assigned to field, plus spares and blank positions adequate to satisfy 20 % expansion criteria. Mounting: Fiber distribution box shall be 19” rack mounted. The interconnect housing shall be Ortronics # ORFC01-UP, or approved equal, with SM and MM adapters as required. IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A Class standard labeling guidelines: B. Cable Labels: Self-adhesive vinyl or vinyl-cloth wraparound tape markers, machine printed with alphanumeric cable designations. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 A. 3.02 EXAMINATION Examine pathway elements to receive cable. Check raceways, cable trays, conduits and other elements for compliance with space allocations, installation tolerances, hazards to cable installation, and other conditions affecting installation. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. APPLICATION OF MEDIA A. Campus backbone for data service: Use high-speed fiber optic cable for runs between buildings as shown on plan drawings. B. Campus backbone cable for voice service: use UTP #24 AWG high-pair OSP cable conforming to Category-3 of EIA/TIA standards, for runs between buildings as shown on plan drawings. C. Campus backbone cable for voice service: use UTP #24 AWG high-pair plenum cable conforming to Category- Communications Outside Plant Cabling  2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1314 - 6 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building 3 of EIA/TIA standards, for runs between entrance points and termination points (coordinate transition & termination locations with owner). 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters and except in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum board partitions where cable-wiring method may be used. Use UL-listed plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. Conceal cable and raceway wiring except in unfinished spaces. All surface mount raceway to be permanently mounted with metal hardware. B. Install components as indicated, according to manufacturers' written instructions. Use techniques, practices, and methods that are consistent with the Category 3 rating of the components and that assure Category 3 performance of completed and linked signal paths, end-to-end. C. Install cable without damaging conductors, shield, or jacket. D. Do not bend cable in handling or installation to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturers and 568B specifications. E. Pull cables without exceeding cable manufacturer's recommended pulling tensions. 1. 2. 3. Pull cables simultaneously where more than one is being installed in the same conduit. Use pulling compound or lubricant where necessary. Use compounds that will not damage conductor or insulation. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips that will not damage media or raceway. F. Secure and support Plenum cable at intervals not exceeding 30 inches (760 mm) and not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. When running inside building from entrance points to termination points. G. Separation from EMI Sources: Comply with BICSI TDM and TIA/EIA-569-A recommendations for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment. Comply with the following minimum separation distances from possible sources of EMI. H. Separation between unshielded power lines or electrical equipment in proximity to open cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways is as follows: 1. 2. 3. I. Separation between unshielded power lines or electrical equipment in proximity to cables in grounded metallic raceways is as follows: 1. 2. 3. J. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: 5 inches (127 mm). Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: 12 inches (300 mm). Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: 24 inches (610 mm). Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: 2-1/2 inches (64 mm). Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: 6 inches (150 mm). Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: 12 inches (300 mm). Separation between power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures in proximity to cables in grounded metallic raceways is as follows: 1. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. Communications Outside Plant Cabling  2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1314 - 7 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 2. 3. 4. 5. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: 3 inches (76 mm). Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: 6 inches (150 mm). Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: 48 inches (1200 mm). Fluorescent Fixtures: 5 inches (127 mm). K. Make UTP terminations only at indicated termination blocks. No splicing will be accepted, unless specified on drawings or in specifications. L. Contractor will furnish and install all supplies and equipment, supporting structures, plywood, an any other requirements. M. All cables and termination hardware shall be 100% tested for defects in installation and to verify cable performance under installed conditions in compliance with EIA/TIA TSB-67. All conductors of each installed cable shall be verified usable by the contractor prior to system acceptance. Any defect in the cable system installation including but not limited to cable, connectors, LIU boxes, protector blocks, and all related components shall be repaired or replaced, at no cost to the owner, in order to ensure 100% useable conductors an all cables installed. N. All cable tests shall be documented and a report provided to the owner prior to project acceptance. O. Contractor will provide any additional conduits and conduit sleeves necessary to run data cabling through buildings. No cable shall be run exposed in school. All cables shall be run in raceway or above accessible ceiling. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A for maximum length of conduit and bends between pull points, and for pullbox sizing. Use manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius ells whenever possible. P. Contractor will provide detailed as-built prints and CAD/CAM drawing files. Prints to include Cable pathways, Entrance locations, Transition locations, Termination Locations, Splice locations and elevations. The owner, prior to the start of work will inspect these for accuracy. Q. Contractor will supply wire management for each LIU Box and 110 block required for cable and wire termination. R. Contractor shall supply all fire-stop required by the NEC, local codes, or as indicated on the plan drawings. Fire stop material shall remain resilient and pliable to allow for the removal and or addition of cable without drilling new holes. It shall adhere to itself to allow all repairs to be made with the same material. A minimum 2 hour fire rating is required. S. All UTP copper cable must meet EIA/TIA 40 Level 6 specifications, as well as TSB-36. T. Contractor will be available for a final walk-through/inspection upon completion of the wiring. U. Contractor will supply the following: Shop drawings prior to the start of work; CAD/CAM asbuilts upon completion. V. Contractor is responsible for clean up of debris on a daily basis and cost of clean up is the responsibility of the Contractor. W. The Contractor shall furnish and install each cable as an uninterrupted section from point of origin to the point of termination. There shall be no field splices or mechanical coupling used during cable installation. X. Contractor is responsible to verify all cable lengths prior to installation. Pathway route accessibility may require re-distribution of cabling. 3.04 GROUNDING Communications Outside Plant Cabling  2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1314 - 8 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building A. Comply with NEC and TIA 607 Bonding and Grounding standards. B. Ground cable shields, drain conductors, and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground loops, common mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments. C. Bond shields and drain conductors to ground at only one point in each circuit. D. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at each equipment room and wiring closet. Isolate from power system and equipment grounding. E. Install grounding electrodes of type, size, location, and quantity as indicated. Comply with installation requirements of Division 16 Section "Grounding." F. Signal Ground Bus: Mount on wall of main equipment room with standoff insulators. G. Signal Ground Backbone Cable: Extend from signal ground bus to signal ground terminal in each wiring closet and equipment room. 3.05 INSTALLATION AT EQUIPMENT ROOMS AND WIRING CLOSETS A. Mount punch down blocks and other connecting hardware on walls or as indicated. B. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields. C. Use punch down blocks and patch panels to terminate cables entering the space, except as otherwise indicated. 3.06 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components in compliance with the applicable requirements of Division 26, " SECTION 26-0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL" and the following specifications: B. System: Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A Class 2 standard labeling guidelines. Use a unique 3-syllable alphanumeric designation for each cable, and label the cable and the jacks, connectors, and terminals to which it connects with the same designation. Use logical and systematic designations related to the architectural arrangement of the facility. Label in conjunction with the building's room numbers with labeling to be pre-approved by Owner. 1. 2. 3. First syllable is to identify and locate the wiring closet or equipment room where the cable originates. Second syllable is to identify and locate the cross-connect or patch panel field in which the cable terminates. Third syllable is to designate the type of media (copper or fiber) and the position occupied by the cable pairs or fibers in the field. C. Workstation: Label cables within outlet boxes. D. Distribution Racks and Frames: Label each unit and field within that unit. E. Within Connector Fields, in Wiring Closets and Equipment Rooms: Label each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware. Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data service, use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service. Communications Outside Plant Cabling  2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1314 - 9 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building F. Cables, Generally: Label each cable within 4 inches (100 mm) of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated. G. Cable Schedule: Post at a prominent location in each wiring closet and equipment room. List incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with a rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Provide a diskette copy of final comprehensive schedules for the Project in the software and format selected by Owner. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Upon installation of cable and connectors, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements. Test each signal path for end-to-end performance. Remove temporary connections when tests have been satisfactorily completed. C. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. D. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare and submit test reports to the owner and architect/engineer. E. Category 3 UTP Cabling Testing Shall include: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. F. Polarity Continuity Pair mapping Length In addition provide loop resistance measurement in Ohms and dB loss at 1 kHz, 8 kHz and 56 kHz. Fiber-Optic Cable Tests: 1. 2. 3. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568 Standards Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration. FIBER OPTIC TEST STANDARDS, TIA/EIA-526 (SERIES) The TIA/EIA-455 series, together with its addenda, provides uniform test procedures for testing the fiber optic components intended for, or forming a part of, optical communications and data transmission systems. This series contains standard test procedures for optical fibers, cables, transducers, and connecting and terminating devices. a. b. c. d. A complete end-to-end test results for all copper UTP and fiber optic lines installed is required. All fiber optic cable must be visually inspected and optically tested on the reel upon delivery to the installation site. Using an Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR), an access jumper with like fiber, a pigtail, and a mechanical splice, all fibers shall be tested for continuity and attenuation. Testing for continuity and attenuation on the reel must confirm factory specifications to ensure that the fiber optic cable was not damaged during shipment. Test results must match the results of the factory-attached tag on the reel, or the fiber shall not be used. Reel data sheet must be provided showing test results. End to end test measurements shall be provided for singlemode and multimode fibers (2 wave lengths per test is required). Test results must be submitted for review as part of the installation inspection requirements. Test results shall be in paper form and electronic form, and must contain the names and signatures of the technicians performing the tests. Communications Outside Plant Cabling  2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1314 - 10 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site G. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Testing shall be performed on 100% of the fibers in the completed end-to-end system. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-A, Annex H, provides the technical criteria and formulae to be used in fiber optic testing. Note however, that all fiber strands must be tested, rated and guaranteed for Ethernet GigaSPEED 1000B-X performance. Additionally, all fiber Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components. Link End-to-End Attenuation Tests: 1. 2. 3. Multi and Single-Mode backbone link measurements: Test at 850 or 1310 nm in both directions according to TIA/EIA-526-14 standards, Reference Jumper. Attenuation test results for horizontal links shall be less than 2.0 dB. Attenuation test results shall be less than that calculated according to equation in TIA/EIA-568-B. 1. Data for each measurement shall be documented. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDM, or transferred from the instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted. H. Each element of all new single-mode fiber optic cabling shall be tested for continuity and attenuation in both directions at both 1310 and 1550 nm, with a fiber optic light source and power meter. Before beginning testing, the contractor shall submit a design fiber optic loss budget for the segment to be tested, based upon the length of fiber optic cable installed. When tested at both windows in both directions, the measured attenuation of each fiber optic cable segment shall be less than or equal to the design attenuation of the segment being tested. Until this condition has been met, the installation shall not be considered complete, and will not be accepted. I. Remove and replace cabling where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. J. Retest and inspect cabling to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.08 A. 3.09 CLEANING On completion of system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish, including chips, scratches, and abrasions. DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance. Train designated personnel in cable plant management operations, including changing signal pathways for different workstations, rerouting signals in failed cables, and extending wiring and establishing new workstation outlets. B. Conduct a minimum of one day's training as specified in Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout." Include both classroom training and hands-on experience. C. Training Aid: Use operation and maintenance manual material as an instructional aid. Provide copies of this material for use in the instruction. D. Schedule training with Owner with at least 7 days' advanced notice. END OF SECTION Communications Outside Plant Cabling  2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1314 - 11 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 27-1500 - COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. 1.02 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. B. Related Sections: 1. 2. 1.03 UTP cabling (Category 6). Cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross-connects. Telecommunications outlet/connectors. Cabling system identification products. Cable management system. Division 27 Section "Communications Backbone Cabling" for voice and data cabling associated with system panels and devices. Division 28 Section "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security" for voice and data cabling associated with system panels and devices. DEFINITIONS A. Basket Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of wire mesh bottom and side rails. B. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International. C. Channel Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of a one-piece, ventilated-bottom or solid-bottom channel. D. Consolidation Point: A location for interconnection between horizontal cables extending from building pathways and horizontal cables extending into furniture pathways. E. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or crossconnection. F. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. G. IDC: Insulation displacement connector. H. Ladder Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of two longitudinal side rails connected by individual transverse members (rungs). I. LAN: Local area network. J. MUTOA: Multiuser telecommunications outlet assembly, a grouping in one location of several telecommunications outlet/connectors. K. Outlet/Connectors: A connecting device in the work area on which horizontal cable or outlet cable terminates. Communications Horizontal Cabling © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1500 - 1 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building L. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer. M. Solid-Bottom or Non-ventilated Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of longitudinal side rails and a bottom without ventilation openings. N. Trough or Ventilated Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of longitudinal side rails and a bottom having openings for the passage of air. O. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. 1.04 A. HORIZONTAL CABLING DESCRIPTION Horizontal cable and its connecting hardware provide the means of transporting signals between the telecommunications outlet/connector and the horizontal cross-connect located in the communications equipment room. This cabling and its connecting hardware are called "permanent link," a term that is used in the testing protocols. 1. 2. 3. 4. TIA/EIA-568-C.1 requires that a minimum of two telecommunications outlet/connectors be installed for each work area. Horizontal cabling shall contain no more than one transition point or consolidation point between the horizontal cross-connect and the telecommunications outlet/connector. Bridged taps and splices shall not be installed in the horizontal cabling. Splitters shall not be installed as part of the optical fiber cabling. B. A work area is approximately 100 sq. ft. C. The maximum allowable horizontal cable length is 295 feet, and includes the components that extend from the telecommunications outlet/connectors to the patch panels located in the MDF/IDFs. 1. 2. 1.05 A. 1.06 A. The maximum allowable length does not include an allowance for the length of 16 feet to the workstation equipment. The maximum allowable length does not include an allowance for the length of 16 feet in the horizontal cross-connect. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS General Performance: Horizontal cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in TIA/EIA-568C.1, when tested according to test procedures of this standard. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. For coaxial cable, include the following installation data for each type used: a. b. c. B. Nominal OD. Minimum bending radius. Maximum pulling tension. Shop Drawings: 1. 2. 3. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules, in software and format selected by Owner. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules that are part of the cabling and asset identification system of the software. Cabling administration drawings and printouts. Communications Horizontal Cabling © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1500 - 2 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 4. Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics, including the following: a. b. c. 5. 6. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Cross-connects. Patch panels. Patch cords. Cross-connects and patch panels. Detail mounting assemblies, and show elevations and physical relationship between the installed components. Cable tray layout, showing cable tray route to scale, with relationship between the tray and adjacent structural, electrical, and mechanical elements. Include the following: a. b. c. d. Vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions. Clearances for access above and to side of cable trays. Vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or bottom of ceiling structure. Load calculations to show dead and live loads as not exceeding manufacturer's rating for tray and its support elements. C. Samples: (If requested) For workstation outlets, jacks, jack assemblies, in specified finish, one for each size and outlet configuration and faceplates for color selection and evaluation of technical features. D. Qualification Data: For Installer, qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector. E. Source quality-control reports. F. Field quality-control reports. G. Maintenance Data: For splices and connectors to include in maintenance manuals. H. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: 1. 1.07 A. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff. 1. 2. 3. B. NOT USED. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and Cabling Administration Drawings, and field testing program development by an RCDD. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of a Registered Technician, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Project site. Testing Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site testing. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site testing. C. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. E. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A. Communications Horizontal Cabling © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1500 - 3 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site F. 1.08 A. Grounding: Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Test cables upon receipt at Project site. 1. 2. 3. 1.09 A. 1.10 Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Test optical fiber cable to determine the continuity of the strand end to end. Use optical fiber flashlight or optical loss test set. Test optical fiber cables while on reels. Use an optical time domain reflectometer to verify the cable length and locate cable defects, splices, and connector; including the loss value of each. Retain test data and include the record in maintenance data. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits. PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cables and connecting materials until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications pathways and cabling with Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers. B. Coordinate telecommunications outlet/connector locations with location of power receptacles at each work area. 1.11 A. 1.12 A. 1.13 A. SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT NOT USED. EXTRA MATERIALS NOT USED. MANUFACTURER’S WARRANTY Provide a twenty (20) year warranty for an end to end permanent link horizontal and backbone subsystem of the structured cabling system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. UTP CABLE Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following manufacturer offering products to be incorporated into the Work including, but not limited to: 1. C. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company or approved equal. All UTP and fiber optic cables shall conform to ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-A Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard (latest amendment and including all applicable addenda) and ISO/IEC 11801 (International) Generic Cabling for Customer Premises standard (latest amendment and including all applicable addenda). 1. All horizontal UTP shall be Category 6 cable and shall comply with the following specification: Communications Horizontal Cabling © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1500 - 4 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site a. b. c. Pairs: 4 Insulation: Teflon or approved equal Color: 1) 2) 3) d. e. f. 2.02 A. 47.0 db @ 10 MHz 43.0 db @ 20 MHz 32.0 db @ 100 MHz 28.0 db @ 200 MHz 25.0 db @ 350MHz SRL: 1) 2) k. l. m. n. 6.5 db @ 10 MHz 9.3 db @ 20 MHZ 21.7 db @ 100 MHz 32.0 db @ 200 MHz 44.3 db @ 350 MHz Capacitance: 4.4 nF/100m @ 100 MHz DC Resistance: 9.38 Ohms/100m @ 100 MHz PS-NEXT: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) j. Voice/Data – Blue Wireless Data – Yellow Security - Red Type: 24 AWG Twisted Impedance: 100 ohms ± 15% across the band Attenuation/100m: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) g. h. i. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building 16.0 db @ 350MHz(Typical) 19.0 db @ 100MHz (minimum) ACR, NEXT Attenuation, SRL have to be specified and tested to 350MHz. Minimum ACR rating must show 8 dB improvement over TIA/EIA 568-A Standard. Minimum SRL rating must show 3 dB improvement Over TIA/EIA 568-A Standard. Must be PS-NEXT performance ETL verified to TIA/EIA 568-A and ISO/IEC 11801 UTP CABLE HARDWARE Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following manufacturer products to be incorporated into the Work including, but not limited to: 1. Ortronics or approved equal. B. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, IDC type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher. C. Cross-Connect: Modular array of connecting blocks arranged to terminate building cables and permit interconnection between cables. 1. Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables. Communications Horizontal Cabling © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1500 - 5 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site D. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Patch Panel: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered jack units with IDC-type connectors at each jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables. 1. Number of Jacks per Field: One for each four-pair UTP cable indicated, plus spares and blank positions adequate to suit specified expansion criteria. E. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: Modular, color-coded, eight-position modular receptacle units with integral IDC-type terminals. F. Patch Cords: Factory-made, 4-pair cables in quantities and lengths specified on T-drawings; terminated with 8-position modular plug at each end. 1. 2. 2.03 A. 2.04 A. 2.05 A. 2.06 A. 2.07 Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots and color-coded icons to ensure Category 6A performance. Patch cords shall have latch guards to protect against snagging. Patch cords shall have color-coded boots for circuit identification. OPTICAL FIBER CABLE NOT USED COAXIAL CABLE NOT USED CONSOLIDATION POINTS NOT USED MULTIUSER TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET ASSEMBLY (MUTOA) NOT USED TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET/CONNECTORS A. Jacks: 100-ohm, balanced, twisted-pair connector; four-pair, eight-position modular. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.1. B. Workstation Outlets: Two and Four-port-connector assemblies mounted in double gang backbox with single gang reducer fitting and single gang faceplate. 1. 2. 3. Plastic Faceplate: High-impact plastic. Coordinate color with Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices." Metal Faceplate: Stainless steel, complying with requirements in Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices." For use with snap-in jacks accommodating any combination of UTP, optical fiber, and coaxial work area cords. a. 4. 5. 6. Flush mounting jacks. Legend: Factory labeled by silk-screening or engraving for faceplates. Legend: Machine printed, in the field, using adhesive-tape label. Legend: Snap-in, clear-label covers and machine-printed paper inserts. Communications Horizontal Cabling © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1500 - 6 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 2.08 Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building GROUNDING A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" for grounding conductors and connectors. B. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A. 2.09 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers. B. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 2.10 A. 2.11 CABLE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM Refer to T-Drawings SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables. B. Factory test UTP and optical fiber cables on reels according to TIA/EIA-568-C.1. C. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA/EIA-568-C.2. D. Factory test multimode optical fiber cables according to TIA/EIA-526-14-A and TIA/EIA-568-C.2. E. Factory-sweep test coaxial cables at frequencies from 5 MHz to 1 GHz. Sweep test shall test the frequency response, or attenuation over frequency, of a cable by generating a voltage whose frequency is varied through the specified frequency range and graphing the results. F. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. G. Prepare test and inspection reports. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. 3.02 A. ENTRANCE FACILITIES NOT USED WIRING METHODS Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters and except in accessible ceiling spaces, in attics, and in gypsum board partitions where unenclosed wiring method may be used. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces. 1. 2. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." B. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible. C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools. Communications Horizontal Cabling © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1500 - 7 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 3.03 INSTALLATION OF CABLES A. Comply with NECA 1. B. General Requirements for Cabling: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. C. NOT USED Open-Cable Installation: 1. 2. 3. F. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.2. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch Optical Fiber Cable Installation: from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry. 1. E. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.1. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices." Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated. MUTOA shall not be used as a cross-connect point. Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before de-reeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating. In the communications equipment room, install a 10-foot long service loop on each end of cable. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions. UTP Cable Installation: 1. 2. D. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment. Suspend UTP cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inches above ceilings by cable supports not more than 60 inches apart. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items. Separation from EMI Sources: 1. 2. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA/EIA-569-A recommendations for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. b. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. Communications Horizontal Cabling © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1500 - 8 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site c. 3. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. b. c. 4. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches. 5. 6. 3.04 Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches. FIRESTOPPING A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." B. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A, Annex A, "Firestopping." C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article. 3.05 GROUNDING A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter. B. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A. C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall allowing at least 2inch clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar with a minimum No. 4 AW grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable electrical building ground. D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG equipment grounding conductor. 3.06 A. IDENTIFICATION Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. 2. B. Administration Class: 2. Color-code cross-connect fields. Apply colors to voice and data service backboards, connections, covers, and labels. Using cable management system software specified in Part 2, develop Cabling Administration Drawings for system identification, testing, and management. Use unique, alphanumeric designation for each cable and label cable, jacks, connectors, and terminals to which it connects with same designation. At completion, cable and asset management software shall reflect as-built conditions. Communications Horizontal Cabling © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1500 - 9 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building C. Comply with requirements in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" for painting backboards. For fireresistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label. D. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA/EIA-606-A for Class 2 level of administration, including optional identification requirements of this standard. E. Cable Schedule: Post in prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. List incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for Project. F. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration-point labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets, backbone pathways and cables, entrance pathways and cables, terminal hardware and positions, horizontal cables, work areas and workstation terminal positions, grounding buses and pathways, and equipment grounding conductors. Follow convention of TIA/EIA-606-A. Furnish electronic record of all drawings, in software and format selected by Owner. G. Cable and Wire Identification: 1. 2. 3. 4. Label each cable within 4 inches of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at device if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within panel or cabinet Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable at intervals not exceeding 15 feet. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel. a. b. 5. H. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware. Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling, use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area and font color that contrasts with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in TIA/EIA-606-A. 1. 3.07 Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips, and identify each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a building-mounted device shall be identified with name and number of particular device as shown. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flex as cables are bent. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Perform tests and inspections. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. 2. Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber cable jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA/EIA-568-C.1. Visually confirm Category 6A, marking of outlets, cover plates, outlet/connectors, and patch panels. Communications Horizontal Cabling © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1500 - 10 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 3. 4. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components. Test UTP backbone copper cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross-connection. a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-C.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration. 5. Optical Fiber Cable Tests: NOT USED 6. UTP Performance Tests: a. Test for each outlet. Perform the following tests according to TIA/EIA-568-C.1 and TIA/EIA-568-C.2: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 7. 8. 9. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Wire map. Length (physical vs. electrical, and length requirements). Insertion loss. Near-end crosstalk (NEXT) loss. Power sum near-end crosstalk (PSNEXT) loss. Equal-level far-end crosstalk (ELFEXT). Power sum equal-level far-end crosstalk (PSELFEXT). Return loss. Propagation delay. Delay skew. Optical Fiber Cable Performance Tests: NOT USED Coaxial Cable Tests: NOT USED Final Verification Tests: Perform verification tests for UTP and optical fiber systems after the complete communications cabling and workstation outlet/connectors are installed. a. b. Voice Tests: These tests assume that dial tone service has been installed. Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Go off-hook and listen and receive a dial tone. If a test number is available, make and receive a local, long distance, and digital subscription line telephone call. Data Tests: These tests assume the Information Technology Staff has a network installed and is available to assist with testing. Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Log onto the network to ensure proper connection to the network. D. Document data for each measurement. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted. E. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.08 A. DEMONSTRATION Train Owner's maintenance personnel in cable-plant management operations, including changing signal pathways for different workstations, rerouting signals in failed cables, and keeping records of cabling Communications Horizontal Cabling © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1500 - 11 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building assignments and revisions when extending wiring to establish new workstation outlets. Include training in cabling administration software. END OF SECTION Communications Horizontal Cabling © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1500 - 12 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 27-1700 – CABLE TESTING, IDENTIFICATION AND ADMINISTRATION PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings, General Conditions, and Special Conditions related to this project are found in this Division, as well as the other Divisions included in the Contract Documents. 1. 1.02 A. SCOPE OF SPECIFICATION This section includes the minimum requirements for the following: 1. 1.03 A. B. It is the obligation and responsibility of the CONTRACTOR/VENDOR to carefully read all Sections and Divisions in order to ensure compliance with this specification. Testing and Identification of both in-building and Outside Plant cabling provided under this contract. SUBMITTALS The CONTRACTOR/VENDOR shall submit product data (manufacturer catalog cut sheets) for all equipment to be used as part of their solution to the ENGINEER and shall not install any equipment until such product data sheets have been approved in writing. Upon completion of work, but before final approval, the Contractor shall submit test results and configuration information as required by each of the individual specification sections. The test results will be submitted in hard copy and CD in Word or Excel format. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. EQUIPMENT/MATERIALS TESTING Copper Cable 1. 2. 3. All Category 6 UTP cable shall be tested to a frequency of 350MHz to demonstrate compliance with the individual manufacturers advertised electrical characteristics. All Category 6 UTP cable shall be field-tested with connectivity products installed to a frequency of 250MHz to demonstrate performance equal to or better than the minimum requirements as specified in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568b.2.1 and as listed in Table The Test Model shall be Permanent Link TABLE 1 - Category 6 Permanent Link Limits in dB per ANSI/TIA/EIA-568B.2-1 Parameter Performance @ 100MHz Performance @ 200MHz 19.0 dB 27.4 dB Insertion Loss NEXT Loss 43.9 dB 39.3 dB PS NEXT Loss 41.9 dB 37.3 dB ACR 24.9 dB 11.9 dB CABLE TESTING, IDENTIFICATION AND ADMINISTRATION © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers Performance @ 250MHz 30.9 dB 37.8 dB 35.8 dB 6.9 dB Performance @ 300MHz 34.1 dB 36.6 dB 34.6 dB 2.5 dB 27-1700 - 1 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site PS ACR ELFEXT PS ELFEXT Return Loss Propagation Delay Delay Skew 4. 5. 6. 7. B. 22.9 dB 26.3 dB 23.4 dB 14.7 dB 528 ns 40 ns Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building 9.9 dB 20.3 dB 17.3 dB 11.7 dB 527 ns 40 ns 4.9 dB 18.3 dB 15.4 dB 10.7 dB 526 ns 40 ns 0.5 dB 16.8 dB 13.8 dB 9.9 dB 526 ns 40 ns All testing shall be performed with a UTP/ScTP field test device that has been factory calibrated each calendar year by the field test equipment manufacturer as stipulated by the manuals provided with the field test unit. The calibration certificate shall be provided for review prior to the start of testing. Autotest settings provided in the field tester for testing the installed cabling shall be set to the default parameters. Test settings selected from options provided in the field testers shall be compatible with the installed cable under test. UTP horizontal and backbone cables shall be 100 percent tested according to ANSI/TIA/EIATSB-67 and ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2.1. Test parameters include wire map plus shield continuity (when present), length, NEXT loss (pair-to-pair), NEXT loss (power sum), ELFEXT loss (pair-topair), ELFEXT loss (power sum), return Loss, attenuation, propagation delay, and delay skew. Single-mode Fiber Optical Cable 1. Field Tests a. Fiber Optic Cable Reel Tests. 1) 2) 2. Fiber Optic Reel tests: Perform the following tests on fiber optic cable at the job site before it is removed from the cable reel. For cables with factory installed pulling eyes, these tests shall be performed at the factory and certified test results shall accompany the media. Perform optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR) tests with media on the reels and compare factory and field test data. Reel Test Results: Provide results of reel tests to the District at least 10 working days before installation is to commence. Results shall indicate reel number of the media, manufacturer, type and number of fiber tested, and recorded readings. When reel tests indicate that the media does not comply with factory reel test results, remove the media from the job site and replace with compliant media. Fiber Optic Cable Installation Tests: a. b. c. Test all single mode fiber strands end-to-end for bi-directional attenuation (1310 nm/1550 nm for single mode fibers). Conduct tests in compliance with EIA/TIA-526-14 or OFSTP 14, Method B, according to the manufacturer’s instructions for the test set being utilized. Tests must ensure that the measured link loss for each strand does not exceed the “worst case” allowable loss defined as the sum of the connector loss (based on the number of mated connector pairs at the EIA/TIA-568 B maximum allowable loss of 0.75 dB per mated pair) and the optical loss (based on the previously-specified performance standards). After the cable is terminated, perform the following tests: CABLE TESTING, IDENTIFICATION AND ADMINISTRATION © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1700 - 2 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 1) 2) 3) 4) 3. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building After termination, test each fiber with an OTDR for length, transmission anomalies, and end-to-end attenuation. Perform the test in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-455-8-2000, Measurement of Splice or Connector Loss and Reflectance using an OTDR. Insertion Loss: An OTDR shall be used to measure splice losses and identify events such as bad or dirty connectors, fiber bends, bad splices, and mismatched core sizes. Conduct the test in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA455-34-A-2002, Interconnection Device Insertion Loss Test. Detected problems on a given link shall be corrected and then retested before proceeding with subsequent tests. Optical Power Loss (OPL) and Optical Return Loss (ORL): The specified multifunction loss tester shall be used to measure OPL and ORL on each link. The ORL shall be 26 dB minimum for single mode fiber. The maximum allowable attenuation for any splice or termination is 0.3 dB. d. Review all end faces of field terminated connectors with a fiber inspection scope following the final polish. Connector end faces with hackles, scratches, cracks, chips, or surface pitting shall be rejected and re-polished or replaced if re-polishing will not remove the end face surface defects. The recommended minimum viewing magnifications for connector ends are 200X for single mode fiber. e. Conduct surface inspection testing of each fiber connector using the DAISI interferometer. The return loss performance of UPC fiber optic connectors shall be 50 dB or higher. Surface inspection testing for manufactured connector pigtails provided with factory certification documentation is not required. Fiber Optic Network End-to-End Testing. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. General: End-to-end testing shall be performed for all links that comprise two or more link segments that are connected via splices or patch cords. In each of the following tests, inspect and clean the fiber connectors before hooking them up to the test equipment. Test patchcords and patch panels shall also be cleaned. All tests shall be performed in both directions for each end-to-end fiber link. Repeat the OTDR, OPL and ORL tests specified in Section 3.08C. All outlets, cables, patch panels and associated components shall be fully assembled and labeled prior to field-testing. Any testing performed on incomplete systems shall be redone on completion of the work. Field-test instruments shall have the latest software and firmware installed. Link and channel test results from the OLTS and OTDR shall be recorded in the test instrument upon completion of each test for subsequent uploading to a PC in which the administrative documentation (reports) may be generated. Fiber endfaces shall be inspected at 200X. Scratched, pitted or dirty connectors shall be diagnosed and corrected. It is preferable that the endface images be recorded in the memory of the test instrument for subsequent uploading to a PC and reporting. Testing shall be performed on each cabling segment (connector to connector). Testing shall be performed on each cabling channel (equipment to equipment) that is planned for use per the owner’s instructions. Testing of the cabling shall be performed using high-quality test cords of the same fiber type as the cabling under test. The test cords for OLTS testing shall be between 1 m and 5 m in length. The test cords for OTDR testing shall be approximately 100 m for the launch cable and at least 25 m for the receive cable. CABLE TESTING, IDENTIFICATION AND ADMINISTRATION © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1700 - 3 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 3. Optical loss testing a. Backbone link 1) 2) 3) 4. Fiber links shall be tested at the appropriate operating wavelengths for anomalies and to ensure uniformity of cable attenuation and connector insertion loss. 1) b. c. d. A. 3.03 A. Fibers shall be inspected at 250X or 400X magnification. 400X magnification may be used for detailed examination of singlemode fibers. The length of each fiber shall be recorded. It is preferable that the optical length be measured using an OLTS or OTDR. Polarity Testing a. 3.02 Each fiber link and channel shall be tested in both directions. A launch cable shall be installed between the OTDR and the first link connection. A receive cable shall be installed after the last link connection. Length Measurement a. b. 7. Singlemode: 1310 nm and 1550 nm Magnified Endface Inspection a. 6. Singlemode backbone links shall be tested at 1310 nm and 1550 nm in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-7, Method A.1, One Reference Jumper or the equivalent method. Link attenuation does not include any active devices or passive devices other than cable, connectors, and splices, i.e. link attenuation does not include such devices as optical bypass switches, couplers, repeaters, or optical amplifiers. Use the One Reference Jumper Method specified by ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-14A, Method B and ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-7, Method A.1 or the equivalent method. The user shall follow the procedures established by these standards or application notes to accurately conduct performance testing. OTDR Testing a. 5. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Paired duplex fibers in multi-fiber cables shall be tested to verify polarity in accordance with Clause E.5.3 of ANSI/TIA-568-C.0. The polarity of the paired duplex fibers shall be verified using an OLTS. IDENTIFICATION Labeling: Labeling shall conform to the requirements specified within ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A or to the requirements specified by the Owner or the Owner’s representative. ADMINISTRATION Test results documentation 1. Test results saved within the field-test instrument shall be transferred into a Windows™-based database utility that allows for the maintenance, inspection and archiving of the test records. CABLE TESTING, IDENTIFICATION AND ADMINISTRATION © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1700 - 4 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 2. 3. 4. 5. These test records shall be uploaded to the PC unaltered, i.e., “as saved in the field-test instrument”. The file format, CSV (comma separated value), does not provide adequate protection of these records and shall not be used. The test results documentation shall be available for inspection by the Owner or the Owner’s representative during the installation period and shall be passed to the Owner's representative within 5 working days of completion of tests on cabling served by a telecommunications room or of backbone cabling. The installer shall retain a copy to aid preparation of as-built information. The database for the complete project, including twisted-pair copper cabling links, if applicable, shall be stored and delivered on CD-ROM prior to Owner acceptance of the building. This CDROM shall include the software tools required to view, inspect, and print any selection of the test reports. Circuit IDs reported by the test instrument should match the specified label ID (see 3.3 of this Section). The detailed test results documentation data is to be provided in an electronic database for each tested optical fiber and shall contain the following information: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. B. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building The identification of the customer site as specified by the end-user The name of the test limit selected to execute the stored test results The name of the personnel performing the test The date and time the test results were saved in the memory of the tester The manufacturer, model and serial number of the field-test instrument The version of the test software and the version of the test limit database held within the test instrument The fiber identification number The length for each optical fiber Test results to include OLTS attenuation link and channel measurements at the appropriate wavelength(s) and the margin (difference between the measured attenuation and the test limit value). Test results to include OTDR link and channel traces and event tables at the appropriate wavelength(s). The length for each optical fiber as calculated by the OTDR. The overall Pass/Fail evaluation of the link-under-test for OLTS and OTDR measurements Record copy and as-built drawings 1. 2. Provide record copy drawings periodically through out the project as requested by the Construction Manager or Owner, and at end of the project on CD-ROM. Record copy drawings at the end of the project shall be in CAD format and include notations reflecting the as built conditions of any additions to or variation from the drawings provided such as, but not limited to cable paths and termination point. CAD drawings are to incorporate test data imported from the test instruments. The as-built drawings shall include, but are not limited to block diagrams, frame and cable labeling, cable termination points, equipment room layouts and frame installation details. The as-builts shall include all field changes made up to construction completion: a. b. c. d. e. Field directed changes to pull schedule. Field directed changes to cross connect and patching schedule. Horizontal cable routing changes. Backbone cable routing or location changes. Associated detail drawings. END OF SECTION CABLE TESTING, IDENTIFICATION AND ADMINISTRATION © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-1700 - 5 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 27-3226 - EMERGENCY TELEPHONES (E-Phones) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. 1.02 A. 1.03 OVERVIEW Emergency telephones shall be meant to operate as ring-down telephones, contacting the Ocean County College Campus Police call center when activated. PURPOSE This specification provides requirements for procurement and installation of Emergency Telephone for the new OCC Health Sciences Building. GENERAL DESCRIPTION A. The Emergency Phone shall be a vandal resistant, hands free speaker phone communications device that is Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) compliant. The unit shall be wall mounted and constructed of heavy gauge steel. B. The Emergency phone shall be a Viking Electronics model E-1600A, or approved equal, and have a momentary tactile push button switch labeled “PUSH FOR HELP” and a red LED light labeled “CALL CONNECTED”. The unit shall be designed so a single push of the button will initiate automatic dialing of a up to 5 preprogrammed telephone numbers and or up to two Central Station receiver numbers. The phone will continue to cycle through the programmed phone numbers until answered. Upon answering, the unit shall be capable of playing up to a 16 second voice message to identify the location of the emergency call and light the call connected LED light. The caller shall be able to converse hands free with the called party (emergency personal). The unit shall be phone line powered with non-volatile memory requiring no battery back-up. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONSTRUCTION A. The chassis shall be constructed of 16 gauge cold rolled steel. B. The finish shall be bright red polyester wrinkle powder paint. C. The labeling shall be silk screened with bright white U.V. stable silk screen ink. D. The signage shall be constructed of 0.032 inch thick aluminum with 0.625 inch tall “HELP” letters for the push button switch, Braille embossed to the height of approximately 0.025 inch and symbols/letters embossed to a height of approximately 0.032 inch for ADA 2002 compliance. E. The chassis shall measure 4.00” W x 5.25” H x 2.00” D. F. The push button switch shall have an electrical life of 500,000 cycles. G. The speaker and microphone shall be protected by a louvered front panel and a screen to provide a barrier against vandalism and moisture. H. The bottom of the chassis shall provide a knock out for a conduit connector. 2.02 MOUNTING Emergency Telephones (E-Phones) © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-3226 - 1 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site A. 2.03 Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building The unit shall attach to a single gang electrical box, a 4” x 4” electrical junction box, recessed into an elevator phone box or mount directly to a flat surface of a wall or pole. ELECTRICAL A. The unit shall be telephone line powered, requiring no battery back up. B. The unit shall require one dedicated twisted pair communication wire. 26 AWG minimum. C. The unit shall require a minimum loop current of 20mA and a minimum Talk Battery voltage of 24VDC. 2.04 FEATURES A. All programming shall be stored in non-volatile memory (no batteries required). B. Unit shall have advanced call progress detection, allowing for automatic redialing, automatic “Call Connected” light and automatic digital voice and Touch Tone location identification. C. Unit shall be capable of Touch Tone or Pulse dialing. D. Unit shall have hands free VOX speaker phone operation. E. Unit shall be phone line powered. F. Unit shall be programmable from a remote telephone via Touch Tone keypad entry. G. Unit shall capable of dialing up to five 20 digit phone numbers. H. Unit shall be capable of dialing one 20 digit Central Monitoring Station receiver number and one 20 digit Central Monitoring Station voice number. I. Unit shall automatically hang up on CPC (Calling Party Control), silence, busy signal, return to dial tone, time-out or a Touch Tone command. J. Unit shall remain operational within a temperature range of -15°F to 130°F. K. Unit shall be programmable to automatically answer incoming calls. L. Unit shall have up to 16 seconds of non-volatile digital voice record time for location identification. M. Unit shall have a programmable 6 digit security code for accessing the programming mode. N. Unit shall have a programmable VOX switching speed from .1 to .9 seconds. O. Unit shall have a programmable maximum call time of 1 to 9 minutes or disabled. P. Unit shall have a programmable silence time out from 10 to 90 seconds or disabled. Q. Unit shall have a dial next number on ring no answer feature, programmable to dial the next number after 2 to 9 rings or disabled. R. Unit shall have a programmable enable or disable dial next number on busy feature. Emergency Telephones (E-Phones) © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-3226 - 2 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building S. Unit shall have a programmable pulse dialing speed of 10 or 20 pulses per second. T. Unit shall have a programmable announcement delay from 1 to 99 seconds or disabled (automatic play back). U. Unit shall have a programmable announcement repeat from 1 to 9 times or every 8 seconds. V. Unit shall have a programmable Touch Tone identification number from 1 to 20 digits or disabled. W. Unit shall have a call connected LED programmable to light automatically when the call is answered or only light after a Touch Tone * is detected from the distant party. Unit shall have volume adjustment controls for the speaker and microphone. X. Y. Unit shall have a dip switch selection allowing the push button to connect calls only or alternately connect and disconnect calls. Z. Unit shall have a dip switch selection for automatically answering incoming calls or not answering incoming calls. AA. Unit shall have a dip switch selection for placing the unit in the learn mode where answered incoming calls are automatically entered into the programming mode without a security code. BB. Unit shall be compatible with the following 4 different Central Monitoring Station formats: Ademco Contact ID, Ademco High Speed, 4 + 1 Express, and 4 + 2 Express. CC. Unit shall comply with Part 68 of the FCC rules for the United States. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 1 MATERIALS AND STANDARDS A. Materials. The materials used for this system are to be manufacturer and part number specific with no substitutions. B. Standards. All work shall be in accordance with the latest edition of all applicable campus, State, and Federal regulations and codes, and with manufacturer recommendations. C. Emergency telephone installation. The telephone unit should be installed to meet all ADA height and accessibility requirements. A ¾conduit should be installed from the bottom of the telephone unit to the nearest telecommunications wireway. The contractor should install one four pair, Category 3 UTP cable from the MDF/IDF to the telephone unit. This cable should be installed unterminated with 5 feet of cable coiled up inside the telephone unit and 50 feet of cable coiled and neatly attached to the wall of the MDF/IDF. This cable should be tagged on both ends clearly as “Emergency Telephone # 1, # 2 …” D. Emergency telephone will be terminated at both ends of the cables as follows. The station end will be terminated on the appropriate terminals within the telephone unit. At the MDF/IDF end the cables will be terminated on the terminal block. . END OF SECTION Emergency Telephones (E-Phones) © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-3226 - 3 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 27-3226.01 – EMERGENCY BLUE LIGHT TELEPHONES PART 1 - GENERAL DESCRIPTION 1.01 The unit shall be a vandal-resistant communications device that is a multi-functional, freestanding pedestal constructed of carbon steel, model CB 1-d from Code Blue Corporation, or approved equal. It shall include a high quality, hands-free communications device illuminated by a high intensity faceplate light, with a second faceplate available for multiple uses. It also shall be illuminated by a powerful combination blue beacon/strobe and an area light that serve to easily identify it from a distance. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 CONSTRUCTION A. The unit shall be a cylinder constructed of ASTM A500 seamless carbon steel structural tube, schedule 20, 12.75” outside diameter x 0.25” thick wall, at a height of 108” and weigh approximately 330 lbs. B. The unit shall have an internal anchor base plate that is MIG welded 2” above the base and fabricated with a minimum of 0.50” thick A-36 grade steel plate. It shall have a 5” diameter center hole for electrical conduit access. The base plate shall have four oblong holes on an 8” circular bolt pattern for attachment. C. An access door measuring 14” H x 9.64” W will be placed 10.94” from the bottom of the base to provide access for mounting to the anchor bolts and connectivity to electrical facilities. The opening shall have a cover plate, which mounts flush and is the same steel and radius as the unit. The cover plate shall fit into the opening and have a weather-resistant gasket. The cover plate shall be held in place by two ¼-20 x 1” countersunk proprietary fasteners. D. Tamper resistant proprietary fasteners provided the Manufacturer shall be used. It shall not be possible to acquire the custom-designed bit from any other source. E. Two area light openings 10” high and 17” wide with 153 degrees of arc shall be cut opposite each other, with the bottom of the openings approximately 14” from the top. 1. F. A recessed opening shall be cut at a point beginning 36.6” above the bottom of the unit. The opening shall be 27.5” tall at the forward edge and 25.2” tall at the rear edge, creating a 25-degree angle from the horizontal and an arc of 160 degrees in the face. 1. 2.02 A heavy cylindrical lens made of clear UV-rated polycarbonate shall be mechanically and chemically fastened to the interior. The lens shall be fully sealed and treated to prevent damage from ultra-violet radiation, aging, cracking, yellowing or breaking. The opening shall be enclosed by a 7 gauge steel plate with a dual opening for a communication device and an additional faceplate available for directory listings, camera, card reader or other mounted device. MOUNTING A. The unit shall be mounted onto four anchor bolts that are set .50” above the concrete. Standard 0.75” x 24” galvanized steel anchor bolts, nuts and washers shall be supplied. B. The concrete foundation shall measure 24” x 24” minimum and the anchor bolts shall protrude 6” from the foundation. Emergency Blue Light Telephones  2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-3226.01 - 1 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site C. 2.03 Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Unit shall include a weather-resistant, vented rubberized gasket mounted into the base to prevent entry of sediment and pests. ELECTRICAL A. All electrical components shall have a modular plug for easy service and replacement, and will be equipped with a fuse for protection from transient voltage conditions. B. Requires 2.5 ampere at 24V AC. C. Voltage options shall include: 12-24V AC/DC; 120, 240, 277 and 347V AC. 2.04 A. LIGHTS LED Beacon/Strobe: Located in the dome top assembly with a rating of no less than 270 Lumens/92 candela, it shall have a factory-set flash rate of up to 375 flashes per minute and be programmable. A deep blue UV-rated polycarbonate prismatic refractor shall surround the LED Beacon/Strobe and be used to distribute the light in a horizontal pattern for maximum brightness and visibility. 1. 2. B. Area Light: The LED Area Light shall be protected within the two light openings by a .13" thick UV-rated polycarbonate lens and be used to distribute light in a horizontal and vertical pattern. 1. 2. 3. C. A reflector disk shall be mounted above to direct light outward and downward. It shall measure 17” W x 10” H, with the opening 14” from the top and an arc of 153 degrees. It shall have a Lumen rating of 852. Faceplate light: LED will direct light onto the communications device and be vandal resistant. 1. 2. 2.05 The communication device shall be factory programmed to activate the LED Beacon/Strobe for the duration of a call. The LED Beacon/Strobe shall be 5.10” tall and 5.50” in diameter. The opening shall measure 4.50” W x .50” H. The light shall have a lifetime of 100,000 hours and a rating of 100 Lumens. COMMUNICATIONS A. The unit shall have a speakerphone communication device. B. The unit shall communicate via IP wireless communication. 2.06 FINISH A. Four-coat paint process, with zinc-rich primer for corrosion resistance and baked-on polyurethane enamel for maximum gloss and shine. B. Substrate preparation shall be as required to comply with applicable ASTM impact and adhesion standards: D2794 Direct and Reverse Impact, D523 Gloss @ 60 Degrees, D3359B Cross hatch Adhesion, D1654 Corrosion Creep, D714 Scribe Blisters and D714 Field Blisters. C. The finish shall be available in 12 standard colors: Safety Blue, Safety Red, Safety Yellow, Midnight Blue, Gloss White, Gloss Black, Medium Bronze, Dark Bronze, British Racing Green, Cardinal Red, Bright Silver and Tiger Orange. Custom colors shall be available. D. Minimum coverage thickness of 2.0 mils. Emergency Blue Light Telephones  2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-3226.01 - 2 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 2.07 COMPLIANCE A. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) compliant B. UL 60950-1 and UL 2017 listed C. NFPA 72 Chapter 24 (2010) compliant D. Meets NEMA 4X and IP56 requirements 2.08 Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building GRAPHICS A. Engineering grade reflective vinyl for high visibility and legibility. B. Standard 3.25” tall and 30” long text offerings: Emergency, Assistance, Security, Courtesy, Police, Information or Help Point. C. Standard graphics color offerings: Reflective White, Reflective Blue, Reflective Black, Reflective Green, Reflective Red and Reflective Yellow. D. Custom text, length and color options shall be available. 2.09 A. WARRANTY The CB 1-d shall be warrantied against any defects in material and workmanship, under normal use, for a period of 2 years from date of installation. If system is found by manufacturer to be defective within the warranty period, manufacturer shall repair and/or replace any defective parts, provided the equipment is returned to manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. CONDITIONS Inspection 1. 2. 3.2 Identify electrical and power conduit runs. Identify Telecom terminations. INSTALLATION A. Locate as per plan or specific project requirements. B. Set stanchion anchors with plywood template. C. Install phones on concrete bases. D. Ensure access to the keypad/emergency call button meets ADA guidelines. E. Ensure phone is facing pathway. F. Install stanchion plumb and level. Emergency Blue Light Telephones  2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-3226.01 - 3 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site G. 3.3 A. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Prior to phone start-up, cover beacon and phone with black plastic to indicate that phone is not in operation. START UP The installing contractor will set the stanchion and verify the operation of the lights. END OF SECTION Emergency Blue Light Telephones  2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-3226.01 - 4 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 27-5300 - AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary. Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall provide and install all the systems and equipment specified herein. B. Section Includes: Classroom Audio Visual system with the following components: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 1.03 Ceiling mounted projector. Interactive projector. Video Control Systems. Projectors mounting hardware. Blueray/DVD/VCR combination unit. Local audio power amplifier and speakers. Conductors and cables. Raceways. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated including detail cut sheets. B. Shop Drawings: For intercommunications and program systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. 2. 3. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Include scaled drawings for master station that detail built-in equipment. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring and rough-in diagrams. a. b. c. Identify terminals to facilitate installation, operation, and maintenance. Single-line diagram showing interconnection of components. Cabling diagram showing cable routing. C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved. D. Installer must present proof of qualifications. E. Field quality-control reports. F. Installation, Operation and Maintenance Data: For intercommunications and program systems to include in operation and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. A record of Owner's equipment-programming option decisions. Audio Visual Systems and Equipment © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-5300 - 1 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 1.04 Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. Installation must comply with manufacturers’ instructions. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70), latest ANSI TIA/EIA-568, 569, 606, 607 standards and latest BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manuals (TDMM) D. Contractor to consult manufacturers’ documentation and recommendations on equipment installation for best results and safe working. 1.05 COORDINATION A. Contractor is responsible to coordinate all work with General Contractor, contractors of other trades and Owner. B. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted speaker microphones with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies. 1.06 WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE A. The contractor shall warranty the equipment to be new and free from defects in material and workmanship and shall repair or replace defective equipment for two years from the date of acceptance by Owner. This warranty shall include all material, labor, wiring, connectors, boxes, enclosures, coordination with manufacturers etc. for a full replacement of a defective equipment, device and or system. B. The contractor shall provide factory repair service and or replacement for all equipment for full one year. The contractor shall provide replacement component and installation by service personnel for one year. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION A. Use ceiling mounted projector, wall mounted short throw interactive projector, or LCD flat screen display as specified in drawings, for presenting A/V applications. B. Provide necessary outlet boxes and connectors at indicated adjacent to main desk and at Projector location for connections to Computer as specified in drawings. C. Provide compatible cables and wires for a complete system D. Provide integral Extron control system in each class room. 2.02 A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS Coordinate features and select components to form an integrated system. Match components and interconnections for optimum performance of specified functions. Audio Visual Systems and Equipment © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-5300 - 2 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site B. 2.03 A. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Equipment: Modular type using solid-state components, fully rated for continuous duty unless otherwise indicated. Select equipment for normal operation on input power usually supplied at 110 to 130 V, 60 Hz. VIDEO DISPLAYS The following Ceiling Mounted Projector shall be provided in designated locations (Rooms 104, 105, 106, 107, 118, 215, 300, 309, 325): Epson Powerlight 4750w Projector or approved equal. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Projection System: High-aperture Epson 3-chip 3LCD technology Projection Method: Front / rear / ceiling mount Driving Method: Epson Poly-silicon TFT Active Matrix Pixel Number: 1,024,000 pixel (1280 x 800) x 3 Color Brightness (Color Light Output): 4200 lumens1 White Brightness (White Light Output): 4200 lumens1 Aspect Ratio: Supports 4:3, 16:9, 16:10 Native Resolution: 1280 x 800 (WXGA) Resize: 640 x 480, 800 x 600, 1280 x 1024, 1400 x 1050 Lamp Type: 280 UHE Lamp Life: a. b. 12. 13. 14. Brightness Uniformity: 90% Pixel Arrangement: Cross stripe Effective Scanning Frequency Range: a. b. c. 15. 16. 17. Pixel Clock: 13.5 MHz – 162 MHz (up to UXGA 60 Hz) Horizontal: 15 KHz – 92 KHz Vertical: 50 Hz – 85 Hz Throw Ratio Range: 1.27 – 2.59 Size (projected distance): 30" – 300" Keystone Correction: a. b. 18. 19. 20. 21. Normal mode: Up to 4000 hours2 ECO mode: Up to 5000 hours2 Horizontal: ±30 degrees Vertical: ±30 degrees Contrast Ratio: High Brightness, Dynamic mode: 5000:1 Color Reproduction: Up to 1.07 billion colors Color Processing: 10 bit Projection Lens: a. b. c. d. e. Type: Manual focus / Zoom F-number: 1.50 – 2.14 Focal Length: 16.72 mm – 33.47 mm Zoom Ratio: Optical zoom 1.0x – 2.0x Lens Shift: 1) 2) 22. Horizontal: ±38 degrees Vertical: ±70 degrees Display Performance: Audio Visual Systems and Equipment © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-5300 - 3 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site a. b. 23. 33. Normal mode: 38 dB ECO mode: 32 dB Security: a. b. c. 30. 31. 32. Normal mode: 409 W ECO mode: 311 W Communication on: 4.3 W standby Communication off: 0.41 W standby Fan Noise: a. b. 29. HDMI x 1 DisplayPort x 1 Computer: D-sub 15 pin x 1 Video 1: 5-BNC x 1 Video-2: RCA x 1 Composite video: BNC x 1 S-Video x 1 Audio-in: Mini stereo x 3 Audio-in: RCA (L&R) x 1 Network: RJ-45 x 1, 1,100 Mbps USB Type-A x 1, Type-B x 1 Serial: RS-232c x 1 Hardwire remote jack x 1 Monitor-Out: D-sub 15 pin x 1 Operating Temperature: 32° to 113° F (0° to 45° C) Power Supply Voltage: 100 – 240 V ±10%, 50/60 Hz AC Power Consumption: a. b. c. d. 28. NTSC / NTSC4.43 / PAL / M-PAL / N-PAL / PAL60 / SECAM 480i / 576i / 480p / 576p / 720p / 1080i / 1080p Pixel works: video chip 3D Y / C separation, noise reduction motion compensated Interlace-Progressive conversion (2 – 2, 3 – 2 film detection) Interfaces: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. 25. 26. 27. NTSC: 480 line PAL: 576 line Input Signal: a. b. c. d. e. 24. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Security Cable Hole Lens lock, Kensington® lock provision Dimensions:18.58" x 12.60" x 5.28" (W x D x H) Weight: Weight with standard Lens 14.3 lbs. Remote Control Features: Power, source search selection, computer, video, A/V mute, freeze, user ID, auto, aspect, color mode, number, page up and down, E-zoom, volume, help, menu, enter, esc and pointer functions. Operating Angle: a. Right / Left: Audio Visual Systems and Equipment © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-5300 - 4 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site b. c. d. e. f. 34. 35. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Front: ±60 degrees Rear: ±30 degrees Upper / Lower: Front: ±20 degrees Rear: +10 to +45 degrees Operating Distance: 49 ft. Mounting: Refer to T-Drawings and Section 11131. B. HD format projection screen(s), shall have H:54” x W:96” (110” Diagonal) viewing area (103-5⁄16" wide case). The screen shall be capable of being wall and ceiling mounted (refer to floor plans). The screens shall have black masking borders standard on flame retardant and mildew resistant fiberglass fabric, mounted on a ball bearing rigid steel spring roller. Fabric to be permanently attached to roller. The case shall be powder coated white 21-gauge steel with flat back design. The case shall have heavy-duty end caps concealing roller ends with steel inner plates to support roller and provide added case strength. End caps shall form sturdy brackets for wall or ceiling installations. Bottom of screen shall be formed into pocket holding tubular metal slat. A steel pull bail shall be attached to the slat. The ends of the slat shall be protected by heavy duty plastic caps. Bumper stops shall be built into case to prevent slat wedging inside case. A 6' pull cord with plastic knob is included. The screen viewing surface shall be Matte White. C. The following Wall Mounted Short-throw Interactive Projector shall be provided in designated locations (Rooms 313, 315, 316): Epson Brightlink 585WI (or latest evolutuion) or approved equal. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. Projection System: 3LCD, 3-chip technology Projection Method: Front/rear/wall mount/table Driving Method: Poly-silicon TFT Active Matrix Pixel Number: 1,024,000 dots (1280 x 800) x 3 Color Brightness (Color Light Output): 3300 lumens1 White Brightness (White Light Output): 3300 lumens1 Interactive Color Brightness (Color Light Output): 3300 lumens1 Interactive White Brightness (White Light Output): 3300 lumens1 Aspect Ratio: 16:10 Native Resolution: 1280 x 800 (WXGA) Lamp Type: E-TORL™ 245 W UHE Lamp Life: a. b. 13. Throw Ratio Range: a. b. c. 14. (4:3) 0.33 – 0.44 (16:10) 0.27 – 0.37 (16:9) 0.27 – 0.37 Size (projected distance): a. b. c. 15. ECO mode: Up to 6,000 hours 2 Normal mode: Up to 4,000 hours 2 (4:3) 53" – 88" (16:10) 60" – 100" (16:9) 59" – 97" Keystone Correction: Manual a. b. Vertical: ±3 degrees Horizontal: ±3 degrees Audio Visual Systems and Equipment © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-5300 - 5 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 16. USB Plug 'n Play: a. b. 17. 18. 19. 20. Normal mode: 376 W Communication on: 4.3 W standby Communication off: 0.33 W standby Fan Noise: a. b. 29. HDMI x1 HDMI/MHL x1 Computer / Component video: D-sub 15 pin x 2 S-video: Mini DIN x 1 Composite video: RCA (Yellow) x 1 Audio in: Mini stereo x 3 USB connector: Type B x 1 (USB display, audio and mouse control) USB connector: Type A x 1 (USB memory / document camera) RJ-45 x 1 Serial: RS-232c x 1 Monitor Out: D-sub 15 pin x 1 Audio out: Mini stereo x 1 Microphone: Mini stereo x 1 Wireless LAN port: 802.11 b/g/n (optional – module sold separately) Interactive Synchronization Mini stereo In Interactive Synchronization Mini stereo Out Speaker: 16 W mono Operating Temperature: 41° to 95° F (5° C to 35° C) Power Supply Voltage: 100 – 240V ±10%, 50 / 60Hz Power Consumption: a. b. c. 28. NTSC: 480 lines PAL: 576 lines Input Signal: NTSC / NTSC4.43 / PAL / M-PAL / N-PAL / PAL60 / SECAM Interfaces: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. 24. 25. 26. 27. Type: Manual focus F-number: 1.80 Focal Length: 3.71 mm Zoom Ratio: Digital zoom 1.0 – 1.35x Display Performance: a. b. 22. 23. Mac OS® 10.5 / 10.6 / 10.7 / 10.8 / 10.9 Windows 2000 XP / Windows Vista® / Windows 7 / Windows 8 Contrast Ratio: Up to 10,000:1 Color Reproduction: Up to 1.07 billion colors Color Processing: 10 bit Projection Lens: a. b. c. d. 21. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building ECO mode: 28 dB Normal mode: 35 dB Security: Audio Visual Systems and Equipment © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-5300 - 6 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site a. b. c. 30. 31. 32. 33. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. Kensington® lock provision Security anchor bar Password protection function Dimensions (Excluding feet): 14.5" x 14.8" x 6.1" (W x D x H) Weight: 12.1 lbs. Remote Control Features: Computer, video, USB, LAN, source search, power, aspect, color mode, volume, e-zoom, A / V mute, freeze, menu, help, auto, enter, esc, pointer, user Operating Angle: a. b. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. Right / Left: -55 to +55 degrees Upper / Lower: +75 to +15 degrees Operating Distance: 19.7' (6 m) Interactive Technology: Infrared, 940nm Interactive Area: 60 – 100" diagonal (16:10, WXGA) Interactive Modes: Interactive and Whiteboard modes annotation, dual user Calibration Method: Automatic or Manual Interactive Connectivity: USB cable for non-networked & LAN System Compatibility: Microsoft Windows XP SP2, Windows XP SP3 (Home Edition/Professional), Windows Vista, Windows Vista SP1, Windows Vista SP2 (All editions except for Starter), Windows 8.x, Windows 7 SP1 (All editions except for Starter) Mac OS X 10.5/10.6/10.7/10.8/10.9 PC-Free Annotation: dual user Devices:Document Cameras, DVD / Blu-Ray Disc player, iPod / iPad devices3 PC-Free Annotation Tools: Epson Easy Interactive Tools, dual user PC-Free Annotation Sources: USB, HDMI, Computer 1, Computer 2, LAN Interactive Software: a. Requirements: 1) 2) 3) 4) 46. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Epson Easy Interactive Driver (Mac only) Windows and Linux: no driver required Macintosh: Mac OS X 10.5/10.6/10.7/10.8/10.9 Epson Easy Interactive Tools for Windows and Macintosh Other Software: a. SMART Notebook 1) 2) b. Windows: Pentium® 4 processor or better, 2 GB of RAM, 2.5 GB of free hard disk space for SMART® education software installation (an additional 600 MB is required for complete Gallery installation) Windows XP SP3, Windows 7 SP1 or Windows 8 operating system Macintosh: Intel® CoreTM 2 Duo processor or better, 2 GB of RAM, 2 GB of free hard disk space for SMART education software installation (an additional 600 MB is required for complete Gallery installation) Mac OS X 10.7 or 10.8 operating system software Promethean ActivInspire 1) Windows: Recommended Specs: 2.0 GHz Intel Core 2 Duo or faster for HDquality videos, 1GB of RAM is required to play HD-quality videos, 1024 x 768 resolution, 1.5 GB of free disk space; Minimum Specs: Pentium 4 – 1GHz (800MHz for Vista), 512MB of RAM, 1024 x 768 resolution, 1.5GB of free disk space; Audio Visual Systems and Equipment © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-5300 - 7 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 2) 47. Macintosh: Recommended Specs: 2.0GHz Intel Core 2 Duo, 512MB of RAM, 1024 x 768 resolution, 3.0GB of free disk space; Minimum Specs: Intel Processors (Universal Binary), 512MB of RAM, 1024 x 768 resolution, 3.0GB of free disk space Interactive Input Device a. b. c. d. e. f. D. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Type of Interactive Input Device: Digital Pen Interactive Pen Functions: Mouse functions (left and right click), Electronic pen, LED battery status indicator Interactive Pen Power: AA battery, rechargeable Compatible Pen Battery Types: SANYO Eneloop® HR-3UTG/HR-UTGA (Eneloop batteries included. Eneloop is registered trademark of Sanyo Electronic Co. Ltd., Manganese dry cell, alkaline dry cell Interactive Pen Dimensions: 6.4" x 0.94" Interactive Pen Weight: 1.1 oz (without battery) 50” Class LED Screen VIZIO E50-C1 LED Smart HDTV or approved equal. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Diagonal: 49.50 inches Color: Black Cable(s) Included: Power Digital Tuner ENERGY STAR Certified a. b. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. Estimated Annual Electricity Use (max.): 112 kilowatt hours Estimated Annual Operating Cost (max.)12 United States dollars Number Of Component Video Inputs: 1 Number Of Composite Video Inputs: 1 Number Of HDMI Inputs: 3 Number Of Speakers: 2 Number Of USB Port(s): 1 Product Depth Without Stand: 2.52 inches Product Height Without Stand: 25.91 inches Product Width Without Stand: 44.24 inches Approximate Product Weight Without Stand: 27.56 pounds Refresh Rate: 120Hz Remote Control Type: Smart Maximum Resolution: 1920 x 1080 Smart Capable Instant Content Supported Display Type: LED Vertical Resolution: 1080p VESA Wall Mount Standard: 300mm x 300mm Video Input(s): Component video, Composite video, Ethernet, HDMI, USB Horizontal Viewing Angle: 178 degrees Local Dimming Minimum Contrast Ratio (Dynamic): 5000000 Network Compatibility: Built-in Wi-Fi Number Of Analog Audio Outputs: 1 Number Of Digital Optical Audio Outputs: 1 Wall Mount: Refer to T-Drawings and Section 11131 Audio Visual Systems and Equipment © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-5300 - 8 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 2.04 Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building A/V SOURCES A. CD/DVD/BLU-RAY PLAYER SHALL MEET THE FOLLOWING SPECIFICATIONS Provide in designated locations (Rooms 104, 105, 106, 108, 107, 118, 215, 300, 309, 313, 315, 316, 325): 1. Playback Capability: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. BD (Blu-ray Disc) Reading Speed: 4.917m/sec DVD (Digital Versatile Disc) Reading Speed: 3.49 ~ 4.06 m/sec. Play Time (Single Sided, Single Layer Disc): 135 min. CD: 5 inches (COMPACT DISC): Reading Speed: 4.8 ~ 5.6 m/sec. Maximum Play Time: 74 min. CD: 3 1/2 inches (COMPACT DISC) Reading Speed: 4.8 ~ 5.6 m/sec. Maximum Play Time: 20 min. 1) 2) 2. Video Output: a. Composite Video: 1) 2) 3. HDMI=1080p, 1080i, 720p, 480p PCM multichannel audio, Bit stream audio Audio Output: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) B. Blu-ray/DVD Disc: 480i Component Video: Blu-ray Disc: 480i Video/Audio: a. b. 4. Reading Speed: 4.8 ~ 5.6 m/sec. Maximum Play Time: 74 min. Two channel left & right Digital Audio output: Optical S/N Ratio: 110 dB Dynamic Range: 100 dB Total Harmonic: Distortion 0.003% Acceptable Manufacturer: Sony or approved equal. Wireless Presentation System - Provide and install wireless presentation gateway in designated locations (Rooms 104, 105, 106, 107, 108, 118, 215, 300, 309, 313, 315, 316, 325) with following specifications: 1. 2. Processor: 400MHz Standards: a. b. 3. 4. IEEE 802.11b/g/n 2.4GHz IEEE 802.3 (10BASE-T), IEEE 802.3u (100BASE-TX) Security: IEEE Standard 64/128 bit WEP/WPA/WPA2-PSK/WPA-Enterprise Management: a. Web-Based ADMIN Panel Configuration Audio Visual Systems and Equipment © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-5300 - 9 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site b. 5. 2.05 A. SVGA (800x600), XGA (1024x768), WXGA (1280x768) WXGA (1280x800), WXGA (1360x768), WXGA+ (1440x900), UXGA (1600x1200) Output Resolutions (HDMI): 720p (1280x720), 1080i (1920x1080), 1080p (1920x1080) Supported Windows Operating Systems: Windows XP, Vista, 7, 8, 8.1 Supported OS X Operating Systems: Mac OS X 10.5 and above Supported Mobile Operating Systems: Android 2.2 and above, iOS 3.2 and above Power: External power adapter (DC 5V 2.6A) Onboard Interfaces: a. b. c. d. e. f. 12. SNMP IT Management Output Resolutions (VGA): a. b. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building 15Pin VGA HDMI RJ-45 USB 2.0 (x3) Reset Button Stereo Phone Jack Acceptable Manufacturer: wePresent WiPG-1500 or approved equal. A/V CONTROL SYSTEM in designated locations (Rooms 104, 105, 106, 107, 108, 118, 215, 300, 309, 313, 315, 316, 325): Provide a video scaling presentation switcher that shall support up to six inputs and two outputs for processing and switching of HDMI, HDTV, RGB, and composite video sources. 1. Rack-mountable scaler and switcher for HDMI, HDTV, RGB, and composite video sources and associated digital and analog audio. a. Video Input Requirements: 1) Provide video input connections. a) b) 2) Four HDMI Two 15-pin HD, configurable for RGB, component video, S-video, or composite video Provide automatic detection of input video parameters. a) Determine total pixels, active pixels, active lines, H/V starting points, H/V image positions, H/V image sizes, and video clock phase. The user may selectively enable or disable automatic detection for each input. b) 3) 4) Provide image adjustments for brightness, contrast, color, tint, detail, H/V positioning, and sizing. Provide storage and recall of video parameters and picture settings. a) Automatic memories for each video input i. ii. Audio Visual Systems and Equipment © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers Save video settings and picture adjustments without user intervention. Automatically recall settings when the same video rate is encountered. 27-5300 - 10 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building iii. b) The user may selectively enable or disable automatic memories. Manual user presets: i. ii. iii. c) Manual input presets: i. ii. 5) 7) b. Save video settings and picture adjustments. Input presets may be saved and recalled electronically via Ethernet, RS-232, or USB connection. Provide enhanced decoding of composite video. a) b) 6) Save picture adjustments. User presets may be saved and recalled using front panel controls. User presets may be saved and recalled electronically via Ethernet, RS-232, or USB connection. Decoder shall include a temporal, 3D adaptive comb filter. Support NTSC 3.58, NTSC 4.43, PAL, and SECAM formats. Support HDMI specifications including 1080p/60 Deep Color, data rates up to 6.75 Gbps, and HD lossless audio formats. Provide automatic 3:2 and 2:2 pulldown detection. Video Output Requirements: 1) Provide simultaneous video output connections. a) 2) 3) 4) Two HDMI Provide a range of selectable video output rates from 640x480 to 1920x1200, including HDTV 1080p/60 and 2048x1080p/60. Provide image scaling and video format conversion at 30-bit precision and support 1080i deinterlacing. Provide aspect ratio control. a) b) When in FILL mode, the video image shall always fill the output screen without letterbox or pillarbox. When in FOLLOW mode, the video image on the output screen shall always preserve the aspect ratio of the input signals without distortion. 5) 6) 7) 8) Provide internal test patterns for calibration and setup. Support image freeze via Ethernet, RS-232, or USB connection. Support muting of one or all outputs at any time. Support automatic muting of video and sync output when no video input signal is present. a) Provide a choice to generate a blue screen or a black screen before disabling sync. b) Provide a configurable timeout period before disabling sync. c) The user may selectively enable or disable automatic muting of sync output. 9) Provide a low power standby state selectable via Ethernet, RS-232, or USB. Audio Visual Systems and Equipment © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-5300 - 11 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 10) Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Support the connection of DVI displays that do not recognize HDMI-specific formats. a) Automatically enable or disable embedded TMDS audio and InfoFrames. Automatically set the correct color space. b) c. Switching Requirements: 1) Provide automatic switching between input sources a) Automatically switch to the active input. b) Provide a configurable switching priority when multiple inputs are active. i. ii. 2) Provide selectable transition effects when switching inputs. a) Cut: video output shall cut to black, then cut to the newly selected input source. Fade: video output shall fade to black, then fade into the newly selected input source. Accompanying audio shall ramp down, then ramp up to match the transition effect. b) c) d. EDID Requirements: 1) Provide automatic EDID management between connected devices. a) b) c) d) e. High to low: highest numbered input has priority Low to high: lowest numbered input has priority Provide a set of pre-stored EDID files. Support capture of EDID from any connected display. Support user uploading of custom-generated EDID files. Support assignment of any pre-stored, captured, or custom uploaded EDID file to any input connection. HDCP Requirements: 1) The unit shall be HDCP compliant. a) Provide authentication and maintain continuous verification of HDCP key exchange with connected sink devices. Provide authentication and maintain continuous verification of HDCP key exchange with connected source devices. Provide the option to disable HDCP processing at any HDMI input connection when passing unencrypted content. Provide selectable, human-readable visual confirmation of HDCP compliance when encrypted content is routed to a non-HDCP compliant display. b) c) d) i. ii. 2) When enabled, the video output shall be a solid green color and an on-screen message stating "HDCP CONTENT" shall be displayed. When disabled, the output shall be muted. Provide real-time verification of HDCP status for each HDMI input and output. Audio Visual Systems and Equipment © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-5300 - 12 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site a) b) f. Directly readable on front panel LEDs. Electronically accessible over Ethernet, RS-232, or USB connection. Audio Requirements: 1) Provide audio input connections. a) b) c) 2) 3) 4) 5) 7) 8) Two simultaneous HDMI, embedded. Two 5-pole captive screw, with independent output level control and configurable for balanced/unbalanced, analog stereo or independently mixed analog mono. Support embedding of any analog audio input signal onto the HDMI outputs. Support extraction of two-channel LPCM HDMI audio signals to the analog stereo outputs, or pass multichannel bitstream audio to the HDMI outputs. Support mixing of program audio with two mic/line inputs, providing three simultaneously available, independently mixed outputs. a) b) c) 6) Four HDMI, embedded. Six 5-pole captive screw, balanced/unbalanced line level analog stereo. Two 3-pole captive screw, mono mic/line level with switchable 48 V phantom power. Provide audio output connections. a) b) g. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Stereo output to HDMI Stereo analog audio output Stereo or dual mono analog audio output Provide the capability to break an analog audio signal away from its corresponding video signal and route to the audio outputs, allowing the analog audio channels to be operated as a separate switcher. Provide a delay in the audio output to match the corresponding video processing delay. Provide gain and attenuation adjustments for analog input audio. Control Requirements: 1) Provide control connections. a) b) c) 2) Provide alternatives for configuration and operation. a) b) c) d) 3) RJ-45: 10/100Base-T Ethernet 3-pole captive screw: RS-232 Mini USB-B: USB 2.0 On-screen menus navigated using front panel controls. Built-in Web pages accessible using a standard Web browser via Ethernet connection. Product configuration software connected via Ethernet or USB. Serial commands sent over Ethernet, RS-232, or USB connection. Support disabling of front panel controls to prevent inadvertent or unauthorized changes to configuration settings. Audio Visual Systems and Equipment © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-5300 - 13 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site h. General Requirements: 1) 2) 3) Enclosure shall be rack-mountable, full rack width, and 1RU in height. Shall be equipped with an internal 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz universal power supply. Shall meet regulatory compliances. a) b) c) 4) i. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Shall meet safety compliances under CE, c-UL, and UL. Shall meet EMI/EMC compliances under CE, C-tick, FCC Class A, ICES, and VCCI. Shall comply with appropriate requirements of RoHS and WEEE. Shall provide three year parts and labor warranty. Approved device shall be the Extron IN1606 (part number 60-1081-01); no alternates or equals B. Provide an Ethernet enabled control processor for the purpose of remotely controlling, monitoring and troubleshooting connected AV equipment and AV systems. 1. Configuration-based, Ethernet enabled control processor a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. Provide three bidirectional configurable RS-232 ports on captive screw connectors located on the back of the processor that can be configured for control of AV system components Provide four IR ports on captive screw connectors located on the back of the processor. These ports shall allow the transmission of IR signals (using an IR emitter) for control of AV system components Provide four configurable low voltage relays on captive screw connectors located on the back of the processor that can be configured to control lighting, projector control or other device functions. Provide four contact closure input ports on captive a screw connector located on the back of the processor that can be used to interface with devices such as sensors, switches, and relays. Supports the creation of IR drivers by capturing IR commands from handheld remotes. IR receiver shall be located on the bottom right front of the processor and integrated into the control processor enclosure. Device shall have a female RJ-45 jack located on the back of the enclosure that supports 10/100Base-T, half/full duplex with auto-detect for connection to a LAN or WAN and includes link and activity LED indicators located on the left and right of the jack for troubleshooting network issues. Device shall support the following protocols: ARP, ICMP (ping), IP, TCP, UDP, DHCP, HTTP, SMTP, Telnet. Device shall include a multi-function button that allows for the reset of the device or its communication properties at minimum. Supports a web-based AV resource management application that provides a means to manage, monitor, and control AV equipment. Provide an internal real-time clock with a 30 years backup battery that is used to keep track of the date and time. Provide an integrated high performance Web server that supports up to 200 simultaneous sessions and has at least 7.25 MB nonvolatile user memory. Provide front panel led activity indicators for power status, RS-232 status, IR status, contact input status, relay status, and network status. Device shall include an energy-efficient external 12 VDC, 1 A power supply. Audio Visual Systems and Equipment © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-5300 - 14 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 2. Mounting requirements a. b. c. d. 3. Device shall be housed in a 1 RU, quarter EIA rack width metal enclosure. Device shall be able to be rack mounted using an optional rack shelf. Device shall be able to be installed under a table, desk, or other flat surface using an optional mounting kit. Device shall be able to be mounted on a projector mounting pole using an optional mounting kit. Software requirements a. Device shall be configured using Global Configurator 3.x with support for the following: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 4. C. CE UL c-UL C-tick FCC Class A ICES VCCI RoHS WEEE KC mark Product Warranty a. 6. Provide support for four configurable TouchLink Touch panels Provide remote monitoring and control via Ethernet Provide the ability to create E-mail notifications Provide multiple levels of password protection Provide the ability to create schedules and monitors Supports up to six Ethernet-controllable AV devices Shall meet regulatory compliances a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. 5. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Shall provide at least 3 years parts and labor. Approved device shall be the Extron IPL 250 Control Processor, part number 60-1026-81 or approved equal. Provide switching of digital video and embedded digital audio signals that shall support four inputs and one output. 1. Switcher for HDMI and embedded digital audio. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. Support for local device connection. Supports HDTV 1080p/60 and computer-video resolutions to 1920x1200. Supports HDMI specifications including data rates to 6.75 Gbps, Deep Color (12-bits), and HD Lossless Audio. Provide automatic input cable equalization to 50 feet (15.2 meters) at 1080p @ 60 Hz with 8-bit color. Provide +5 VDC, 250 mA power on the output. The device shall be HDCP compliant. Provide automatic management of color bit depth based on the capabilities of the connected display, as reported by the display’s EDID. Provide automatic reformatting of HDMI source signals when routed to a DVI display. Audio Visual Systems and Equipment © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-5300 - 15 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site i. Provide automatic EDID management between connected devices. 1) 2) 3) j. k. l. m. n. o. 2. D. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Shall provide user-selection of EDID from the connected display. Shall provide user-selection of EDID from pre-stored data files. Shall maintain continuous EDID communication with the connected sources. Provide front panel indicators for EDID status, HDCP authentication, and signal presence. Front panel shall provide physical buttons for creating ties within the switcher. Provide automatic switching that follows the most recently connected or highestnumbered input with an active connected source. Provide one RS-232 serial control port. Device shall be housed in a 1 RU, one-half EIA rack-width metal enclosure. Device shall be equipped with an external, universal AC power supply capable of supporting 100 - 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz power. Approved device shall be the Extron SW4 HDMI 4 Input HDMI Switcher w/ EDID Minder, part number 60-841-02 or approved equal. Provide an HDMI twisted pair transmitter that shall support the distribution of video, audio, and control over a shielded CATx cable. 1. 2. Rack-mountable transmitter for the transmission of HDMI, audio, and control Video input requirements. a. Provide one (1) video input for digital video signals. 1) 3. Audio input requirements: a. b. Support embedded digital audio on HDMI input. Provide a dedicated analog audio input connection. 1) 4. Provide communication connections for AV device control. 1. 2. One bidirectional RS-232 pass-through One bidirectional IR pass-through Interconnection requirements: a. Support interconnection between transmitter and receiver or DTP®-enabled products. 1) 6. One (1) stereo analog audio Control input requirements: a. 5. Supported HDMI specifications include data rates up to 10.2 Gbps, Deep Color up to 12-bit, 3D, HD lossless audio formats, and CEC pass-through. One RJ-45 twisted pair connection Transmission requirements: a. b. Provide signal transmission distance capability of 230 feet (70 m) at 1920x1200, including 1080p @ 60 Hz and 2K using a shielded CATx cable. Support signal transmission distance capability of 4K @ 30 Hz, UHD, and 2560x1600 up to 130 feet (40 m) using a shielded CATx cable. Audio Visual Systems and Equipment © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-5300 - 16 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site c. d. e. 7. b. c. b. c. The unit shall support bidirectional RS-232 communication pass-through up to 115200 baud. The unit shall support bidirectional IR pass-through. The unit shall support EDID and HDCP transmission. Power requirements: a. b. 12. The unit shall be HDCP 2.2 compliant with backward compatibility with earlier HDCP versions. Communication requirements: a. 11. The unit shall accept additional analog stereo audio signals for simultaneous transmission with HDMI embedded audio: The unit shall support multiple embedded audio formats: The unit shall support embedded HD lossless audio formats: HDCP requirements: a. 10. Support computer and video resolutions up to 4K, including 1080p/60 Deep Color: Support RGB and YCbCr digital video formats: Audio requirements: a. 9. Support video, audio, and control over a single shielded CATx cable. Support embedded HD lossless audio formats. Actively buffer DDC channels. Resolution requirements: a. b. 8. The unit shall support remote power capability. The unit shall support being locally powered. General requirements: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. The unit shall be HDCP 2.2 compliant with backward compatibility with earlier HDCP versions. The unit shall be compatible with CATx shielded twisted pair cable, and Extron XTP DTP 24 shielded twisted pair cable. The unit shall support HDMI specifications including data rates up to 10.2 Gbps, Deep Color, 3D, HD lossless audio formats, and CEC pass-through. The unit shall support being locally or remotely powered. The unit shall support embedded HD lossless audio formats. The unit shall support the use of HDMI to DVI-D cables or adapters for DVI-D. The unit shall have a low profile enclosure and versatile mounting capability. Shall provide visual indication for signal presence and power. Shall meet regulatory compliances. 1) 2) j. k. 13. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building CE, c-UL, UL CE, C-tick, FCC Class A, ICES, VCCI Shall provide at least 3 years parts and labor warranty. Shall be compatible with other DTP-enabled products. Approved device shall be the Extron DTP HDMI 4K 230 Tx (60-1271-12) Twisted Pair Transmitter or approved equal. Audio Visual Systems and Equipment © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-5300 - 17 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site E. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Provide an HDMI twisted pair receiver that shall support the distribution of video, audio, and control over a shielded CATx cable. 1. 2. Rack-mountable receiver for HDMI, audio, and control. Video output requirements: a. Provide one (1) video output for digital video signals. 1. 3. Audio output requirements: a. b. Support embedded digital audio on HDMI output. Provide a dedicated analog audio output connection. 1. 4. Provide communication connections for AV device control. 1. 2. Support interconnection between receiver and transmitter or DTP®-enabled products. 1) b. c. d. e. Support computer and video resolutions up to 4K, including 1080p/60 Deep Color. Support RGB and YCbCr digital video formats. Audio requirements: a. b. c. 9. Provide signal transmission distance capability of 230 feet (70 m) at 1920x1200, including 1080p @ 60 Hz and 2K using a shielded CATx cable. Support signal transmission distance capability of 4K @ 30 Hz, UHD, and 2560x1600 up to 130 feet (40 m) using a shielded CATx cable. Support video, audio, and control over a single shielded CATx cable. Support embedded HD lossless audio formats. Actively buffer DDC channels. Resolution requirements: a. b. 8. One RJ-45 twisted pair connection. Transmission requirements: a. 7. One bidirectional RS-232 pass-through. One bidirectional IR pass-through. Interconnection requirements: a. 6. One (1) stereo analog audio. Control output requirements: a. 5. Supported HDMI specifications include data rates up to 10.2 Gbps, Deep Color up to 12-bit, 3D, HD lossless audio formats, and CEC pass-through. The unit shall support analog stereo audio pass-through signals The unit shall support multiple embedded audio formats The unit shall support embedded HD lossless audio formats HDCP requirements: Audio Visual Systems and Equipment © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-5300 - 18 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site a. 10. b. c. The unit shall support bidirectional RS-232 communication pass-through up to 115200 baud. The unit shall support bidirectional IR pass-through. The unit shall support EDID and HDCP transmission. Power requirements a. b. 12. The unit shall be HDCP 2.2 compliant with backward compatibility with earlier HDCP versions. Communication requirements: a. 11. The unit shall support remote power capability The unit shall support being locally powered General requirements a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. The unit shall be HDCP 2.2 compliant with backward compatibility with earlier HDCP versions. The unit shall be compatible with CATx shielded twisted pair cable, and Extron XTP DTP 24 shielded twisted pair cable. The unit shall support HDMI specifications including data rates up to 10.2 Gbps, Deep Color, 3D, HD lossless audio formats, and CEC pass-through. The unit shall support being locally or remotely powered. The unit shall support embedded HD lossless audio formats. The unit shall support the use of HDMI to DVI-D cables or adapters for DVI-D. The unit shall have a low profile enclosure and versatile mounting capability. Shall provide visual indication for signal presence and power. Shall meet regulatory compliances. 1. 2. j. k. 13. F. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building CE, c-UL, UL CE, C-tick, FCC Class A, ICES, VCCI Shall provide at least 3 years parts and labor warranty. Shall be compatible with other DTP-enabled products. Approved device shall be the Extron DTP HDMI 4K 230 Rx (60-1271-13) Twisted Pair Receiver or approved equal.. Provide a 3.5” touchscreen interface for switching and control of AV equipment. 1. Wall mountable 3.5” touchscreen user interface for AV and control systems. a. b. c. d. e. f. Device shall provide a 3.5” color touchscreen with 18-bit color depth and 320x240 resolution. Device shall support Extron IP Link configurable control processors. Device shall provide 8 customizable backlit buttons located on the right side of the touch surface that can be used to control room functions. Device shall provide a rotary encoder located on the right side of touch surface that can be used to control the volume in a system. Provide a built-in speaker located below the touch surface which can be configured to provide audio and button feedback. Device shall have a female RJ-45 jack located on the back of the enclosure that supports 10/100Base-T, half/full duplex with auto-detect for connection to a LAN or WAN and includes link and activity LED indicators located on the left and right of the jack for Audio Visual Systems and Equipment © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-5300 - 19 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site g. h. i. j. k. l. m. troubleshooting network issues as well as supports PoE- Power over Ethernet, 802.3af and include a PoE injector. Device shall support the following protocols: ARP, ICMP (ping), IP, TCP, UDP, DHCP, HTTP, SMTP, Telnet. Device shall be capable of displaying S-video or composite video sources using BNC connectors that are located on the back of the panel. The content from this input shall be available for display on the touch panel. Provide a built-in configurable motion sensor located above the touch surface on the right side of the panel allowing the panel to be woken from a sleep state or configured via software to trigger any number of actions. Provide a light sensor located above the center of the touch surface that automatically adjusts the LCD screen’s backlight based on available ambient light. Device shall have a menu button that is recessed behind the bezel for setup of items such as IP address and sound volume at minimum. Device shall include a multi-function button that is recessed behind the bezel that allows for the reset of the device or its communication properties at minimum. Device shall have the following memory available, at minimum: 1) SDRAM a) b) 2) o. p. 2. b. c. Device shall have a 12 volt captive screw connection located on the back of the panel that will be used to power the panel using an included universal power supply. Device shall have the ability to controlled by an Apple iPad as a secondary point of control. Coordinate device color with Architect and Owner. Device shall have the ability to be mounted directly in a wall, lectern, or other flat surface and shall be able to be secured using the built-in six locking arms located on the top and bottom of the panel respectively or by using an optional back box. Device shall have the ability to be mounted to the surface of a wall using an optional wall box. Device shall have the ability to be mounted into a rack using an optional rack mount kits. Software Requirements: a. 4. 7 MB for project storage 1 MB for system use Mounting Requirements: a. 3. 16 MB for graphics processing 8 MB for system use Flash a) b) n. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building User interface shall be configured using drag and drop software. Regulatory compliances requirements: a. b. c. d. e. f. CE UL c-UL C-tick FCC Class A ICES Audio Visual Systems and Equipment © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-5300 - 20 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site g. h. i. 5. G. Shall provide at least 3 years materials and workmanship. Shall provide 1 year touchscreen and overlay components. Approved device shall be the Extron TLP 350MV Touchscreen Interface, part number 60-107703 or approved equal. Mounting for Extron TLP 350MV Touchscreen Interface or approved equal. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Mounting: Surface mountable or mountable to furniture including lecterns and tabletops Enclosure type: Plastic Enclosure dimensions: 3.5" H x 6.4" W x 4.1" D (89 mm H x 163 mm W x 104 mm D) Faceplate compatibility: Mounts a standard 3 gang, 4.5" H x 6.4" W (114 mm H x 163 mm), faceplate or wall plate Furniture mounting holes: 4 Cable management lance punches: 2 Cable routing openings a. b. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. H. VCCI RoHS WEEE Product Warranty: a. b. 6. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Back: 1 trapezoidal: 0.7" H x 0.8" W bottom, 0.7" W top (18 mm H x 19 mm W bottom, 17 mm W top) Bottom: 1 circular: 1.0" (25 mm) diameter Front angle: 45° from vertical, 45° from horizontal Product weight: 1.0 lbs (0.5 kg) Vibration: ISTA 1A in carton (International Safe Transit Association) Warranty: 3 years parts and labor Approved device shall be Extron SMB 303 Low Profile Surface Mount Box for Three-Gang Products; no alternates or equals. Provide an audio power amplifier that shall support three analog stereo inputs and one amplified stereo output or two mono analog outputs with 15 watts RMS per channel. 1. Compact stereo amplifier with 15 watts RMS power output per channel, ENERGY STAR® qualification, and stereo or dual mono operation. a. Input Requirements: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) b. Shall support one stereo, balanced or unbalanced signal on one 5-pole, 3.5 mm captive screw connector. Shall support one stereo, unbalanced signal on one pair of RCA connectors. Shall support one stereo, unbalanced signal on one 3.5 mm stereo mini jack. Shall provide individual buffering for each input. Shall provide stereo input summing of all inputs into a single stereo signal. Shall provide summing of left and right channels, and route the resulting mono signal to both outputs when dual mono output is selected. Output Requirements: 1) Shall support one stereo speaker level signal or two mono speaker level signals on one 4-pole, 5 mm captive screw connector. Audio Visual Systems and Equipment © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-5300 - 21 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 2) 3) 4) 5) c. Shall provide a total of 30 watts RMS output power with 15 watts RMS per channel into 4 ohms or 8 watts per channel into 8 ohms measured at 1 kHz with 1% THD. Shall provide a signal-to-noise ratio of 90 dB measured from 20 Hz to 20 kHz, +1/-3 dB, at 8 ohms. Shall provide a THD+N measurement of less than 0.1% measured at 1 kHz, at 8 ohms and 3 dB below clipping. Shall provide damping factor of greater than 100 at 8 ohms. Amplifier Requirements: 1) 2) 3) 4) d. Shall utilize an efficient Class D amplifier design. Shall provide Class D Ripple Suppression technology. Shall be convection cooled and operate without fans or vents. Shall provide an automatic clip limiter to detect onset of clipping by comparing input and output waveforms and automatically reduce gain without audible artifacts to eliminate clipping distortion. Power Requirements: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Shall enter standby mode after 25 minutes (+/- 5 minutes) of inactivity Shall draw 7.3 watts during typical (1/8) power operation with both output channels driven with 4 ohm loads. In conjunction with power supply, shall draw 3.1 watts during typical (1/8 power) operation with both output channels driven with 4 ohm loads. Shall draw 3.1 watts during quiescent operation. In conjunction with power supply, shall draw 3.8 watts during quiescent operation. Shall provide a low power standby mode. a) b) c) d) e) 6) 7) Shall draw less than 1 watt while in standby mode. Shall return to full power status in less than one second upon signal detection while in standby mode. Shall feature an input signal detection threshold of -53 dBV, +/- 3 dB on unbalanced RCA and 3.5 mm stereo mini jack inputs to deactivate standby mode. Shall feature an input signal detection threshold of -46 dBu, +/- 3 dB on balanced captive screw connector input to deactivate standby mode. Shall provide a defeatable auto standby timer and retain ENERGY STAR qualification. Shall be ENERGY STAR qualified. Shall provide energy-efficient external universal power supply with 2-pole captive screw connector. a) b) c) d) e. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Shall be universal in-line power supply with IEC power socket and support for international 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz standards. Shall provide output of 12 VDC, 2 A, 24 watts. Shall support use of optional Extron ZipClip™ 200 mounting bracket. Shall meet energy efficiency level V and bear the UL. Environment Energy Efficiency Certification (EEC) Mark. Control Requirements: Audio Visual Systems and Equipment © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-5300 - 22 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 1) f. 2) 3) Shall provide an LED for power indication that lights green when the unit is receiving power and active, and lights amber when the unit is in standby mode. Shall provide a recessed switch for toggling between stereo or dual mono output modes. Shall provide potentiometers for bass, treble, and input level adjustment. Rear Panel Requirements: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) h. Shall support remote control of volume and muting on 3-pole, 3.5 mm captive screw connector using optional Extron analog volume and mute controllers. Front Panel Requirements: 1) g. Shall provide one input on one 5-pole, 3.5 mm captive screw connector. Shall provide one input on one pair of RCA connectors. Shall provide one input on one 3.5 mm stereo mini jack. Shall provide one output on one 4-pole, 5 mm captive screw connector. Shall provide remote volume and mute control port on one 3-pole, 3.5 mm captive screw connector. General Requirements: 1) 2) Shall be enclosed in a rack-mountable 1U, quarter rack width metal enclosure. Shall meet regulatory compliances. a) b) c) d) e) 3) 2. I. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Shall meet safety compliances under CE, c-UL, and UL. Shall be UL rated for use in plenum airspaces and meet UL 2043 compliance for heat and smoke release, excluding the power supply. Shall meet UL 60065 for safety. Shall meet EMI/EMC compliances under CE, C-tick, FCC Class B, ICES, and VCCI. Shall comply with appropriate requirements of CEC, ENERGY STAR, EU code of conduct, RoHS, and WEEE. Shall provide three year parts and labor warranty Approved device shall be the Extron MPA 152 Plus, part number 60-844-03 or approved equal. Audio Speakers 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Provide and install two (2), two-way loudspeakers in all designated locations. (Rooms 104, 105, 106, 107, 108, 118, 215, 300, 309, 313, 315, 316, 325): The loudspeaker system shall consist of a 135 mm (5¼ in) low-frequency transducer, 19 mm (¾ in) dome high-frequency transducer, and frequency dividing network installed in a ported enclosure. The magnetic assemblies shall use ferrite magnets, with integral shielding of the external magnetic field. The low frequency voice coil shall be 25 mm (1 in) in diameter. The frequency dividing network shall have a crossover frequency of 6 kHz and shall utilize polypropylene bypass capacitors to reduce hysteresis effects on the signal. Performance specifications of a typical production unit shall be as follows: a. b. Measured sensitivity (SPL at 1 m (3.3 ft.) with 2.0 V input, swept from 500 Hz to 2.5 kHz) shall be at least 87 dB SPL. Frequency response shall be within plus or minus 3 dB from 120 Hz to 20 kHz. Usable frequency response shall extend downward to 70 Hz. Nominal impedance shall be 4 ohms. Audio Visual Systems and Equipment © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-5300 - 23 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site c. d. e. f. g. h. 2.06 Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Rated power capacity shall be at least 150 watts continuous pink noise, based on a test signal of filtered random noise conforming to international standard IEC 268-5 (pink noise with 12 dB/octave roll-off below 40 Hz and above 5 kHz with a peak-to average ratio of 6 dB), two hours duration. The entire enclosure shall be manufactured of molded polypropylene structural foam. Mounting brackets shall be provided for positioning of the loudspeaker at various angles for both temporary and permanent installations. Overall dimensions shall be no greater than 235 mm (9¼ in) by 159 mm (6¼ in) by 143 mm (5 5/8 in) deep. Finish shall be black or white, with metal grille and rubber end protectors. Color shall be coordinated with the Architect and Owner. The system shall be the JBL Model Control 1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Conductors: Jacketed, twisted pair and twisted multi-pair, untinned solid copper. Sizes as recommended by system manufacturer, but no smaller than No. 22 AWG. B. Insulation: Thermoplastic, not less than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) thick. C. Shielding: For speaker-microphone leads and elsewhere where recommended by manufacturer; No. 34 AWG, tinned, soft-copper strands formed into a braid or equivalent foil. 1. Minimum Shielding Coverage on Conductors: 60 percent. D. Plenum Cable: All cables/wires shall be listed and labeled for plenum installation. 2.07 RACEWAYS A. Intercommunication and Program System Raceways and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." B. Intercommunication and Program System Raceways and Boxes: Same as required for electrical branch circuits specified in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." C. Raceways and Boxes: EMT, Metal wireways and Surface metal raceways. D. Outlet boxes shall be not less than 2 inches wide, 3 inches (75 mm) high, and 2-1/2 inches deep. E. Flexible metal conduit is prohibited. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 A. WIRING METHODS Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters except in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum board partitions where unenclosed wiring method may be used. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces. 1. 2. B. Install plenum rated cables in all spaces. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 27-0528. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible. Audio Visual Systems and Equipment © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-5300 - 24 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools. D. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows whenever possible. 3.02 A. INSTALLATION OF CABLES General Requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. B. 3.03 Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain un-terminated elements. Make terminations only at outlets, terminals and connectors. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Arrange on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before de-reeling. Heat lamps shall not be used Cable, not installed in a wireway or pathway, is to be suspended a minimum of 8 inches above ceiling by cable supports not more than 18 inches apart. Cable shall not be run through structural members or be in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items. Separation of Wires: Separate line-level, base level, and power wiring runs. Install in separate raceways or, where exposed or in same enclosure, separate conductors at least 12 inches apart. Separate other equipment conductors as recommended by equipment manufacturer. INSTALLATION A. Match input and output impedances and signal levels at signal interfaces. Provide matching networks or baluns where required. B. Identification of Conductors and Cables: Color-code conductors and apply wire and cable marking tape to designate wires and cables so they identify media in coordination with system wiring diagrams. 3.04 A. B. 3.05 GROUNDING Ground cable shields and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground loops, commonmode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment cabinet. Isolate from power system and equipment grounding. SYSTEM PROGRAMMING A. Programming: Fully brief Owner on available programming options. Record Owner's decisions and set up initial system program. Prepare a written record of decisions, implementation methodology, and final results. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Audio Visual Systems and Equipment © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-5300 - 25 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site A. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Perform tests and inspections. 1. C. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. Tests and Inspections: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Schedule tests with at least seven days' advance notice of test performance. After installing intercommunications and program systems and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. Operational Test: Test entire system and all connectors, wiring etc for a complete working system. Verify proper routing and volume levels and that system is free of noise and distortion. Test each available signal path from each connector on system. Power Output Test: Measure electrical power output of each paging amplifier at normal gain settings of 150, 1000, and 2500 Hz. Maximum variation in power output at these frequencies is plus or minus 3 dB. Signal Ground Test: Measure and report ground resistance at system signal ground. Comply with testing requirements in Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." D. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly labeled and interconnecting wires and terminals are identified. E. The installed system will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.07 A. STARTUP SERVICE Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service and initial system programming. 1. 2. 3.08 Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. ADJUSTING A. On-Site Assistance: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to provide on-site assistance in adjusting picture quality, sound levels, and adjusting controls to meet occupancy conditions. B. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 3.09 A. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the Multi-purpose Room projector system. Audio Visual Systems and Equipment © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-5300 - 26 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 1. 2. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Train Owner's maintenance personnel on programming equipment for starting up and shutting down, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining the system and equipment. Provide on-site training for OCC personnel and technology personnel. Provide documentation of all covered topics. Provide minimum two 3 hours of training for all Audio Visual equipment. Coordinate training classes and schedule with Owner. END OF SECTION Audio Visual Systems and Equipment © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 27-5300 - 27 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 28-0513 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. 1.02 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1.03 UTP cabling. RS-232 cabling. RS-485 cabling. Low-voltage control cabling. Control-circuit conductors. Identification products. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Qualification Data: For qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector. C. Field quality-control reports. 1.04 A. QUALITY ASSURANCE Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL. 1. 1.05 A. 1.06 A. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Test cables upon receipt at Project site. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits. FIELD CONDITIONS Do not install conductors and cables that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1. B. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site testing. Indications that wire and cables are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration and sagging of factory packing materials. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install UTP cable and connecting materials until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-0513 - 1 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. 2.02 A. 2.03 A. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. BACKBOARDS Backboards: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches. Comply with requirements for plywood backing panels in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry." UTP CABLE Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. B. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company or “approved equal”. Description: 100-ohm, four-pair UTP, covered with a blue thermoplastic jacket. 1. 2. 3. 4. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 for performance specifications. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Category 6A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types: a. b. 2.04 A. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP complying with NFPA 262. Communications, Riser Rated: Type CMR complying with UL 1666. UTP CABLE HARDWARE Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Ortronics Legrand or “approved equal”. B. UTP Cable Connecting Hardware: IDC type, using modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of the same category or higher. C. Connecting Blocks 110-style for Category 6 Provide blocks for the number of cables terminated on the block, plus 10 percent spare. Integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated. 2.05 A. RS-232 CABLE Standard Cable: NFPA 70, Type CM. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Paired, 2 pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded tinned copper conductors. Polypropylene insulation. Individual aluminum foil-polyester tape shielded pairs with 100 percent shield coverage. PVC jacket. Pairs are cabled on common axis with No. 24 AWG, stranded tinned copper drain wire. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581. Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-0513 - 2 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site B. Plenum-Rated Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 2.06 A. Paired, 2 pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded tinned copper conductors. Plastic insulation. Individual aluminum foil-polyester tape shielded pairs with 100 percent shield coverage. Plastic jacket. Pairs are cabled on common axis with No. 24 AWG, stranded tinned copper drain wire. Flame Resistance: Comply with NFPA 262. RS-485 CABLE Standard Cable: NFPA 70, Type CM 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. C. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Paired, 2 pairs, twisted, No. 22 AWG, stranded tinned copper conductors. PVC insulation. Unshielded. PVC jacket. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581. Plenum-Rated Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP. 1. Paired, 2 pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded tinned copper conductors. 2. Fluorinated ethylene propylene insulation. 3. Unshielded. 4. Fluorinated ethylene propylene jacket. 5. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262, Flame Test. 2.07 A. LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROL CABLE Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMG. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. B. Plenum-Rated, Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 2.08 One pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded and No. 18 AWG, stranded tinned copper conductors. PVC insulation. Unshielded. PVC jacket. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581. One pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded and No. 18 AWG, stranded tinned copper conductors. PVC insulation. Unshielded. PVC jacket. Flame Resistance: Comply with NFPA 262. CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS A. Class 1 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, complying with UL 83, in raceway. B. Class 2 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, complying with UL 83, in raceway, power-limited cable, complying with UL 83, concealed in building finishes or power-limited tray cable, complying with UL 83, in cable tray. Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-0513 - 3 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site C. 2.09 A. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits: Stranded copper, Type TW or TF, complying with UL 83. IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. 2. Brady Worldwide, Inc. Panduit Corp. B. Comply with UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers. C. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables. B. Factory test UTP cables on reels according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1. C. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA/EIA-568-B.2. D. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 A. 3.02 A. INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for installation of supports for cables. WIRING METHOD Install wiring in metal pathways and wire-ways. 1. 2. 3. Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4 inch Comply with requirements in Division 28 Section "Pathways for Electronic Safety and Security." Control and data transmission wiring shall not share conduit with other building wiring systems. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Cable Trays for Electrical Systems." B. Install cable, concealed in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors when possible. C. Wiring within Enclosures: 1. 2. 3. 4. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended in writing by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of enclosure. Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-0513 - 4 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 5. 6. 7. 3.03 Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with intrusion system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors. INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Conductors: Size according to system manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated. C. General Requirements for Cabling: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. D. UTP Cable Installation: Install using techniques, practices, and methods that are consistent with Category 6 rating of components and that ensure Category 6 performance of completed and linked signal paths, end to end. 1. 2. 3. E. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch Open-Cable Installation: from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry. 1. 2. 3. F. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices." Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain un-terminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect and patch panels. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before de-reeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment. Suspend copper cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inches above ceilings by cable supports not more than 60 inches apart. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items. Installation of Cable Routed Exposed under Raised Floors: 1. 2. 3. Install plenum-rated cable only. Install cabling after the flooring system has been installed in raised floor areas. Coil cable 72 inches long shall be neatly coiled not less than 12 inches in diameter below each feed point. Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-0513 - 5 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site G. Separation from EMI Sources: 1. 2. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA-569-B recommendations for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. b. c. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches 3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches 4. Separation between cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches 5. Separation between Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches Separation between Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches 6. 3.04 Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building POWER AND CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS A. 120-V Power Wiring: Install according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" unless otherwise indicated. B. Minimum Conductor Sizes: 1. 2. 3. 3.05 Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits, No. 14 AWG. Class 2 low-energy, remote-control and signal circuits, No. 16 AWG. Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm and signal circuits, No. 12 AWG. CONNECTIONS A. Comply with requirements in Division 28 Section "Perimeter Security Systems" for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables. B. Comply with requirements in Division 28 Section "Intrusion Detection" for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables. C. Comply with requirements in Division 28 Section "Access Control" for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables. D. Comply with requirements in Division 28 Section "Video Surveillance" for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables. Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-0513 - 6 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 3.06 Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building FIRESTOPPING A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." B. Comply with TIA-569-B, "Firestopping" Annex A. C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article. 3.07 GROUNDING A. For communications wiring, comply with J-STD-607-A and with BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter. B. For low-voltage wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 3.08 A. IDENTIFICATION Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. 2. 3. Visually inspect UTP cable jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations to confirm color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections to confirm compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components. Test UTP cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross connection. a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-B.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration. B. Document data for each measurement. Print data for submittals in a summary report that is formatted using Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM as a guide, or transfer the data from the instrument to the computer, save as text files, print, and submit. C. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-0513 - 7 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 28-1300 - ACCESS CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 1.02 One or more security access networked workstation(s). Security access operating system and application software. Security access controllers connected to high-speed electronic-data transmission network. DEFINITIONS A. Credential: Data assigned to an entity and used to identify that entity. B. Identifier: A credential card, keypad personal identification number or code, biometric characteristic, or other unique identification entered as data into the entry-control database for the purpose of identifying an individual. Where this term is presented with an initial capital letter, this definition applies. C. Location: A Location on the network having a PC-to-controller communications link, with additional Controllers at the Location connected to the PC-to-controller link with TIA 485-A communications loop. D. RAS: Remote access services. E. TWAIN: Technology without an Interesting Name. A programming interface that lets a graphics application, such as an image editing program or desktop publishing program, activate a scanner, frame grabber, or other image-capturing device. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: 1. 2. 3. 4. 1.04 A. 1.05 A. Diagrams for cable management system. System labeling schedules. Wiring diagrams. Cable administration drawings. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Field quality-control reports. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Operation and maintenance data include the following: 1. 2. 3. Software documentation. PC installation and operating documentation, manuals, and software for the PC and all installed peripherals. Software shall include system restore, emergency boot diskettes, and drivers for all installed hardware. Provide separately for each PC. Hard copies of manufacturer's specification sheets, operating specifications, design guides, user's guides for software and hardware, and PDF files on CD-ROM of the hard-copy submittal. Access Control © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-1300 - 1 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 4. 1.06 Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building System installation and setup guides with data forms to plan and record options and setup decisions. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code." 1.07 A. PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Conditions: System shall be capable of withstanding the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating capability: 1. 2. 3. Control Station: Rated for continuous operation in ambient conditions of 60 to 85 deg. F and a relative humidity of 20 to 80 percent, non-condensing. Indoor, Controlled Environment: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure. System components, except central-station control unit, installed in air-conditioned or temperature-controlled indoor environments shall be rated for continuous operation in ambient conditions of 36 to 122 deg. F and a relative humidity of 20 to 80 percent, non-condensing. Indoor, Uncontrolled Environment: NEMA 250 enclosures. System components installed in nonair-conditioned or non-temperature-controlled indoor environments shall be rated for continuous operation in ambient conditions of 0 to 122 deg. F dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, non-condensing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. 2.02 Tyco-Software House: C-Cure 9000 or “approved equal” DESCRIPTION A. Security Access System: PC-based central station, one or more networked PC-based workstations, and field-installed controllers, connected by a high-speed electronic-data transmission network. B. System Software: Based on 32-bit, central-station, workstation operating system, server operating system, and application software. Software shall have the following capabilities: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. B. Graphical user interface to show pull-down menus and a menu-tree format that complies with interface guidelines of Microsoft Windows. System license for the entire system including capability for future additions that are within the indicated system size limits specified in this Section. Open-architecture system that allows importing and exporting of data and interfacing with other systems that are compatible with Microsoft Windows. Password-protected operator login and access. Open-database-connectivity compliant. Network(s) connecting PCs and controllers shall consist of one or more of the following: Access Control © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-1300 - 2 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 1. 2.03 Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Local area, IEEE 802.3 Fast Ethernet Gigabit-Ethernet or 100 BASE-TX, star topology network based on TCP/IP. OPERATION A. Security access system shall use a single database for access-control and credential-creation functions. B. Distributed Processing: A fully distributed processing system. 1. 2. 3. C. Number of Locations: 1. 2. 3. D. Unlimited different card-reader formats. 999 comments. 12 graphic file types for importing maps. Location Capacity: 1. 2. 3. 4. F. Support at least 32,000 separate Locations using a single PC with combinations of direct connect or TCP/IP LAN connections to each Location. Each Location shall have its own database and history in the central station. Locations may be combined to share a common database. Data Capacity: 1. 2. 3. E. Access-control information, including time, date, valid codes, access levels, and similar data, shall be downloaded to controllers so each controller can make access-control decisions. Intermediate controllers for access control are prohibited. In the event that communications with the central controller are lost, controllers shall automatically buffer event transactions until communications are restored, at which time buffered events shall be uploaded to the central station. 2500 reader-controlled doors. 500,000 total-access credentials. 10,000 supervised alarm inputs. 10,000 programmable outputs. System Network Requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4. System components shall be interconnected and shall provide automatic communication of status changes, commands, field-initiated interrupts, and other communications required for proper system operation. Communication shall not require operator initiation or response and shall return to normal after partial- or total-network interruption such as power loss or transient upset. System shall automatically annunciate communication failures to the operator and shall identify the communications link that has experienced a partial or total failure. Communications controller may be used as an interface between the central-station display systems and the field device network. Communications controller shall provide functions required to attain the specified network communications performance. G. Central station shall provide operator interface, interaction, display, control, and dynamic and real-time monitoring. Central station shall control system networks to interconnect all system components, including workstations and field-installed controllers. H. Field equipment shall include controllers, sensors, and controls. Access Control © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-1300 - 3 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 1. 2. 3. 4. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Controllers shall serve as an interface between the central station and sensors and controls. Data exchange between the central station and the controllers shall include down-line transmission of commands, software, and databases to controllers. The up-line data exchange from the controller to the central station shall include status data such as intrusion alarms, status reports, and entry-control records. Controllers are classified as alarm-annunciation or entry-control type. I. System Response to Alarms: Field device network shall provide a system end-to-end response time of one second(s) or less for every device connected to the system. J. False-Alarm Reduction: The design of the central station and controllers shall contain features to reduce false alarms. Equipment and software shall comply with SIA CP-01. K. Error Detection: 1. 2. Use a cyclic code method to detect single- and double-bit errors, burst errors of eight bits or fewer, and at least 99 percent of all other multi-bit and burst errors between controllers and the central station. Interactive or product error-detection codes alone will not be acceptable. L. Data Line Supervision: System shall initiate an alarm in response to opening, closing, shorting, or grounding of data transmission lines. M. Door Hardware Interface: 1. 2. 2.04 A. APPLICATION SOFTWARE System Software: Based on 32-bit, Microsoft Windows central-station and workstation operating system and application software. 1. 2. 3. 4. B. Comply with requirements in Division 08 Sections for door hardware required to be monitored or controlled by the security access system. Electrical characteristics of controllers shall match the signal and power requirements of door hardware. Graphical user interface shall show pull-down menus and a menu-tree format. Capability for future additions within the indicated system size limits. Open architecture that allows importing and exporting of data and interfacing with other systems that are compatible with operating system. Password-protected operator login and access. Application Software: Interface between the alarm annunciation and entry-control controllers to monitor sensors, operate displays, report alarms, generate reports, and help train system operators. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Reside at the central station, workstations, and controllers as required to perform specified functions. Operate and manage peripheral devices. Manage files for disk I/O, including creating, deleting, and copying files; and automatically maintain a directory of all files, including size and location of each sequential and random-ordered record. Import custom icons into graphics to represent alarms and I/O devices. Globally link I/O so that any I/O can link to any other I/O within the same Location without requiring interaction with the host PC. This operation shall be at the controller. Access Control © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-1300 - 4 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. C. Globally code I/O links so that any access-granted event can link to any I/O with the same Location without requiring interaction with the host PC. This operation shall be at the controller. Messages from PC to controllers and controllers to controllers shall be on a polled network that utilizes check summing and acknowledgment of each message. Communication shall be automatically verified, buffered, and retransmitted if message is not acknowledged. Selectable poll frequency and message time-out settings shall handle bandwidth and latency issues for TCP/IP, RF, and other PC-to-controller communications methods by changing the polling frequency and the amount of time the system waits for a response. Automatic and encrypted backups for database and history backups shall be automatically stored at the central-control PC or a selected workstation and encrypted with a nine-character alphanumeric password that must be used to restore or read data contained in backup. Operator audit trail for recording and reporting all changes made to database and system software. Support network protocol and topology, TCP/IP, Novel Netware, Digital Pathworks, Banyan Vines, LAN/WAN, and RAS. Workstation Software: 1. 2. D. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Password levels shall be individually customized at each workstation to allow or disallow operator access to program functions for each Location. Workstation event filtering shall allow user to define events and alarms that will be displayed at each workstation. If an alarm is unacknowledged (not handled by another workstation) for a preset amount of time, the alarm will automatically appear on the filtered workstation. Controller Software: 1. Controllers shall operate as autonomous, intelligent processing units. a. b. c. 2. The following functions shall be fully implemented and operational within each controller: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. 3. Controllers shall make decisions about access control, alarm monitoring, linking functions, and door-locking schedules for their operation, independent of other system components. Controllers shall be part of a fully distributed processing-control network. The portion of the database associated with a controller, and consisting of parameters, constraints, and the latest value or status of points connected to that controller, shall be maintained in the controller. Monitoring inputs. Controlling outputs. Automatically reporting alarms to the central station. Reporting of sensor and output status to central station on request. Maintaining real time, automatically updated by the central station at least once a day. Communicating with the central station. Executing controller resident programs. Diagnosing. Downloading and uploading data to and from the central station. Controller Operations at a Location: a. Up to 64 controllers connected to TIA 485-A communications loop. Globally operating I/O linking and anti-passback functions between controllers within the same Location without central-station or workstation intervention. Linking and anti-passback shall Access Control © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-1300 - 5 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site b. c. 4. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. Controllers shall transmit alarms, status changes, and other data to the central station when communications circuits are operable. If communications are not available, controllers shall function in a stand-alone mode; operational data, including the status and alarm data normally transmitted to the central station, shall be stored for later transmission to the central station. Storage capacity for the latest 1024 events shall be provided at each controller. Card-reader ports of a controller shall be custom configurable for at least 120 different card-reader or keypad formats. Multiple reader or keypad formats may be used simultaneously at different controllers or within the same controller. Controllers shall provide a response to card readers or keypad entries in less than 0.25 seconds, regardless of system size. Controllers that are reset, or powered up from a non-powered state, shall automatically request a parameter download and reboot to their proper working state. This shall happen without any operator intervention. Initial Startup: When controllers are brought on-line, database parameters shall be automatically downloaded to them. After initial download is completed, only database changes shall be downloaded to each controller. On failure for any reason, controllers shall perform an orderly shutdown and force controller outputs to a predetermined failure-mode state, consistent with the failure modes shown and the associated control device. After power is restored, following a power failure, startup software shall initiate self-test diagnostic routines, after which controllers shall resume normal operation. After controller failure, if the database and application software are no longer resident, controllers shall not restart but shall remain in the failure mode until repaired. If database and application programs are resident, controllers shall immediately resume operation. If not, software shall be restored automatically from the central station. Communications Monitoring: a. b. c. 6. remain fully functional within the same Location even when the central station or workstations are off-line. In the event of communication failure between the central station and a Location, there shall be no degradation in operations at the controllers at that Location. Controllers at each Location shall be connected to a memory buffer with a capacity to store up to 10,000 events; there shall be no loss of transactions in system history files until the buffer overflows. Buffered events shall be handled in a first-in-first-out mode of operation. Individual Controller Operation: a. 5. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building System shall monitor and report status of TIA 485-A communications loop of each Location. Communication status window shall display which controllers are currently communicating, a total count of missed polls since midnight, and which controller last missed a poll. Communication status window shall show the type of CPU, the type of I/O board, and the amount of RAM memory for each controller. Operating systems shall include a real-time clock function that maintains seconds, minutes, hours, day, date, and month. The real-time clock shall be automatically synchronized with the central station at least once a day to plus or minus 10 seconds. The time synchronization shall be automatic, without operator action and without requiring system shutdown. Access Control © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-1300 - 6 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site E. PC-to-Controller Communications: 1. Central-station or workstation communications shall use the following: a. b. Each serial port used for communications shall be individually configurable for "direct communications," "modem communications incoming and outgoing," or "modem communications incoming only," or as an ASCII output port. Serial ports shall have adjustable data transmission rates and shall be selectable under program control. 3. Use multiport communications board if more than two serial ports are needed. 4. 5. 6. 3. 2. Communication software on the PC shall supervise the PC-to-controller communications link. Loss of communications to any controller shall result in an alarm at all PCs running the communication software. When communications are restored, all buffered events shall automatically upload to the PC, and any database changes shall be automatically sent to the controller. TIA 485-A, four-wire, point-to-point, regenerative (repeater) communications network methodology. TIA 485-A communications signal shall be regenerated at each controller. Database Downloads: 1. 2. I. Direct serial, TCP/IP, and cable or satellite communications shall be alike in the monitoring or control of system except for the connection that must first be made to a voice-over IP Location. TCP/IP network interface card (NIV) shall have an option to set the poll-frequency and message response time-out settings. PC-to-controller and controller-to-controller communications (direct or TCP/IP) shall use a polled-communication protocol that checks sum and acknowledges each message. All communications shall be verified and buffered, and retransmitted if not acknowledged. Controller-to-Controller Communications: 1. H. Use a 4-, 8-, or 16-serial port configuration that is expandable to 32 or 64 serial ports. Connect the first board to an internal PCI bus adapter card. Direct Serial or TCP/IP PC-to-Controller Communications: 1. 2. G. Direct connection using serial ports of the PC. TCP/IP LAN interface cards. 2. a. b. F. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building All data transmissions from PCs to a Location, and between controllers at a Location, shall include a complete database checksum to check the integrity of the transmission. If the data checksum does not match, a full data download shall be automatically retransmitted. If a controller is reset for any reason, it shall automatically request and receive a database download from the PC. The download shall restore data stored at the controller to their normal working state and shall take place with no operator intervention. Operator Interface: 1. 2. Inputs in system shall have two icon representations, one for the normal state and one for the abnormal state. When viewing and controlling inputs, displayed icons shall automatically change to the proper icon to display the current system state in real time. Icons shall also display the input's state, Access Control © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-1300 - 7 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 3. 4. 5. 6. whether armed or bypassed, and if the input is in the armed or bypassed state due to a time zone or a manual command. Outputs in system shall have two icon representations, one for the secure (locked) state and one for the open (unlocked) state. Icons displaying status of the I/O points shall be constantly updated to show their current realtime condition without prompting by the operator. The operator shall be able to scroll the list of I/Os and press the appropriate toolbar button, or right click, to command the system to perform the desired function. Graphic maps or drawings containing inputs, outputs, and override groups shall include the following: a. b. c. d. 7. b. c. d. b. c. d. J. System shall incorporate override groups that provide the operator with the status and control over user-defined "sets" of I/Os with a single icon. Icon shall change automatically to show the live summary status of points in that group. Override group icon shall provide a method to manually control or set to time-zone points in the group. Override group icon shall allow the expanding of the group to show icons representing the live status for each point in the group, individual control over each point, and the ability to compress the individual icons back into one summary icon. Schedule Overrides of I/Os and Override Groups: a. 9. Database to import and store full-color maps or drawings and allow for input, output, and override group icons to be placed on maps. Maps to provide real-time display animation and allow for control of points assigned to them. System to allow inputs, outputs, and override groups to be placed on different maps. Software to allow changing the order or priority in which maps will be displayed. Override Groups Containing I/Os: a. 8. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building To accommodate temporary schedule changes that do not fall within the holiday parameters, the operator shall have the ability to override schedules individually for each input, output, or override group. Each schedule shall be composed of a minimum of two dates with separate times for each date. The first time and date shall be assigned the override state that the point shall advance to when the time and date become current. The second time and date shall be assigned the state that the point shall return to when the time and date become current. Copy command in database shall allow for like data to be copied and then edited for specific requirements, to reduce redundant data entry. Operator Access Control: 1. 2. 3. Control operator access to system controls through up to three password-protected operator levels. System operators and managers with appropriate password clearances shall be able to change operator levels for operators. Three successive attempts by an operator to execute functions beyond their defined level during a 24-hour period shall initiate a software tamper alarm. A minimum of 32 passwords shall be available with the system software. System shall display the operator's name or initials in the console's first field. System shall print the operator's name or initials, action, date, and time on the system printer at login and logoff. Access Control © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-1300 - 8 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 4. 5. The password shall not be displayed or printed. Each password shall be definable and assignable for the following: a. b. c. d. e. K. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Selected commands to be usable. Access to system software. Access to application software. Individual zones that are to be accessed. Access to database. Operator Commands: 1. 2. 3. Command Input: Plain-language words and acronyms shall allow operators to use the system without extensive training or data-processing backgrounds. System prompts shall be a word, a phrase, or an acronym. Command inputs shall be acknowledged and processing shall start in not less than one second(s). Tasks that are executed by operator's commands shall include the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. Acknowledge Alarms: Used to acknowledge that the operator has observed the alarm message. Place Zone in Access: Used to remotely disable intrusion-alarm circuits emanating from a specific zone. System shall be structured so that console operator cannot disable tamper circuits. Place Zone in Secure: Used to remotely activate intrusion-alarm circuits emanating from a specific zone. System Test: Allows the operator to initiate a system-wide operational test. Zone Test: Allows the operator to initiate an operational test for a specific zone. Print reports. Change Operator: Used for changing operators. Run system tests. Generate and format reports. Request help with the system operation. 1) 2) 3) 4) k. Entry-Control Commands: 1) 2) 3) 4) 4. Include in main menus. Provide unique, descriptive, context-sensitive help for selections and functions with the press of one function key. Provide navigation to specific topic from within the first help window. Help shall be accessible outside the application program. Lock (secure) or unlock (open) each controlled entry and exit up to four times a day through time-zone programming. Arm or disarm each monitored input up to four times a day through time-zone programming. Enable or disable readers or keypads up to two times a day through time-zone programming. Enable or disable cards or codes up to four times a day per entry point through access-level programming. Command Input Errors: Show operator input assistance when a command cannot be executed because of operator input errors. Assistance screen shall use plain-language words and phrases to explain why the command cannot be executed. Error responses that require an operator to look up a code in a manual or other document are not acceptable. Conditions causing operator assistance messages include the following: Access Control © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-1300 - 9 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site a. b. c. d. e. L. Command entered is incorrect or incomplete. Operator is restricted from using that command. Command addresses a point that is disabled or out of service. Command addresses a point that does not exist. Command is outside the system's capacity. Alarms: 1. System Setup: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. 2. b. c. d. 3. 4. 5. Assign manual and automatic responses to incoming-point status change or alarms. Automatically respond to input with a link to other inputs, outputs, or operatorresponse plans; unique sound with use of WAV files; and maps or images that graphically represent the point location. Sixty-character message field for each alarm. Operator-response-action messages shall allow message length of at least 65,000 characters, with database storage capacity of up to 32,000 messages. Setup shall assign messages to access point, zone or sensor. Secondary messages shall be assignable by the operator for printing to provide further information and shall be editable by the operator. Allow 25 secondary messages with a field of four lines of 60 characters each. Store the most recent 1000 alarms for recall by the operator using the report generator. Software Tamper: a. M. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Annunciate a tamper alarm when unauthorized changes to system database files are attempted. Three consecutive unsuccessful attempts to log onto system shall generate a software tamper alarm. Annunciate a software tamper alarm when an operator or other individual makes three consecutive unsuccessful attempts to invoke functions beyond their authorization level. Maintain a transcript file of the last 5000 commands entered at each central station to serve as an audit trail. System shall not allow write access to system transcript files by any person, regardless of their authorization level. Allow only acknowledgment of software tamper alarms. Read access to system transcript files shall be reserved for operators with the highest password authorization level available in system. Animated Response Graphics: Highlight alarms with flashing icons on graphic maps; display and constantly update the current status of alarm inputs and outputs in real time through animated icons. Alarm Handling: Each input may be configured so that an alarm cannot be cleared unless it has returned to normal, with options of requiring the operator to enter a comment about disposition of alarm. Allow operator to silence alarm sound when alarm is acknowledged. Alarm Monitoring: Monitor sensors, controllers, and DTS circuits and notify operators of an alarm condition. Display higher-priority alarms first and, within alarm priorities, display the oldest unacknowledged alarm first. Operator acknowledgment of one alarm shall not be considered acknowledgment of other alarms nor shall it inhibit reporting of subsequent alarms. 1. Displayed alarm data shall include type of alarm, location of alarm, and secondary alarm messages. Access Control © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-1300 - 10 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 2. 3. 4. Printed alarm data shall include type of alarm, location of alarm, date and time (to nearest second) of occurrence, and operator responses. Maps shall automatically display the alarm condition for each input assigned to that map if that option is selected for that input location. Alarms initiate a status of "pending" and require the following two handling steps by operators: a. b. 5. 6. 7. b. c. d. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. N. First Operator Step: "Acknowledged." This action shall silence sounds associated with the alarm. The alarm remains in the system "Acknowledged" but "Un-Resolved." Second Operator Step: Operators enter the resolution or operator comment, giving the disposition of the alarm event. The alarm shall then clear. Each alarm point shall be programmable to disallow the resolution of alarms until the alarm point has returned to its normal state. Alarms shall transmit to central station in real time. Alarms shall be displayed and managed from a minimum of four different windows. a. 8. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Input Status Window: Overlay status icon with a large red blinking icon. Selecting the icon will acknowledge the alarm. History Log Transaction Window: Display name, time, and date in red text. Selecting red text will acknowledge the alarm. Alarm Log Transaction Window: Display name, time, and date in red. Selecting red text will acknowledge the alarm. Graphic Map Display: Display a steady colored icon representing each alarm input location. Change icon to flashing red when the alarm occurs. Change icon from flashing red to steady red when the alarm is acknowledged. Once an alarm is acknowledged, the operator shall be prompted to enter comments about the nature of the alarm and actions taken. Operator's comments may be manually entered or selected from a programmed predefined list, or a combination of both. For locations where there are regular alarm occurrences, provide programmed comments. Selecting that comment shall clear the alarm. The time and name of the operator who acknowledged and resolved the alarm shall be recorded in the database. Identical alarms from the same alarm point shall be acknowledged at the same time the operator acknowledges the first alarm. Identical alarms shall be resolved when the first alarm is resolved. Alarm functions shall have priority over downloading, retrieving, and updating database from workstations and controllers. When a reader-controlled output (relay) is opened, the corresponding alarm point shall be automatically bypassed. Monitor Display: Display text and graphic maps that include zone status integrated into the display. Colors are used for the various components and current data. Colors shall be uniform throughout the system. 1. Color Code: a. b. c. d. FLASHING RED: Alerts operator that a zone has gone into an alarm or that primary power has failed. STEADY RED: Alerts operator that a zone is in alarm and alarm has been acknowledged. YELLOW: Advises operator that a zone is in access. GREEN: Indicates that a zone is secure and that power is on. Access Control © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-1300 - 11 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 2. Graphics: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. O. Support 32,000 graphic display maps and allow import of maps from a minimum of 16 standard formats from another drawing or graphics program. Allow I/O to be placed on graphic maps by the drag-and-drop method. Operators shall be able to view the inputs, outputs, and the point's name by moving the mouse cursor over the point on graphic map. Inputs or outputs may be placed on multiple graphic maps. The operator shall be able to toggle to view graphic map associated with I/Os. Each graphic map shall have a display-order sequence number associated with it to provide a predetermined order when toggled to different views. Camera icons shall have the ability to be placed on graphic maps that, when selected by an operator, will open a video window, display the camera associated with that icon, and provide pan-tilt-zoom control. Input, output, or camera placed on a map shall allow the ability to arm or bypass an input, open or secure an output, or control the pan-tilt-zoom function of the selected camera. System test software enables operators to initiate a test of the entire system or of a particular portion of the system. 1. P. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Test Report: The results of each test shall be stored for future display or printout. The report shall document the operational status of system components. Report Generator Software: Include commands to generate reports for displaying, printing, and storing on disk and tape. Reports shall be stored by type, date, and time. Report printing shall be the lowest priority activity. Report-generation mode shall be operator selectable but set up initially as periodic, automatic, or on request. Include time and date printed and the name of operator generating the report. Report formats may be configured by operators. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Automatic Printing: Setup shall specify, modify, or inhibit the report to be generated; the time the initial report is to be generated; the time interval between reports; the end of period; and the default printer. Printing on Request: An operator may request a printout of any report. Alarm Reports: Reporting shall be automatic as initially set up. Include alarms recorded by system over the selected time and information about the type of alarm (such as door alarm, intrusion alarm, tamper alarm, etc.) the type of sensor, the location, the time, and the action taken. Access and Secure Reports: Document zones placed in access, the time placed in access, and the time placed in secure mode. Custom Reports: Reports tailored to exact requirements of who, what, when, and where. As an option, custom report formats may be stored for future printing. Automatic History Reports: Named, saved, and scheduled for automatic generation. Cardholder Reports: Include data, or selected parts of the data, as well as the ability to be sorted by name, card number, imprinted number, or by any of the user-defined fields. Cardholder by Reader Reports: Based on who has access to a specific reader or group of readers by selecting the readers from a list. Cardholder by Access-Level Reports: Display everyone that has been assigned to the specified access level. Panel Labels Reports: Printout of control-panel field documentation including the actual location of equipment, programming parameters, and wiring identification. Maintain system installation data within system database so that they are available on-site at all times. Access Control © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-1300 - 12 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 11. History Reports: Custom reports that allows the operator to select any date, time, event type, device, output, input, operator, Location, name, or cardholder to be included or excluded from the report. a. b. c. d. e. f. 12. c. d. Q. View on screen. Print to system printer. Include automatic print spooling and "Print To" options if more than one printer is connected to system. "Save to File" with full path statement. System shall have the ability to produce a report indicating status of system inputs and outputs or of inputs and outputs that are abnormal, out of time zone, manually overridden, not reporting, or in alarm. Custom Code List Subroutine: Allow the access codes of system to be sorted and printed according to the following criteria: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. 14. 15. Initially store history on the hard disk of the host PC. Permit viewing of the history on workstations or print history to any system printer. The report shall be definable by a range of dates and times with the ability to have a daily start and stop time over a given date range. Each report shall depict the date, time, event type, event description, and device; or I/O name, cardholder group assignment, and cardholder name or code number. Each line of a printed report shall be numbered to ensure that the integrity of the report has not been compromised. Total number of lines of the report shall be given at the end of the report. If the report is run for a single event such as "Alarms," the total shall reflect how many alarms occurred during that period. Reports shall have the following four options: a. b. 13. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Active, inactive, or future activate or deactivate. Code number, name, or imprinted card number. Group, Location, access levels. Start and stop code range. Codes that have not been used since a selectable number of days. In, out, or either status. Codes with trace designation. The reports of system database shall allow options so that every data field may be printed. The reports of system database shall be constructed so that the actual position of the printed data shall closely match the position of the data on the data-entry windows. Anti-Passback: 1. 2. 3. 4. System shall have global and local anti-passback features, selectable by Location. System shall support hard and soft anti-passback. Hard Anti-Passback: Once a credential holder is granted access through a reader with one type of designation (IN or OUT), the credential holder may not pass through that type of reader designation until the credential holder passes through a reader of opposite designation. Soft Anti-Passback: Should a violation of the proper IN or OUT sequence occur, access shall be granted, but a unique alarm shall be transmitted to the control station, reporting the credential holder and the door involved in the violation. A separate report may be run on this event. Timed Anti-Passback: A controller capability that prevents an access code from being used twice at the same device (door) within a user-defined amount of time. Access Control © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-1300 - 13 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 5. 6. 7. 8. R. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Provide four separate zones per Location that can operate without requiring interaction with the host PC (done at controller). Each reader shall be assignable to one or all four anti-passback zones. In addition, each anti-passback reader can be further designated as "Hard," "Soft," or "Timed" in each of the four anti-passback zones. The four anti-passback zones shall operate independently. The anti-passback schemes shall be definable for each individual door. The Master Access Level shall override anti-passback. System shall have the ability to forgive (or reset) an individual credential holder or the entire credential-holder population anti-passback status to a neutral status. Visitor Assignment: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Provide for and allow an operator to be restricted to only working with visitors. The visitor badging subsystem shall assign credentials and enroll visitors. Allow only those access levels that have been designated as approved for visitors. Provide an automated log of visitor name, time and doors accessed, and name of person contacted. Allow a visitor designation to be assigned to a credential holder. Security access system shall be able to restrict the access levels that may be assigned to credentials issued to visitors. Allow operator to recall visitors' credential-holder file, once a visitor is enrolled in the system. The operator may designate any reader as one that deactivates the credential after use at that reader. The history log shall show the return of the credential. System shall have the ability to use the visitor designation in searches and reports. Reports shall be able to print all or any visitor activity. S. Training Software: Enables operators to practice system operation including alarm acknowledgment, alarm assessment, response force deployment, and response force communications. System shall continue normal operation during training exercises and shall terminate exercises when an alarm signal is received at the console. T. Entry-Control Enrollment Software: Database management functions that allow operators to add, delete, and modify access data as needed. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. The enrollment station shall not have alarm response or acknowledgment functions. Provide multiple, password-protected access levels. Database management and modification functions shall require a higher operator access level than personnel enrollment functions. The program shall provide means to disable the enrollment station when it is unattended, to prevent unauthorized use. The program shall provide a method to enter personnel identifying information into the entry control database files through enrollment stations. In the case of personnel identity-verification subsystems, this shall include biometric data. Allow entry of personnel identifying information into the system database using menu selections and data fields. The data field names shall be customized during setup to suit user and site needs. Personnel identity-verification subsystems selected for use with the system shall fully support the enrollment function and shall be compatible with the entry-control database files. Cardholder Data: Provide 99 user-defined fields. System shall have the ability to run searches and reports using any combination of these fields. Each user-defined field shall be configurable, using any combination of the following features: a. b. c. MASK: Determines a specific format with which data must comply. REQUIRED: Operator is required to enter data into field before saving. UNIQUE: Data entered must be unique. Access Control © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-1300 - 14 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site d. e. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 2.05 Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building DEACTIVATE DATE: Data entered will be evaluated as an additional deactivate date for all cards assigned to this cardholder. NAME ID: Data entered will be considered a unique ID for the cardholder. Personnel Search Engine: A report generator with capabilities such as search by last name, first name, group, or any predetermined user-defined data field; by codes not used in definable number of days; by skills; or by seven other methods. Multiple Deactivate Dates for Cards: User-defined fields to be configured as additional stop dates to deactivate any cards assigned to the cardholder. Batch card printing. Default card data can be programmed to speed data entry for sites where most card data are similar. Enhanced ACSII File Import Utility: Allows the importing of cardholder data and images. Card Expire Function: Allows readers to be configured to deactivate cards when a card is used at selected devices. SYSTEM DATABASE A. Database and database management software shall define and modify each point in database using operator commands. Definition shall include parameters and constraints associated with each system device. B. Database Operations: 1. 2. System data management shall be in a hierarchical menu-tree format, with navigation through expandable menu branches and manipulated with use of menus and icons in a main menu and system toolbar. Navigational Aids: a. b. c. d. 3. 4. C. Toolbar icons for add, delete, copy, print, capture image, activate, deactivate, and muster report. Point and click feature to facilitate data manipulation. Next and previous command buttons visible when editing database fields to facilitate navigation from one record to the next. Copy command and copy tool in the toolbar to copy data from one record to create a new similar record. Data entry shall be automatically checked for duplicate and illegal data and shall be verified for valid format. System shall generate a memo or note field for each item that is stored in database, allowing the storing of information about any defining characteristics of the item. Memo field is used for noting the purpose for which the item was entered, reasons for changes that were made, and the like. File Management: 1. 2. 3. File management shall include database backup and restoration system, allowing selection of storage media, including 3.5-inch floppy disk, Zip and Jaz drives, and designated network resources. Operations shall be both manual and automatic modes. The number of automatic sequential backups before the oldest backup becomes overwritten; FIFO mode shall be operator selectable. Backup program shall provide manual operation from any PC on the LAN and shall operate while system remains operational. Access Control © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-1300 - 15 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site D. Operator Passwords: 1. 2. 3. 4. Support up to 32,000 individual system operators, each with a unique password. Allow passwords to be case sensitive. Passwords shall not be displayed when entered. Passwords shall have unique and customizable password profile, and allow several operators to share a password profile. Include the following features in the password profile: a. b. c. 5. 6. E. Predetermine the highest-level password profile for access to all functions and areas of program. Allow or disallow operator access to any program operation, including the functions of View, Add, Edit, and Delete. Restrict doors to which an operator can assign access. Operators shall use a user name and password to log on to system. This user name and password shall be used to access database areas and programs as determined by the associated profile. Make provision to allow the operator to log off without fully exiting program. User may be logged off but program will remain running while displaying the login window for the next operator. Access Card/Code Operation and Management: Access authorization shall be by card, by a manually entered code (PIN), or by a combination of both (card plus PIN). 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. F. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Access authorization shall verify the facility code first, the card or card-and-PIN validation second, and the access level (time of day, day of week, date), anti-passback status, and number of uses last. Use data-entry windows to view, edit, and issue access levels. Access-authorization entry management system shall maintain and coordinate all access levels to prevent duplication or the incorrect creation of levels. Allow assignment of multiple cards/codes to a cardholder. Allow assignment of up to four access levels for each Location to a cardholder. Each access level may contain any combination of doors. Each door may be assigned four time zones. Access codes may be up to 11 digits in length. Software shall allow the grouping of locations so cardholder data can be shared by all locations in the group. Visitor Access: Issue a visitor badge for data tracking or photo ID purposes without assigning that person a card or code. Cardholder Tracing: Allow for selection of cardholder for tracing. Make a special audible and visual annunciation at control station when a selected card or code is used at a designated code reader. Annunciation shall include an automatic display of the cardholder image. Allow each cardholder to be given either an unlimited number of uses or a number from one to 9999 that regulates the number of times the card can be used before it is automatically deactivated. Provide for cards and codes to be activated and deactivated manually or automatically by date. Provide for multiple deactivate dates to be preprogrammed. Security Access Integration: 1. Photo ID badging and photo verification shall use the same database as the security access and may query data from cardholder, group, and other personal information to build a custom ID badge. Access Control © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-1300 - 16 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 2. 3. G. Automatic or manual image recall and manual access based on photo verification shall also be a means of access verification and entry. System shall allow sorting of cardholders together by group or other characteristic for a fast and efficient method of reporting on, and enabling or disabling, cards or codes. Operator Comments: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. With the press of one appropriate button on the toolbar, the user shall be permitted to enter operator comments into the history at any time. Automatic prompting of operator comment shall occur before the resolution of each alarm. Operator comments shall be recorded by time, date, and operator number. Comments shall be sorted and viewed through reports and history. The operator may enter comments in two ways; either or both may be used: a. b. 6. H. 2. 3. 4. System shall have a minimum of 999 predefined operator comments with up to 30 characters per comment. Group names may be used to sort cardholders into groups that allow the operator to determine the tenant, vendor, contractor, department, division, or any other designation of a group to which the person belongs. System software shall have the capacity to assign one of 32,000 group names to an access authorization. Make provision in software to deactivate and reactivate all access authorizations assigned to a particular group. Allow sorting of history reports and code list printouts by group name. Time Zones: 1. 2. 3. 4. J. Manually entered through keyboard data entry (typed), up to 65,000 characters per each alarm. Predefined and stored in database for retrieval on request. Group: 1. I. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Each zone consists of a start and stop time for seven days of the week and three holiday schedules. A time zone is assigned to inputs, outputs, or access levels to determine when an input shall automatically arm or disarm, when an output automatically opens or secures, or when access authorization assigned to an access level will be denied or granted. Up to four time zones may be assigned to inputs and outputs to allow up to four arm or disarm periods per day or four lock or unlock periods per day; up to three holiday override schedules may be assigned to a time zone. Data-entry window shall display a dynamically linked bar graph showing active and inactive times for each day and holiday, as start and stop times are entered or edited. System shall have the capacity for 2048 time zones for each Location. Holidays: 1. 2. 3. Three different holiday schedules may be assigned to a time zone. Holiday schedule consists of date in format MM/DD/YYYY and a description. When the holiday date matches the current date of the time zone, the holiday schedule replaces the time-zone schedule for that 24-hour period. System shall have the capacity for unlimited holidays. Three separate holiday schedules may be applied to a time zone. Access Control © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-1300 - 17 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 4. 5. K. 3. 4. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. A. System shall provide a minimum of 99 user-defined fields, each with up to 50 characters, for specific information about each credential holder. System shall accommodate a title for each field; field length shall be 20 characters. A "Required" option may be applied to each user-defined field that, when selected, forces the operator to enter data in the user-defined field before the credential can be saved. A "Unique" option may be applied to each user-defined field that, when selected, will not allow duplicate data from different credential holders to be entered. Data format option may be assigned to each user-defined field that will require the data to be entered with certain character types in specific spots in the field entry window. A user-defined field, if selected, will define the field as a deactivate date. The selection shall automatically cause the data to be formatted with the windows MM/DD/YYYY date format. The credential of the holder will be deactivated on that date. A search function shall allow any one user-defined field or combination of user-defined fields to be searched to find the appropriate cardholder. The search function shall include search for a character string. System shall have the ability to print cardholders based on and organized by the user-defined fields. SURGE AND TAMPER PROTECTION Surge Protection: Protect components from voltage surges originating external to equipment housing and entering through power, communication, signal, control, or sensing leads. Include surge protection for external wiring of each conductor-entry connection to components. 1. 2. B. System shall allow for the creation of up to unlimited access levels. One level shall be predefined as the Master Access Level. The Master Access Level shall work at all doors at all times and override any anti-passback. System shall allow for access to be restricted to any area by reader and by time. Access levels shall determine when and where an Identifier is authorized. System shall be able to create multiple door and time-zone combinations under the same access level so that an Identifier may be valid during different time periods at different readers even if the readers are on the same controller. User-Defined Fields: 1. 2.06 Holidays have an option to be designated as occurring on the designated date each year. These holidays remain in system and will not be purged. Holidays not designated to occur each year shall be automatically purged from the database after the date expires. Access Levels: 1. 2. L. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Minimum Protection for Power Connections 120 V and More: Auxiliary panel suppressors complying with requirements in Division 26 Section "Transient-Voltage Suppression for LowVoltage Electrical Power Circuits." Minimum Protection for Communication, Signal, Control, and Low-Voltage Power Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Transient-Voltage Suppression for LowVoltage Electrical Power Circuits." as recommended by manufacturer for type of line being protected. Tamper Protection: Tamper switches on enclosures, control units, pull boxes, junction boxes, cabinets, and other system components shall initiate a tamper-alarm signal when unit is opened or partially disassembled. Control-station control-unit alarm display shall identify tamper alarms and indicate locations. Access Control © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-1300 - 18 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 2.07 A. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building CENTRAL-STATION HARDWARE Central-Station Computer: Standard unmodified PC of modular design. The CPU operating speed shall be at least 1.6 GHz. 1. 2. 3. Memory: 256 MB of usable installed memory, expandable to a minimum of 2048 MB without additional chassis or power supplies. Power Supply: Minimum capacity of 250 W. Real-Time Clock: a. b. c. d. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Parallel Port: An enhanced parallel port. LAN Adapter Card: 10/100/1000Mbps PCI bus, internal network interface card. Sound Card: For playback and recording of digital WAV sound files that are associated with audible warning and alarm functions. Color Monitor: Not less than 17 inches with a minimum resolution of 1280 by 1024 pixels, noninterlaced. The video card shall support at least 256 colors at a resolution of 1280 by 1024 at a minimum refresh rate of 70Hz. Keyboard: With a minimum of 64 characters, standard ASCII character set based on ANSI INCITS 154. Mouse: Standard, compatible with the installed software. Special-function keyboard attachments or special-function keys to facilitate data input of the following operator tasks: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. 11. Help. Alarm Acknowledge. Place Zone in Access. Place Zone in Secure. System Test. Print Reports. Change Operator. Disk storage shall include the following, each with appropriate controller: a. b. 12. 13. 14. Accuracy: Plus or minus one minute per month. Time-Keeping Format: 24-hour time format including seconds, minutes, hours, date, day, and month; resettable by software. Clock shall function for one year without power. Provide automatic time correction once every 24 hours by synchronizing clock with the Time Service Department of the U.S. Naval Observatory. Minimum 160 GB hard disk Floppy Disk Drive: High density, 3-1/2-inch size. Audible Alarm: Manufacturer's standard. CD-ROM Drive: Report Printer: a. b. c. d. Connected to the central station and designated workstations. Laser printer with minimum resolution of 600 dpi. RAM: 2 MB, minimum. Printing Speed: Minimum 12 pages per minute. Access Control © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-1300 - 19 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site e. 15. 16. B. Paper Handling: Automatic sheet feeder with 250 sheet paper cassette and with automatic feed. Interface: Bidirectional parallel, and universal serial bus. LAN Adapter Card: 10/100/1000Mbps internal network interface card. UPS: Self-contained; complying with requirements in Division 26 Section "Static Uninterruptible Power Supply." 1. 2. 2.08 Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Size: Provide a minimum of 8 hours of operation of the central-station equipment, including two hours of alarm printer operation. Batteries: Sealed, valve regulated, recombinant, lead calcium. CONTROLLERS A. Controllers: Intelligent peripheral control unit, complying with UL 294, that stores time, date, valid codes, access levels, and similar data downloaded from the central station or workstation for controlling its operation. B. Subject to compliance with requirements in this article, manufacturers may use multipurpose controllers. C. Battery Backup: Sealed, lead acid; sized to provide run time during a power outage of 90 minutes, complying with UL 924. D. Alarm Annunciation Controller: 1. The controller shall automatically restore communication within 10 seconds after an interruption with the field device network. a. b. Inputs: Monitor dry contacts for changes of state that reflect alarm conditions. Provides at least eight alarm inputs, which are suitable for wiring as normally open or normally closed contacts for alarm conditions. Alarm-Line Supervision: 1) 2) c. 2. E. Supervise the alarm lines by monitoring each circuit for changes or disturbances in the signal by monitoring for abnormal open, grounded, or shorted conditions using dc change measurements. System shall initiate an alarm in response to an abnormal current, which is a dc change of 10 percent or more for longer than 500 ms. Transmit alarm-line-supervision alarm to the central station during the next interrogation cycle after the abnormal current condition. Outputs: Managed by central-station software. Auxiliary Equipment Power: A GFI service outlet inside the controller enclosure. Entry-Control Controller: 1. Function: Provide local entry-control functions including one- and two-way communications with access-control devices such as card readers, keypads, biometric personnel identity-verification devices, door strikes, magnetic latches, gate and door operators, and exit push buttons. a. Operate as a stand-alone portal controller using the downloaded database during periods of communication loss between the controller and the field-device network. Access Control © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-1300 - 20 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site b. Accept information generated by the entry-control devices; automatically process this information to determine valid identification of the individual present at the portal: 1) 2) c. 2. b. b. c. d. 5. Data from entry-control devices; use this input to change modes between access and secure. Database downloads and updates from the central station that include enrollment and privilege information. Indicate success or failure of attempts to use entry-control devices and make comparisons of presented information with stored identification information. Grant or deny entry by sending control signals to portal-control devices and mask intrusion-alarm annunciation from sensors stimulated by authorized entries. Maintain a date-, time-, and Location-stamped record of each transaction and transmit transaction records to the central station. Door Prop Alarm: If a portal is held open for longer than 30 seconds alarm sounds. With power supplies sufficient to power at voltage and frequency required for field devices and portal-control devices. Data Line Problems: For periods of loss of communication with the central station, or when data transmission is degraded and generating continuous checksum errors, the controller shall continue to control entry by accepting identifying information, making authentication decisions, checking privileges, and controlling portal-control devices. a. 6. Maintain a date-, time-, and Location-stamped record of each transaction. A transaction is defined as any successful or unsuccessful attempt to gain access through a controlled portal by the presentation of credentials or other identifying information. Outputs: a. 4. On authentication of the credentials or information presented, check privileges of the identified individual, allowing only those actions granted as privileges. Privileges shall include, but are not limited to, time of day control, day of week control, group control, and visitor escort control. Inputs: a. 3. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Store up to 2000 transactions during periods of communication loss between the controlled and access-control devices for subsequent upload to the central station on restoration of communication. Controller Power: NFPA 70, Class II power-supply transformer, with 12- or 24-V ac secondary, backup battery and charger. a. b. c. Backup Battery: Valve-regulated, recombinant-sealed, lead-calcium battery; spill proof; with a full one-year warranty and a pro rata [19] [9]-year warranty. With single-stage, constant-voltage-current, limited battery charger, comply with battery manufacturer's written instructions for battery terminal voltage and charging current recommendations for maximum battery life. Backup Battery: Valve-regulated, recombinant-sealed, lead-acid battery; spill proof. With single-stage, constant-voltage-current, limited battery charger, comply with battery manufacturer's written instructions for battery terminal voltage and charging current recommendations for maximum battery life. Backup Power-Supply Capacity: 90 minutes of battery supply. Submit battery and charger calculations. Access Control © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-1300 - 21 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site d. Power Monitoring: Provide manual, dynamic battery-load test, initiated and monitored at the control center; with automatic disconnection of the controller when battery voltage drops below controller limits. Report by using local controller-mounted digital displays and by communicating status to central station. Indicate normal power on and battery charger on trickle charge. Indicate and report the following: 1) 2) 3) 2.09 Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Trouble Alarm: Normal power-off load assumed by battery. Trouble Alarm: Low battery. Alarm: Power off. CARD READERS, CREDENTIAL CARDS, AND KEYPADS A. Card-Reader Power: Powered from its associated controller, including its standby power source, and shall not dissipate more than 5 W. B. Response Time: Card reader shall respond to passage requests by generating a signal that is sent to the controller. Response time shall be 800 ms or less, from the time the card reader finishes reading the credential card until a response signal is generated. C. Enclosure: Suitable for surface, semi-flush, pedestal, or weatherproof mounting. Mounting types shall additionally be suitable for installation in the following locations: 1. 2. 3. Indoors, controlled environment. Indoors, uncontrolled environment. Outdoors, with built-in heaters or other cold-weather equipment to extend the operating temperature range as needed for operation at the site. D. Display: Digital visual indicator shall provide visual and audible status indications and user prompts. Indicate power on or off, whether user passage requests have been accepted or rejected, and whether the door is locked or unlocked. E. Touch-Plate and Proximity Readers: 1. 2. 3. 2.10 A. Active-detection proximity card readers shall provide power to compatible credential cards through magnetic induction, and shall receive and decode a unique identification code number transmitted from the credential card. Passive-detection proximity card readers shall use a swept-frequency, RF field generator to read the resonant frequencies of tuned circuits laminated into compatible credential cards. The resonant frequencies read shall constitute a unique identification code number. The card reader shall read proximity cards in a range from contact to at least 6 inches from the reader. PUSH-BUTTON SWITCHES Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Securitron Magnalock Corporation; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. B. Push-Button Switches: Momentary-contact back-lighted push buttons with stainless-steel switch enclosures. C. Enclosures: Flush or surface mounting. Push buttons shall be suitable for flush mounting in the switch enclosures. Access Control © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-1300 - 22 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site D. Enclosures shall additionally be suitable for installation in the following locations: 1. 2. 3. E. 2.11 Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Indoors, controlled environment. Indoors, uncontrolled environment. Outdoors. Power: Push-button switches shall be powered from their associated controller, using dc control. DOOR HARDWARE INTERFACE A. Exit Device with Alarm: Operation of the exit device shall generate an alarm and annunciate a local alarm. Exit device and alarm contacts are specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." B. Exit Alarm: Operation of a monitored door shall generate an alarm. Exit devices and alarm contacts are specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." C. Electromagnetic Locks: End-of-line resistors shall provide power-line supervision. Lock status sensing signal shall positively indicate door is secure. Power and signal shall be from the controller. Electromagnetic locks are specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." 2.12 CABLES A. General Cable Requirements: Comply with requirements in Division 28 Section "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security" and as recommended by system manufacturer for integration requirement. B. PVC-Jacketed, TIA 485-A Cables: Two pairs, twisted, No. 22 AWG, stranded tinned copper conductors, PVC insulation, unshielded, PVC jacket, and NFPA 70, Type CMG. C. Plenum-Type, TIA 485-A Cables: 1. 2. 3. D. Multi-conductor, PVC, Reader and Wiegand Keypad Cables: 1. 2. 3. 4. E. Two pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded tinned copper conductors, fluorinated-ethylene-propylene insulation, unshielded, and fluorinated-ethylene-propylene jacket. NFPA 70, Type CMP. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262 flame test. No. 22 AWG, paired and twisted multiple conductors, stranded tinned copper conductors, semirigid PVC insulation, overall aluminum-foil/polyester-tape shield with 100 percent shield coverage, plus tinned copper braid shield with 65 percent shield coverage, and PVC jacket. NFPA 70, Type CMG. Flame Resistance: UL 1581 vertical tray. For TIA 232-F applications. Paired, PVC, Reader and Wiegand Keypad Cables: 1. 2. 3. Three pairs, twisted, No. 22 AWG, stranded tinned copper conductors, polypropylene insulation, individual aluminum-foil/polyester-tape shielded pairs each with No. 22 AWG, stranded tinned copper drain wire, 100 percent shield coverage, and PVC jacket. NFPA 70, Type CM. Flame Resistance: UL 1581 vertical tray. Access Control © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-1300 - 23 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site F. Paired, PVC, Reader and Wiegand Keypad Cables: 1. 2. 3. G. 2. 3. 2. 3. 2. 3. 2. 3. One pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded tinned copper conductors, PVC insulation, unshielded, and PVC jacket. NFPA 70, Type CMP. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262 flame test. Paired, Lock Cables: 1. 2. 3. L. One pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded tinned copper conductors, PVC insulation, unshielded, and PVC jacket. NFPA 70, Type CMG. Flame Resistance: UL 1581 vertical tray. Paired, Plenum-Type, Lock Cables: 1. K. Six conductors, No. 20 AWG, stranded tinned copper conductors, fluorinated-ethylenepropylene insulation, overall aluminumfoil/polyester-tape shield with 100 percent shield coverage plus tinned copper braid shield with 85 percent shield coverage, and fluorinated-ethylenepropylene jacket. NFPA 70, Type CMP. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262 flame test. Paired, Lock Cables: 1. J. Three pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded tinned copper conductors, plastic insulation, individual aluminum-foil/polypropylene-tape shielded pairs each with No. 22 AWG, stranded tinned copper drain wire, 100 percent shield coverage, and fluorinated-ethylene-propylene jacket. NFPA 70, Type CMP. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262 flame test. Multi-conductor, Plenum-Type, Reader and Wiegand Keypad Cables: 1. I. Three pairs, twisted, No. 20 AWG, stranded tinned copper conductors, polyethylene (polyolefin) insulation, individual aluminum-foil/polyester-tape shielded pairs each with No. 22 AWG, stranded tinned copper drain wire, 100 percent shield coverage, and PVC jacket. NFPA 70, Type CM. Flame Resistance: UL 1581 vertical tray. Paired, Plenum-Type, Reader and Wiegand Keypad Cables: 1. H. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building One pair, twisted, No. 18 AWG, stranded tinned copper conductors, PVC insulation, unshielded, and PVC jacket. NFPA 70, Type CMG. Flame Resistance: UL 1581 vertical tray. Paired, Plenum-Type, Lock Cables: 1. 2. 3. One pair, twisted, No. 18 AWG, stranded tinned copper conductors, fluorinated ethylenepropylene insulation, unshielded, and plastic jacket. NFPA 70, Type CMP. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262 flame test. Access Control © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-1300 - 24 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site M. Paired, Input Cables: 1. 2. 3. N. 2. 3. 2. 2. 3. 2. A. One pair, twisted, No. 18 AWG, stranded tinned copper conductors, fluorinatedethylenepropylene insulation, unshielded, and plastic jacket. NFPA 70, Type CMP. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262 flame test. LAN Cabling: 1. 2.13 One pair, twisted, No. 18 AWG, stranded tinned copper conductors, PVC insulation, unshielded, and PVC jacket. NFPA 70, Type CMG. Paired, Plenum-Type, AC Transformer Cables: 1. Q. One pair, twisted, No. 22 AWG, stranded tinned copper conductors, fluorinatedethylenepropylene insulation, aluminum-foil/polyester-tape shield (foil side out), with No. 22 AWG drain wire, 100 percent shield coverage, and plastic jacket. NFPA 70, Type CMP. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262 flame test. Paired, AC Transformer Cables: 1. P. One pair, twisted, No. 22 AWG, stranded tinned copper conductors, polypropylene insulation, overall aluminum-foil/polyester-tape shield with No. 22 AWG, stranded tinned copper drain wire, 100 percent shield coverage, and PVC jacket. NFPA 70, Type CMR. Flame Resistance: UL 1666 riser flame test. Paired, Plenum-Type, Input Cables: 1. O. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Comply with requirements in Division 28 Section "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security." NFPA 262. TRANSFORMERS NFPA 70, Class II control transformers, NRTL listed. Transformers for security access-control system shall not be shared with any other system. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Comply with TIA/EIA 606-A, "Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure." B. Obtain detailed Project planning forms from manufacturer of access-control system; develop custom forms to suit Project. Fill in all data available from Project plans and specifications and publish as Project planning documents for review and approval. 1. 2. 3. Record setup data for control station and workstations. For each Location, record setup of controller features and access requirements. Propose start and stop times for time zones and holidays, and match up access levels for doors. Access Control © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-1300 - 25 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. C. 3.02 Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Set up groups, facility codes, linking, and list inputs and outputs for each controller. Assign action message names and compose messages. Set up alarms. Establish interlocks between alarms, intruder detection, and video surveillance features. Prepare and install alarm graphic maps. Develop user-defined fields. Develop screen layout formats. Propose setups for guard tours and key control. Discuss badge layout options; design badges. Complete system diagnostics and operation verification. Prepare a specific plan for system testing, startup, and demonstration. Develop acceptance test concept and, on approval, develop specifics of the test. In meetings with Architect and Owner, present Project planning documents and review, adjust, and prepare final setup documents. Use final documents to set up system software. CABLING A. Comply with NECA 1, "Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction." B. Install cables and wiring according to requirements in Division 28 Section "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security." C. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway and cable tray except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters. Conceal raceway and wiring except in unfinished spaces. D. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway and cable tray except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters and except in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum board partitions where unenclosed wiring method may be used. Use NRTL-listed plenum cable in environmental airspaces, including plenum ceilings. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces. E. Install LAN cables using techniques, practices, and methods that are consistent with Category 5E rating of components and fiber-optic rating of components, and that ensure Category 6 and fiber-optic performance of completed and linked signal paths, end to end. F. Boxes and enclosures containing security-system components or cabling, and which are easily accessible to employees or to the public, shall be provided with a lock. Boxes above ceiling level in occupied areas of the building shall not be considered accessible. Junction boxes and small device enclosures below ceiling level and easily accessible to employees or the public shall be covered with a suitable cover plate and secured with tamperproof screws. G. Install end-of-line resistors at the field device location and not at the controller or panel location. 3.03 CABLE APPLICATION A. Comply with TIA 569-B, "Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces." B. Cable application requirements are minimum requirements and shall be exceeded if recommended or required by manufacturer of system hardware. C. TIA 485-A Cabling: Install at a maximum distance of 2000 ft. D. Card Readers and Keypads: Access Control © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-1300 - 26 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 1. 2. 3. 4. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Install number of conductor pairs recommended by manufacturer for the functions specified. Unless manufacturer recommends larger conductors, install No. 22 AWG wire if maximum distance from controller to the reader is 250 ft. and install No. 20 AWG wire if maximum distance is 500 ft. For greater distances, install "extender" or "repeater" modules recommended by manufacturer of the controller. Install minimum No. 18 AWG shielded cable to readers and keypads that draw 50 mA or more. E. Install minimum No. 16 AWG cable from controller to electrically powered locks. Do not exceed 500 ft. F. Install minimum No. 18 AWG ac power wire from transformer to controller, with a maximum distance of 25 ft. 3.04 GROUNDING A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." B. Comply with IEEE 1100, "Recommended Practice for Power and Grounding Electronic Equipment." C. Ground cable shields, drain conductors, and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments. D. Bond shields and drain conductors to ground at only one point in each circuit. E. Signal Ground: 1. 2. 3. 3.05 Terminal: Locate in each equipment room and wiring closet; isolate from power system and equipment grounding. Bus: Mount on wall of main equipment room with standoff insulators. Backbone Cable: Extend from signal ground bus to signal ground terminal in each equipment room and wiring closet. INSTALLATION A. Push Buttons: Where multiple push buttons are housed within a single switch enclosure, they shall be stacked vertically with each push-button switch labeled with 1/4-inch B. Install card readers, keypads, push buttons, and biometric readers. high text and symbols as required. Push-button switches shall be connected to the controller associated with the portal to which they are applied, and shall operate the appropriate electric strike, electric bolt, or other facility release device. 3.06 IDENTIFICATION A. In addition to requirements in this article, comply with applicable requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" and with TIA/EIA 606-A. B. Using software specified in "Cable and Asset Management Software" Article, develop cable administration drawings for system identification, testing, and management. Use unique, alphanumeric designation for each cable, and label cable and jacks, connectors, and terminals to which it connects with the same designation. Use logical and systematic designations for facility's architectural arrangement. C. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel. Access Control © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-1300 - 27 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 1. 2. D. 3.07 A. 3.08 Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building All wiring conductors connected to terminal strips shall be individually numbered, and each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a building-mounted device shall be identified with the name and number of the particular device as shown. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at the device if the color of the wire is consistent with the associated wire connected and numbered within the panel or cabinet. At completion, cable and asset management software shall reflect as-built conditions. SYSTEM SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE Develop, install, and test software and hardware, and perform databases tests for the complete and proper operation of systems involved. Assign software license to Owner. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. 2. 3. LAN Cable Procedures: Inspect for physical damage and test each conductor signal path for continuity and shorts. Use Class 2, bidirectional, Category 5 tester. Test for faulty connectors, splices, and terminations. Test according to TIA/EIA 568-B.1, "Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standards - Part 1: General Requirements." Link performance for UTP cables must comply with minimum criteria in TIA/EIA 568-B.1. Test each circuit and component of each system. Tests shall include, but are not limited to, measurements of power-supply output under maximum load, signal loop resistance, and leakage to ground where applicable. System components with battery backup shall be operated on battery power for a period of not less than 10 percent of the calculated battery operating time. Provide special equipment and software if testing requires special or dedicated equipment. Operational Test: After installation of cables and connectors, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements. Test each signal path for end-to-end performance from each end of all pairs installed. Remove temporary connections when tests have been satisfactorily completed. C. Devices and circuits will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.09 A. STARTUP SERVICE Engage a factory-authorized service representative to supervise and assist with startup service. 1. 3.10 A. Complete installation and startup checks according to approved procedures that were developed in "Preparation" Article and with manufacturer's written instructions. PROTECTION Maintain strict security during the installation of equipment and software. Rooms housing the control station, and workstations that have been powered up shall be locked and secured with an activated burglar alarm and access-control system reporting to a central station complying with UL 1610, "Central- Access Control © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-1300 - 28 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Station Burglar-Alarm Units," during periods when a qualified operator in the employ of Contractor is not present. 3.11 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain security access system. See Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training." B. Develop separate training modules for the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Computer system administration personnel to manage and repair the LAN and databases and to update and maintain software. Operators who prepare and input credentials to man the control station and workstations and to enroll personnel. Security personnel. Hardware maintenance personnel. Corporate management. END OF SECTION Access Control © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-1300 - 29 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 28-1600 - INTRUSION DETECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes intrusion detection with communication links to perform monitoring, alarm, and control functions. B. Related Sections: 1. 2. 1.02 Division 28 Section "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security" for cabling between master control units and field-mounted devices and control units. Division 28 Section "Video Surveillance" for CCTV cameras that are used as devices for video motion detection. DEFINITIONS A. Control Unit: System component that monitors inputs and controls outputs through various circuits. B. Master Control Unit: System component that accepts inputs from other control units and may also perform control-unit functions. The unit has limited capacity for the number of protected zones and is installed at an unattended location or at a location where it is not the attendant's primary function to monitor the security system. C. Monitoring Station: Facility that receives signals and has personnel in attendance at all times to respond to signals. A central station is a monitoring station that is listed. D. Standard Intruder: A person who weighs 50 lb or more and whose height is 84 inches or less. E. Standard-Intruder Movement: Any movement, such as walking, running, crawling, rolling, or jumping, of a "standard intruder" in a protected zone. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Detail assemblies of standard components that are custom assembled for specific application on this Project. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Raceway Riser Diagrams: Detail raceway runs required for intrusion detection. Include designation of devices connected by raceway, raceway type and size, and type and size of wire and cable fill for each raceway run. Site and Floor Plans: Indicate final outlet and device locations, routing of raceways, and cables inside and outside the building. Include room layout for master control-unit console, terminal cabinet, racks, and UPS. Master Control-Unit Console Layout: Show required device identification. Device Address List: Coordinate with final system programming. System Wiring Diagrams: Include system diagrams unique to Project. Show connections for all devices, components, and auxiliary equipment. Include diagrams for equipment and for system with all terminals and interconnections identified. Details of surge-protection devices and their installation. Sensor detection patterns and adjustment ranges. Intrusion Detection © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-1600 - 1 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building C. Equipment and System Operation Description: Include method of operation and supervision of each component and each type of circuit. Show sequence of operations for manually and automatically initiated system or equipment inputs. Description must cover this specific Project; manufacturer's standard descriptions for generic systems are unacceptable. D. Samples: For units with factory-applied color finishes. 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality-control reports. B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.05 A. 1.06 A. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Operation and maintenance data. MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. 2. 1.07 A. Intrusion Detection Devices: Furnish quantity equal to five percent of the number of units of each type installed, but no fewer than one of each type. Fuses: Three of each kind and size. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: 1. 2. An employer of workers, at least one of whom is a technician certified by the National Burglar & Fire Alarm Association. Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. D. Control Units, Devices, and Communications with Monitoring Station: Listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency for compliance with SIA CP-01. E. FM Global Compliance: FM-Approved and -labeled intrusion detection devices and equipment. F. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.08 A. PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Conditions: Capable of withstanding the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating capability: 1. Altitude: Sea level to 4000 feet Intrusion Detection © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-1600 - 2 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1.09 A. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Master Control Unit: Rated for continuous operation in an ambient of 60 to 85 deg F. Interior, Controlled Environment: System components, except master control unit, installed in air conditioned or temperature-controlled interior environments shall be rated for continuous operation in ambients of 36 to 122 deg. F and a relative humidity of 20 to 80 percent, noncondensing. Interior, Uncontrolled Environment: System components installed in non-air-conditioned or nontemperature-controlled interior environments shall be rated for continuous operation in ambients dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, noncondensing. Exterior Environment: System components installed in locations exposed to weather shall be rated for continuous operation in ambients of 30 to 122 deg. F dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, non-condensing. Comply with UL 294 and UL 639 for outdoor-use equipment. Rate for continuous operation when exposed to rain as specified in NEMA 250, winds up to 85 mph and snow cover up to 24 inches thick. Hazardous Environment: System components located in areas where fire or explosion hazards may exist because of flammable gases or vapors, flammable liquids, combustible dust, or ignitable fibers or flyings shall be rated, listed, and installed according to NFPA 70. WARRANTY Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of intrusion detection devices and equipment that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM A. Intrusion Detection System must be fully compatible with Access Control System. B. Description: Hard-wired modular, microprocessor-based controls, intrusion sensors and detection devices, and communication links to perform monitoring, alarm, and control functions. C. Supervision: System components shall be continuously monitored for normal, alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions. Indicate deviations from normal conditions at any location in system. Indication includes identification of device or circuit in which deviation has occurred and whether deviation is an alarm or malfunction. 1. 2. 3. Alarm Signal: Display at master control unit and actuate audible and visual alarm devices. Trouble Condition Signal: Distinct from other signals, indicating that system is not fully functional. Trouble signal shall indicate system problems such as battery failure, open or shorted transmission line conductors, or control-unit failure. Supervisory Condition Signal: Distinct from other signals, indicating an abnormal condition as specified for the particular device or control unit. D. System Control: Master control unit shall directly monitor intrusion detection units and connecting wiring. E. System shall automatically reboot program without error or loss of status or alarm data after any system disturbance. F. Operator Commands: Intrusion Detection © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-1600 - 3 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Help with System Operation: Display all commands available to operator. Help command, followed by a specific command, shall produce a short explanation of the purpose, use, and system reaction to that command. Acknowledge Alarm: To indicate that alarm message has been observed by operator. Place Protected Zone in Access: Disable all intrusion-alarm circuits of a specific protected zone. Tamper circuits may not be disabled by operator. Place Protected Zone in Secure: Activate all intrusion-alarm circuits of a protected zone. Protected Zone Test: Initiate operational test of a specific protected zone. System Test: Initiate system-wide operational test. Print reports. G. Timed Control at Master Control Unit: Allow automatically timed "secure" and "access" functions of selected protected zones. H. Automatic Control of Related Systems: Alarm or supervisory signals from certain intrusion detection devices control the following functions in related systems: 1. 2. 3. Switch selected lights. Open a signal path between certain intercommunication stations. Switch signal to selected monitor from CCTV camera in vicinity of sensor signaling an alarm. I. Printed Record of Events: Print a record of alarm, supervisory, and trouble events on system printer. Sort and report by protected zone, device, and function. When master control unit receives a signal, print a report of alarm, supervisory, or trouble condition. Report type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or trouble), protected zone description, date, and time of occurrence. Differentiate alarm signals from other indications. When system is reset, report reset event with the same information concerning device, location, date, and time. Commands shall initiate the reporting of a list of current alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions in system or a log of past events. J. Response Time: Two seconds between actuation of any alarm and its indication at master control unit. K. Circuit Supervision: Supervise all signal and data transmission lines, links with other systems, and sensors from master control unit. Indicate circuit and detection device faults with both protected zone and trouble signals, sound a distinctive audible tone, and illuminate an LED. Maximum permissible elapsed time between occurrence of a trouble condition and indication at master control unit is 20 seconds. Initiate an alarm in response to opening, closing, shorting, or grounding of a signal or data transmission line. L. Programmed Secure-Access Control: System shall be programmable to automatically change status of various combinations of protected zones between secure and access conditions at scheduled times. Status changes may be preset for repetitive, daily, and weekly; specially scheduled operations may be preset up to a year in advance. Manual secure-access control stations shall override programmed settings. M. Manual Secure-Access Control: Coded entries at manual stations shall change status of associated protected zone between secure and access conditions. 2.02 A. SYSTEM COMPONENT REQUIREMENTS Surge Protection: Protect components from voltage surges originating external to equipment housing and entering through power, communication, signal, control, or sensing leads. Include surge protection for external wiring of each conductor entry connection to components. 1. Minimum Protection for Power Lines 120 V and More: Auxiliary panel suppressors complying with requirements in Division 26 Section "Transient-Voltage Suppression for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits." Intrusion Detection © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-1600 - 4 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 2. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Minimum Protection for Communication, Signal, Control, and Low-Voltage Power Lines: Listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency for compliance with NFPA 731. B. Intrusion Detection Units: Listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency for compliance with UL 639. C. Interference Protection: Components shall be unaffected by radiated RFI and electrical induction of 15 V/m over a frequency range of 10 to 10,000 MHz and conducted interference signals up to 0.25-Vrms injected into power supply lines at 10 to 10,000 MHz. D. Tamper Protection: Tamper switches on detection devices, control units, annunciators, pull boxes, junction boxes, cabinets, and other system components shall initiate a tamper-alarm signal when unit is opened or partially disassembled and when entering conductors are cut or disconnected. Master control unit alarm display shall identify tamper alarms and indicate locations. E. Self-Testing Devices: Automatically test themselves periodically, but not less than once per hour, to verify normal device functioning and alarm initiation capability. Devices transmit test failure to master control unit. F. Anti-masking Devices: Automatically check operation continuously or at intervals of a minute or less, and use signal-processing logic to detect blocking, masking, jamming, tampering, or other operational dysfunction. Devices transmit detection of operational dysfunction to master control unit as an alarm signal. G. Addressable Devices: Transmitter and receivers shall communicate unique device identification and status reports to master control unit. H. Remote-Controlled Devices: Individually and remotely adjustable for sensitivity and individually monitored at master control unit for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition. 2.03 ENCLOSURES A. Interior Sensors: Enclosures that protect against dust, falling dirt, and dripping noncorrosive liquids. B. Interior Electronics: NEMA 250, Type 12. C. Exterior Electronics: NEMA 250, Type 4X. D. Corrosion Resistant: NEMA 250, Type 4X. E. Screw Covers: Where enclosures are readily accessible, secure with security fasteners of type appropriate for enclosure. 2.04 A. SECURE AND ACCESS DEVICES Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. B. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Digital Security Controls Ltd.; a business unit of Tyco Safety Products. GE Security. Honeywell International Inc.; Honeywell Security. Keypad and Display Module: Arranged for entering and executing commands for system-status changes and for displaying system-status and command-related data. Intrusion Detection © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-1600 - 5 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site C. 2.05 A. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Key-Operated Switch: Change protected zone between secure and access conditions. DOOR AND WINDOW SWITCHES Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. 2. GE Security, Inc. Honeywell International Inc.; Honeywell Security. B. Description: Balanced-magnetic switch, complying with UL 634, installed on frame with integral overcurrent device to limit current to 80 percent of switch capacity. Bias magnet and minimum of two encapsulated reed switches shall resist compromise from introduction of foreign magnetic fields. C. Flush-Mounted Switches: Unobtrusive and flush with surface of door and window frame. D. Overhead Door Switch: Balanced-magnetic type, listed for outdoor locations, and having door-mounted magnet and floor-mounted switch unit. 2.06 A. PIR SENSORS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Digital Security Controls Ltd.; a business unit of Tyco Safety Products. General Electric Company; GE Security, Inc. Honeywell International Inc.; Honeywell Security. B. Listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency for compliance with SIA PIR-01. C. Description: Sensors detect intrusion by monitoring infrared wavelengths emitted from a human body within their protected zone and by being insensitive to general thermal variations. 1. 2. 3. D. Device Performance: above floor. 1. 2. 2.07 A. Wall-Mounted Unit Maximum Detection Range: 125 percent of indicated distance for individual units and not less than 50 feet. Provide adjustable coverage pattern. Ceiling-Mounted Unit Spot-Detection Pattern: Full 360-degree conical. Ceiling-Mounted Unit Pattern Size: 84-inch diameter at floor level for units mounted 96 inches above floor; 18-foot diameter at floor level for units mounted 25 feet Sensitivity: Adjustable pattern coverage to detect a change in temperature of 2 deg. F or less, and standard-intruder movement within sensor's detection patterns at any speed between 0.3 to 7.5 fps across two adjacent segments of detector's field of view. Test Indicator: LED test indicator that is not visible during normal operation. When visible, indicator shall light when sensor detects an intruder. Locate test enabling switch under sensor housing cover. MASTER CONTROL UNIT Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: Intrusion Detection © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-1600 - 6 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. B. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Digital Security Controls, Inc.; a business unit of Tyco Safety Products. General Electric Company; GE Security, Inc. Honeywell International Inc.; Honeywell Security. Or approved equal. Description: Supervise sensors and detection subsystems and their connecting communication links, status control (secure or access) of sensors and detector subsystems, activation of alarms and supervisory and trouble signals, and other indicated functions. 1. 2. 3. 4. System software and programs shall be held in flash electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), retaining the information through failure of primary and secondary power supplies. Include a real-time clock for time annotation of events on the event recorder and printer. Addressable initiation devices that communicate device identity and status. Control circuits for operation of mechanical equipment in response to an alarm. C. Construction: Freestanding equipment rack or Desk-mounted console, modular, with separate and independent alarm and supervisory system modules. Alarm-initiating protected zone boards shall be plugin cards. Arrangements that require removal of field wiring for module replacement are unacceptable. D. Comply with UL 609, UL 1023 & UL 1076. E. Console Controls and Displays: Arranged for interface between human operator at master control unit and addressable system components including annunciation and supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming and control menu. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Annunciator(s) and Display: LCD, three lines of 80 characters, minimum. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control commands. Control-Unit Network: Automatic communication of alarm, status changes, commands, and other communications required for system operation. Communication shall return to normal after partial or total network interruption such as power loss or transient event. Total or partial signaling network failures shall identify the failure and record the failure at the annunciator display and at the system printer. Field Device Network: Communicate between the control unit and field devices of the system. Communications shall consist of alarm, network status, and status and control of field-mounted processors. Each field-mounted device shall be interrogated during each interrogation cycle. Operator Controls: Manual switches and push-to-test buttons that do not require a key to operate. Prevent resetting of alarm, supervisory, or trouble signals while alarm or trouble condition persists. Include the following: a. b. c. d. 6. 7. Acknowledge alarm. Silence alarm. System reset. LED test. Timing Unit: Solid state, programmable, 365 days. Confirmation: Relays, contactors, and other control devices shall have auxiliary contacts that provide confirmation signals to system for their on or off status. Software shall interpret such signals, display equipment status, and initiate failure signals. Intrusion Detection © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-1600 - 7 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 8. 9. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Alarm Indication: Audible signal sounds and a plain-language identification of the protected zone or addressable detector originating the alarm appears on LED or LCD display at master control unit. Annunciator panel displays a common alarm light and sounds an audible tone. Alarm activation sounds a bell, siren and or strobe. F. Protected Zones: Quantity of alarm and supervisory zones as indicated, with capacity for expanding number of protected zones by a minimum of 25 percent. G. Power Supply Circuits: Master control units shall provide power for remote power-consuming detection devices. Circuit capacity shall be adequate for at least a 25 percent increase in load. H. Cabinet: Lockable, steel enclosure arranged so operations required for testing, normal operation, and maintenance are performed from front of enclosure. If more than a single cabinet is required to form a complete control unit, provide exactly matching modular enclosures. Accommodate all components and allow ample gutter space for field wiring. Identify each enclosure with permanent labels, individual components and modules within cabinets. I. Transmission to Monitoring Station: A communications device to automatically transmit alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to the monitoring station, operating over a standard voice grade telephone leased line. Comply with UL 1635. J. Printout of Events: On receipt of signal, print alarm, supervisory, and trouble events. Identify zone, device, and function. Include type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or trouble) and date and time of occurrence. Differentiate alarm signals from all other printed indications. Also print system reset event, including same information for device, location, date, and time. Commands initiate the printing of a list of existing alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions in the system and a historical log of events. 2.08 SECURITY FASTENERS A. Operable only by tools produced for use on specific type of fastener by fastener manufacturer or other licensed fabricator. Drive system type, head style, material, and protective coating as required for assembly, installation, and strength. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Acument Global Technologies North America. Safety Socket LLC. Tamper-Pruf Screws. Or approved equal. C. Drive System Types: Pinned Torx-Plus, pinned Torx or pinned hex (Allen) D. Socket Flat Countersunk Head Fasteners E. Socket Button Head Fasteners F. Socket Head Cap Fasteners PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. SYSTEM INSTALLATION Comply with UL 681 and NFPA 731. Intrusion Detection © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-1600 - 8 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site B. Equipment Mounting: Install master control unit on finished floor with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished floor. 1. C. 3.02 Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing perimeter security system is operational before making changes or connections. 1. 2. 3. E. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Install wall-mounted equipment, with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished floor. 1. D. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Connect new equipment to existing control panel in existing part of the building. Connect new equipment to existing monitoring equipment at the Supervising Station. Expand, modify, and supplement existing control or monitoring equipment as necessary to extend existing control or monitoring functions to the new points. New components shall be capable of merging with existing configuration without degrading the performance of either system. Security Fasteners: Where accessible to inmates, install intrusion detection components using security fasteners with head style appropriate for fabrication requirements, strength, and finish of adjacent materials except that a maximum of two different sets of tools shall be required to operate security fasteners for Project. Provide stainless-steel security fasteners in stainless-steel materials. WIRING INSTALLATION A. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceways according to Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems, except in accessible indoor ceiling spaces and in interior hollow gypsum board partitions where cable may be used. Conceal raceways and wiring except in unfinished spaces and as indicated. Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2 inch B. Wiring Method: Cable, concealed in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors when possible. Control and data transmission wiring shall not share conduit with other building wiring systems. C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points. Use lacing bars and distribution spools. Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended in writing by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of enclosure. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with intrusions system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors. D. Wires and Cables: 1. 2. 3. Conductors: Size as recommended in writing by system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. 120-V Power Wiring: Install according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" unless otherwise indicated. Control and Signal Transmission Conductors: Install unshielded, twisted-pair cable unless otherwise indicated or if manufacturer recommends shielded cable, according to Division 28 Section "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security." Intrusion Detection © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-1600 - 9 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 4. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Data and Television Signal Transmission Cables: Install according to Division 28 Section "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security." E. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures. F. Install power supplies and other auxiliary components for detection devices at control units unless otherwise indicated or required by manufacturer. Do not install such items near devices they serve. G. Identify components with engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for master control unit and each terminal cabinet, mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.03 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with identification requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Install instructions frame in a location visible from master control unit. 3.04 GROUNDING A. Ground the master control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main service ground to master control unit. B. Ground system components and conductor and cable shields to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments. C. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment rack or cabinet. Isolate from power system and equipment grounding. Provide 5 ohm ground. Measure, record, and report ground resistance. D. Install grounding electrodes of type, size, location, and quantity indicated. Comply with installation requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 3.05 A. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Pretesting: After installation, align, adjust, and balance system and perform complete pretesting to determine compliance of system with requirements in the Contract Documents. Correct deficiencies observed in pretesting. Replace malfunctioning or damaged items with new ones and retest until satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved. Prepare forms for systematic recording of acceptance test results. 1. B. Perform tests and inspections. 1. C. Report of Pretesting: After pretesting is complete, provide a letter certifying that installation is complete and fully operable; include names and titles of witnesses to preliminary tests. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. Tests and Inspections: Comply with provisions in NFPA 731, Ch. 9, "Testing and Inspections." Intrusion Detection © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-1600 - 10 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 1. 2. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly labeled and interconnecting wires and terminals are identified. Test Methods: Intrusion detection systems and other systems and equipment that are associated with detection and accessory equipment shall be tested according to Table "Test Methods" and Table "Test Methods of Initiating Devices." D. Documentation: Comply with provisions in NFPA 731, Ch. 4, "Documentation." E. Tag all equipment, stations, and other components for which tests have been satisfactorily completed. 3.06 A. DEMONSTRATION Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the intrusion detection system. Comply with documentation provisions in NFPA 731, Ch. 4, "Documentation and User Training." END OF SECTION Intrusion Detection © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-1600 - 11 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 28-2300 - VIDEO SURVEILLANCE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes a video surveillance system consisting of cameras, network video recorder, data transmission wiring, and a control station with its associated equipment. B. Video surveillance system shall be integrated with monitoring and control system specified in Division 28 Sections "Intrusion Detection, and Access Control” which specifies systems integration. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include dimensions and data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For video surveillance. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. C. 1.03 A. 1.04 Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Functional Block Diagram: Show single-line interconnections between components for signal transmission and control. Show cable types and sizes. Dimensioned plan and elevations of equipment racks, control panels, and consoles. Show access and workspace requirements. UPS: Sizing calculations. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. Equipment List: Include every piece of equipment by model number, manufacturer, serial number, location, and date of original installation. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Operation and maintenance data. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with NECA 1. C. Comply with NFPA 70. D. Electronic data exchange between video surveillance system with an access-control system shall comply with SIA TVAC. 1.05 A. PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Conditions: Capable of withstanding the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating capability: Video Surveillance © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-2300 - 1 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 1.06 A. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Control Station: Rated for continuous operation in ambient temperatures of 60 to 85 deg. F and a relative humidity of 20 to 80 percent, non-condensing. Interior, Controlled Environment: System components, except central-station control unit, installed in air-conditioned or temperature-controlled interior environments shall be rated for continuous operation in ambient temperatures of 36 to 122 deg. F dry bulb and a relative humidity of 20 to 90 percent, non-condensing. Use NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosures. Interior, Uncontrolled Environment: System components installed in non-air-conditioned or temperature-controlled interior environments shall be rated for continuous operation in ambient temperatures of 0 to 122 deg. F dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, non-condensing. Use NEMA 250, Type 3R enclosures. Exterior Environment: System components installed in locations exposed to weather shall be rated for continuous operation in ambient temperatures of minus 30 to plus 122 deg. F dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, condensing. Rate for continuous operation when exposed to rain as specified in NEMA 250, winds up to 85 mph and snow cover up to 24 inches thick. Use NEMA rated enclosures. Security Environment: Camera housing for use in high-risk areas where surveillance equipment may be subject to physical violence. WARRANTY Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of cameras, equipment related to camera operation, and control-station equipment that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. Video-signal format shall comply with NTSC standard, composite interlaced video. B. Surge Protection: Protect components from voltage surges entering through power, communication, signal, control, or sensing leads. Include surge protection for external wiring of each conductor's entry connection to components. 1. 2. C. 2.02 A. Minimum Protection for Power Connections 120 V and More: Auxiliary panel suppressors complying with requirements in Division 26 Section "Transient-Voltage Suppression for LowVoltage Electrical Power Circuits." Minimum Protection for Communication, Signal, Control, and Low-Voltage Power Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Transient-Voltage Suppression for LowVoltage Electrical Power Circuits." as recommended by manufacturer for type of line being protected. Tamper Protection: Tamper switches on enclosures, control units, pull boxes, junction boxes, cabinets, and other system components shall initiate a tamper-alarm signal when unit is opened or partially disassembled. Control-station, control-unit alarm display shall identify tamper alarms and indicate locations. CAMERA MODELS The following AXIS surveillance camera models, or approved equals, shall be utilized: 1. Axis IP P3365-VE IP Camera w/T91B62 corner bracket. a. Video Surveillance Application: Exterior fixed camera perimeter of building. © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-2300 - 2 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 2. Axis IP P3365-VE IP Camera w/T91B61 wall bracket. a. 3. A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: AXIS or approved equal.. Description: Optical-quality coated lens, designed specifically for video-surveillance applications and matched to specified camera. Provide color-corrected lenses. 1. 2. 3. Auto-Iris Lens: Electrically controlled iris with circuit set to maintain a constant video level in varying lighting conditions. Fixed Lens: With calibrated focus ring. Zoom Lens: Motorized, remote-controlled unit, rated as "quiet operating." Features include the following: a. b. c. 2.04 A. A. Electrical Leads: Filtered to minimize video signal interference. Motor Speed: Variable. Lens shall be available with preset positioning capability to recall the position of specific scenes. POWER SUPPLIES Low-voltage power supplies matched for voltage and current requirements of cameras and accessories, and of type as recommended by manufacturer of camera and lens. 1. 2.05 Interior fixed camera. LENSES 1. B. Application: Exterior Pan/Tilt/Zoom camera on roof. Axis IP P3365-VE IP Camera w/ interior dome. a. 2.03 Application: Exterior Pan/Tilt/Zoom camera around perimeter of building. Axis IP P5534-E IP Camera w/T91B62 parapet mount. a. 5. Application: Exterior fixed camera around perimeter of building. Axis IP P5534-E IP Camera w/T91B62 corner bracket. a. 4. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1 or Type 3. CAMERA-SUPPORTING EQUIPMENT Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. AXIS 2. March Networks - Video Sphere 3. Videolarm. 4. Video Mount Products. 5. Or approved equal. Video Surveillance © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-2300 - 3 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building B. Minimum Load Rating: Rated for load in excess of the total weight supported times a minimum safety factor of two. C. Pan-and-Tilt Units: Motorized units arranged to provide remote-controlled aiming of cameras with smooth and silent operation, and equipped with matching mounting brackets. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Panning Rotation: 0 to 355 degrees, with adjustable stops. Tilt Movement: 90 degrees, plus or minus 5 degrees, with adjustable stops. Speed: 12 degrees per second in both horizontal and vertical planes. Wiring: Factory prewired for camera and zoom lens functions and pan-and-tilt power and control. Built-in encoders or potentiometers for position feedback, and thermostat-controlled heater. Pan-and-tilt unit shall be available with preset positioning capability to recall the position of a specific scene. D. Mounting Brackets for Fixed Cameras: Type matched to items supported and mounting conditions. Include manual pan-and-tilt adjustment. E. Protective Housings for Fixed and Movable Cameras: Steel or 6061 T6 aluminum enclosures with internal camera mounting and connecting provisions that are matched to camera/lens combination and mounting and installing arrangement of camera to be housed. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 2.06 A. NETWORK VIDEO RECORDERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. C. Tamper switch on access cover sounds an alarm signal when unit is opened or partially disassembled. Central-control unit shall identify tamper alarms and indicate location in alarm display. Tamper switches and central-control unit are specified in Division 28 Section "Intrusion Detection." Camera Viewing Window: Polycarbonate or Lexan window, aligned with camera lens. Duplex Receptacle: Internally mounted. Alignment Provisions: Camera mounting shall provide for field aiming of camera and permit removal and reinstallation of camera lens without disturbing camera alignment. Built-in, thermostat-activated heater and blower units. Units shall be automatically controlled so the environmental limits of the camera equipment are not exceeded. Sun shield shall not interfere with normal airflow around the housing. Mounting bracket and hardware for wall or ceiling mounting of the housing. Bracket shall be of same material as the housing; mounting hardware shall be stainless steel. Finish: Housing and mounting bracket shall be factory finished using manufacturer's standard finishing process suitable for the environment. Enclosure Rating: IP66 March Networks or “approved equal”. External storage or internal 250-1, 4000-GB hard disk drive. 1. Video and audio recording over TCP/IP network. 2. Video recording of MPEG-4 and H.264 streams. 3. Video recording up to 48 Mbps for internal storage and up to 100 Mbps for external storage. 4. Duplex Operation: Simultaneous recording and playback. 5. Continuous and alarm-based recording. 6. Full-Featured Search Capabilities: Search based on camera, time, or date. Video Surveillance 28-2300 - 4 © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 2.07 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 4. 5. 6. 7. 2. 3. 4. Switching Time Interval: Continuously adjustable, 5 to 20 seconds minimum, with manual override. Camera Identification Legend: Either on-screen message or label at skip-sequential switch. Alarm Switching: In the event of an alarm, alarming channel shall automatically switch the monitor to full screen. Mounting: Standard 19-inch rack complying with CEA 310-E. PTZ Controls: Arranged for multiple-camera control, with switches to select camera to be controlled. 1. 2. 3. 2.08 Controls: Unit-mounted front panel. Resolution: 720 by 480 lines Modes: Auto, manual, and alarm. In manual mode, each channel can also be viewed in single display mode. In the event of an alarm, alarming channel shall automatically switch to full screen. If several alarms are activated, channels in alarm shall be in auto-switching mode. Channel Loss Alarm: Audible buzzer; occurrence details shall be recorded. Time: Indicate date and time. Timing of Auto-Switcher: 1 to 30 seconds, selectable. Mounting: Standard 19-inch Sequential Switchers: Automatically sequence outputs of multiple cameras to single monitor. rack complying with CEA 310-E, or freestanding desktop. 1. D. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Pelco Tyco International Limited Or approved equal. Quad Switch: For displaying images from four cameras on a single monitor. Provide color switcher. 1. 2. 3. C. Automatic data replenishment to ensure recording even if network is down. Digital certification by watermarking. Internal RAID storage of up to 4 TB. Capable of adding external RAID storage up to 8 TB for models with no internal storage. Full integration with LAN, Intranet, or Internet through standard Web browser or video management software. Integrated Web server FTP server functionality. Supports up to 16, 32, or 64 devices. DIGITAL SWITCHERS 1. 2. 3. 4. B. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Pan-and-Tilt Control: Joystick type. Zoom Control Automatic-Scan Control: A push button for each camera with pan capability that places camera in automatic-scanning mode. IP VIDEO SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. AXIS 2. March Networks – Video Sphere 3. Or approved equal. Video Surveillance 28-2300 - 5 © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site B. Description: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 2.09 Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building System shall provide high-quality delivery and processing of IP-based video, audio, and control data using standard Ethernet-based networks. System shall have seamless integration of all video surveillance and control functions. Graphical user interface software shall manage all IP-based video matrix switching and camera control functions, two-way audio communication, alarm monitoring and control, and recording and archive/retrieval management. IP system shall also be capable of integrating into larger system environments. System design shall include all necessary compression software for high-performance, dual stream, MPEG-2/MPEG-4 video. Unit shall provide connections for all video cameras, camera PTZ control data, bidirectional audio, and control system outputs. All camera signals shall be compressed, encoded, and delivered onto the network for processing and control by the IP video-management software. Camera system units shall be ruggedly built and designed for extreme adverse environments, complying with NEMA Type environmental standards. All system interconnect cables, workstation PCs, PTZ joysticks, and network intermediate devices shall be provided for full performance of specified system. SIGNAL TRANSMISSION COMPONENTS A. Cable: Un-shielded Twisted Pair (UTP) cable minimally rated to Category 5e. Comply with requirements in Division 28 Section "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security." B. Video Surveillance Cable Connectors: RJ-45 Cat5e min rated. Comply with requirements in Division 28 Section "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 WIRING A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." B. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2. 3. Raceways are not required in accessible indoor ceiling spaces and attics. Raceways are not required in hollow gypsum board partitions. Conceal raceways and wiring except in unfinished spaces. C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools. D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: For power and control wiring, use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B. E. For LAN connection and fiber-optic and copper communication wiring, comply with Division 27 Sections "Communications Backbone Cabling" and "Communications Horizontal Cabling." F. Grounding: Provide independent-signal circuit grounding recommended in writing by manufacturer. 3.02 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM INSTALLATION Video Surveillance © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-2300 - 6 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building A. Install cameras with 84-inch minimum clearance space below cameras and their mountings. If necessary, change type of mounting to achieve required clearance. B. Set pan-and-tilt unit stops to suit final camera position and to obtain the field of view required for camera. Connect all controls and alarms, and adjust. Avoid ground loops by making ground connections only at the control station. C. D. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. 1. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. Tests and Inspections: 1. 2. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly installed, connected, and labeled, and that interconnecting wires and terminals are identified. Pretesting: Align and adjust system and pretest components, wiring, and functions to verify that they comply with specified requirements. Conduct tests at varying lighting levels, including day and night scenes as applicable. Prepare video-surveillance equipment for acceptance and operational testing as follows: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. 3. 4. Verify operation of auto-iris lenses. Set back-focus of fixed focal length lenses. At focus set to infinity, simulate nighttime lighting conditions by using a dark glass filter of a density that produces a clear image. Adjust until image is in focus with and without the filter. Set back-focus of zoom lenses. At focus set to infinity, simulate nighttime lighting conditions by using a dark glass filter of a density that produces a clear image. Additionally, set zoom to full wide angle and aim camera at an object 50 to 75 feet away. Adjust until image is in focus from full wide angle to full telephoto, with the filter in place. Set and name all preset positions; consult Owner's personnel. Set sensitivity of motion detection. Connect and verify responses to alarms. Verify operation of control-station equipment. Test Schedule: Schedule tests after pretesting has been successfully completed and system has been in normal functional operation for at least 14 days. Provide a minimum of 10 days' notice of test schedule. Operational Tests: Perform operational system tests to verify that system complies with Specifications. Include all modes of system operation. C. Video surveillance system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.04 DEMONSTRATION Video Surveillance © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-2300 - 7 Kimmel Bogrette Architecture + Site A. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain video-surveillance equipment. END OF SECTION Video Surveillance © 2016 Intertech Associates Inc., Consulting Engineers 28-2300 - 8 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building SECTION 28 30 00 - FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS - ADDRESSABLE - HORN PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCE A. Refer to Section 26 00 00 for requirements which are applicable to this section. All work required is not limited to this section. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. E. Provide labor, material, equipment and supervision necessary to install a complete electrically supervised microprocessor based, fully addressable type system as outlined in this section. Equipment by EST, is acceptable provided that criteria is satisfied. It is the intent of this specification and accompanying drawings to require the contractor and/or supplier of equipment and devices to provide a complete code compliant system which will obtain, as a minimum, the approval of the AHJ. Different suppliers may have devices which differ between each other and as such all devices necessary for approval shall be included in the scope of work whether specifically identified or not. Speakers and horns shall be audible as required by code in all spaces above ambient. Devices provided by manufacturers shall be selected to provide audibility with either additional horns or speakers or higher dB devices as necessary to achieve such approval. Strobes shall be visible as required by code in all spaces to meet requirements of the AHJ. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish shop drawings and/or descriptive data, complete with the following: B. C. D. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. B. Fire Alarm Control Unit Smoke Detectors Signals Annunciator Stations Sprinkler Water flow Fire Alarm Riser Diagram drawn specifically for this project with devices identified, room designations, and conductor runs. 8. Tamper switches 9. Telephone auto dialer 10. Modem communicator for remote monitoring. 11. Floor plans (to same scale as architectural/engineering plan) indicating all equipment locations. Submit drawings to the local authority for permit and approval. Submit approved drawings to consulting engineers and to owner’s insurance company and obtain approval prior to construction. All requirements for above approval are to be included with the work. 1.04 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM A. Control of System: By the FACP. FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS - ADDRESSABLE 28 30 00 - 1 McHugh Engineering Associates B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building System Supervision: Automatically detect and report open circuits, shorts, and grounds of wiring for initiating device, signaling line, and notification-appliance circuits. Priority of Signals: Automatic alarm response functions resulting from an alarm signal from one zone or device are not altered by subsequent alarm, supervisory, or trouble signals. An alarm signal is the highest priority. Supervisory and trouble signals have second- and third-level priority. Higher-priority signals take precedence over signals of lower priority, even when the lower-priority condition occurs first. Annunciate and display all alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals regardless of priority or order received. Noninterference: A signal on one zone shall not prevent the receipt of signals from other zones. System Reset: All zones are manually resettable from the FACP after initiating devices are restored to normal. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically route alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to a remote alarm station by means of a digital alarm communicator transmitter and telephone lines. System Alarm Capability during Circuit Fault Conditions: System wiring and circuit arrangement prevent alarm capability reduction when an open circuit, ground or wire-to-wire short occurs, or an open circuit and a ground occur at the same time in an initiating device circuit, signal line circuit, or notification-appliance circuit. Loss of primary power at the FACP initiates a trouble signal at the FACP and the annunciator. An emergency power light is illuminated at both locations when the system is operating on the secondary power supply. Basic Alarm Performance Requirements: Unless otherwise indicated, operation of a manual station, automatic alarm operation of a smoke or flame or heat detector, or operation of a sprinkler flow device initiates the following: 1. Notification-appliance operation (exterior bell/strobe only operates with sprinkler flow devices). 2. Identification at the FACP and the remote annunciator of the device originating the alarm. 3. Transmission of an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station. 4. Unlocking of electric door locks in designated egress paths. 5. Release of fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders. 6. Recall of elevator(s). 7. Shutdown of fans and other air-handling equipment serving zone when alarm was initiated. 8. Closing of smoke dampers in air ducts of system serving zone where alarm was initiated. 9. Recording of the event in the system memory. *10 Recording of the event by the system printer. Alarm Silencing, System Reset and Indication: Controlled by switches in the FACP (and the remote annunciator). 1. Silencing-switch operation halts alarm operation of notification appliances and activates an "alarm silence" light. Display of identity of the alarm zone or device is retained. 2. Subsequent alarm signals from other devices or zones reactivate notification appliances until silencing switch is operated again. 3. When alarm-initiating devices return to normal and system reset switch is operated, notification appliances operate again until alarm silence switch is reset. Water-flow alarm switch operation initiates the following: 1. Notification-appliance operation. 2. Flashing of the device location-indicating light for the device that has operated. 3. Notification-appliance operation on exterior. Operating a heat detector in the elevator shaft shuts down elevator power by operating the shunt trip in a (all) circuit breaker(s) feeding the elevator(s). Refer to 26 00 00 for sequence of operation. Water-flow alarm for connection to sprinkler in an elevator shaft and elevator machine room shuts down elevators associated with the location without time delay. FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS - ADDRESSABLE 28 30 00 - 2 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building 1. N. O. P. Q. R. A field-mounted relay actuated by the fire detector or the FACP closes the shunt trip circuit and operates building notification appliances and annunciator. Smoke detection for zones or detectors with alarm verification initiates the following: 1. Audible and visible indication of an "alarm verification" signal at the FACP. 2. General alarm if the alarm is verified. 3. Cancellation of the FACP indication and system reset if the alarm is not verified. Sprinkler valve-tamper switch operation initiates the following: 1. A supervisory, audible, and visible "valve-tamper" signal indication at the FACP and the annunciator. 2. Flashing of the device location-indicating light for the device that has operated. 3. Transmission of supervisory signal to remote alarm receiving station. Remote Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Manipulation of controls at the FACP causes the selection of specific addressable smoke detectors for adjustment, display of their current status and sensitivity settings, and control of changes in those settings. Same controls can be used to program repetitive, scheduled, automated changes in sensitivity of specific detectors. Sensitivity adjustments and sensitivity-adjustment schedule changes are recorded in system memory and are printed out by the system printer. Removal of an alarm-initiating device or a notification appliance initiates the following: 1. A "trouble" signal indication at the FACP and the annunciator for the device or zone involved. 2. Transmission of trouble signal to remote alarm receiving station. FACP Alphanumeric Display: Plain-English-language descriptions of alarm, supervisory, and trouble events; and addresses and locations of alarm-initiating or supervisory devices originating the report. Display monitoring actions, system and component status, system commands, programming information, and data from the system's historical memory. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONTROL PANEL A. Fire Alarm Panel shall be surface mounted where shown on the drawings, with the following items. UL Listed Modular, Solid-state Addressable locations of all devices Zoned Visual Alarm and Trouble Indicators Automatic Ground Detection Lamp Test Supervisory Voltage and Current Meters Double Supervision Field Programmable Fan Relays Supervise Signal Circuit Modules Annunciator Contacts by Zone Dead Front Construction Battery backup 2.02 SMOKE DETECTORS FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS - ADDRESSABLE 28 30 00 - 3 McHugh Engineering Associates A. B. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Furnish and install where shown on the drawings UL listed smoke detectors. Detector shall be solid state photoelectric type and shall operate on the light scattering, photo diode principle. Detector shall have an integral fixed temperature heat detector rated at 135 degrees F. Detector shall be analog-addressable type, individually monitored at the FACP for calibration, sensitivity and alarm condition, and individually adjustable for sensitivity from the FACP. 2.03 HORN/STROBE A. Combination device with factory integrated audible and visible devices in a single mounting assembly. Horn shall be electric vibrating polarized type which produces 90 dB measured 10 feet from the horn. Strobe shall be self-synchronizing, Xenon strobe lights with clear lens and rated light output of 15, 30, 60, 75 or 110 candela. 2.04 STROBE A. Self-synchronizing, flush wall mounted, red housing, white letters, UL 1638 and UL 1971 compliant 15, 30, 60, 75 or 110 candela as appropriate, mounted on single gang box, clear Lexan flash tube enclosure. 2.05 MINI-HORN/STROBE A. Similar to Horn/Strobe except 110 Candela strobe, 75 dBA measured at 10 feet. 2.06 FIRE ALARM STATIONS A. B. Fire Alarm Stations shall be semi-flush mounted, non-code break glass type, finish shall be red with white letters. Stations shall be addressable. 2.07 HEAT DETECTORS A. Heat Detectors, furnished and installed where indicated on the drawings, shall be combination type, actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 degrees F or rate of rise of temperature that exceeds 15 degrees F per minute. Detectors shall be analog-addressable type, individually monitored at the FACP for calibration, sensitivity and alarm condition, and individually adjustable for sensitivity from the FACP. B. 2.08 DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS A. Furnish where indicted on the drawings or required elsewhere in the specifications air duct smoke detectors. Duct smoke detectors are to be furnished by the electrical contractor, installed by the mechanical contractor and wired to the fire alarm system by the electrical contractor. They shall integrate photoelectric, ionization and heat sensing technologies for optimum detection accuracy and to prevent unwanted alarms. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided to shut down the air handling unit fan. The detector shall output to a remote alarm indicator. Detectors shall be analog-addressable type, individually monitored at the FACP for calibration, sensitivity and alarm condition, and individually adjustable for sensitivity from the FACP. B. 2.09 REMOTE DEVICE LOCATION-INDICATING LIGHTS AND IDENTIFICATION PLATES A. Device shall contain LED indicating light near each smoke detector that may not be readily visible, FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS - ADDRESSABLE 28 30 00 - 4 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building and each sprinkler water-flow switch and valve-tamper switch. Light is connected to flash when the associated device is in an alarm or trouble mode. Lamp is flush mounted in a single gang wall plate. A red, laminated, phenolic-resin identification plate at the indicating light identified, in engraved white letters, device initiating the signal and room where the smoke detector or valve is located. For water-flow switches, the identification plate also designates protected spaces downstream from the water-flow switch. 2.10 WATERFLOW SWITCHES - TAMPER SWITCHES A. Water flow Switches and tamper switches shall be furnished and installed by the sprinkler contractor. Refer to sprinkler drawings and specs for locations and quantities. Switches shall be addressable. Electrical contractor shall wire to fire alarm system and to exterior bell/strobe. Switches are supplied with two contacts, one for connection to fire alarm system and one for exterior bell/strobe. B. C. 2.11 TELEPHONE AUTO DIALER A. Furnish and install where indicated on the drawings or required elsewhere in the specifications a digital type telephone auto dialer. The dialer shall call and notify a preprogrammed telephone number when in the alarm mode. 2.12 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS A. B. Units are equipped for wall or floor mounting as indicated and are complete with matching door plate. Electromagnet shall require no more than 3 W to develop 25-lbf holding force. Material and finish shall match door hardware. 2.13 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE A. Device shall be Microelectronic monitor module listed for use in providing a multiplex system address for listed fire and sprinkler alarm-initiating devices with normally open contacts. Integral Relay shall be capable of providing a direct signal to the elevator controller to initiate elevator recall or to a circuit-breaker shunt trip for power shutdown. B. 2.14 ANNUNCIATOR A. Description: Duplicate annunciator functions of the FACP for alarm, supervisory, and trouble indications. Also duplicate manual switching functions of the FACP, including acknowledging, silencing, reset, and test. Mounting: Flush cabinet, NEMA 250, Class 1. Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display same as the FACP. Controls with associated LEDs permit acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing functions for alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals identical to those in the FACP. B. 2.15 EXTERIOR BELL AND STROBE A. Weatherproof device(s) with factory integrated audible and visible devices in a single mounting assembly. Bell shall be 24 V (nominal) which produces 83 dB measured at 10 feet. Strobe shall be Zenon type with clear lens and rated light output of 75 candela or as required by the local Fire Marshal. Strobe shall be provided with clear weatherproof guard for physical protection and heater FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS - ADDRESSABLE 28 30 00 - 5 McHugh Engineering Associates Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building system to assure operation to -40°F. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SYSTEM OPERATION A. Operation of any manual or automatic device shall cause all signals and strobes to sound. The annunciator will light showing the specific location of the alarm initiation. Control and contacts for the building system shall function as required. Door hold opens shall be released. Door locks will be opened. 3.02 A. B. C. WIRING All wiring shall be run in conduit in exposed areas or Fire Alarm MC Cable in concealed spaces and shall be installed as recommended by the system manufacturer. Provide deduct alternate for use of type FPLP plenum rated fire alarm cable. Initiating device circuits are to be Class B (2 wire using NO contact initiating devices and an end of line resistor). Notification appliance circuits shall have polarized devices wired in parallel and be equipped an end of line resistor. 3.03 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Smoke detectors indicated on the drawings shall be located in the occupied space. A similar device layout shall be duplicated above suspended ceilings and/or below raised floors as outlined in NFPA 72 for return air plenums. Connect the FACP with a disconnect switch with lockable handle or cover. Provide circuit label as per NFPA 72 requirements. Manual Pull Stations: Mount semi flush in recessed back boxes. Water-Flow Detectors and Valve Supervisory Switches: Connect for each sprinkler valve station required to be supervised. Connect to exterior bell/strobe (bell/strobe only operates with water flow). Ceiling-Mounted Smoke Detectors: Not less than 4 inches (100 mm) from a side wall to the near edge. For exposed solid-joist construction, mount detectors on the bottom of joists. On smooth ceilings, install not more than 30 feet (9 m) apart in any direction. Wall-Mounted Smoke Detectors: At least, 4 inches (100 mm), but not more than, 12 inches (300 mm) below the ceiling. Smoke Detectors near Air Registers: Install no closer than 60 inches (1520 mm). Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Verify that each unit is listed for the complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating. 2. Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of the duct. 3. Install detectors in supply and return for all units 2000 CFM and greater. Coordinate with mechanical documents for all units requiring detection. Note that (1) detector may be installed in lieu of (2) where directed by the authority having jurisdiction when units are between 2000 CFM and 15000 CFM. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor. FACP and Auxiliary Booster Panels: Surface mount with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches (1830 mm) above the finished floor. Provide smoke detection for room in which the panel is located. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS - ADDRESSABLE 28 30 00 - 6 McHugh Engineering Associates K. L. M. N. O. Ocean County College New Health Sciences Building Annunciator: Install with the top of the panel not more than 72 inches (1830 mm) above the finished floor. Provide separate zone for each floor, not to exceed 20,000 sq. ft., length not to exceed 200 ft. in any direction. Provide where indicated on drawings, 15 cd horn/strobes or strobes in non-sleeping rooms up to 20' x 20'. Provide 30 cd horn/strobes or strobes in non-sleeping rooms up to 30' x 30'. Provide 110 cd in all other spaces where indicated on drawings. Exterior Bell and Strobe: Install on exterior wall above the Fire Department sprinkler connection at a height of 12' unless directed otherwise by the local Fire Marshal. Coordinate with fire protection contractor. For all magnetic door hold-open devices, a smoke detector is to be provided within 5' of each doorway on both sides of the doorway. Coordinate with architect/owner for magnetic door holder material, finish and mounting. 3.04 SERVICE A. B. A service contract shall be made available to the owner after the one year warranty expires. A complete set of reproducible as-builts, showing installed wiring and color coding and wire tag notations for exact locations of all installed equipment, specific interconnections between all equipment shall be provided for the system. 3.05 TESTING A. Perform test of system according to procedures outlined in NFPA 72. Correct deficiencies as necessary. Provide written record of inspections, tests and test results in the form of a test log. END OF SECTION FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS - ADDRESSABLE 28 30 00 - 7